| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080198761 | DECENTRALIZED NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR TRAVEL RELATED SERVICES - A decentralized grid architecture is disclosed for a travel-related network. The system moves the functionality previously performed by a GDS down to the travel consumers' computing devices. The grid architecture may include travel consumers and travel service providers, as well as a grid manager for implementing the network. Cross-selling and value-add services are also provided to enhance the user experience and present the most attractive and economical options to the travel consumer. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198762 | Cross-subnet-nodes subnet node device detection method - A cross-subnet-nodes network node device detection method is provided, including the steps of disposing a boot module in each network node devices in an arbitrary subnet of a network; activating the first subnet node device to be a registry server and recording its registry information; activating other network node devices in the subnet, and dispatching the registry information of these devices to the registry server and recording it; searching for the IP address of the first available network node device in the subnet; issuing a command for searching the registry server, issuing a registry information command by the first available network node device, and obtaining the IP address of the registry server and sending it back to the discovery server; and upon receiving a command for searching the network node devices by the registry server, transmitting the information of the node devices in a subnet back to the discovery server. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198763 | Changing a Radio Access Configuration Between a Terminal and a Network - A method of changing a radio access configuration between a terminal and a network. The network performs the steps of: initiating a new configuration that is related to an old configuration for the same terminal; informing the terminal to apply the second configuration; and determining when the terminal uses the second configuration based on the reception of a radio signal from the terminal. The terminal performs the steps of: receiving information to apply a new configuration; transmitting, to the network, a radio signal indicating a change in configuration; and changing from an old configuration to the new configuration at a predetermined time after transmitting the radio signal. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198764 | Communication Path Allocating Entity and Method - A communication path allocating entity and method are described. The entity ( | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198765 | Signal Interconnection System - The present invention relates to a signal interconnection system ( | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198766 | NETWORK RECONFIGURATION METHOD AND ROUTER - Disclosed is a method for reconfiguring a network including a plurality of routers each having a redundant function. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198767 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A PATH BETWEEN TWO POINTS OF AN IP NETWORK OVER WHICH DATAGRAMS ARE TRANSMITTED - A system, computer program and method to determine a transmission path of a datagram in an IP network from a source device to a destination device. The source device sends a datagram to an IP network device along the transmission path to the destination device. The datagram comprises as destination address, the IP address of the destination device and as source address, the IP address of the network manager station. Consequently, replies, if any, to the datagram are sent back directly to the network manager station by the IP network device along the transmission path, bypassing the source device. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080205291 | SMART PRE-FETCHING FOR PEER ASSISTED ON-DEMAND MEDIA - A “Media Sharer” operates within peer-to-peer (P2P) networks to provide a dynamic peer-driven system for streaming high quality multimedia content, such as a video-on-demand (VoD) service, to participating peers while minimizing server bandwidth requirements. In general, the Media Sharer provides a peer-assisted framework wherein participating peers assist the server in delivering on-demand media content to other peers. Participating peers cooperate to provide at least the same quality media delivery service as a pure server-client media distribution. However, given this peer cooperation, many more peers can be served with relatively little increase in server bandwidth requirements. Further, each peer limits its assistance to redistributing only portions of the media content that it also receiving. Peer upload bandwidth for redistribution is determined as a function of surplus peer upload capacity and content need of neighboring peers, with earlier arriving peers uploading content to later arriving peers. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205292 | Detection of Asymmetric Network Routes - Route asymmetry is detected in a network by running a route tracing program to trace routes between a first element of the network and a second element of the network. The route tracing program need be run at only a single network element, such as the first network element. Forward and reverse routes between the first and second network elements are identified as asymmetric if performance data from the route tracing program indicates a significant deviation from an expected monotonic characteristic as a function of time-to-live values of respective packets transmitted by the route tracing program. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205293 | Time Scale Separated Network Management and Network Provisioning Optimizations - A communication network is configured to implement time scale separated management and provisioning optimizations, for example, in a core optical network coupled to multiple data networks. Network management optimizations are performed at respective points in time separated by intervals of a first time scale, and network provisioning optimizations are performed at respective points in time separated by intervals of a second time scale, with the intervals of the second time scale being on average substantially longer than the intervals of the first time scale. Moreover, at least a given one of the intervals of the second time scale has a length which is determined based on results of performance of one or more of the network management optimizations. The core optical network maybe configured utilizing information specified by the network management and network provisioning optimizations. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205294 | Synchronisation In A Communications Network - A communications network and corresponding method comprising topology means for detecting the topology of the network means for detecting the timing status of each node and for providing to at least one node of the communications network information on the detected topology of the network and timing status and for selecting a source of timing information on the basis of the information detected. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205295 | Creation of organizational hierarchies in a group-centric network via handshake mechanisms - Exemplary systems and methods for creating organizational hierarchies in a group-centric network are provided. In exemplary embodiments, a request to establish a new group within an organization on the group-centric network is received by the group-centric network host. The group-centric network host then determines if the request if from an authorized individual, such as a leader of a home group representing the organization. If the request is not from an authorized individual, at least one message-based handshake through which one or more relationships of the new group may be activated is performed. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205296 | VLAN-based data packet transmission and ethernet bridge device - The present invention provides a VLAN-based data packet transmission method and an Ethernet bridge device. The method includes: learning a member port corresponding to a VLAN according to a data packet received by an Ethernet bridge device, and storing a correspondence between a VLAN and the learnt member port; and forwarding the data packet by the Ethernet bridge device according to the correspondence between each VLAN and its member port that is stored. In the invention, the storage space of MAC address table of the Ethernet bridge device only needs to meet the requirement on the MAC address of its local user, thus the requirement of the access convergence network on the storage space of the MAC address table of the Ethernet bridge device may be lowered. According to the invention, the correspondence between the VLAN and the member port stored in the Ethernet bridge device is only related to the number of VLANs in the network, regardless of the number of users accessing the network, so that more users can access the access convergence network, which is advantageous for expanding the network. Therefore, the networking cost of the access convergence network can be lowered. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205297 | IP MULTICAST DELIVERY APPARATUS, CONTENT DELIVERY SYSTEM, AND IP MULTICAST DELIVERY METHOD BEING EMPLOYED THEREFOR - The present invention is an IP multicast delivery apparatus for relaying the content, which is delivered from the multicast delivery server with the IP (Internet Protocol) multicast, to the premise apparatus, comprising: managing unit for managing a dependence relation of the content between the multicast groups; and controller for stopping/restarting of transfer of a multicast group based on the dependence relation that is managed by said managing unit. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205298 | POINT TO MULTIPOINT CROSSLINK - A communication network comprises a first central digital subscriber line (DSL) unit having at least one application port and a plurality of DSL ports; a first remote DSL unit having at least one application port and at least one DSL port, wherein the first remote DSL unit is communicatively coupled to the central DSL unit via a first single independent DSL pair having a first EOC channel; and a second remote DSL unit having at least one application port and at least one DSL port, wherein the second remote DSL unit is communicatively coupled to the central DSL unit via a second single independent DSL pair having a second EOC channel; wherein the at least one application port in the central DSL unit is communicatively coupled to an application port in at least one of the first remote DSL unit and the second remote DSL unit. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205299 | CONFIGURATION OF FIBRE CHANNEL SAN PATH - System and computer program product are provided to configure a path between nodes through a fabric in a fibre channel storage area network (SAN). A node name is provided for a target node on the SAN and a port name is provided for each port in the target node. A relationship is established in a data structure between each port name and a slot in which each port is physically located in the target node. Prior to configuring a path between a source node and a port in the target node, the ports which are physically connected and logged in to the fabric are identified by port address. The port names corresponding to the port addresses are then identified. The port names are used to generate interface_ids of the ports corresponding to the physical slots in which the ports are located. A data structure is created to maintain the relationship between interface_ids and port names. To establish a path connection between a port in the source node and a selected port in the target node, the node name of the target node and the interface_id of the selected port are input to the data structure and the port name of the selected port is output. The port name is then used to obtain the address of the selected port and an I/O session path opened between the source and target nodes. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205300 | CHECKING AND REPAIRING A NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Disclosed is a technique for correcting a configuration problem. The configuration problem is detected. It is determined whether there is at least one solution for the configuration problem in a knowledge data store. When it is determined that there is at least one solution in the knowledge data store, automatically selecting a solution to solve the configuration problem. When said solution can be automatically applied, automatically applying said solution. When said solution cannot be automatically applied, notifying a user. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205301 | SYSTEM AND PROGRAM FOR SELECTING ONE OF MULTIPLE PATHS TO COMMUNICATE WITH A DEVICE - Provided are a system, program, and data structure for selecting one of multiple data paths to a device. A selection is made of one of multiple paths indicated as enabled to transmit data. A path is indicated as enabled or disabled. Transfer time data is gathered for each enabled path capable of being selected. Paths having transfer time data satisfying a threshold are indicated as disabled. Paths indicated as disabled are not capable of being selected to use to transmit data. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080212490 | Method of Setting Up Connections in a Communication Environment, Communication System and Contact Elemenet for Same - A method of setting up a connection in a communication environment controlled by a communication system between a first node allocated to a first contact and a second node allocated to a second contact includes the steps of providing a contact element within the first node for the first contact, the contact element having graphic and functional properties and graphically representing the second contact, an unambiguous identification and contact data being allocated to the contact element; accessing the contact data using a program and setting up a first connection from the first node to the communication system; checking within the communication system using the unambiguous identification whether the contact element is approved by the communication system for the setting-up of connections; and setting up a second connection to the second node depending on a result of the checking. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212491 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE INTEGRITY AND PERFORMANCE OF AN AD-HOC WIRELESS NETWORK - Several transceivers can be combined together to form a relay which can be used to form an ad-hoc network. A computation unit within the ad-hoc network determines the best placement of a new relay to improve the link integrity of the network. Furthermore, a database of power outlets, their locations and whether they contain a relay or not can be utilized to determine a method to improve the links within the ad-hoc network by placing additional relays into unused power outlets. A control unit can be used to configure the transceivers of each relay to enhance data transfer within a given information flow path of the ad-hoc network. The stream of bits can be exchanged with a second stream of bits. The housing unit can also contain the power plugs molded into the unit to allow the unit to be easily inserted into an AC power wall outlet. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212492 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESOURCE DISCOVERY - In distributed networks of cooperating nodes, it is useful to perform resource discovery in a manner that is efficient but that also minimizes communication complexity. A system and method in which nodes in a network efficiently are provided with information about the presence of, and other information about, other nodes in the network provides tangible benefits. In general, in one aspect, a system and method according to the invention features a distributed method for communicating information among a plurality of nodes. The method includes choosing, by a first node, one second node from information about nodes that the first node is aware of. The method further includes communicating from the first node to the second node information about the first node and nodes that the first node is aware of. The method further includes adding or merging, by the second node, the information about the first node and nodes that the first node is aware of with information about nodes that the second node is aware of. The method further includes each of the plurality of cooperating nodes repeating these steps. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212493 | ROBUST REMOTE RESET FOR NETWORKS - An approach provides a reset trigger signaling in a network, wherein a reset trigger is generated, which carries a device indicator for indicating a target device. To trigger a reset procedure, the reset trigger is signaled over the network by using a protocol layer lower than a network layer. At a network entity, it is checked whether the device indicator indicates this network entity; and the reset procedure is initiated in response to the result of this checking. Thereby, the reset trigger works independent of the network topology and will reach the destination device, even if a higher protocol layer is blocked due to error situations, so that a robust and flexible reset signaling procedure can be provided. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212494 | Ad hoc network formation and mangement based on aggregation of ad hoc nodes according to an aggregation hierarchy - Each mobile ad hoc node has an assigned hierarchy position within an identified tree-based aggregation group. Each ad hoc node is configured for selectively attaching to one of a plurality of available ad hoc nodes based on identifying a best match, for the assigned hierarchy position within the identified aggregation group, from among identifiable hierarchy positions of identifiable aggregation groups. Each ad hoc node also is configured for selectively attaching to any available ad hoc node based on a determined absence of any available ad hoc node advertising the identified aggregation group of the ad hoc node, or an aggregation group containing the identified aggregation group. Hence, a root node of an aggregation group can filter group-specific routing information from packets destined toward a network clusterhead, resulting in a scalable routing protocol that is not adversely affected by added nodes. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212495 | Configuration mechanism in hosted remote access environments - In the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is a method including setting up a first tunnel between a first device and a remote access relay, setting up a second tunnel between the remote access relay and a remote access server, and updating the first device with related parameters and settings on the remote access relay. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080219183 | Switch method for ensuring communication continuity in mobile communication system - The present invention discloses a switch method ensuring communication continuity, mainly including: when a switch occurs to an Mobile Station (MS), the MSC Server controlling the MGW establishing in a context a new termination connected with a new ground circuit; after the MS switching to a new wireless channel, the MGW controlling the new termination inheriting a resource channel from an original termination connected with an original ground circuit and continuing with the communications through the resource channel. The method of the present invention solves the problem of interruption in an announcement service, a data service and a QNC service caused by a switch process and the communication continuity during a switch procedure is ensured. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219184 | Discovery of network devices - Network devices, systems, and methods are described for visually identifying physically linked network devices. One network device includes a memory in connected to a processor. A network chip on the device is connected to the processor and the memory. The network chip includes logic and a number of ports. A first location indicator is associated with the network device. A physical link is established between one of the number of ports on the network device and a port on a different network device. Computer executable instructions are stored in the memory and executable by the processor to send a locate signal to visually identify the different network device. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219185 | Method and System For Radio Frequency Management In A Mesh Network With A Path Distance Factor - A method and system for radio frequency management (RFM) in a mesh network using a path distance factor (PDF) is disclosed. According to one embodiment, a computer-implemented method, comprises calculating a path distance factor (PDF) between a first mesh router and a portal. A frame is transmitted to a second mesh router, wherein the frame includes the path distance factor. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219186 | ENERGY SWITCH ROUTER - In various embodiments, a policy-based residential networked meter can be an energy switch router device (ESRD) that provides policy-based advanced metering, load control and shaping, energy services delivery and accounting, and secure web services interfaces and internetworking communications. The ESRD can be integrated and inter-related with advanced policy-based sensory, metrology, monitoring, control, recording, classification, prioritization, security, routing, and switching functions. The ESRD may be used to sense, measure, meter, and control electrical service flows to the utility service point at the customer premise, and may be configured and managed with one or more policy-based networking methods. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080225748 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING STUCTURED POLICY EXPRESSIONS TO REPRESENT UNSTRUCTURED DATA IN A NETWORK APPLIANCE - Systems and methods for configuring and evaluating policies that direct processing of one or more data streams are described. A configuration interface is described for allowing users to specify object oriented policies. These object oriented policies may allow any data structures to be applied with respect to a payload of a received packet stream, including any portions of HTTP traffic. A configuration interface may also allow the user to control the order in which policies and policy groups are executed, in addition to specifying actions to be taken if one or more policies are undefined. Systems and methods for processing the policies may allow efficient processing of object-oriented policies by applying potentially complex data structures to unstructured data streams. A device may also interpret and process a number of flow control commands and policy group invocation statements to determine an order of execution among a number of policies and policy groups. These policy configurations and processing may allow configuration and processing of complex network behaviors relating to load balancing, VPNs, SSL offloading, content switching, application security, acceleration, and caching. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225749 | Auto-configuration of a network device - Exemplary systems and methods for auto-configuring a network device are provided. In exemplary embodiments, the network device receives network data, which is used to determine identification data for a client. A version of the client identification data is then sent to an ISP by the network device. In response, a public IP address is returned from the ISP. The network device then translates the public IP address into an internal IP address for use with the client. In some embodiments, the network device is verified by a central data center. In some embodiments, the network device may be provisioned for PSTN and/or VoIP calls. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225750 | Method of transmitting data in a communication system - A method of establishing parameters to facilitate a communication event in a communication network comprising: establishing a first communication event; monitoring at least one parameter used to process data associated with the first communication event; storing said at least one monitored parameter; establishing a second communication event; selecting at least one stored monitored parameter in response to establishing the second communication event; and applying said at least one selected parameter to process data associated with said second communication event. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225751 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITIZED INFORMATION DELIVERY WITH NETWORK CODING OVER TIME-VARYING NETWORK TOPOLOGIES - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for information delivery with network coding over time-varying network topologies. In one embodiment, the method comprises decomposing a sequence of topology graphs that model a time-varying network topology into a plurality of virtual graphs, where each virtual graph of the plurality of virtual graphs corresponds to a distinct traffic class, and the virtual topology graph representing a partial topology of a time-varying network. The method also includes selecting a network code for each virtual graph in the plurality of the virtual graphs to meet requirements of the distinct traffic class corresponding to said each topology graph, where the network code is used to encode packets of the associated traffic class, and processing packets of each traffic class using the network code determined by its corresponding virtual topology and the requirements of said each traffic class, including using a virtual buffer system to implement the network code corresponding to each traffic class over the physical network topology. The method also includes using a scheduler to determine the transmission schedules for each output packet from the virtual buffer system of each traffic class where the scheduling decisions are based, at least in part, on the QoS requirements of each class. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225752 | Communication Resource Allocation Method of Base Station - A communication resource allocation method for solving resource request imbalance content in a cell is provided. Considering a propagation environment, the base station allocates a whispering resource to a whispering area, the whispering resource being one part of the communication resource and the whispering area being a peripheral area of the first base station, and allocates a speaking resource to a speaking area, the speaking resource being other parts of the communication resource and the speaking area being a border area of a cell. When the resource request of the whispering area is increased, the base station further allocates a part of the speaking resource to the whispering area or increases a ratio of the whispering resource. When the resource request of the speaking area is increased, the base station controls a threshold value for identifying the whispering and speaking areas or increases a ratio of the speaking resource. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080232270 | Systems and arrangements for power conservation in network devices - Arrangements for a reduced power consumption network device are disclosed. In one embodiment, the device can join the network by communicating with a second network compatible device. After the network connection is made the device can place communication configuration or network status processing components in a low power mode until the device detects an indication of a status change in a communication from the second device. When the status change is detected the device can activate the status processing components that were placed in the low power mode and these processing components can process the status change information to change a communication configuration. Significant power saving can be achieved by placing such components into the sleep mode. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232271 | REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A disclosed remote management system includes an electronic device; a communication adaptor; and a management apparatus connected via the communication adaptor to the electronic device and configured to remotely manage the electronic device. The communication adaptor includes a network segment specification unit for specifying a network segment to be managed, a device search unit configured to search the specified network segment to find the electronic device in the network segment, a remote management information obtaining unit configured to obtain remote management information from the found electronic device, a format verification unit configured to verify the obtained remote management information, an invalid device information sending/reporting unit configured to send or report electronic device information of the electronic device if the remote management information is invalid, and a change request sending unit configured to send a change request including updated remote management information to the electronic device. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232272 | EXTENSIBLE MICRO-MOBILITY WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A network having an access service network (“ASN”) configured to provide full mobility to mobile stations located within a service area. The ASN includes a Layer 2 or data link layer network that is larger, incorporates more nodes, or carries more data communications than Layer 2 networks incorporated in prior art ASNs. Data communications to and from the mobile stations are routed inside the ASN across the Layer 2 network which transports the data communication using a Layer 2 protocol. If the network includes another ASN located adjacent to the first ASN, the two ASNs may communicate directly with one another over a Layer 2 connection. If the network includes another ASN that is not adjacent to the first, Mobile Internet Protocol components may be included in the ASNs and configured to provide mobility between ASNs. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING A NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION CHANGE DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE - The invention comprises a method and apparatus for adjusting a distribution schedule controlling distribution of network device configuration changes associated with a plurality of network devices. Specifically, the method comprises determining a distribution status of the distribution of network device configuration changes, comparing the distribution status to the distribution schedule, and adjusting the distribution schedule in response to a difference between the distribution schedule and the distribution status. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080239984 | Energy Saving System/Network - An energy saving system/network is used to control the power of air conditioners (AC) in hotels/motels. The system includes a master device and an array of slave devices. The master device may be installed in the hotel/motel front desk area, while the slave devices may be installed in guest rooms. The master device communicates with the slave devices via the power lines in the hotels/motels. This system/network automatically turns on the AC power when the guest is checked in and turns off the AC power when the guest is checked out. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239985 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SERVICES MODEL BASED PROVISIONING IN A MULTITENANT ENVIRONMENT - A method, system and computer usable program code is disclosed for mapping a logical topology to information technology (IT) resources. The method comprises the steps of generating a logical topology of resources for a solution to a given request for resources, extracting information about shared rules and constraints on IT resources specific to a plurality of customers, and generating multiple mappings from the logical topology to the IT resources that satisfy said shared rules and constraints. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239986 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC DETECTION OF UTRAN TOPOLOGY - System and method for automatically detecting nodes, components and interfaces in a network. A preferred embodiment comprises detecting nodes in a network, wherein the nodes are coupled to a network controller, comprises identifying ports for the network controller, capturing messages received by the network controller at the ports, parsing the messages to identify a node address parameter, wherein the node address parameter uniquely identifies the node to the network controller, and if the node address parameter has not been previously identified, adding a new entry to a node database. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239987 | System and Method for Real-Time Iub and Iur Link Detection and AAL5 Channel Detection in UTRAN - System and method for identifying interfaces and channels in a network using messages passing through the network. An embodiment comprises detecting components of a network, comprises capturing a message from the network, extracting a network node identifier from the captured message, comparing the network node identifier to a database of known network nodes, and, if the network node identifier is not associated with a known network node, then adding an entry for a new network node to the database, wherein the new network node entry includes the network node identifier. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239988 | Method and System For Network Infrastructure Offload Traffic Filtering - Aspects of a method and system for network infrastructure offload traffic filtering are disclosed and may include a networked device, or station, which may communicate one or more filters to an infrastructure networking device. The infrastructure networking device may utilize the filters to implement filtering rules upon traffic received by the infrastructure networking device on behalf of the station. Based on the filters, the infrastructure networking device may determine whether to transmit received traffic to the station via a network, or whether to discard received traffic. The infrastructure networking device may perform traffic shaping based on the filters. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239989 | Method of routing and resource allocation in a wireless communication system - The present invention provides a method for route and resource allocation. One embodiment of the method includes determining at least one network variable associated with a network that includes a plurality of nodes connected by a plurality of links. The network variable(s) are determined based on a plurality of basic loads associated with the plurality of links and a plurality of data rates associated with the plurality of links. The method also includes determining at least one communication variable based on the determined network variable(s) and allocating at least one resource for communication over the network based on the determined network variable(s) and the determined communication variable(s). | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239990 | Networking apparatus and computer usable medium therefor - A networking apparatus electrically connectable with a removable device and an external device through a network is provided. The networking apparatus includes a removal instruction receiving unit to receive a disconnection instruction to electrically disconnect the removable device from the networking apparatus, an approval inquiry transmission unit to transmit an inquiry for approval for the removal of the removable device to the external terminal device, an approval receiver unit to receive the approval for removal from the external terminal device, a connection control unit to control electrical connection and disconnection between the removable device and the networking apparatus, and a disconnection unit to electrically disconnect the removable device from the networking apparatus based on the control of the connection control unit. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080239991 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT ROUTING OF VARIABLE TRAFFIC - A method and apparatus for provide highly efficient traffic routing for a wide range of possible traffic matrices (TM) in an intra-domain network. That routing optimally balances the traffic loads over a range of traffic matrices so as to minimize the deviation for any particular traffic matrix from the optimal routing. Such a routing provides a guaranteed performance ratio against the best possible network routing. The invention utilizes a method of optimally configuring a traffic network based on solving a linear program to obtain the optimal routing, and then configuring the routing on the network accordingly. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080247332 | Network Configuration Management Method, Network Band Management Method, Network Participation Method, and Communication Terminal Device - A network configuration management includes the steps of sending from the management terminal ( | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247333 | Method and Apparatus for Self-Configuring Routing Devices in a Network - A method, apparatus, and computer instructions for configuring routing devices in a network data processing system. A routing change is identified in the network data processing system. In response to the routing change being identified, a node topology is generated for a set of routing devices present in the network data processing system. A master network configuration table is built at a routing device within the set of routing devices. The network configuration table contains configuration data from the routing devices in the node topology. The master network configuration table is broadcast to the routing devices in the network data processing system. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080253302 | NETWORK FORMATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A determination is made as to whether a communication apparatus is a data sender or a data recipient and, based on the results of the determination, it is determined whether the apparatus constructs a network or joins a constructed network. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253303 | Method to Determine a Relative Position of Devices in a Network and Network of Devices for Carrying Out the Method - The invention discloses a method to determine a relative position of devices in a network, and to a network of devices for carrying out the method. In a network with a power cable ( | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253304 | Service discovery method in a network - A centralized service discovery process performed in a data or telecommunications network collects a list of services available to user terminal equipment connected to a network based on user-specific data (e.g., the user's identification and preferences, the location and capabilities of the user terminal equipment). The list of services is then communicated to the user. The list of services may include home environment (HE) services the user is authorized to receive by a home network, and value-added services being offered to the user by the home network, a visited network, or third party service platforms. Both application and bearer services may further be collected in the list of available services. The service discovery process can be integrated in wireless and wireline networks, or implemented in a stand-alone service enabler. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080259815 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MAPPING AND ANALYZING VULNERABILITIES IN NETWORKS - Systems and methods for mapping and analyzing vulnerabilities in networks. In one embodiment, a network is mapped, comprising: converting network line data into point data; associating the point data with cells of a grid overlaying the network; and analyzing the network by determining the relationship of the point data to the cells of the grid. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259816 | Validating a Cabling Topology in a Distributed Computing System - Validating a cabling topology in a distributed computing system comprised of cabled nodes connected using data communications cables, each cabled node characterized by cabling dimensions, each cable corresponding to one of the cabling dimensions, includes: receiving a selection from a user of at least one cabled node for topology validation; identifying, for each cabling dimension for each selected cabled node, a shortest cabling path; determining, for each cabling dimension, whether the number of cabled nodes in the shortest cabling path for each selected cabled node match; and if, for each cabling dimension, the number of cabled nodes in the shortest cabling path for each selected cabled node match: selecting, for each cabling dimension, the number of cabled nodes in the shortest cabling path as a representative value for the cabling dimension, calculating a product of the representative values, and determining whether the product equals the number of selected cabled nodes. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259817 | Media access control (MAC) address management system and method - A media access control (MAC) address management system, comprises logic configured to generate a MAC address for at least one network device of a computing device based on a MAC address of another network device of the computing device. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259818 | HOME-TO-HOME DELIVERY OF MEDIA CONTENT VIA CABLE - A residential services gateway operating within a networked home setting that is enabled by a Strings software program to obtain, view, and/or repurpose content obtained from within the networked home setting or exterior of the networked home setting. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259819 | Automatic device detection and configuration in a network-aware print fulfillment engine - Disclosed is a system and method for automatically detecting the topology of output devices present in a network, and for automatically configuring those output devices for outputting a specific media type. One or more network devices are present in a computer network environment configured for processing orders for physical and/or electronic photographic prints. Such network devices may have one or more output devices attached thereto for fulfilling consumer orders for photographic prints. In accordance with a particularly preferred embodiment of the invention, the system and method described herein query the network devices to determine the numbers and characteristics of output devices that are attached to and active on each network device, update a listing of such available output devices on an administrative management unit attached to the network, and configure each such output device for outputting specific media types. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080267088 | Optimal Path Selection for Accessing Networked Applications - An efficient and user-friendly application service access method utilizing network dynamic conditions and application traffic requirements. This method allows applications to register their servers' location information and traffic requirements with the network and provides an optimal connection to application service without specifying an application server location for an end user and based on network conditions and application requirements. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267089 | Passive Optical Network Topology Estimation - An apparatus comprising an optical line terminal (OLT) in communication with a plurality of optical network terminals (ONTs) via an optical distribution network (ODN), and a passive optical network (PON) topology estimator coupled to the OLT or at least one of the ONTs, wherein the PON topology estimator is configured to model a PON topology. Also disclosed is an apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising defining a PON topology comprising a plurality of network parameters, a plurality of component parameters, and at least one relationship between the network parameters and the component parameters, acquiring values for the network parameters, and determining the component parameters using the network parameters and the mathematical equations. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267090 | Management computer for setting configuration information of node - Provided is a management computer which reduces the workload of an administrator of a network in setting node when the normal network is changed to a network with redundancy. The management computer manages a plurality of nodes that constitute a network accommodating VLANs. The plurality of nodes include a first node and a second node which make a redundancy pair and which divides the network into an active path and a standby path. The management computer stores port management information showing connection relations for respective nodes and identifiers of VLANs allocated to ports of the nodes, and creates the redundancy pair by updating the port management information of the first node such that a VLAN allocated to one of ports of a connected node that is connected to the first node is allocated to one of ports of the first node that is connected to the connected node. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080273472 | ETHERNET RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - The state of resources (e.g., links, trunks, services) of an Ethernet Resource may be maintained at a management console. Upon detection of a change of state in a given resource, a management agent of a node in the Ethernet Resource may indicate the state change to the management console in a MIB. Upon receipt of the indication of change, the management console can update a record of the state of the given resource. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080279116 | Method For Obtaining Configuration Data For a Terminal By Using the Dhcp Protocol - A method of obtaining configuration data for a terminal using the DHCP protocol. The method includes inserting optional data including an identifier into a predefined option field of a DHCP request sent by a DHCP client module to obtain configuration data, directly or indirectly, with a single user of the terminal, to obtain configuration data customized for the user. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080285481 | TECHNIQUE FOR DEFINING AND DYNAMICALLY ENABLING SERVICE LEVEL REQUIREMENTS IN A SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE - The present invention discloses a document for formally defining service level requirements in a service oriented architecture (SOA). This document can include a service specification that defines functional attributes and a capability specification that defines performance requirements. These functional attributes and performance requirements can influence the response of the SOA to a service request. For example, a dynamic interpreter of the requirements document can dynamically adjust SOA resources to ensure performance requirements specified in the requirements document are met. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285482 | Quality of Service in Networked Computing Devices - In mobile phones, delays can occur when the parameters that determine the characteristics of the network connection are changed or updated. The present invention sets the characteristics of the network connection in advance by anticipating the likely future use for network connections by analysing common or past usage. In a preferred embodiment the required network connection characteristics are triggered automatically by the opening of specific applications or a communication channel directed to a particular network address, or the use of specific bookmarks or Favourites. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285483 | Client Operation For Network Access - A network traffic device for a managed network can operate as a client host, to receive packets from the managed network and forward them to an uplinked external network, thereby operating as a gateway to the uplink network and performing a network address translation (NAT) function for the managed network relative to the uplinked network. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080291843 | ROUTING PROTOCOL SELECTION BASED UPON MOTION-INFERRED LINK METRIC IN MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORKS - Dynamic routing protocol selection capability may be provided within a MANET without the cost of position and/or motion sensing or calculating hardware. The method manages and controls the discovery and maintenance of routes in the MANET, and may include determining additions and drop outs over time of neighboring nodes in communication with a wireless mobile node, and generating a motion-inferred link metric based upon the additions and drop outs over time. A routing protocol may be selected from a plurality of possible routing protocols based upon the motion-inferred link metric, and routes may be discovered with the selected routing protocol to other wireless mobile nodes within the network. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291844 | Direct Sequential Network Addressing (Dsna) - A system that includes a network server and a number of network clients connected to the server through a daisy chained network. These network clients include a clamper circuit parallel coupled to the daisy network, with the clamper adapted to detect a signal transmitted through the daisy network and adapted to short circuit the daisy network when the signal has been detected. A detect and blocking circuit can detect a signal on the transmission line via measuring voltage or current going trough the transmission line, and as a result of a detection block or interrupt the signal. The detect and blocking circuit can be enabled and disabled by the network client controller in that a detect and blocking instance is memorized by detect and blocking circuit enabling the network client controller to acquire the detect and blocking circuit if a detect and blocking instance has occurred. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291845 | Inter-Domain Map-Finder - Link information is obtained about new or changes links in a communications system having a plurality of domains. The link information concerning a link between a first and a second domain comprises at least four pieces of information, domain identity of the first domain, domain identity of the second domain, link end identifier for a first end of the link, and link end identifier for a second end of the link. The link information is cascaded through the communications system by providing the link information stepwise from one domain to an adjacent domain. This is achieved by spreading the obtained link information to adjacent domains and by distributing link information received from adjacent domains to further adjacent domains. Preferably, the link information is compiled and access to the compiled link information is provided for creation of a system link map. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291846 | DUAL RADIO WIRELESS MESH NETWORK ACCESS POINT - A dual radio wireless mesh access point is described herein. According to one embodiment, a wireless mesh access point includes an uplink wireless interface, a downlink wireless interface, a local wireless interface, and a routing unit coupled to the uplink, downlink, and the local wireless interfaces. The routing unit is configured to route data packets to other wireless mesh access points (APs), including communicating with an uplink AP via the uplink wireless interface and communicating with a downlink AP via the downlink wireless interface. The uplink and downlink wireless interfaces utilize different communication channels having different communication frequencies. The routing unit communicates with one or more local clients via the local wireless interface. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080298273 | Method For Establishing a Communication Relationship in at Least One Communication Network - The invention relates to a method for establishing a communication link. According to said method, to establish said link, a communications unit transmits at least one message that initiates the establishment of the communications link in at least one communications network and at least one corresponding confirmation is transmitted with the aid of a broadcast transmission method in the direction of the initiating communications unit. The information that represents the initiating communications unit is stored in the communications network or networks. The confirmation(s) that has or have been transmitted with the aid of the broadcast transmission method is detected and target information that is contained in said confirmation is compared to the stored information. If the compared information agrees at least partially, the confirmation(s) is or are routed to the initiating communication unit represented by the communication unit. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298274 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING VIRTUAL NETWORK AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A first computer stores a correspondence between a virtual channel and a physical channel(s) in physical channel information and transmits the correspondence between the virtual channel and the physical channel(s) to a second computer having a virtual network interface to which a data transmission instruction is addressed. Upon receiving the correspondence between the virtual channel and the physical channel(s), the second computer stores the received correspondence in the physical channel information. The first computer transmits data in accordance with the data transmission instruction, using one or more physical channels associated with the virtual channel, based on the correspondence stored. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080304424 | Multi-Topology And Multi-Service Routing System - A system and method is disclosed for routing a stream between several nodes, Ni, forming a network. The stream is transmitted by a source and is intended for one or more destinations taking account of the mobility requirements of the users and of the network nodes. The network nodes have the following characteristics: a node, Ni, of the network comprises a service module, xSVi, one or more transfer gateways, xTGi, a function LOC suitable for generating for each service a routing table used at the request of the service modules, xSVi. A server LOC is connected, for a given service, via a service node, SNGi, to the other routing modules LOCi. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304425 | Method And System For A Configurable Communication Integrated Circuit And/Or Chipset - A deployed configurable communication integrated circuit (IC) and/or chipset which may be integrated within a wireless communication and/or multi-media communication device may be operable to monitor its operating conditions, performance and/or utilization characteristics. It may send information via a wireless, optical and/or wired network to a remote analysis and/or development system and/or service, such as an engineering service, that may determine and return configuration parameters. The configuration parameters may be utilized to adjust antenna and/or MIMO, SIMO, MISO and beamforming configuration, power level, interference rejection, equalizer length, dynamic range, modulation, encoding and/or decoding, analog to digital conversion precision, error detection and/or correction parameters, MAC parameters such as timing thresholds, transmit window size and/or buffer space. The configurable communication IC and/or chipset may configure and/or reconfigure itself one or more times over a period of time while deployed in the field. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304426 | LOGICAL ROUTERS - Systems and methods include providing a router that may be deployed as multiple logical routers that share a common fast interconnect. These logical routers may functionally serve as core routers, peering routers, aggregation routers, etc. A further aspect of the system and methods is that the resources assigned to a logical router are allocated from a pool potentially including multitude of hardware cards. A further aspect of the system and methods is that a logical router may be independently managed by the owner of the router or by an owner of the logical router. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080310323 | Method and Apparatus for DNS Update Triggered IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement - In a 3GPP2 Converged Access Network (CAN), IPv6 stateless auto configuration can be used to configure an IPv6 address of an access terminal (AT) for Simple IPv6 operation. A domain name system (DNS) update is triggered by IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement addresses a need for a DNS update when the full IPv6 address (128 bits) has not yet been sent in IPv6 packets from the AT. Upon receipt of the full address in response to the IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement, provision is made for prompting this DNS update even when the requesting network entity (e.g., access gateway (AGW) or home agent (HA)) does not have security authentication with a responsible home DNS server by utilizing access to an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) function, perhaps via a local visited AAA, to submit an Accounting Request (Start) message that prompts the home DNS server to perform the DNS update. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310324 | ABORTING A PACKETIZED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods are provided for a signaling an ongoing communication of a data unit in a data packet is to be aborted. Upon a determination to abort an ongoing communication is made, a code-point in a data unit header is utilized to indicate the ongoing communication is to be aborted. A first class of code-point is a dedicated, predefined abort data unit field header. A second class of code-point is a combination of a set of existing, predefined data unit header fields, at least one data unit header field in the combination holds a value that is either invalid or legitimate yet unlikely to occur. Conveying code-point(s) to indicate termination of an ongoing communication of a data unit in a data packet in a regular communication mitigates transmission disruption and saves channel capacity. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310325 | METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING VIRTUAL BACKBONE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Disclosed is a method for constructing a virtual backbone in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN). The method including the steps of setting a ‘Dominator’ status for a gateway or a sink node within the WSN, setting a ‘CoveredByDominator’ status for each neighbor node positioned in the transmission range of a node for which the ‘Dominator’ status is set, and setting a ‘NULL’ status for each of the other nodes, transmitting a beacon frame by periods from each node to neighbor nodes thereof within the WSN, receiving, by each node in the ‘CoveredByDominator’ status, the beacon frame from neighbor nodes thereof in the ‘NULL’ status, computing a time duration of a defer timer, and enabling the defer timer to operate by the computed time duration; and changing, to the ‘Dominator’ status, a status of a node whose defer timer expires earliest among the nodes all having the ‘CoveredByDominator’ status. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310326 | NETWORK PHYSICAL CONNECTION INFERENCE FOR IP TUNNELS - The physical connection corresponding to IP tunnels in a network are found by tracing through the device configuration and routing tables at the routers in the network to determine the outbound interface associated with each tunnel endpoint, and then inferring a likely return interface associated with the opposite tunnel endpoint. Having determined the physical devices at the source and destination of each tunnel, the physical path between these source and destination devices is traced from the source toward the destination until the path is terminated at the destination device, or at an interface to an external network. If the path ends at an external network, the path is traced from the destination device toward the source device until a corresponding interface to the external network is reached. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080316939 | Presence Display System and Gateway Apparatus - Synchronization of presence information is established between different presence services. Presence information of each user is stored on the presence server | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316940 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USING MANAGED PORT CIRCUITRY TO MAP CONNECTIONS AMONG STRUCTURED CABLING APPARATUS AND NETWORK DEVICES - A managed port circuit includes a detection circuit that is disposed in a communication channel between a first local port and a second local port and a controller that is coupled to the detection circuit and is operable to configure the detection circuit in a detection configuration in which the first and second local ports are connected to the controller and a second pass through configuration in which the first and second local ports are connected to each other via the communication channel, the controller being further operable to determine when an end device is connected to one of the first and second local ports when the detection circuit is in the detection configuration. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316941 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DYNAMICALLY CHANGED UPNP DESCRIPTION - Provided is a method, medium and apparatus for providing a dynamically changed universal plug and play (UPnP) description. The method includes sensing a change of a service configuration of a device complying with a predetermined standard, updating a description including information about a service based on the change of the service configuration, and advertising that the description is updated. Thus, the service configuration is matched with the description and a control point can correctly control the device whose service configuration is changed. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316942 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR EXCHANGING PEER PARAMETERS BETWEEN NETWORK DEVICES - Methods and devices are provided for detecting whether peer ports interconnecting two network devices can perform a novel protocol called Exchange Peer Parameters (“EPP”). If the peer ports are so configured to perform EPP, EPP services are exchanged between the peer ports. In a first phase, information is exchanged about peer port configurations of interest. In a second phase, the results of the exchange of information are applied to hardware and/or software of the respective ports, as needed. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20090003237 | Method for Configuring Parameters of Broadband Access Terminal - This invention relates to access technologies in the communication field and discloses a method for configuring parameters of a broadband access terminal, which is stable, simple in operation, convenient in maintenance and easy to implement. Configuration parameters are generated at the network management side and are sent to a DSLAM, the DSLAM stores the configuration parameters, and a terminal downloads the configuration parameters through interacting with the DSLAM. In addition, the terminal can request for download upon start-up or in operation, and the download can be implemented by the terminal or the DSLAM. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003238 | Node Merging Process for Network Topology Representation - Node merging methods and apparatus are disclosed for generating simplified representations of network topology. A first topology representative of a given network is determined, and at least one pair of nodes of the first topology is merged into a single node based on measures associated with respective edges connecting the nodes of the node pair to at least one neighbor node common to that pair. The merging step is repeated for one or more additional pairs of nodes to produce a reduced network topology meeting one or more desired criteria, and a visualization or other representation of the reduced network topology is generated. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003239 | Methods and Computer Program Products For Route Determination - This application discloses methods and computer program products for optimal or at least improved routing by evaluating routing alternatives based on multiple-path elements. The systems and methods can determine the shortest route to network points while maintaining route diversity. As such, the systems and methods can determine diverse routes with network-entrance diversity or diverse routes entering a network through a common access point. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003240 | System and method for configuration of network-capable appliances - A controlling device is used to configure an appliance for wireless network communications through use of a setup wizard installed on a computing device. The setup wizard is used to obtain from a user information required to perform communications on a wireless network via a wireless network router and a digital representation of the information obtained from the user through use of the setup wizard is provided to the controlling device. The controlling device is then used to transfer the digital representation of the information to the appliance whereupon the appliance will use the digital representation of the information to configure itself for wireless network communications. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003241 | A Method and System For Obtaining Path Maximum Transfer Unit in Network - A method and system for obtaining path maximum transfer unit in network, include first, at the path start node sending the second layer message which carries the path MTU field for carrying path MTU value and at each node which the second layer message passed renewing the MTU value in the field according to the values preserved in each node; then, when the second layer message arrives at the path terminal node, regarding the MTU value being carried in the path MTU field in the second layer message as the path MTU value corresponding with the path. The present invention acquires the size of path MTU by use of Ethernet network OAM process, avoids the failure of transmitting the OAM message to object end caused by the reason that the size of transmitted OAM message exceeds the MTU of path when the route itself is normal. Therefore, the present invention can increase the reliability of OAM message transmission effectively, and assure the reliability of OAM function realization in Ethernet network. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090010178 | CORDLESS MAINS POWERED FORM FACTOR FOR MESH NETWORK ROUTER NODE - An apparatus comprising a cordless, mains powered mesh network router. The mains powered mesh network router includes a controller configured to initiate a first indication when the mains powered mesh network router is mounted to an electrical outlet, and initiate a second indication when the controller joins a mesh network. Other devices, methods and systems are disclosed. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010179 | METHODS AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING TRAFFIC SIGNALING IN PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. An active connection list is maintained by a wireless communications device supporting peer to peer communications. In various embodiments, the active connection identifier list being maintained is in addition to a list of discovered peers in the local vicinity. Paging signaling, e.g., peer to peer paging signaling, is used to establish active connections. Air link peer to peer traffic resources include traffic control resources and traffic data resources. A wireless communications device seeking to transmit on a traffic data resource transmits a traffic request signal on a traffic control resource. An active connection identifier is, in some embodiments, associated with a particular subset of traffic control resources. Thus, a wireless communications device monitors the portion or portions of the traffic control resource corresponding to its active connections for traffic request signals, but need not monitor other portions. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010180 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE PROVISIONING AND PLANNING IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for resource provisioning and planning in a communication network. In an aspect, a method includes generating resource entities that represent resource requirements of targeted services, wherein the resource entities are modeled from at least one of transport network (TN) dependent information and TN independent information, and determining whether the resource entities can be supported by one or more transport networks. An apparatus includes input logic to receive at least one of TN dependent information and TN independent information, and processing logic to generate resource entities that represent resource requirements of targeted services, wherein the resource entities are modeled from at least one of the TN dependent information and the TN independent information, and to determine whether the resource entities can be supported by one or more transport networks. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010181 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING THE CONFIGURATION MODE OF SERVICE CARRIER FREQUENCY TIME SLOTS - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting the configuration mode of MBMS carrier frequency time slots, and a method for receiving the configuration mode of MBMS carrier frequency time slots. The present invention also discloses a RNC and a terminal. The present invention enables the terminal to ascertain the configuration mode of MBMS carrier frequency time slots, and performs appropriate combining operation on the basis of the capability of the terminal itself, hence reduces the workload on the terminal. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010182 | Protection providing method and customer edge apparatus - The present invention provides a protection providing method in a network configuration having a customer edge apparatus redundantly connected to a first provider edge apparatus and a second provider edge apparatus for setting a primary provider edge apparatus and a secondary provider edge apparatus with the customer edge apparatus. The first provider edge apparatus transmits a first signaling message received when establishing a pseudowire to the customer edge apparatus. The second provider edge apparatus also transmits a second signaling message received when establishing a pseudowire to the customer edge apparatus. The customer edge apparatus compares the first and second signaling messages and sets the primary provider edge apparatus and the secondary provider edge apparatus. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090022067 | Cable ID Using RFID Devices - The present invention relates to the use of RFID technology to identify specific cables in a bundle, and in particular to a cable identification device in which RFID devices are connected to the far end of a plurality of cables and splitters, and an RF measurement device is used to identify each cable from the central location. The RF measurement device provides the AC RF electrical signal power required to pass through the at least one AC couple splitter to operate the plurality of RFID devices, and includes means to identify the unique identification numbers associated with the plurality of coaxial cables from the plurality of identification signals received simultaneously. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022068 | Delegated network connection management and power management in a wireless device - A method and system for advanced media access control delegated from a host device, such as a WiFi device, to a smart wireless communications module. In an embodiment, the host signals to the wireless module a list of one or more preferred networks. The wireless module offloads from the host the processing required to scan for the preferred network(s), as well as possibly other management tasks. The wireless communications module may automatically reassign the network connection from an existing network to a preferred network, or may report to the host when a preferred network is discovered. In either case, the wireless communications module may monitor the wireless environment, and scan for preferred networks, in parallel with maintaining an existing connection. The method and system allows rapid adaptation to a changing network environment, and enables lower system power consumption by distributing management functions between the host and the lower-powered wireless communications module. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090028067 | Network Map Creating Method - By synthesizing the map of an entire network, it provides a method for detecting OSI Reference Model layer- | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028068 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVISION MPLS/VPN NETWORK - Systems and methods of automatically determining a set of route targets is provided. The method includes receiving network topology data specifying configuration of a network. The method also includes automatically converting the network topology data into route targets to be assigned to virtual routing and forwarding elements. The route targets are grouped into sets and duplicate sets of route targets are removed based on the route targets between duplicate sets of route targets identified as being the same. The method further includes generating a data record including information related to the set of route targets. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090034430 | INFRASTRUCTURE FOR MEDIATION DEVICE TO MEDIATION DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatus for providing a mediation device infrastructure that allows a mobile node to be tapped while roaming among and within service providers are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes determining when a node that is tapped by a first mediation device has moved from a first domain associated with the first mediation device into a second domain associated with a second mediation device. A first packet is sent to the second mediation device if the node has moved. The first packet provides an indication that the second mediation device is to tap the node. The method also includes opening a call data channel to the second mediation device, and receiving information from the second mediation device on the call data channel that is obtained by the second mediation device from the node. Finally, the method includes providing the information to the first mediation device. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034431 | ENTERPRISE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR IMPLEMENTING A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK FOR WIRELESS USERS BY MAPPING WIRELESS LANs TO IP TUNNELS - An enterprise network is provided which includes a central site, a network and a remote site communicatively coupled to the central site over the network. The central site includes a first termination device in communication with a restricted network segment including at least one server. The remote site includes an infrastructure device, an authorized access wireless local area network (WLAN), and an unauthorized access WLAN. The infrastructure device comprises a second termination device which communicates with the first termination device over the network. The authorized access WLAN allow communications with the central site via the second termination device over a tunnel coupling the first termination device to the second termination device, whereas the unauthorized access WLAN allows communications with the network via the second termination device. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090040943 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ROUTING IN A PACKET NETWORK SUPPORTED BY A TRANSPORT NETWORK - A method of controlling routing in a packet network supported by a transport network allowing the dynamic creation/suppression of links for transporting packets of said packet network, said method including a routing step, a step of informing other routers of said network of the metric assigned to each link of the packet network, and a step of creating/destroying a link. The link may have three states: a non-connected state if said two routers cannot be directly connected, a virtual connection state wherein a virtual metric is assigned to said link between said head end router and said tail end router of the same communication, and a real connection state wherein a real metric is normally assigned to said link. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040944 | Method and Bypass Device of Network-Based IP Allocation - The present invention provides a method and bypass device of IP allocation based on the network, the method comprising: establishing a mapping relation between the parameters of a visitor and an IP address; filing a request for visiting the network using the parameters of the visitor; performing authentication of AAA according to parameters of the visitor; finding the IP address corresponding to the successful parameters of the visitor from the mapping relation between the parameters of the visitor and the IP address and allocating the found IP address via DHCP to the network terminal being used by the visitor, to achieve the allocation of IP address based on the parameters of the visitor. The problem of the determination of the true identity of the visitor is solved and the safety of the network and the reasonable allocation of the network sources are improved. Other on-line or off-line devices are set using the IP address section correspond to the parameters of the visitor and thus, making these devices to realize the existing functions of the network devices according to the parameters of the visitor. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040945 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR UTILIZING GLOBAL TRAFFIC FLOW PARAMETERS FOR PACKET-BASED NETWORKS - Embodiments achieve simpler solutions to coexistence problems for wireless network subsystems in a single device. Some embodiments describe systems and methods for determining change in at least one network technology traffic flow, performing mapping functions between network technology-specific parameters of the changed traffic flow and global traffic flow parameters, and prioritizing the at least one changed network technology traffic flow based on the mapped global traffic flow parameters. Further embodiments alternatively describe a mapper for performing mapping between at least one network technology-specific parameter of a network technology subsystem traffic flow and at least one global traffic flow parameter. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090046597 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING AND ACCESSING METADATA IN MEDIA FILE FORMAT - Provided are a method and apparatus for generating and accessing metadata in a media file format. The method of generating metadata in a media file format includes generating a time-track map composed of a plurality of map nodes that are distinguished according to track and unit time, and generating media objects corresponding to each of the map nodes, in which each of the map nodes includes position information of the corresponding media objects, thereby facilitating real-time reproduction and modification of content. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046598 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING OR DISTRIBUTING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONE OR MORE ALTERNATE AD HOC SERVICE PROVIDERS - An ad hoc service provider includes a processing system configured to receive information regarding a second ad hoc service provider. The information includes service information of the second ad hoc service provider. The processing system is further configured to support transmission of the information to a server. The processing system is also configured to support an access point to a network for a mobile client. A method is also provided for acquiring or distributing information related to one or more alternate ad hoc service providers. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046599 | INTEGRATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD FOR INTEGRATING A NETWORK NODE INTO A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments of integration apparatus, communication network and method for integrating a network node into a communication network can be provided. For example, an integration apparatus for integrating a network node into a communication network may include a monitoring device, a policy device, an identifying manager device, a linking manager device, a commissioning manager device. The monitoring device can be configured to detect activating of the network node within the communication network. The identifying manager device can be configured to identify the activated network node. Furthermore, the identifying manager device may be further configured to receive a policy from the policy device. Such exemplary policy may be configured to facilitate an integration of the identified network node into the communication network. The linking manager device can be configured to establish a link between the network node and at least the integration apparatus. Further, the commissioning manager device can be configured to use the link to configure the network node in accordance with the policy. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046600 | PORTABLE NETWORKING INTERFACE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTED SWITCHING SYSTEM - An apparatus and method to provide a portable networking interface for distributed switching systems. Two Application Program Interfaces (APIs) are defined for communication to a Forwarding Database Distribution Library (FDDL). The FDDL sits between network client applications and the switch device driver in order to provide a uniform interface to the switch device driver. Towers may be added to the FDDL to provide additional functionality specific to certain client applications. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090052344 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless communication method in a wireless communication apparatus, which can exchange data with another wireless communication apparatus via a wireless communication, searches for another wireless communication apparatus, and determines a function of the other wireless communication apparatus. The method selects a communication route required to wirelessly communicate with the other wireless communication apparatus in accordance with the function of the other wireless communication apparatus, and communicates data to the other wireless communication apparatus in accordance with the selected communication route. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052345 | Method and Apparatus for an Adapter in a Network Device to Discover its Adapter Name in a Network System - A network system supports multiple network communication protocols. In one embodiment, network device driver software provides a “Fibre Channel over Ethernet” communication capability and methodology. Device driver software manages a Fibre Channel to Ethernet and Ethernet to Fibre Channel address translation in real time for data packet communications in the network system. Different embodiments of the disclosed network system include multiple name servers and network device driver software that together provide multiple adapter name discovery methodologies. In one embodiment, the adapter name discovery methodologies include port name discovery and adapter attributes discovery. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052346 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling an Adapter in a Network Device to Discover the Name of Another Adapter of Another Network Device in a Network System - A network system supports multiple network communication protocols. In one embodiment, network device driver software provides a “Fibre Channel over Ethernet” communication capability and methodology. Device driver software manages a Fibre Channel to Ethernet and Ethernet to Fibre Channel address translation in real time for data packet communications in the network system. Different embodiments of the disclosed network system include multiple name servers and network device driver software that together provide multiple adapter name discovery methodologies. In one embodiment, the adapter name discovery methodologies include port name discovery and adapter attributes discovery. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052347 | NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE NODE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A neighbor discovery method and apparatus for performing network-transparent neighbor discovery in a heterogeneous network environment is provided. A neighbor discovery method for a multi-mode mobile node includes determining a type of a network, with which a mobile node is in communication, in response to a detection of a request for sending a neighbor solicitation message, retrieving, if the network type identifies a self-processing network, information about the network from a database, determining whether a tentative address contained in the neighbor solicitation message is already in use by another node with reference to the information about the network, and generating, when the tentative address is already in use, a neighbor advertisement message. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052348 | Information processing apparatus, information processing system, and program product - A disclosed image processing apparatus performs non-contact communication with a mobile terminal, and includes a first communication unit and a second communication unit having different communication areas from one another, and a processing unit. When the mobile terminal is within the communication area of the first communication unit, the first communication unit receives, from the mobile terminal, setting information for establishing communication between the mobile terminal and the second communication unit, and function information indicating a function for processing substantial information including a document and/or an image to be received/transmitted by the second communication unit. The second communication unit establishes communication with the mobile terminal based on the setting information received by the first communication unit, and receives from or transmits to the mobile terminal, the substantial information. The processing unit processes the substantial information with the function corresponding to the function information received by the first communication unit. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052349 | Node device, recording medium where storage control program is recorded, and information storing method - In a node device included in an information communication system which has a plurality of node devices capable of performing communication with each other via a network, common information shared by the plurality of node devices is stored so as to be spread to the plurality of node devices. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090059813 | INTEGRATION OF EXTERNAL LOCATION ENGINE USING SWITCH - An RF switch is provided. The RF switch includes a processor adapted for communication with an external location engine. The processor is configured to receive notification regarding a status of a wireless asset, receive a plurality of input variables associated with the wireless asset, determine whether the wireless asset is associated with the external location engine, and if the wireless asset is associated with the external location engine, query the external location engine for location data associated with the wireless asset. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059814 | Configuring and Optimizing a Wireless Mesh Network - An interactive software-based network design tool that may be used to simulate and view the operation of a wireless mesh device network used in a process plant, such as a wireless HART device network, allows a user to create a model of a wireless network, input several design requirements, and automatically generate and view communication routes and schedules for the wireless network. The network design tool provides an interactive graphic interface for the addition, removal, and positioning of nodes and devices within the wireless network and a menu including several interactive screens for specifying threshold values, network topology selections, routing preferences, and other configuration parameters related to generating and optimizing communication routes and schedules within the wireless mesh network. The network design tool automatically applies a set of optimization rules along with the parameters input by user to the network model in order to generate efficient network configuration data. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059815 | Self- organizing multi-channel mesh network - A system for self-organizing and auto-configuring mesh networks is disclosed. Special nodes (deemed special for their topological significance) are used as a starting point for forming clusters of fully connected nodes. Here, all nodes can communicate directly with one another and links are scheduled to meet the traffic requirements as indicated by their individual configuration and topological positions. Links that do not interfere with each other are scheduled to operate concurrently, thereby increasing the bandwidth offered by the whole system. When there is change to the system, such as leaving or introduction of a node, the system will adjust with minimum impact on its operation. Once all of the clusters are formed in a system, the clusters are now capable of inter-cluster communications with an increase in bandwidth for such communications. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090067342 | H.248.1 Topology Descriptor - A new H.248.1 topology descriptor (T | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067343 | Method for the synthesis of optimal asynchronous on-chip communication networks from system-level constraints - The invention provides chip designers a means to take advantage of ANoC interconnect, the combination of the two technologies, asynchronous circuits and Network on Chip (ANoC), enabling them to design large chips more easily and quickly than before. The designer develops a table of interconnect requirements, specifying the desired connections and certain constraints such as area, power, and latency. The invention develops a connectivity network utilizing a library of characterized components, then optimizes the network by selecting various alternative components from the library and examining alternative link width combinations. The optimized network is verified against the predetermined requirements. If the verification is successful a fabric file is provided. If the verification is not successful the optimization process is repeated provided some improvement has been made. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067344 | System, apparatus, and method for assigning node addresses in a wireless network - A significant label is associated with at least one node of a wireless network through the use of a handheld wireless transceiver. A user passes the transceiver near a network node, causing the transceiver to read the unique address of the node. The user then enters a label holding significance into the transceiver, which associates the label with the unique address. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067345 | RADIO TERMINAL, RADIO SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A radio terminal managing slave terminals and forming a network together with the slave terminals, includes unit receiving, from a slave terminal, one of a secession request packet and a join request packet, first storage unit storing first identifiers of the slave terminals, second storage unit storing second identifiers to be assigned to the slave terminals and reception channels for the slave terminals, unit determining whether the reception channels assigned to the slave terminals are unevenly distributed after the slave terminal secedes from or joins the network, unit reassigning, when the determination unit determines that the reception channels are unevenly distributed, at least one of the first identifiers to at least one of the slave terminals not to unevenly distribute the reception channels and update the first storage unit, and unit transmitting the at least one of the first identifiers to the at least one of the slave terminals. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067346 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ENTRY OF PORTABLE INTERNET TERMINAL, AND PORTABLE INTERNET TERMINAL - Disclosed is controlling entry of a portable internet terminal into a network, in which provided is a method and a system for processing a network entry request received from a portable internet terminal, and then controlling a network entry operation of the portable internet terminal, and is the portable internet terminal. The method includes the steps of: receiving an network entry request for entry into a portable internet network from the portable internet terminal; determining if the portable internet terminal can enter the portable internet network in response to the network entry request; and generating a network entry restriction message according to an entry restriction type in a case where the portable internet terminal cannot entry the portable internet network as a result of the determining, and transmitting the network entry restriction message to the portable internet terminal to be set a network entry operation rule by the portable internet terminal. The overall configuration of network entry control that is not being defined in portable internet standards is proposed, and load of all portable internet system can be reduced since a continuous entry attempt of a portable internet terminal corresponding to a network entry restriction type is prevented. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090073894 | System and Method for Multicast Transmission - A system and method for multicast transmission are disclosed. In one embodiment, a virtual exchange network including interconnected nodes is embedded within a network. A sender is disposed in communication with a root node and receivers are disposed in communication with a set of edge nodes. The sender publishes a packetized data stream to which the receivers subscribe. The packetized data stream is promulgated by implicit signaling through optimum virtual exchange network connections from the sender through the virtual exchange network to the receivers. The interconnected nodes, responsive to receiving the published packetized data stream, are adapted to multicast N instances of the published packetized data stream to N recipients selected from the group consisting of receivers and other of the interconnected nodes. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090080343 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MAINTAINING DIVERSITY FOR TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICES - Diversity among telecommunications circuits is maintained by analyzing factors including whether synchronization leads are shared by diverse circuits, whether violations of diversity are brought about by new orders that have been placed, and whether improper personnel have been assigned to monitor diverse circuits. Diversity is further maintained by reporting within a graphical user interface those circuits that are subject to diversity and reporting violations of diversity that exist for those circuits. The graphical user interface may provide various controls for dictating which violations are displayed for which circuits. Additionally, diversity is maintained by providing search options that allow the circuits subject to diversity to be narrowed depending upon user-specified criteria. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080344 | Method for Configuring 1:N Overlay Multicast Network of Multicast Agent in Wireless LAN Environment and Multicast Agent Therefor - A method of configuring a multicast agent and a 1:N overlay multicast network considering a wireless local area network (WLAN) environment of the same are provided. The method includes: a session manger generating a first database with entries of multicast agents subscribing to a session and multicast agents that have applied for subscription to a session but have not been confirmed for normal operation; a multicast agent generating a second database with entries of a path from the root of a tree to which the multicast agent belongs, a hierarchical relation in the tree, the list of probed neighboring nodes, and a list of not-probed neighboring nodes; the multicast agent subscribing to the overlay network; obtaining information on neighboring multicast agents; setting a multicast agent which is determined to be optimal based on the obtained information, as a parent node; and if a multicast agent providing a tree improved from the current tree is found, changing the parent node. According to the method, multicast communication can be easily introduced into a wireless environment without particular modification of existing Internet router equipment. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090086652 | MODEL AND METHOD FOR COMPUTING PERFORMANCE BOUNDS IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORKS - Disclosed is a general model and method for computing performance bounds in multi-hop wireless networks. Rather than focusing on computing asymptotic performance bounds under assumptions of homogeneity or randomness in the network topology and/or workload, the present invention accommodates any given network, technology, interference model, routing paradigm, and workload. Using a conflict graph to formally characterize the impact of wireless interference on the performance of multi-hop wireless networks, methods for computing upper and lower bounds on the capacity of a given wireless network are detailed. Besides computing network capacity, the model and method disclosed can also enable or benefit other applications including maximizing fairness and minimizing maximum link utilization. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090092060 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus functioning as a master device denies participation by new communication apparatuses in a network in communication parameter configuration mode based on participation statuses of communication apparatuses functioning as slave devices in the network. The communication apparatus functioning as a master device establishes the network in communication parameter configuration mode between the communication apparatuses participating in the network, and configures communication parameters. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092061 | Assignment of a serving entity in a communication system - The present invention relates to assigning an S-CSCF to an un-registered user in an IMS network. A HSS maintains information about a registration state of users and about assignments of S-CSCF to the users. HSS determines if S-CSCFs are available to serve the users. When receiving a request associated with a user and requesting address of an S-CSCF assigned to the user, assignment of the S-CSCF for the user is removed from HSS if the S-CSCF has been determined not to be available and if the registration state of the user indicates that the user is not registered. The HSS may transmit Server Capabilities to an I-CSCF to enable the I-CSCF to re-select new S-CSCF to serve the user. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092062 | CRITICAL RESOURCE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM AND INTERFACE DEVICE - A system and device that communicates critical resource information is described. The resource notification system comprises a resource distributor, a resource notification server, and a networked interface device. The resource distributor generates a demand response action that is associated with a particular resource. The resource distributor is also communicatively coupled to a wide area network. The resource notification server, which is also communicatively coupled to the wide area network, receives and processes the demand response action and generates a demand response event signal that is communicated to a customer list. The networked interface device comprises at least one indicator. The networked interface device receives the demand response event signal that triggers at least one indicator corresponding to the demand response action generated by the resource distributor, wherein the indicator provides a real-time indication that corresponds to the usage of the particular resource. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090097414 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF PROVIDING LOCATION INFORMATION THEREIN - A communication device, computer program product and method of providing location information therein are disclosed. The communication device includes a wireless communication unit configured to receive location information concerning the communication device, a display, a memory and a controller operatively connected to the wireless communication unit, the display and the memory, the controller configured to periodically store, in the memory, a current location and a current time of the communication device and generate a movement history of the communication device using the periodically stored current location and current time. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097415 | WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE AND SUPPORT FOR PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS - A wireless communication system for use in a process environment uses mesh and possibly a combination of mesh and point-to-point communications to produce a wireless communication network that can be easily set up, configured, changed and monitored, thereby making a wireless communication network that is less expensive, and more robust and reliable. The wireless communication system allows virtual communication paths to be established and used within the process control system in a manner that is independent of the manner in which the wireless signals are sent between different wireless transmitting and receiving devices within the process plant, to thereby operate in a manner that is independent of the specific messages or virtual communication paths within the process plant. Still further, communication analysis tools are provided to enable a user or operator to view the operation of the wireless communication network to thereby analyze the ongoing operation of the wireless communications within the wireless communication network. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097416 | Method and System for Addressing and Routing in Coded Communications Relationships - The invention relates to a method and system for addressing and routing in coded communications relationships in at least two different network levels of a network with different routing levels, which are separated from one another. A first network level with the associated first routing level is demarcated from a second network level with a second routing level via at least one coding device. A network topology of both network levels is determined independently of one another in the at least two routing levels and stored respectively in routing tables. An interface in the at least one coding device is provided with an unambiguous allocation of addresses of the second routing level to addresses of the first routing level, in order to derive the topology of the second network level efficiently from the first network level. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090103451 | Method and system for topology discovery in an SIP network - A method for discovering topology in an SIP network is disclosed. According to the method, the SIP network is divided into domains governed by corresponding SIP proxies. A management system creates a topology agent for each SIP-domain and registers it with the governor proxy of each SIP-domain. Each topology agent generates topology-exploring messages to other agent and accumulates topology-exploring messages from other agents, gather routing information of the SIP network based on the collected topology-exploring messages to deduce topology of the SIP network. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103452 | AD-HOC SECURE COMMUNICATION NETWORKING BASED ON FORMATION FLIGHT TECHNOLOGY - An ad-hoc secure communication network and methods of communicating with a fleet of vehicles using the ad-hoc communication network is provided. The method includes communicating relatively long range communication signals to a fleet router. The fleet router is a select one of the vehicles in the fleet. The method further includes forming an ad-hoc communication network between the fleet vehicles to communicate relatively short range communication signals between the vehicles in the fleet. Wherein each vehicle in the fleet uses surveillance information to determine the network topology and each vehicle routes messages based on the discovered network topology. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103453 | Network Planning and Optimization of Equipment Deployment - Embodiments of the present invention provide systems, devices and methods for improving the efficient deployment and configuration of networking equipment within a network build-out. In certain embodiments of the invention, an iterative analysis of inter-node equipment placement and connectivity, and inter- and intra-node traffic flow is performed to identify a preferred deployment solution. This analysis of deployment optimization takes into account both configurations from a network node perspective as well as from a network system perspective. Deployment solutions are iteratively progressed and analyzed to determine a preferred solution based on both the cost of deployment and satisfaction of the network demands. In various embodiments of the invention, a baseline marker is generated from which the accuracy of the solution may be approximated that suggests to an engineer whether the deployment is approaching an optimal solution. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103454 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ASSURING COMMUNICATION QUALITY OF PACKET FLOW - A base station or packet control apparatus, constituting a wireless access network system to be connected to an IP network via a node apparatus, includes a QoS authorization and admission control function for verifying a first communication quality request received from a wireless mobile station based on communication quality level information assured previously to the wireless mobile station, converting the request into a second communication quality request assured to the wireless mobile station, and converting the second communication quality request into a third communication quality request acceptable to communication resources of the wireless access network, and a QoS admission control function for converting, when a second or third communication quality request is received from another node apparatus connected to another wireless access network on account of handover of a wireless mobile station between node apparatuses, the received communication quality request into a communication quality request acceptable to the communication resources. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103455 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILITY SUPPORT AND IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYTEM (IMS) REGISTRATION IN A MULTIMODE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Described aspects provide for improving the mobility of wireless communication devices between one network domain and another network domain, specifically, but not limited to, between a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and a cellular network and the like. Present aspects provide for services to be moved seamlessly and in a reliable manner between the cellular and WLAN domains in order to minimize service disruption for the end user and provide the requisite Quality of Service (QoS) for the different applications. The aspects herein presented provide for various mechanisms that serve to improve the decision points related to when and what technology each service is expected to be associated with and provides better techniques to move the wireless communication device between cellular and WLAN domains when in-traffic and when idle. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103456 | PROTOCOL FOR RELIABLE, SELF-ORGANIZING, LOW-POWER WIRELESS NETWORK FOR SECURITY AND BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS - A method to wirelessly network a sensor/actuator node is described. The sensor/actuator node is installed in a sensor/actuator node network and arranged in a hierarchical manner with a plurality of node levels and a cluster head network. A unique node identifier is assigned to the sensor node and the sensor node network is initialized. The sensor node is woken-up to perform a task and then set to an active low power mode. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090109868 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK TOPOLOGY DETERMINATION - A communication network topology is determined by evaluating costs of states each representing a possible assignment of hubs and remote nodes to nodes of the communication network. The hubs connect to a central network, the remote nodes connect wirelessly to the hubs and obtain connectivity to the central network through the hubs. The cost of each state is determined based on costs for configuring each node as a hub or a remote node, uplink frequencies for sending data from the remote nodes to corresponding hubs, and downlink frequencies for sending data from the hubs to corresponding remote nodes. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109869 | CIRCUIT BUNDLE FOR RESILIENCY/PROTECTION OF CIRCUITS - A device having circuit bundles and a method of configuring the network device to provide resiliency and protection for network circuits. A circuit bundle provides the ability to group multiple circuits of the same type for resiliency/protection. There is an active virtual circuit that is selected based on a user configured priority value defining priority for carrying circuit traffic. When the active virtual circuit fails, alternative virtual circuits are selected to carry the circuit traffic, again based on user configured priority. Virtual circuits included in the circuit bundle can have different destinations, and include at least multipoint virtual circuits. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109870 | METHOD FOR INTELLIGENT MERGING OF AD HOC NETWORK PARTITIONS - A method for merging of ad hoc network partitions within an ad hoc network, the method includes forming a plurality of network partitions by forming a security association among each of a group of partitioned nodes. Each network partition includes a Network Identifier. A node operating within one of the network partitions receives an update message from another node, compares its current Network Identifier to the received Network Identifier; and determines whether to update to the received Network Identifier using an arbitration method when the received Network Identifier is different from the current Network Identifier. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109871 | CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - Techniques for configuring wireless communications devices are disclosed. For instance, an apparatus may include a storage medium to store one or more configuration files, and a configuration module. Each of the one or more configuration files may correspond to a network carrier. The configuration module selects one of the configuration files and to extract one or more operational parameters from it. This selected configuration file and the one or more operational parameters correspond to a designated network carrier. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109872 | Method and an apparatus for analyzing a communication network - The invention provides a novel method and apparatus for analyzing a communication network such as a computer network or a social network comprising nodes communicating with each other by means of messages. A topic discovery unit is provided for performing a topic discovery on the basis of a message content which can be formed by textual content. A segmentation unit performs a segmentation of a global network graph representing the communication network into topic sub-graphs depending on the discovered topics. A property calculation unit calculates intra-topic network properties and inter-topic network properties of the network nodes. An advantage is that a deeper understanding of the analyzed communication network can be achieved such as communications patterns to identify roles of participating nodes. The method and apparatus according to the present invention can be used to optimize the organization of any communication network. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109873 | Selective Rank CQI and PMI Feedback in Wireless Networks - Within a wireless network, feedback information is used to determine channel quality. A node in the network receives a configuration message indicating at least a first type of feedback information and a subset S | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109874 | IDENTIFYING NODES IN A NETWORK - A method of secure mutual identification of nodes (N | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109875 | Network Topology Management System, Management Apparatus, Management Method, Management Program, and Storage Media That Records Management Program - A network topology management system includes information processing units, storage units, connection units that control connection switching between the information processing units and the storage units, a management unit that manages a network topology consisting of the information processing units, the storage units and the connection units, and an emulator connected to the connection units and to the management unit the network. The emulator comprises a conversion section that converts first equipment identification information that identifies the information processing units or the storage units into second equipment identification information that is recognizable by the management unit to identify the information processing units or the storage units, and a transmitting section that sends the second equipment identification information to the management unit. The management device has a control section that manages the network topology based on the second equipment identification information. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090116403 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT - A method and computer program product for managing communications with a user include defining one or more communication profiles for a user, in which defining the one or more communication profiles includes defining one or more communication channels for the user, and defining a preferred communication schedule for each of the one or more communication channels. The preferred communication schedule is associated with a respective one of the one or more communication channels. Communications with the user by a contacting user are managed based upon, at least in part, the one or more communication profiles for the user. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116404 | TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A Next Generation Network (NGN) resource management system and method includes a network topology discovery mechanism at the scale of an administrative domain. Information about nodes and links, such as bandwidth, delay, jitter, name and description of devices is collected and stored in a database by way of a protocol. The protocol is notifications-based, which involves each node device (e.g., a switch, router etc.) notifying its presence to its neighboring node. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116405 | Redundant Automation Data Communications Network - The object of the invention is an automation data communications network ( | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116406 | Node device, memory medium saving computer program, information delivery system, and network participation method - A node device to participate in an overlay network formed by all or a part of a plurality of node devices, mutually connected through a communication network, including:
| 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116407 | Wireless network construction system - A wireless network construction system includes: first wireless nodes being previously installed in a wireless network; a wireless node installation support terminal carried in a location capable of conducting wireless communication, the wireless node installation support terminal serving as a wireless node being previously installed in the wireless network; and a second wireless node being newly installed in the wireless network and adjacent to the wireless node installation support terminal. The second wireless node performs a procedure of participation in the wireless network via the wireless node installation support terminal using the wireless communication. The wireless node installation support terminal allocates and distributes a network address to the second wireless node upon performing the procedure of participation in the wireless network. The second wireless node performs a path search and establishes a wireless line between the first wireless nodes and the second wireless node. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116408 | DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR RESIDENTIAL AND CUSTODIAL-CARE ENVIRONMENTS, OFFICE AND THE LIKE - The system is based on the arrangement of a plurality of terminals ( | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116409 | Interactive Topology Graphs for Visualization and Characterization of Sonet Consumption Patterns - A computer-based monitoring system provides interactive topology information about a synchronized optical network (SONET). The monitoring system utilizes a trunks integrated record keeping system (TIRKS) connected to the SONET for collecting status data in a raw format. A computer system retrieves the raw format status data from TIRKS and provides the data in a simple graphical user interface to a user. The interface includes several menus from which the user may specify specific components of the SONET, and a graphical output for providing a graphical representation of the SONET. The graphical output illustrates each node and link and interactively provides more detailed information about any user selected link or node. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090122718 | GLOBAL AUTO-CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES CONNECTED TO MULTIPOINT VIRTUAL CONNECTIONS - A method involves receiving information identifying one or more virtual connections (VCs) available within a network and one or more IP subnets. The information is received by the first of several nodes coupled by the network and identifies either (or both) a first VC that is not locally available at the first node and a first IP subnet that is not configured on the first node. Information identifying a global topology of the network is generated, based upon the received information. The global topology includes each of several active VCs within the network and each of several IP subnets configured on the nodes coupled by the network. One of the IP subnets is then assigned to the one of the VCs, based upon the global topology of the network, until all of the IP subnets are assigned, each to a unique VC. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122719 | Detecting Interfering Packet Streams in Packet Networks - A method for estimating the network-layer topology of a telecommunications network is described. In particular, the illustrative embodiment of the present invention estimates the existence and connectivity of nodes in the topology based on the detection of network-wide end-to-end path intersections. This is based on the assumption that pairs of streams of packets that share a common node will interfere and that the interference can be detected in the received streams. In general, this interference is manifested as jitter. By transmitting streams on each pair of end-to-end paths in the network, and detecting interference (or a lack of interference) a matrix of path intersections for the network can be created. Using logic and supposition, the topology of the network can be estimated using the matrix of path intersections. Once the estimate of the topology is complete, the maintenance and operation of the network can proceed based on the topology. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122720 | Estimating Network-Layer Topology Using End-to-End Measurements - A method for estimating the network-layer topology of a telecommunications network is described. In particular, the illustrative embodiment of the present invention estimates the existence and connectivity of nodes in the topology based on the detection of network-wide end-to-end path intersections. This is based on the assumption that pairs of streams of packets that share a common node will interfere and that the interference can be detected in the received streams. In general, this interference is manifested as jitter. By transmitting streams on each pair of end-to-end paths in the network, and detecting interference (or a lack of interference) a matrix of path intersections for the network can be created. Using logic and supposition, the topology of the network can be estimated using the matrix of path intersections. Once the estimate of the topology is complete, the maintenance and operation of the network can proceed based on the topology. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122721 | HYBRID NETWORK DISCOVERY METHOD FOR DETECTING CLIENT APPLICATIONS - A hybrid network discovery method for detecting client applications. The method has the steps of: (a) applying test traffic packets to a network which is to be measured, and analyzing responses so as to check target nodes; (b) transmitting a protocol request packet to each of the checked target nodes; and (c) when the URL of the header of the protocol request packet coincides with a site for a specific application of the target node, extracting the URL and the IP address of the target node. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122722 | Method of connecting and sharing resources of network terminal devices of two private networks via user agents - A method of connecting and sharing resources of network terminal devices of two private networks via user agents is applied in a network system including at least two private networks and an Internet. Each private network includes at least two network terminal devices. At least one network terminal device installs a user agent, and each user agent is connected with the other network terminal device on a private network. Each network terminal device is connected to the Internet through a network connecting device. In the method, the network terminal device can be connected with other network terminal devices on the private network for accessing data, and a connection channel can be established between the network terminal devices on the public network and another private network, and the network terminal devices on the other private network can share the services provided by other network terminal devices on the private network. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090129289 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM FOR CALCULATING ADDRESSING AND BANDWIDTH REQUIREMENTS OF A NETWORK - Apparatuses, methods and computer-readable storage mediums are provided for calculating estimated addressing and bandwidth requirements of a customer domain, such as to facilitate designing the respective domain. A method includes selecting customer premises equipment (CPE) of a domain including a plurality of CPEs, where each CPE includes one or more devices, and one of the one or more devices include an interface with which the domain communicates with the respective CPE. The method also includes determining if the interface of the selected CPE comprises a router, and calculating an addressing requirement of the selected CPE, where the addressing requirement includes a number of device addresses for the selected CPE. The method may additionally or alternatively include analyzing traffic patterns of the selected CPE with respect to one or more other CPEs, and based on the analysis, calculating a bandwidth requirement of the selected CPE. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129290 | Method for acquiring information of network resources connected to ports of network switches - Provided is a method for acquiring information of network resources connected to ports of network switches. The method includes the steps of: acquiring network resource information including IP address, MAC address, computer name, and workgroup name of the network resources in a network including one or more network switches and a plurality of network resources connected to the switches; acquiring information of the ports of the switches and MAC address information of the network resources connected to ports of the switches; and matching the port-based resource information on the basis of the acquired network resource information and the acquired MAC address information of the network resource information based on the ports of the switches. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129291 | CONFIGURING AN IDENTIFIER FOR AN ACCESS POINT - An access point is configured based on acquired information. An access point may be configured based on the configuration(s) of at least one other access point. An identifier to be transmitted by an access point may be selected based on the identifier(s) transmitted by at least one other access point. An access point may configure itself with assistance from a configuration server. For example, the access point may send information such as the location of the access point to a configuration server and the configuration server may respond with a list of neighboring access points for that access point. A configuration server may provide configuration information to an access point based on the location of the access point. A configuration server also may direct an access point to a different configuration server. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129292 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING AND CALLING A FUNCTION OF A SERVICE WITH RESPECT TO A SUBSCRIBER AND SERVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EMPLOYING THE SAME - Various systems and methods for identifying and calling functions to perform various tasks. One aspect provides a method of exposing a set of device-specific functions associated with a subscriber. In one embodiment, the method includes: (1) identifying service descriptions associated with the subscriber, (2) mapping end points associated with the subscriber to roles in at least one of the service descriptions and (3) collecting at least one function associated with the at least one role in the at least one of the service descriptions. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090135736 | Method of connecting network terminal devices of a private network by using a hand-held electronic device - The present invention is to provide a method applied to a network system which comprises a private network having at least a computer and at least two network terminal devices connecting to the Internet, and said computer is installed with a Fat UA while said hand-held electronic device is installed with a Thin User Agent enabling said hand-held electronic device to send a control command to said computer through the Internet. After said control command is received, said Fat UA encapsulates said control command in two SIP packets for connection request and connection response and send them to said two network terminal devices respectively. And after said SIP packets are received, said network terminal devices will send the SIP packets with each other so as to automatically establish a tunnel and proceed mutual data access therebetween according to said control command encapsulated in said SIP packets. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135737 | Method and Apparatus For Remote Monitoring of FEMTO Radio Base Stations - The present invention describes a method for operation and maintenance of Access Points in a wireless communications network, and a network node and an access point for use in such a network. Access points are used for connecting wireless networks to core networks. The method comprises the step of first receiving, at a network node, an on-demand triggered request for status information, wherein the request includes an access point identity. The network node investigates, using the received access point identity, if the access point is registered within the network. If the access point is registered within the network, then as a first following step, the network node uses the access point identity to retrieving access point address information from storing means. In a second following step, the network node uses the retrieved address information to establish a connection to the access point. Thereafter the network node receives access point status information. As a last step, a response including the access point status information is sent to an end user. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090141651 | DETERMINING AN OPTIMAL ROUTE ADVERTISEMENT IN A REACTIVE ROUTING ENVIRONMENT - In an example embodiment, a method is provided. In this method, a network address query is received. A first network address of a known apparatus is retrieved from a routing table, in response to the network address query. A second network address may be determined based upon the network address query, the second network address having a smaller bit length than the first network address. An aggregate value may be advertised that represents a range of reachable network addresses, the range of reachable network addresses including the second network address. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141652 | Methods for Spreading or Preventing Spreading of Information In a Network - A method for improved spreading of information in a network is described, together with corresponding methods with the opposite aim, namely to hinder the spreading of harmful information in a network. The harmful information may be (for example) a data virus. The first method includes as its characterizing feature to connect at least one node of high Eigenvector Centrality Index in a first region with at least one node of high Eigenvector Centrality Index in a second region. These connections may be made using direct links, or with the help of a new node lying between the nodes to be connected. One method for preventing spreading of information or physical traffic in a network may include as its characterizing feature to inoculate at least one centre node by blocking any transmission of unwanted information on all links in/out of said centre node. Another method for preventing spreading of information or physical traffic may be to inoculate all nodes in a ring of nodes surrounding a centre node by blocking any transmission of unwanted information on all links in/out of said nodes. Still another method may be to inoculate at least one bridge link connecting two regions by blocking any transmission of unwanted information on said link. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141653 | Enhancement of node connectivity in a wireless communications network with changing topology via adaptive role changing - A process and system for enhancing connectivity among nodes of a wireless communications network by adapting to changes in the network topology. Nodes of the network are configured to operate according to either (i) an ad hoc protocol wherein a given node assumes a role of a mesh node capable of connecting with other like-configured nodes, or (ii) a point-to-multipoint protocol wherein the given node assumes a role of a either base station, or a subscriber station being served by another node which is assuming the role of a base station. A determination is made as to whether each node should operate according to the ad hoc protocol or the point-to-multipoint protocol, in order to maintain an optimum state of connectivity among all nodes of the network. The determined operating protocol is then implemented for each node. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141654 | Multi-Processor architecture for a device - Aspects of the invention provide apparatuses and methods for composing a device with different types of multi-processor subsystems based on expected latency times and processing bandwidths. An apparatus may include multi-processor subsystems with different performance characteristics that interact with each other through bridge modules and a central packet network. Different types of multi-processor subsystems include a multi-point bus network, a circuit-switched network, a packet-switch network, and a shared block device. The apparatus includes a plurality of components, where each component has at least one multi-processor subsystem. The apparatus may be partitioned into different detachable parts, which can operate in an independent manner. The detachable parts may be joined so that the detachable parts can interact. A service in one multi-processor subsystem may interact with another service in another multi-processor subsystem by sending messages between the services. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141655 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING HEAD END CABLE MODEM IN CABLE NETWORK - Disclosed are a system and method for monitoring a headend cable modem on a digital cable network, which may monitor a headend cable modem using a configuration management message capable of controlling the headend cable modem. The system includes a message header unit for monitoring the headend cable modem by exchanging a configuration management message including configuration information for controlling channel boding of the headend cable modem and state information of the configuration information with the headend cable modem; and a message varying unit including the configuration information corresponding to the message type information and the state information. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141656 | BANDWIDTH RESERVATION REUSE IN DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATED RING PROTECTION AND RESTORATION TECHNIQUE - The disclosed network includes two rings, wherein a first ring transmits data in a clockwise direction, and the other ring transmits data in a counterclockwise direction. The traffic is removed from the ring by the destination node. During normal operations (i.e., all spans operational), data between nodes can flow on either ring. Thus, both rings are fully utilized during normal operations. The nodes periodically test the bit error rate of the links (or the error rate is constantly calculated) to detect a fault in one of the links. The detection of such a fault sends a broadcast signal to all nodes to reconfigure a routing table within the node so as to identify the optimum routing of source traffic to the destination node after the fault. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141657 | FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH THAT ENABLES END DEVICES IN DIFFERENT FABRICS TO COMMUNICATE WITH ONE ANOTHER WHILE RETAINING THEIR UNIQUE FIBRE CHANNEL DOMAIN_IDs - A Fibre Channel Switch which enables end devices in different Fabrics to communicate with one another while retaining their unique Fibre Channel Domain_IDs. The Switch is coupled to a first fabric having a first set of end devices and a second fabric having a second set of end devices. The Switch is configured to enable communication by the first set of end devices associated with the first fabric with the second set of end devices associated with the second set of end devices using the unique Domain_IDs of each of the first set and the second set of end devices. In one embodiment of the invention, the first and second fabrics are first and second Virtual Storage Array Networks (VSANs) respectively. In an alternative embodiment, the first fabric and the second fabric are separate physical fabrics. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090147697 | ASSOCIATING A WIRELESS COMPUTING DEVICE WITH A DIFFERENT ACCESS POINT - In a network comprising a wireless computing device and a wireless switch coupled to a plurality of access points, techniques are provided for determining a particular one of access points that the wireless computing device is to be associated with and associating the wireless computing device therewith. According to one implementation, the wireless switch monitors one or more wireless communication performance metrics, and determines based on the wireless communication performance metrics, whether the wireless computing device is currently associated with the one of the access points that wireless computing device is to be associated with. If not, then the wireless switch transmits an instruction to the wireless computing device to associate with a particular access point that wireless computing device is to be associated with. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147698 | NETWORK AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY METHOD AND SYSTEM - An automatic network discovery method and device enables network peer nodes to discover one another. A node entering a network has the burden of initiating a connection to peers potentially existing on the network. The incoming node and potential peer nodes each keep a persistent list of at least one potential peer node called a seed list, which is used at startup or restart to initially populate a peer list also kept by each node. The incoming node sends a connection request to the potential peers in its peer list. Through the connection requests and responses to the requests from the potential peer nodes, nodes exchange connection information regarding one another and other potential peer nodes on the network, which is stored in their respective peer lists. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147699 | METHOD OF SUPPORTING NODE PORTABILITY IN SENSOR NETWORK - Provided is a method of supporting node portability in a sensor network, wherein data transmission to a portable node can be guaranteed since even when the portable node is assigned with a different address by being associated with another network, the newly assigned address is transmitted to a parent node or a sink node that was previously associated with the portable node. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147700 | CONFIGURING A WIRELESS ROUTER - A method for configuring a wireless router includes electronically reading information that is unique to the wireless router. A code is automatically generated from the information. The generated code is automatically set as one or more of a network name and a device password for the wireless router. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147701 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING A NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE - A method of configuring a device forming part of a network infrastructure. The method has the steps of storing outside the network application- and user-specific configuration data for each device, and inputting to the device the respective configuration data. The data can be stored on, for example, a flash drive and transferred to the network device, e.g. a router, switch, or terminal, before or after it is actually put in place and connected into the network. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090154374 | COMMUNICATION OF CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT NOTIFICATIONS IN A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and devices are provided for communicating configuration management notifications from a network element to a network manager in a packet-switched network. The configuration information of the network element is stored at different time instants having a time interval therebetween. Two sets of configuration information are compared in order to determine changes between the two time instants. The changes are then transmitted to the network manager through a communication connection by using a file-based configuration protocol. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154375 | EFFICIENT DETECTION OF RELAY NODE - Whether or not a node is a relay node may be determined by, for each of a plurality of active flows, assigning a random number to the flow, wherein each of the random numbers is drawn from a distribution. Then, for each of a plurality of time slots, any incoming flows to the node and any outgoing flows from the node may be determined, random numbers assigned to any active flow of the incoming flows may be summed to generate a first sum, random numbers assigned to any active outgoing flows may be summed to generating a second sum, and the first sum may be multiplied with the second sum to generate a product associated with the time slot. The products over the plurality of time slots may then be summed to obtain a summed product. This may be repeated, reassigning random values to each of the plurality of flows, thereby obtaining a plurality of summed products. A variance of the plurality of summed products may be determined and compared with a threshold to obtain a comparison result. Whether or not the node is a relay node may then be determined using the comparison result. Execution of a relay node protection policy may be controlled using the determination of whether or not the node is a relay node. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090161575 | Long Term Evolution User Equipment Multi-Packet Data Network Connectivity Control - A system is provided for controlling user equipment connectivity to packet data networks. The system includes a profile maintaining information related to connectivity of the user equipment to one or more packet data networks. The system also includes one or more processors programmed to accept a user selection of one or more of the packet data networks maintained by the profile and to promote connection to the selected packet data networks. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161576 | Methods And Systems For Sending Information To A Zone Included In An Internet Network - Methods and systems are described for sending information to a zone included in an internet network. In one embodiment, zone address information identifying a connected region of topology of a given scope included in an internet network is received. The scope is a topological span within which a network address is usable. A message is generated. The message includes a message header including a destination portion including an outside-scope unicast identifier having a zone identifier based on the zone address information. The destination portion does not include a zone network interface portion specified for identifying a network interface of a zone node included in the identified zone. The message is transmitted for routing based on the zone identifier to a border node having an outside network interface for receiving the message and an inside network interface for routing the message to a service. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161577 | Method and System for De-Sychronizing Link State Message Refreshes - A node having a memory storing a network topology and a routing table. The node also having a processing device programmed to generate a link state message and during the generating of the link state message, set a value of an age field of the link state message to a random value. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161578 | Data routing method and device thereof - A method for routing data through a network of devices is disclosed. Each device using the information provided by immediate neighbors | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161579 | Method, system, and apparatus for implementing network capable input devices - Interaction with network capable input device involves advertising, from a mobile device coupled to an Internet Protocol (IP) network, a user input service via an ad-hoc peer-to-peer protocol of the IP network. The user input service is established with a controlled device via the ad-hoc, peer-to-peer protocol. User input events are detected at the mobile device, and the user input events are provided to the controlled device in accordance with parameters of the established user input service. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161580 | Self-service terminal - A self-service terminal comprises a plurality of devices, each device providing management information. A management agent is installed in the terminal and adapted to monitor the plurality of devices. In the event that management information from a device indicates that there is a fault, the management creates and transmits a notification. A communications stack is adapted to receive the transmitted notification from the management agent. A self-service terminal application is adapted to (i) monitor the communications stack to receive the transmitted notification, (ii) package the notification within a host message conforming to a host messaging format, and (iii) transmit the host message to a remote host via a legacy network. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161581 | ADDRESS AUTOCONFIGURATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IPv6-BASED LOW-POWER WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - An IP address autoconfiguration method and system of an IPv6-based Low Power WPAN for reducing network traffics is applicable for an Internet Protocol (IP) based network including a plurality of devices. The address autoconfiguration method generates and broadcasts, at a first device, a beacon frame containing an adaptive router advertisement (RA) message having prefix information, and configures, at a second device received the beacon frame, an IP address using the prefix information extracted from the adaptive RA message carried by the beacon frame and a physical address of the second device. The system includes a first type device which broadcasts a beacon frame carrying a prefix; at least one second type device which relays the prefix using a beacon frame; and at least one terminal device which configures an IP address using the prefix in the beacon frame and a physical address of the terminal device. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161582 | METHOD FOR INTELLIGENTLY SELECTING WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A method and system for selecting and connecting to an access point in a wireless network of devices, such as a Bluetooth network. Initially, an initiator device is preconfigured with a list of available access point addresses. The initiator device broadcasts an inquiry message that is received by available wireless devices which, in turn, respond with their respective addresses, occupancy level and device classification. The initiator device compares the respondent addresses with the preconfigured access point addresses and connects to a match, thus terminating the inquiry, provided certain fitness functions are satisfied. The fitness functions might include such considerations as occupancy rate, device classification, signal strength, or physical distance of separation. The list of addresses on the initiator device is updated automatically upon connecting with a network server whenever a new device is added or an old one removed from the network server's access point address list. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090168663 | Reducing Configuration of OAM Signalling Data - OAM data is automatically configured by each node of an Ethernet network. The OAM data is required to support an OAM signalling session associated with a connection for carrying data traffic between nodes. The OAM data can be derived from data already associated with all endpoints of the connection. The node can derive the OAM data autonomously. A node which is an endpoint of an OAM signalling session automatically derives an identifier for the first endpoint. The first identifier can be autonomously derived by the node and other signalling content, such as source MAC address, is used to differentiate OAM signalling messages. Alternatively, a node can automatically configure the first identifier on the basis of information stored locally at the node and signalling with a second endpoint. The OAM data can be IEEE 802.1ag or ITU Y.1731 data. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168664 | Performance of ECMP Path Tracing in an MPLS Enabled Network - The preferred embodiments of the present invention are directed to a network tracing engine for tracing and depicting a topology (i.e. a network configuration) of a network using, for example, a network diagram. The network tracing engine preferably queries/telnets to interfaces of routers associated with one or more source-to-destination paths in a network concurrently and independently to ensure proper configuration of the routers and/or to generate a true depiction of a routing configuration without redundantly querying routers. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168665 | Method and System for Network Migration Scheduling - A method of transforming an ordered list of nodes of a network into one of a plurality of elite ordered lists, the ordered list corresponding to a deloading sequence, the deloading sequence including a temporary capacity requirement, each of the elite ordered lists corresponding to an elite deloading sequence including an elite temporary capacity requirement by generating at least one intermediate ordered list corresponding to an intermediate deloading sequence including an intermediate temporary capacity requirement, selecting one of the intermediate ordered list and the ordered list based on a comparison of the intermediate temporary capacity requirement and the temporary capacity requirement and replacing one of the elite ordered lists with the one of the intermediate ordered list and the ordered list if a value corresponding to one of the intermediate temporary capacity requirement and the temporary capacity requirement is less than a lowest value of the elite temporary capacity requirements. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168666 | Implementation of VPNs over a link state protocol controlled Ethernet network - Nodes on a link state protocol controlled Ethernet network implement a link state routing protocol such as IS-IS. Nodes assign an IP address or I-SID value per VRF and then advertise the IP addresses or I-SID values in IS-IS LSAs. When a packet is to be forwarded on the VPN, the ingress node identifies the VRF for the packet and performs an IP lookup in customer address space in the VRF to determine the next hop and the IP address or I-SID value of the VRF on the egress node. The ingress node prepends an I-SID or IP header to identify the VRFs and then creates a MAC header to allow the packet to be forwarded to the egress node on the link state protocol controlled Ethernet network. When the packet is received at the egress node, the MAC header is stripped from the packet and the appended I-SID or IP header is used to identify the egress VRF. A customer address space IP lookup is then performed in the identified VRF on the egress node using the information in the client IP header to determine how to forward the packet. Customer reachability information within a VPN may be exchanged between VRFs using iBGP, or directly by using link state protocol LSAs tagged with the relevant I-SID. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168667 | TIME BASED ACCESS PROVISIONING SYSTEM AND PROCESS - A method and apparatus is provided for the time-based provisioning of wireless devices. A network access point monitors operation of wireless devices within a service region. When provisioning logic is activated at the network access point, the access point determines if the tracked parameter (such as power on or the onset of signal transmission) of the wireless device occurs within a designated time interval from the time of the provisioning activation. If the tracked device qualifies, the network access point proceeds with provisioning the device. In one system embodiment, the network access point tracks the power on time of wireless devices. When a wireless device to be authorized is powered on, the provisioning logic at the network access point notes the power on time. The user then activates the provisioning access at the network access point, and the network access point provisions the wireless device if it is recently powered on. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168668 | Device Managing Apparatus and Program Thereof - A device managing apparatus that can easily communicate under a proper communication configuration, through a network may be provided. A managing apparatus is provided with a storage and a controller (management program). The storage stores multiple different communication configurations. The controller controls the communication with the device. The controller carries out the following processes: (1) repeating a communication trial toward the device using one of stored communication configurations that are stored in the device managing apparatus, in which the communication configuration to be used is changed for each communication trial;. (2) monitoring a response which is sent to the device managing apparatus from the device in a case where the communication trial has succeeded; and (3) displaying a plurality of areas, each of which is linked to each of the stored communication configurations; and displaying a symbol image representing the device in the area that is linked to the communication configuration with which the communication trial has succeeded. By using the device managing apparatus, the user can easily recognize, at a glance of the screen, devices at which the same communication configurations are set. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168669 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING NETWORK RESOURCES AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREOF - A method for distributing network resource is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a service request to a network for requesting that a connection be established between the network and a user equipment, determining whether the network is in a resource limited status, and controlling a time interval for transmitting another service request to the network when the network is in the resource limited status. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168670 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION THEREOF - A wireless sensor network and a method for configuration thereof are includes a plurality of sensor nodes and a sink node. The network configuration method includes collecting location information about the sensor nodes by the sink node, setting the sensor nodes, which have sensing regions include a transmitting region of the sink node, to an active node based on the location information, and configuring a network composed of the active nodes. Dead nodes are detected by the sink node, and inactive nodes are activated to reconfigure the network as needed due to the detected dead nodes. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090175193 | COMMUNICATION PARADIGM SWITCHING BASED ON LINK QUALITY INFORMATION - In an example embodiment, a method is provided that accesses a list of communication preferences. The list identifies a communication paradigm and a different communication paradigm. Link quality information associated with the communication paradigm also is accessed. Based on the link quality information, communication may be switched from the communication paradigm to the different communication paradigm. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175194 | IP SECURITY WITHIN MULTI-TOPOLOGY ROUTING - A method for IP Security within Multi-Topology Routing is disclosed. Disclosed methods may also include IKE extensions. A route eligible for IPSec protection is injected into a topology routing table. Network traffic can then be protected in accordance with a security session, such as an IPSec session, between a first network node and a second network node and forwarded through a selected topology to take advantage of the service-differentiation capabilities of MTR. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175195 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR USING TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETRY SIGNATURES TO MONITOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION LINES - Methods, systems and computer program products for uniquely identifying communication lines in a network via time domain reflectometry (TDR) signatures are provided. A pulsed signal is sent into a communication line through a patch panel connector port and a reflection of the pulsed signal through the patch panel connector port is received to obtain a TDR signature for each communication line. The pulsed signal is sent and received by a controller operatively associated with the patch panel and/or by a network switch in communication with the patch panel. Connection changes and/or communication line faults at a network patch panel are detected by comparing current and stored TDR signatures. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175196 | Process integrated mechanism program, apparatus and method - In a distributed computer system with a number of nodes, a process integrated mechanism includes a coordinating process device for controlling a single node at any instant of time. A run time controller executes the coordinating process device through a transfer cycle where the transfer cycle includes an amount of time the coordinating process device is resident on a single node plus an amount of time required to transfer the coordinating process device between one node and another node such that the coordinating process device is unaware of its movement from one node to another node and such that the total time for the transfer cycle, from the perspective of each node, is fast enough to control each node. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175197 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTION OF NAT DEVICES IN A NETWORK - Disclosed is a device, system and method for detecting a Network Address Translation (“NAT”) gateway on a network. According to some embodiments of the present invention a detector including a network communication module may transmit one or more interrogation packets to a suspected NAT gateway. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175198 | NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM - Generally described, the present invention is directed to a network operating system that provides more effective ways of leveraging the connectivity of computer networks. In one embodiment, an XML virtual machine is implemented that accepts high-level application code written in an XML programming language as input. Functionality is provided to interpret or translate the application code written in an XML programming language into code that is suitable for execution across computer platforms. Moreover, the XML virtual machine supports the Model View Controller (MVC) design paradigm that facilitates true data abstraction from applications to a common data model. Multi-instance applications, with each instance potentially supporting multiple views, may be created and executed. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175199 | Arrangement and Method of Configuring Digital Subscriber Lines - An arrangement, method, and node for configuring subscriber lines in a digital access network. A configuration tool downloads configuration parameters from the network into the access nodes, which configure the subscriber lines according to the configuration parameters. An automated monitoring tool monitors performance parameters for the subscriber lines. The monitoring tool compares a value of a first monitored performance parameter on each subscriber line with a predefined threshold value, and based on a result of the comparison, either changes a value of a first configuration parameter or repeats the monitoring of the first performance parameter. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175200 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, DEVICE INFORMATION DISPLAY METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus includes an obtaining unit configured to obtain pieces of identification information sent from devices mutually connected via a network, a determination unit configured to determine, in a case where the pieces of identification information which are obtained by the obtaining unit and sent by using mutually different protocols are identical with each other, that the devices which send the pieces of identification information are identical with each other, and a display unit configured to integrate information related to the devices determined to be identical with each other by the determination unit and display the information on a display apparatus. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175201 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING LINK PARAMETER THRESHOLDS - A method and apparatus for configuring link parameter thresholds are provided. The method includes the following steps. An upper layer sends link parameter thresholds corresponding to different traffic types of a link type to an intermediate layer through a first threshold configuration request ( | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090180396 | Determining associations in a mesh network - Determining associations in wireless mesh networks are provided. In a mesh network that includes a wired border node and multiple wireless nodes, each wireless node advertises a backhaul throughput approximating the throughput between that wireless node and the wired border node. Using the advertised backhaul throughput information and the stored local throughput information, a receiving node determines a node association from among various candidate nodes. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180397 | Homing of User Nodes to Network Nodes in a Communication System - User nodes are homed to network nodes in an IMS network or other communication system by determining a function hierarchy for functions provided by the network nodes. Starting with a function at an initial level of the function hierarchy, a predetermined criterion such as throughput-weighted distance is applied to assign a given user node to a particular network node providing that function. The homing process then proceeds through one or more additional levels of the function hierarchy to assign the given user node to at least one additional network node providing at least one other function identified in the additional level(s) of the function hierarchy. These operations are repeated for one or more additional user nodes until each of the user nodes is homed to one or more of the network nodes providing all of its required functions. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180398 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING INTERACTION BETWEEN THE SERVICES PROVIDED BY RESPECTIVE NETWORKED DEVICES - A method to facilitate interaction between the services provided by respective networked devices. The method includes receiving service capabilities associated with a source device which has joined a first network, and receiving a service application at a presentation device. The service application is associated with at least one service identified by the service capabilities associated with the source device. The method further includes presenting a service associated with the source device on the presentation device utilizing the service application. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180399 | METHOD AND NODE DEVICE FOR REALIZING THE NETWORK TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY - Method for realizing the network topology discovery, which relates to the field of internet technique, includes: receiving the network topology inquiring command from the previous node, the network topology inquiring command includes the address information of the specified node; feeding back the network topology information of this node to the specified node, the network topology information of this node includes the connection information between this node and the previous node. The invention also discloses a node device. With the technique scheme provided by this invention, it can obtain the connection information between the nodes in the network topology information, namely the connection state of point-to-point. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090185505 | MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) FOR AN ACTIVE RFID SYSTEM - A system of radio frequency communication between Readers and Tags, the system comprising at least one tag Reader and a plurality of Tags, each tag is given a unique tag ID, deployed in a region in which at least some of the Tags are in radio communication with the tag Reader and a Media Access Control protocol such that the tag Reader is configured to send and receive radio communication to and from at least some of the plurality of Tags. The plurality of Tags are configured to send and receive radio communication to and from the tag Reader and the Media Access Control protocol is configured to control the radio communication between the tag Reader and the plurality of Tags The Media Access Control protocol includes a multi-dimensional addressing scheme allowing Readers to efficiently address tag communities ranging from small to very large in unicast, multicast and broadcast modes. The multi-dimensional addressing scheme enables division of the plurality of Tags into a number of groups for different stages of Media Access Control protocol processing, based on different portions of the tag ID. A hash function is used to transform the tag ID into a pseudo random ID, so as to achieve better spreading of tag population and lower statistical dependency between dimensions. The MAC has an inherent flexibility in the sense that it allows readers to communicate with different versions of tags and also to optimize communication parameters to reader's capabilities, without pre-configuration of the tags. Furthermore, the MAC supports means to achieve very high access reliability, such as relay between tags, and the ability to work with tags that alternate between active and sleep mode) including means for power savings. All of these novel features, coupled with some prior art concepts like collision resolution algorithms, result in a scalable MAC protocol for an active RFID system employing multiple access. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185506 | System and Method for Router Virtual Networking - A host router is logically partitioned into virtual router domains that manage independent processes and routing application copies but share a common operating system. Each v-net manages an independent set of sockets and host router interfaces, each associated with only one v-net at one time, but interchangeably repartitionable Traffic is removed from an interface during repartitioning. Duplicate arrays of global variables copied to each v-net are accessed by macro references. A v-net facility can separate route tables used internally from the externally visible route tables and can avoid conflicts between internal and external IP addresses that share the same identifier. For example a common FreeBSD operating system supports a dynamic routing protocol (DRP) application. Each v-net runs an independent copy of the DRP software and is logically independent. A failure in one DRP copy does not adversely affect other copies. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185507 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING TOPOLOGY OF A DYNAMIC NETWORK - The present invention provides a method and an apparatus for determining topology of a dynamic network in respect of which there is maintained network data containing (a) node data representing a set of nodes, (b) address data representing a respective MAC (Media Access Control) address of each node, and (c) connectivity data representing a respective connectivity of each node. The dynamic network is cyclically monitored so as to determine during each cycle new nodes that have been connected to the dynamic network since a previous cycle and vanished nodes that have been disconnected from the dynamic network since the previous cycle. The respective connectivity of each new node is determined by identifying a port in a switch to which the respective new node is connected. The network data is augmented so as to include node data representative of the new nodes, and the respective address data and connectivity data of each new node, while node data representative of each vanished node is removed from the network data, as well the respective address data and connectivity data thereof. At the end of each cycle the respective connectivity data of all nodes in the set are indicative of the respective network topology. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090190494 | Method and system for network topology updating using topology perturbation - A method for configuring a communication network includes the steps of identifying a given network configuration having a given network topology based on arcs having associated administrative routing weights and including a number of given shortest paths, generating at least one neighbouring configuration by producing in the network topology a perturbation leaving the administrative routing weights unaffected and wherein the majority of the shortest paths in the neighbouring configuration have the shortest paths from the number left unaffected by the perturbation and combinations of shortest paths from the number evaluating the neighbouring configuration against the given configuration based on a given cost function, whereby the evaluation involves only the portion of the network topology affected by the perturbation, and substituting the neighbouring configuration for the given configuration if the neighbouring configuration is found to represent an improvement over the given configuration based on the cost function. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190495 | GENERAL MULTI-LINK INTERFACE FOR NETWORKING ENVIRONMENTS - A method, information processing system, and computer readable medium manage a plurality of network interfaces. A data packet is accepted at a pseudo network interface. The pseudo network interface manages a plurality of underlying physical network interfaces. The pseudo network interface selects selected physical network interface from the plurality of physical network interfaces for outputting the data packet. The data packet is modified to include a hardware address associated with the selected physical network interface in response to the selecting. The data packet that has been modified is forwarded to the physical network interface that has been selected. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190496 | Method of Organizing Nodes of a Network into Groupings of Nodes, Computer Program for Implementing such a Method and Communication Device Forming a Node of a Network of Nodes - A method of organizing nodes of a network into clusters of nodes comprises a step ( | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190497 | Method for controlling the establishment of a connection in an optical network - A method for controlling the establishment of a connection within an optical network comprising the steps consisting in: transmitting a control message node-to-node along a path of said connection from an input node (A) to an output node (D) of the connection, said control message comprising a step indication field to indicate a current step ( | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190498 | DECOMPOSITION OF NETWORKING DEVICE CONFIGURATION INTO VERSIONED PIECES EACH CONDITIONALLY APPLIED DEPENDING ON EXTERNAL CIRCUMSTANCES - A method of configuring a networking device comprises: collecting data regarding the networking device; conveying the data to a remote server; selecting configuration slice instances based on the data using the server, wherein templates for the slice instances are stored on the server; compiling the configuration slice instances using the server; and delivering the compiled configuration slice instances to the networking device; wherein the slice instances are coherent sub-sections of configuration settings for the networking device. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190499 | System for Extracting and Combining Information from IP Device Configurations, Inventory Systems, and Real-Time Network Monitoring - The inventive system and method for improving network security, availability, and regulatory compliance, and maximizing a network comprises a network configuration component, a network inventory component, a network monitoring component, and a network assessment component, wherein information is extracted from each of the configuration, inventory, and monitoring components, the extracted information is combined and assessed in the assessment component, and the maximized network is produced using the combined information. In one embodiment, the combined information is stored in a database. In one embodiment, an XML is produced from the extracted inventory information, and this XML is converted to a canonical form. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190500 | SERVING CELL SELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate selecting and/or reselecting one or more access points, related cells, or carriers based at least in part on calculating an energy efficiency related to the access points. In particular, the energy efficiency can be based at least in part on an estimated pathloss and/or a level of interference related to communicating with the access points. Moreover, load parameters related to the access point can be received and evaluated in selecting and/or reselecting the access point. Thus, access points can be selected or reselected based on parameters other than forward link transmit power. In addition, pathloss and/or interference levels can be weighed based on access point type to prevent macrocell overloading. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190501 | METHOD, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM FOR DEREGISTERING A WIRELESS IP ACCESS NETWORK CONTACT ADDRESS - A method and equipment for deregistering a wireless IP access network contact address are provided. When a call corresponding to a common subscriber ID of a TE is received after the TE leaves an IP access network abnormally, the method and the equipment can avoid problems caused by still delivering the subsequent call from the IP access network according to an IP access network contact address associated with the common subscriber ID. The method includes notifying an IMS network to deregister a contact address of a TE in a first wireless IP access network through a current available access network of the TE if the contact address of the TE in the first wireless IP access network is not deregistered to the IMS network when the TE leaves the first wireless IP access network. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090196199 | WIRELESS PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICE - A programmable logic device includes a control module, a plurality of input/output modules, and a plurality of configurable logic and millimeter wave (MMW) transceiver modules (CXM). The control module is operable to: receive a programming instruction; identify a set of the plurality of CXMs based on the programming instruction; identify at least one of the plurality of input/output modules based on the programming instruction; determine configuration of the set of the plurality of CXMs and the at least one of input/output modules in accordance with the programming instruction; and allocate wireless communication resources of the programmable logic device to support the configuration of the set of the plurality of CXMs and the at least one of the plurality of input/output modules. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196200 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND NETWORK ESTABLISHING METHOD - A communication apparatus determines whether another communication apparatus participating in a network established in accordance with a first communication standard is also compatible with a second communication standard. The communication apparatus detects leaving of the network by another communication apparatus incompatible with the second communication standard. The communication apparatus establishes a network that adheres to the second communication standard, depending on the detection result. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196201 | SWITCHING DEVICE ADAPTED TO SWITCH AN AIRCRAFT WIRELESS NETWORK FROM A MAINTENANCE CONFIGURATION TO A COMMERCIAL CONFIGURATION AND VICE-VERSA - The object of the invention is a switching device in an aircraft wireless network for configuring the network from a maintenance configuration to a commercial use wherein the passengers have access to the network. The aircraft comprises a maintenance server and a cabin server as well as a cabin access point connected to an internal antenna and an outside access point connected preferably to two external antennas. The network infrastructure additionally comprises a network switch, a radio switch and a maintenance access point. In a first configuration, the cabin server is connected to the cabin access point and the outside access point is connected to the two external antennas. In a second configuration, the maintenance server is connected to the cabin access point and the maintenance access point is connected to one of the two external antennas. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196202 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND PATH SETTING METHOD - A transmitting apparatus in a network constituted of a plurality of rings connected via a plurality of routes includes a node type determining unit and a backup path setting message transmitting unit. The node type determining unit determines, on receipt of a working path setting message requesting to set a working path, whether the transmitting apparatus is any one of a branch node at which a backup path is branched off from the working path or a merge node at which the backup path merges into the working path. The backup path setting message transmitting unit transmits, when the transmitting apparatus is determined to be a branch node or a merge node, a backup path setting message specifying a route from a ring including the transmitting apparatus to a connection node connecting the ring and a neighboring ring. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090201830 | METHOD & SYSTEM FOR NETWORK ENTITY CONFIGURATION - A system for configuring a plurality of network entities by a central server, each of the network entities being associated with a unique identifier, and each of the network entities being associated with at least one service provider having configuration settings data therefor. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201831 | VPLS N-PE REDUNDANCY USING PSEUDO WIRE FAST FAILOVER - In one example embodiment, a system and method is provided that includes establishing a plurality of Pseudo Wire (PW) connections between a first network appliance region and a second network appliance region to transmit data from the first network appliance region to the second network appliance region along an active PW. Further, the method includes disabling the active PW when a failure of the active PW is detected. Additionally, the method may include selecting an inactive PW to become a new active PW such that the data may be transmitted from the first network appliance region to the second network appliance region. Moreover, the method includes switching from the active PW to the new active PW. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201832 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PREVENTING THE MISCONFIGURATION OF OSRP AND OSI/ISIS NETWORKS USING A NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The present invention provides methods and systems for preventing the misconfiguration of OSRP and OS/ISIS networks using a NMS, including: configuring a GNE with an address and NE ID for the NMS; forwarding topology information through a management interface to a NMS server; at the NMS server, copying a topology database of all NEs that are connected to the GNE; and, at the NMS server, launching NE mediators for all of the NEs in the topology database. Each NE mediator includes a listener that listens for updates and topology changes within the network. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201833 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A NETWORK DETERMINATION STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing a network determination state in a wireless communication system is provided, comprising determining whether a Channel record was provided with an Activate command, selecting a system and a channel specified by the record, if provided with the Activate command and entering a Pilot Acquisition state. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201834 | MULTI-ADDRESS SPACE MOBILE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE, METHOD FOR REGISTERING HOST INFORMATION, AND METHOD FOR SENDING DATA - A multi-address space mobile network architecture is disclosed, in which edge networks (ENs) are connected to a core network (CN) through core edge routers (CERs). A distributed hash table (DHT) set in the CN is adapted to not only store or update a mapping relation between a CER ID and CER location information in the CN, but also receive registration information sent from a host through the CER, and store or update mapping relations between a host ID host identifier (HI) and the CER ID and between the HI and host location information. A method for registering host information includes the steps as follows. The host acquires routable host location information in an EN to which the host currently added and information of the CER in the EN. The host sends registration information to the CN through the CER in the EN. Further, a method for sending data is described. The network architecture and methods of the present invention may improve update and query efficiency of the registration information from the host. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090207753 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR POWER CONSUMPTION DATA NETWORKS - Systems and methods for producing power consumption data enabling up-to-the-minute automatic collection and transmission of real-time energy flow information are described. Energy consumption from a source of electricity by an electrical device may be measured. This measured data may then be stored for later transmission on a data network. Energy consumption and network (data network or electrical network) topology data from other measurement or gateway devices may be received and stored or processed. Energy consumption data may be transmitted based on the network topology and claimed. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207754 | METHOD FOR COMPRESSING AND SETTING UP WIRELESS ACCESS BEARER AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING Iu RAB SETTING - The present invention provides for a method of compressing Iu RAB configurations. The method comprises dividing each configuration into a first portion and a second portion, the first portion comprising a fixed portion common to a plurality of configurations, and the second portion comprising a variable portion, the method including the step of compressing the fixed portion through allocation of an Iu RAB identifier thereto. The present invention further includes the transfer over a mobile radio communication network of Iu RAB data so compressed. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207755 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING NETWORKS, IN PARTICULAR ETHERNET SWITCHES - Network devices are configured by displaying an input mask for entering configuration data appears on a display of the network device or a configuration device to be connected to the network device and representing the input mask in at least two different formats. The configuration data is entered in the formats with the same content. Thereafter the inputted data is further processed in various data formats depending on the format of the input mask. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207756 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - A network management apparatus including an acquisition unit that remotely accesses a registered network device and acquires setting information of the network device and logging information of the network device, a detection unit that detects a connection status between network devices based on the setting information and logging information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a diagram producing unit that produces diagram information indicating the connection status between network devices detected by the detection unit. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207757 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING LOCATION AND ACCESS NETWORK INFORMATION SUPPORT IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes communicating location and access network information for an end user to a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) element that is coupled to a network element. The network element receives packets for a communications flow from the end user if the flow is initiated through a wireless network and through a wireline network. In more specific embodiments, the location and access network information is used to initiate one or more applications for the end user. The method could also include communicating to an application function that the end user has attached to one of the networks, has been assigned an Internet Protocol (IP) address, and the location and access network information for the end user. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207758 | Fast Active Scanning Wireless Network Apparatus and Method - In a fast active scanning wireless network apparatus and method for quick determination of available access points, information about a candidate set of available access points is obtained, and a candidate access point is identified from the candidate set. A mobile station then queries the candidate access point with a probe request that designates the candidate access point as a sole responder. The probe request prevents other access points from contending for the medium of communication between the mobile station and the designated sole responder access point by excluding the attempt by other access points to transmit probe responses. The apparatus and method thus increases the probability of a fast and successful probe request from the mobile station and subsequent response from the designated access point. The designated access point may also respond with a probe response of high priority, preventing intervention of communication. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090213751 | Optimum Selection of a Communication Network in the Location Area of a Terminal - In a method of selecting a communication network and connecting a mobile station into a communication network in a coverage area of which it is located, a mobile station is temporarily connected to a network unit of a first communication network, and sends a request relating to at least one second communication network to be used for communication via the network unit from the mobile station to a further network unit. After verifying the request by the farther network unit at least one response message containing at least one item of information is sent to the mobile station. The mobile station connects to a communication network depending on the at least one item of information received. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213752 | Detecting Double Attachment Between a Wired Network and At Least One Wireless Network - The invention concerns the detecting of a double attachment of an equipment communicating both with a wireless network and with a wired network, in particular when the connections with said networks are established by sending a connection configuration request comprising an identifier of the equipment, such as DHCP Host Name. The invention is characterized in that it consists: a) in detecting, at least on the wireless network, connection configuration requests emitted by the equipments (E | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213753 | SUBNET MANAGEMENT IN VIRTUAL HOST CHANNEL ADAPTER TOPOLOGIES - A computer program product for subnet management in virtual host channel adapter topologies includes a tangible storage medium readable by a processing circuit and storing instructions for execution by the processing circuit for performing a method. The method includes receiving a request to add a new logical host channel adapter (HCA) to the subnet, updating a logical switch port topology control block to reflect a pointer to the new logical HCA, and updating a port topology control block of the logical HCA to reflect a pointer to the logical switch port. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213754 | Device, System, and Method of Group Communication - Device, system and method of group communication. For example, a computing apparatus capable of performing group communication may include a group communication service to communicate as a member of a group-communication-system including a plurality of members linked according to a distributed-hash-table overlay network topology, wherein the group communication service is to link to a set of one or more of the plurality of members according to the distributed-hash-table overlay network topology, and to route to a selected member of the set a group-communication-service message, intended for a destination member of the plurality of members. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213755 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A ROUTING MAP IN A COMPUTER SYSTEM INCLUDING MULTIPLE PROCESSING NODES - A method for establishing a routing map of a computer system including a plurality of nodes interconnected by a plurality of physical links includes beginning with a first node, iteratively determining link information corresponding to each physical link of each node. In response to determining the link information for each node, sequentially numbering each node excepting the first node. The method may also include maintaining the link information and associated node number information in a data structure, and assigning node groups based upon which nodes are physically connected together. The method may further include determining a correct node numbering based upon the node groups such that the node numbers are contiguous in each grouping of nodes, and from one group of nodes to a next group of nodes, and updating the data structure based upon the correct node numbering. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213756 | System and Method for Location-Based Configuration of an Information Handling System - A system and method for location-based configuration of an information handling system are disclosed. A method may include detecting an available network for communication with the information handling system. Based on at least the detected available network, a current location of the information handling system may be determined. Based on the determined current location of the information handling system, one or more parameters of the information handling system associated with the determined current location may be automatically configured. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213757 | NEIGHBORHOOD MAINTENANCE IN THE FEDERATION - Systems and methods that provide for joining a node to a federation. A link component facilitates joining such node thru three phases of join, introduce and advise. A plurality of messages and replies are exchanged between nodes in form of introduce, advise, and response messages. Such messages contain the sending node's full neighborhood. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213758 | Automated Configuration of Network Mode - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to a mechanism for seamlessly changing a network mode of a network device that is connected to multiple nodes. In aspects, agents reside on the nodes. A master agent communicates with the other agents and receives the capabilities of the nodes on which they execute. The master agent creates a data structure that includes the settings needed to connect using the new network mode. The master agent distributes this data structure to the other agents and each agent stores settings associated with the current network mode in case a rollback is needed. The master agent then instructs the other agents to begin communicating using the new network mode and the network device is reconfigured. If the master agent does not receive success acknowledgments from all of the other agents, the master agent initiates a rollback procedure. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213759 | METHOD OF PRODUCING A NETWORK TOPOLOGY - Upon producing a topology of a network including a plurality of nodes (L | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213760 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING AD-HOC NETWORK AND INFRASTRUCTURE NETWORK, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - A wireless communication system for interconnecting an ad-hoc network and an IS network, and a wireless terminal and communication method therefor are disclosed. The communication method includes transmitting a discovery signal including terminal information of the wireless terminal to a radio network, receiving a response signal including information for network access from a base station or another wireless terminal, which has received the discovery signal, selecting an operation mode for access to a network through the base station or the other wireless terminal, based on the response signal, communicating with the base station and accessing the IS network when the selected operation mode corresponds to a first mode and accessing a network, to which the other wireless terminal belongs, through a licensed frequency band of the IS network when the selected operation mode corresponds to a second mode. Accordingly, it is possible to support communication through an existing infrastructure and support communication of an ad-hoc network scheme, through use of a licensed frequency band assigned to the provider of an existing IS network. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213761 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACQUIRING ROUTING INFORMATION AND METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATING A USER TERMINAL - The present invention discloses a method and device for locating a user terminal, which include recording information on routing from a calling user terminal activating a recall service to a server; and sending a recall instruction message to the calling user terminal activating the recall service according to the recorded routing information during instructing a recall. The invention further discloses a method and system for acquiring routing information. The technical solutions of the invention implement a recall to an initial calling terminal upon initiation of the recall in the case of a caller with a plurality of terminals. The invention can optimize a user experience of a service and enrich application scenarios of the services. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213762 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS ENTITY - The present invention relates to communication field, and discloses a mobile communication method. As can be seen from various embodiments, in the process of the access entity performing a location update for the UE or performing a UE access procedure, when the UE needs to be paged, the UE is paged in the paging area administered by the access entity and it is prohibited to page the UE in the paging area administered by the access entity in the other network. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090219830 | THIN DESKTOP LOCAL AREA NETWORK SWITCH - Methods, systems, and apparatuses for an automatically configured network switch are provided. The network switch includes a plurality of ports, a switch fabric, switch control logic, and a switch configuration module. The ports are configured to be coupled to a plurality of network communication links. The switch fabric is coupled to each of the ports, providing interconnections between the ports. The switch control logic is coupled to the switch fabric to provide data path selection and arbitration. The switch configuration module is configured to generate a request for switch configuration information to be transmitted from one or more ports of the switch, over the network, to a switch management server. The switch control logic is configured to configure one or more features of the network switch to operate according to the received configuration information. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219831 | Bridge port MAC address discovery mechanism in ethernet networks - Various exemplary embodiments are a method and of discovering medium access control (MAC) addresses in a network and a related access node including one or more of the following: receiving, at an access node, a diagnostic message from an operator, the diagnostic message comprising physical port information and indicating that at least a portion of a MAC address of a destination bridge port is unknown to the operator; forwarding the diagnostic message to a respective bridge port of the access node; determining whether the physical port information specified in the diagnostic message corresponds to a physical port of the respective bridge port; and sending a reply message to the operator specifying a MAC address of the respective bridge port. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219832 | FAST CONFIGURATION OF A DEFAULT ROUTER FOR A MOBILE NODE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method for fast configuring of a default router for a mobile node in a mobile communication system. A default router is used by a mobile node to transmit outgoing data to. The mobile node moves from a first to a second network area, which are respectively connected to a first and second router. In order to update the default router, after changing an attachment of the mobile node to the network, the new second router is adapted to transmit a notification to the mobile node, for changing its default router to the new router. According to the invention, the second router may also transmit a message to inform the mobile node about an expiration of the old first router. The new router may also send a message, including an indication about a new rust-hop router for the outgoing data of the mobile node. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219833 | Autonomous And Heterogeneous Network Discovery And Reuse - In some embodiments, a method is disclosed involving a mobile device discovery and use of target wireless networks which are at least partly within a coverage area of another wireless network which provides location information which includes: acquiring data from a plurality of said target wireless networks; acquiring location information from said another wireless network; mapping said data from said plurality of said target wireless networks with said location information; and selecting one of said plurality of target wireless networks based on said mapped data. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219834 | Dynamic Configuration of IP for a Terminal Equipment Attached to a Wireless Device - Techniques for dynamically configuring IP and providing IP connectivity for a terminal equipment attached to a wireless device are described. The wireless device obtains from a wireless network a dynamically assigned IP address, an IP gateway's IP address, a subnet mask, or none or any combination thereof. Wireless device determines a host IP address (which may be the dynamically assigned IP address), a router IP address (which may be the gateway IP address or a spoofed IP address), a server IP address (which may be the router IP address), and a subnet mask (which may be obtained from the wireless network or spoofed by the wireless device). Wireless device, acting as a DHCP server, provides IP configuration for the terminal equipment, acting as a DHCP client. Wireless device thereafter forwards IP packets exchanged between the terminal equipment and wireless network and processes DHCP packets from the terminal equipment. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090232020 | AUTOMATIC-CONFIGURATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADDING DEVICES TO APPLICATION SYSTEMS - A method for adding a device to an application system is disclosed. The method may include associating a set of Media Access Control address ranges with a set of device providers. The method may also include obtaining a Media Access Control address associated with the device. The method may also include determining a provider of the device if the Media Access Control address is within a Media Access Control address range in the set of Media Access Control address ranges, wherein the provider of the device is associated with the Media Access Control address range. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232021 | WIRELESS NETWORK AUTOMATION: NETWORK TOPOLOGY LEARNING - Various example embodiments are disclosed. According to one example, a method may include receiving, by a gateway node, at least one base station message from each of a plurality of base stations, the base station messages each including a network identification (ID) of the sending base station. The method may further include generating a local table based on the base station messages. The local table may indicate the network IDs or Internet Protocol (IP) addresses of the base stations served by the gateway node. The method may further include sending the local table to each of a plurality of neighboring gateway nodes. The method may further include receiving a neighbor table from each of the neighboring gateway nodes. The method may further include generating a global table based on the local table and the neighbor tables. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232022 | Transition between IP protocol versions - A method comprising: receiving, in a network element of a packet data core network, a network resource request from a user equipment, said request including indication on the user equipment's Internet Protocol (IP) version capability; creating, in said network element, a set of parameters for guiding the user equipment in IP address allocation at least in one packet data network, said set of parameters including at least a recommended version of IP address type to be used; and signalling said set of parameters to the user equipment as a response to the network resource request. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232023 | Combined omni- and directional- communications in high-frequency wireless networks - In a wireless communication network, specific portions of the communication may combine directional transmission with omnidirectional reception. In particular, sector-level directional transmission may be established through sector sweeps, followed by antenna training for more directionality. In some embodiments, collisions during the exchange may be reduced by having different network devices use different sub-channels or different time slots. In some embodiments, each network may restrict its network communications to a single sub-channel that is different than the sub-channels used by adjacent networks. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232024 | NODE DISCOVERY METHOD FOR PROVIDING OPTIMAL PATH PRESERVING LOCATION PRIVACY - A technology that can provide a node discovery method that can detect a TA that can provide a quasi-optimal data path to acquire the quasi-optimal path while protecting location privacy of a MN and the like are disclosed. The technology includes a step in which a first proxy node | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232025 | NETWORK DISCOVERY TOOL - A method for discovering network devices having special IP addresses may include collecting a plurality of IP addresses, where each IP address corresponds to a network device. One or more IP addresses may be identified as a predetermined IP address and/or a predetermined address type. Each of the IP addresses may then be classified according to various IP address types. A network address topology may be built based on the IP addresses, the network devices, and the IP address types. Finally, a special network topology may be built that includes network devices having IP addresses identified as the predetermined IP address and/or the predetermined IP address type. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232026 | MULTI-RADIO WIRELESS MESH NETWORK SOLUTIONS - Techniques for providing multi-radio wireless mesh network solutions are described herein. According to one embodiment, routing information of neighboring mesh APs is monitored via a dedicated monitoring antenna of a current mesh access point (AP). The current mesh AP is one of mesh APs of a wireless mesh network, each having an uplink antenna, a downlink antenna, a local link antenna, and a monitoring antenna. Traffic of an uplink antenna of the wireless mesh AP is dynamically reconfigured and rerouted from a first routing path coupled to a first uplink mesh AP to a second routing path coupled to a second uplink mesh AP, if the second routing path has a better routing condition than the first routing path based on the monitored routing information associated with the first uplink mesh AP and the second uplink mesh AP. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232027 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING THE FREQUENCY OF NETWORK TOPOLOGY PARAMETER UPDATES - Accuracy of network topology information and efficient usage of available bandwidth when broadcasting topology updates are optimized in accordance with the principles of the present invention by collecting and utilizing locally known network usage information to update the network topology information between regular updates. This information is then used in establishing paths for end user communication through the network. It is further used to determine which network topology information is to be included in a subsequent update broadcast by the node. Additionally, it is used to tune adaptively the frequency with which updates are broadcast by the node. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090238095 | Methods and systems for network channel capacity planning, measuring and analyzing of WLAN networks - An apparatus and method for network channel capacity planning, measuring, and analyzing of WLAN networks are presented. In one embodiment, the method includes importing network and node configuration of an existing physical wireless local area network (WLAN) deployment from WLAN surveying system that captures and analyzes WLAN traffic in order to define a configuration of the existing physical WLAN, simulating a virtual WLAN using the imported network and node configuration as parameters of the simulated WLAN and applying various other configurations not present in the imported network and node configuration as parameters of the simulated WLAN, and analyzing the simulated WLAN to produce throughput statistics of network and nodes of the simulated WLAN. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238096 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY UPDATING AND COMMUNICATING WITHIN FLEXIBLE NETWORKS - A software-based application dynamically updates user lists and enables communication between various network communication devices within a wireless network. The software-based application automatically builds and maintains a list of available users associated with the network communication devices in real-time, without reliance on a centralized server for authentication. Various types of communication, between network communication devices of the wireless network including text-based messaging, audio and video communication and file transfer are performed. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238097 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR BUILDING OF A NETWORK CODING SCHEME FOR DATA TRANSMISSION, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND STORAGE MEANS - A method is proposed for building a network coding scheme adapted to the transmission of data between a plurality of source nodes and a plurality of destination nodes in a communications network comprising a plurality of nodes, the method comprising the following steps:
| 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238098 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE INDICATION OF LONG DRX IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for configuring a discontinuous reception ‘DRX’ period at from an evolved Node B for a user equipment, including: sending a long DRX MAC CE from the eNB if preconditions are met, and at the UE determining whether a short DRX period is configured; if no, setting a long DRX period; if yes, determining whether a long DRX command was received in a medium access control ‘MAC’ control element; if yes, setting the long DRX period; if no, starting a short DRX timer and setting a short DRX period. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238099 | DYNAMIC HOME NETWORK ASSIGNMENT - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes establishing a connection with a gateway device in a wireless network. This includes receiving a configuration packet from the gateway device that identifies home mobility options. The method processes at least one home network address from the home mobility options. The method also includes receiving or processing a home network prefix from the home mobility options. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238100 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MAPPING AND ANALYZING VULNERABILITIES IN NETWORKS - Systems and methods for mapping and analyzing vulnerabilities in networks. In one embodiment, a network is mapped, comprising: converting network line data into point data; associating the point data with cells of a grid overlaying the network; and analyzing the network by determining the relationship of the point data to the cells of the grid. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238101 | NETWORK TOPOLOGY FORMATION - Systems and techniques are disclosed relating to wireless communications. The systems and techniques involve wireless communications wherein a module or communications device is configured to listen for a period of time for an incoming pilot signal from a remote terminal that exceeds a threshold power level for the purpose of acquiring such incoming pilot signal and operating under control of the remote terminal, and operating independently of the remote terminal if such pilot signal is not detected within the period of time, such independent operation including transmitting a pilot signal. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090245131 | Remotely controlled gateway management with security - A system and method are disclosed for remotely controlled gateway ( | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245132 | DYNAMIC VLAN IP NETWORK ENTRY - Systems and methods for tagging packets in a wireless network are described. The methods can comprise detecting initial entry of subscriber equipment into a wireless network at a first base station and generating a network tag for the subscriber equipment, the network tag associating the subscriber equipment with the first base station. The tag can be distributed to other base stations and, upon reentry of the subscriber equipment to the network, a network connection can be configured for the subscriber equipment based on the tag. Detecting initial entry includes receiving a network entry packet a including a unique identifier associated with the subscriber equipment. The network connection can be configured by providing an IP address assigned to the subscriber equipment and the IP address may be distributed through a relay agent instantiated for the network connection. The network tag can be an IEEE 802.1q tags, MPLS tags, etc. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245133 | BROADCAST/MULTICAST BASED NETWORK DISCOVERY - Embodiments of the invention relate to apparatus, system and method for use of WLAN access enabled mobile devices such as notebooks and handheld communication devices. In particular, embodiments of the invention relate to methodology whereby WiFi enabled devices can automatically select the appropriate service provider, in a power efficient manner, thereby taking advantage of different services offered by different service providers. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245134 | Broadcasting A Message In A Parallel Computer - Methods, systems, and products are disclosed for broadcasting a message in a parallel computer that includes: transmitting, by the logical root to all of the nodes directly connected to the logical root, a message; and for each node except the logical root: receiving the message; if that node is the physical root, then transmitting the message to all of the child nodes except the child node from which the message was received; if that node received the message from a parent node and if that node is not a leaf node, then transmitting the message to all of the child nodes; and if that node received the message from a child node and if that node is not the physical root, then transmitting the message to all of the child nodes except the child node from which the message was received and transmitting the message to the parent node. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245135 | FLEXIBLE NETWORK SWITCH FABRIC FOR CLUSTERING SYSTEM - A network switch fabric is provided for a clustering system to facilitate flexibility of network-related interconnection selection and system scalability. The network switch fabric includes replaceable network switch(s) and network interface(s) selectively configured on a base board. Multiple types of interconnection protocols with similar characteristics will be able to implement on a common infrastructure of network switch fabric. A pass through card operating as a network interface is also applicable on the network switch fabric to directly connect with an external network. The pass through card allows the network switch fabric supporting the clustering system to be scalable, thereby capable of supporting a large-scale cluster computing. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245136 | Information processing apparatus, summarizing method and summarizing program - An information processing apparatus retains topology information indicating how all nodes are connected in a predetermined target area within a network divided into plural areas. The information processing apparatus includes an ingress/egress determining unit that determines, by referring to connected area information indicative of which area an area border node is connected to, an ingress-node group and an egress-node group, a disjoint determining unit that determines, by referring to the topology information, whether two or more disjoint routes from a node(s) of the ingress-node group to reach a node(s) of the egress-node group are present, a summarized-information generating unit that generates summarized information indicating a route from the adjacent area through the target area to the other adjacent area according to determination result by the disjoint determining unit, and a summarized-information reporting unit that reports the summarized information to another area. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245137 | HIGHLY AVAILABLE VIRTUAL STACKING ARCHITECTURE - At least one embodiment of the present invention provides a single High Availability virtual switching architecture that allows for sub convergence times in the event of a switch or switch link failure. In some instances, the High Availability architecture uses an adaptation of an ISIS protocol to leverage separation of topology calculation and propagation of network management configuration to achieve sub-second convergence. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245138 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TOPOLOGICAL NAVIGATION OF HIERARCHICAL DATA GROUPS - A system and method to visually navigate hierarchical data groups are provided. If a user wishes to graphically view network traffic data for a particular business group of network nodes, a network topology navigation tool may be provided to display to the user such information that is relevant to the selected business group and the corresponding hierarchy level. The user may also be permitted to access more detailed connection information through appropriate drill-downs. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245139 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MEMORY CONSUMPTION IN ROUTER-BASED VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - A method to determine the maximum number of VPNs assignable to plurality of routers in a VPN network. The first step in the method can be specifying a tolerance which is a probability that consumed router memory will exceed available router memory for each router in a plurality of routers. The second step can be computing the consumed router memory on each router in a plurality of routers by summing a route memory, an interface memory, a VPN memory, and a constant memory. The third step can be computing a number [V] of VPNs assigned to the router to insure that, with the specified probability tolerance, the consumed router memory will not exceed the available router memory for each router in a plurality of routers. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090252056 | Explicit Logging of Network User Node/Target Node Coupling - An Edge switch. The edge switch includes a first module configured to receive multiple coupling signals from at least one user node. a second module, and a log. For each coupling signal, the coupling signal indicates coupling one of the at least one user nodes to one of at least one target nodes via one of at least one proxy servers, the first module is configured to determine an identity of the one of the at least one user nodes and an identity of the one of the at least one target nodes from the coupling signal, and the second module is configured to record the identity of the one of the at least one user nodes, the identity of the one of the at least one target nodes, and date and time at which the coupling signal was processed by the edge switch in an entry in the log. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252057 | WIRELESS SERVICE PROCESSOR CONNECTIONS - A method and system for replacing physical connections within a large enterprise system with wireless connections. A first wireless transceiver is associated with a node, wherein the node comprises one or more system service processors. A second wireless transceiver is associated with a main system service processor. System service processors associated with the node, referred to as node service processors, are assigned a unique identification (ID), e.g., a name and/or number, to identify the node service processors during wireless connection. An Ethernet cable is utilized to connect the node service processors to the main system service processor. The unique identification is transferred from the main system service processor to the node service processor, and then the Ethernet cable is disconnected. When the Ethernet cable is disconnected, the node service processor(s) communicate with the main system service processor via a wireless network utilizing the transceivers and unique IDs. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252058 | Multi-Protocol Label Switching Multi-Topology Support - A network component comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising receiving a packet, determining whether the packet comprises a topology label, and adding the topology label to the packet if the packet does not comprise the topology label. Included is a method comprising routing a plurality of packets corresponding to a plurality of forwarding equivalence classes (FECs) over a plurality of network topologies using a topology label and plurality of forwarding labels for each network topology. Also included is a network comprising a plurality of nodes in communication with each other and having a plurality of network topologies, wherein at least some of the nodes are configured to route data packets for a plurality of FECs along a path in each network topology using a topology label corresponding to each network topology and an inner label corresponding to each FEC. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252059 | DETERMINATION OF A LIST OF PREFERRED MOBILE ACCESS NETWORKS - Telecommunications system including a network selection manager and a mobile node. The network selection manager is operable to determine a list of preferred mobile access networks to which the mobile node may be attached during an inactive state and to communicate the list of preferred mobile access networks to the mobile node. The list of preferred mobile access networks for selection is determined in accordance with operator determined conditions (e.g. load, congestion in the access networks, subscription info, location of the mobile, changes in the list since last communication to the Mobile Station, etc.). The mobile node is operable in the inactive state to select one of the plurality of mobile access networks which is available for attachment in dependence on the list of preferred mobile access networks communicated to the mobile node from the network selection manager. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252060 | DETERMINING PRESENCE OF RADIO FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A RF data communication device operates in at least two states. In a first state, the device transmits a response to an RF transmission if specific data therein represents an inquiry as to the presence of one or more RF data communication devices and if specific data therein corresponds to a class maintained by the device. The device does not transmit a response if specific data in the RF transmission is not representative of an inquiry as to the presence of one or more RF data communication devices, or if specific data therein does not correspond to at least one maintained class. In a second state, the device does not transmit a response when specific data is included therein that is representative of an inquiry as to the presence of one or more RF data communication devices and specific data therein corresponds to at least one maintained class. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090257363 | Method and system for intelligent networking trigger contention resolution in IP multimedia subsystem networks - A method of receiving a first InitialIN message, determining if the first InitialIN message is a mobile origination, determining if an mscAddress comprising the first InitialIN message is an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) MSC address, and establishing DMS IN services with an SCF/SCP and performing VCC anchoring for a DMS communication session with a VCC SCF/SCP if the InitialIN is a mobile origination and if the mscAddress is an IMS MSC address. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257364 | Node Discovery in Physically Segmented Logical Token Network - Token authorized node discovery between a plurality of nodes in a downhole networking environment and respective applications for data processing and communication are described herein. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090262661 | DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME, DATA RECEIVING DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME, DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM, DATA RECEIVING DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM CONTAINING THE PROGRAMS - A content transmission device ( | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262662 | AUTO-CONFIGURATION AND DISCOVERY OF PORTABLE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A portable telecommunications system (PTS), and discovery and update protocol provides an ad-hoc system in which PTS systems can detect one another over a wide area network (WAN). The system may be compact in a way that allows mobility and rapid deployment with minimal on-site configuration. PTS systems exchange multicast packets and peer-to-peer data exchanges. A protocol manager sets up these communications channels, manages exchanges between PTS systems, and passes the data to or from internal system nodes. The protocol manager also performs key oversight functions such as signaling to other systems that a PTS is joining or leaving the community, keeping track of which other PTS systems are in the community and active, and determining when data needs to be updated and exchanged. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262663 | Wireless Discovery of Devices - A method for wireless discovery of devices is described. In an embodiment, a Wireless Personal Area Networking (WPAN) device advertises its presence to other WPAN devices by transmitting a beacon which includes its identity. The beacon may include a header and/or footer. This message is picked up by other WPAN devices in proximity to the transmitting device and these receiving devices store data identifying the transmitting device. In some embodiments, a database of beacons received by WPAN devices is maintained. This database may be used to associate data which is relevant to transmitting WPAN devices (or to a user thereof) with a WPAN identity. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262664 | Method for identifying network similarity by matching neighborhood topology - A method of computing a measure of similarity between nodes of first and second networks is described. In particular, sets of pairwise scores are computed to find nodes in the individual networks that are good matches to one another. Thus, a pairwise score, referred to as R | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262665 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING ZIGBEE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - Provided are a communication system using ZigBee to coordinate communication terminals, to transmit and receive data via a coordinator, and to perform a binding operation of setting channels and personal area network (PAN) identifications (IDs) of the communication terminals using only a remote controller when forming a ZigBee communication network between a home appliance and a remote controller, and a method of controlling the same. The communication system which forms a communication network between communication terminals, includes: a ZigBee coordinator disposed at one of the communication terminals, coordinating the communication terminals, and transmitting and receiving data; and a ZigBee device disposed at another one of the plurality of communication terminals and forming a ZigBee communication network through communication with the ZigBee coordinator, wherein an inputting unit for setting channels and PAN IDs of the ZigBee coordinator is provided at the communication terminal in which the ZigBee device is disposed. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262666 | DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK, CIRCUIT OF A NODE OF A DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK, AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP A DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK - A digital radio network, a circuit of a node of a digital radio network, and method for setting up a digital radio network is provided, wherein a transmission power of the first node is set for a radio link between a first node of the digital radio network and a second node of the digital radio network. A sensitivity of a receiving circuit of the second node is set by programming a threshold with which a field-strength-dependent signal is compared. Signal processing of a received and digitized received signal by the second node is activated when the field-strength-dependent signal reaches or exceeds the programmed threshold. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262667 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING TOPOLOGY MAPPING AND COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES IN A NETWORK - Methods and systems are described for discovering network topology in a multimedia network. Further the invention describes methods and systems for establishing synchronization between multiple nodes in a multimedia network. Also, disclosed are message transmission systems and methodology using relative path addressing to guide and direct messages in a multimedia network. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090268633 | NETWORK ADDRESS ASSIGNING AND ALLOCATING METHOD AND ROUTING METHOD FOR LONG-THIN WIRELESS NETWORK - A network address assigning and allocating method and a routing method for a long-thin wireless network are provided. First, a plurality of nodes in the long-thin wireless network is classified into a plurality of clusters, in which nodes ranging from a child node of a bridge node to a next bridge node are classified as the same cluster. Then, a network address is assigned to each of the nodes, in which the network address includes a cluster ID and a node ID, the cluster ID is used for identifying the clusters and for routing a packet between the clusters, and the node ID is used for identifying the nodes in each of the clusters and for routing a packet in the cluster. Thereby, the routing and network transmitting efficiency of the long-thin wireless network can be improved. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268634 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR THE SAME - A communication apparatus is provided. The apparatus comprises: a reception unit configured to receive an annunciation signal from a relay apparatus; a determination unit configured to, based on whether or not an address of another communication apparatus with which the communication apparatus is performing direct wireless communication is included in the annunciation signal, determine whether or not the relay apparatus is capable of relaying wireless communication between the communication apparatus and the other communication apparatus; and a switching unit configured to switch a path of the direct wireless communication with the other communication apparatus to a path via the relay apparatus determined by the determination unit as being capable of relaying the wireless communication. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268635 | Method and Apparatus for Mapping E-UTRAN Cells at Call Establishment - Some embodiments provide a method of macro cell remapping at a Voice over LTE via Generic Access (VoLGA) access network controller (VANC). The method receives a service request message from a user equipment (UE). The service request message includes macro cell information that includes an identity of a current camping cell. The method maps the macro cell information provided by the UE into a corresponding service area identifier (SAI). | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268636 | System and Method for Second Order Multi-Layer Traffic Grooming for Optical Network Optimization - A method of planning a network is disclosed. The method includes estimating a first cost of forming a direct connection between an origination central office and a destination central office. The method also includes estimating a second cost of forming a spoke connection between the origination central office and a hub node. The spoke connection is to carry residual data traffic. The method also includes determining whether to implement the direct connection based on whether the estimated first cost exceeds the estimated second cost. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268637 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM, DATA SENDING/RECEIVING APPARATUS - A data communication method includes: a Radio Network Controller (RNC) sends a notification message to a Node B to instruct the Node B to perform proper operations after a specific event occurs on the User Equipment (UE). A data communication system, a data sending apparatus and a data receiving apparatus are also provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure. Through the technical solution under the present disclosure, when specific events such as cell handover, disconnection and state transition occur on the UE, the RNC that obtains the event information may send a notification message to Node B to instruct the Node B to perform proper operations. Therefore, the Node B is prevented from continuing to send the buffered UE data from the source cell; and in the Cell_FACH state, the present disclosure saves the radio channel resources, shortens the transmission delay, and reduces the transmission packet loss ratio. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090274062 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING DNS OF HOST IN IPV6 STATELESS ADDRESS CONFIGURATION - Disclosed is a method for updating DNS of host in IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration, wherein an option is added in the RS message sent by a host and/or RA message sent by a router, said option including information for negotiation of updating DNS of host. Based on said information, the host negotiates with the router to determine whether the host or the router register, the mapping between the global address of the host and the full domain name of the host, to a DNS server, to complete updating the DNS of the host. This invention enables the host to correctly identify the matching relation between domain name suffix information and address prefix, and achieves the negotiation of updating DNS domain name between the host and the router. Since DNS updating is performed by a router instead of the host, the DNS updating would become simple and safe. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274063 | MULTI-LEVEL INTERCONNECTION NETWORK - A method and system for providing a multi-level interconnection network is provided. A multi-level interconnection network comprises basic cells that are aggregated into higher level cells at each level of the network. At the first level, the basic cells are aggregated into first level cells. Each first level cell is an aggregation of a number of basic cells that is one more than the number of devices in a basic cell. The basic cells of a first level cell are fully connected; that is, each basic cell has a first level link or connection to each other basic cell. In a first level cell, each device of a basic cell has a first level link to each other basic cell. The multi-level interconnection network has higher level cells that are aggregations of lower level cells in a similar manner. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274064 | LIGHT SWITCH AS A WIRELESS HUB - The current invention is directed to using utility outlets as wireless hubs within a premise so as to avoid the use of stand-alone wireless access points. Using utility outlets as wireless hubs requires the use of less cables and enhances security of wireless communication in a premises. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274065 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK BY USING BUTTON - A method and apparatus for setting a wireless local area network (LAN) based on manipulating a button is provided. In the method, an existing wireless network links with a network that supports a wireless security setup. The method includes storing setup information about a currently associated wireless network if the currently associated wireless network exists, and performing the wireless security setup of the network that supports the wireless security setup, according to the stored information about the currently associated wireless network. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274066 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTI-TOPOLOGY SUPPORT FOR LABEL DISTRIBUTION PROTOCOL (LDP) OF A MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING NETWORK - System and method for support multiple topology in Label Distribution Protocol of Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network are disclosed. The system includes a number of network elements and a communication mechanism used to connect the network elements. The network elements discover LDP peers within the network topology, and create and maintain LDP sessions for each of the network topologies. The network elements further establish LSPs by mapping network layer routing information within each network topology to data link layer switches paths. Furthermore, the communication mechanism enables the network elements to advertise the multi-topology capability and exchange the mapping information of label and FECs within each network topology. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274067 | System and Method for Network Planning - A method for designing a communication network is provided. Network demand data is gathered and network architecture data is gathered. Based in part on the network demand data and the network architecture data, a network plan is automatically generated. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090279451 | TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING METHOD AND PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - The present invention provides a transmitting/receiving method capable of selecting a combination of communication media of the own and its counterpart reflecting the preference of the user or an application for each of flows on communication terminals and capable of doing execution without being known by counterpart the preference information. It presents means for selecting a combination of CoAs (the CoA of the communication counterpart and that of the own) of the Mobile IP referring to the preference information of the application when communication terminals transmit/receive one or more flows (data flows) through one or more paths (communication channels). In consideration of combinations of flows and paths, the score is calculated for the combinations, and transmitted to the counterpart terminal of the communication, the approval is obtained to select the optimum path. As a result, the CoA suitable to the preferences of both parties can be selected for each flow. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279452 | HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, ACCESS ROUTER, ANCHOR NODE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ROUTE SETTING METHOD - In a hierarchical mobility management system, a roaming mobile terminal cannot perform handover at a high speed between anchor nodes when conducting AR return communication. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279453 | SHIRNK WRAP TECHNIQUE FOR ENCLOSING MULITPLE POLYGONS - A computer-implemented method receives a list of polygonal vertices associated with multiple polygons located in proximity to one another in a two-dimensional region and analyzes the polygonal vertices. The method automatically generates, based on the analysis, a polygonal hull that encloses the multiple polygons such that a line segment connecting any two polygonal vertices of the multiple polygons falls completely inside the generated polygonal hull. The multiple polygons may correspond to a two-dimensional geographic region. The computer-implemented method may be used for geographic regional segmentation. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090285118 | PROXY TERMINAL, SERVICE DEVICE, PROXY TERMINAL COMMUNICATION PATH SETTING METHOD, AND SERVER DEVICE COMMUNICATION PATH SETTING METHOD - In a proxy terminal or server a path setting can be performed by a server apparatus and a path setting that includes, as a relay point, a proxy terminal arbitrarily specified by a user or the proxy terminal located in a local network to which the user belongs, without adding any function to a user terminal. The proxy terminal includes a terminal group information generator unit configured to generate terminal group information that includes a user terminal identifier and a proxy terminal network identifier as a pair, and to transmit, to a server apparatus, the generated terminal group information. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285119 | INFRASTRUCTURE ASSISTED DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Apparatuses and methods are disclosed for infrastructure assisted discovery in wireless peer-to-peer networks. Various discovery procedures may be implemented where a first node supports discovery of other nodes for a second node. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285120 | Discovery and visualization of active directory domain controllers in topological network maps - Active directory (AD) Domain Controllers (DC) discovery includes determining the topology of the network, such as the nodes and connections in the network. For example, synthetic data may be transferred within the network and traced to determine the presence and relationships of the various network components. Alternatively, other mapping techniques are based upon mapping a known set of nodes to determine the relationship of the nodes. Next, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) commands are forwarded to the various nodes to identify the AD DC within a range of IP addresses discovered during the mapping of to the topology of the network. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285121 | POINT-TO-POINT AND POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATIONS - A network, such as wired and/or wireless LAN, is configured to have both point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections. The point-to-multipoint connection(s) is used to communicate information between a plurality of the stations (or modem, or transceivers) in the network, whereas the point-to-point connection(s) are used to communicate information between only 2 stations in the network with the ability to, for example, maximize performance (rate/reach/BER/latency/etc) between those two stations. A master station allocates one or more frequency bands to the various point-to-multipoint and point-to-point connections. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285122 | UPLINK CONTROL FOR TIME-DIVISION DUPLEX WITH ASYMMETRIC ASSIGNMENT - A link configuration unit includes a hybrid bundling module configured to provide a hybrid ACK/NAK bundling structure for an uplink ACK/NAK entity from user equipment, wherein the hybrid ACK/NAK bundling structure corresponds to an uplink-downlink configuration of subframe assignments. Additionally, the link configuration unit also includes a sending module configured to transmit the hybrid ACK/NAK bundling structure to the user equipment. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285123 | Method and apparatus for content-based routing and filtering at routers using channels - Channels between routers for use in packet routing via payload inspection. The channels constitute logical connections between routers and include subjects and attributes. Publishers create channels for routing particular types of content as defined by the subjects and attributes. The publishers also create proxies and notifications on the channels. The channel definitions for routers identify packet or message structures so that the routers can locate attributes in the packets for content-based routing. The routers apply the packet attributes to filters encapsulating subscriptions in order to perform the content-based routing in the network core. The routers also locally cache content, providing distributed caching of content throughout the network core. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090290507 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PLANNING COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for planning a multi-phase network includes storing initial parameter values for parameters associated with first and second growth phases in a multi-phase network plan, wherein each of the first and second growth phases is characterized by sets of the parameters. The method also includes calculating an initial growth scenario including the first and second growth phases based on the initial parameter values, and adjusting a value for at least one of the parameters to produce a modified parameter value. The method further includes automatically calculating a new growth scenario based on the modified parameter value and at least a portion of the initial parameter values, and displaying the new growth scenario. A computer readable medium for implementing the method described herein is also provided. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290508 | Method for optimizing network "Point of Presence" locations - A methodology for optimizing the placement of network “Points of Presence” (POPs) across the carrier's entire network (i.e., a “global” solution”) utilizes carefully constructed customer clustering and simulated annealing methodology to create a cost-efficient solution. The customer base is first partitioned into a plurality of clusters such that the customers within each cluster are closer to its centroid than the centroid of any other cluster (e.g., applying the k-means clustering algorithm or any other suitable method of partitioning the customer base). A linear algorithm process is used to minimize the costs associated with the number of placement of POPs within each cluster. A simulated annealing (SA) process is then used to iterate the entire set of potential POP locations until a compact, steady-state solution is achieved (or, alternatively, until a given number of iterations has been performed). In a preferred embodiment, a number of iterations are performed at each “temperature” in the simulating annealing process to further improve the result (this iterative process referred to in the art as “intensification”). | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290509 | PROCEDURE FOR INITIAL ACCESS - A method for accessing a wireless communication network includes transmitting a first message that has a first random identifier (RAND ID), and receiving a response to the first message such that the response includes the first RAND ID and signaling information. The method further includes transmitting a second message, having a second RAND ID, using at least one allocated resource. An alternative method includes communicating with a UE by receiving a first message from the UE. The first message includes a first RAND ID. The method further includes transmitting to the UE a response to the first message, and receiving a second message from the UE on at least one allocated resource. Typically, the response includes the first RAND ID and signaling information, and the second message comprises a second RAND ID. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290510 | Network connection device and collection/distribution device - A network connection device for connecting an asynchronous network having a link aggregation function to a synchronous network comprises: a first mapping/demapping unit which maps asynchronous network frames, flowing from the asynchronous network to the synchronous network on a plurality of links redundantly configured using the link aggregation function, into synchronous network frames, and which demaps asynchronous network frames mapped into synchronous network frames flowing from the synchronous network to the asynchronous network on the plurality of links into synchronous network frames; and a collection/distribution unit which collects the asynchronous network frames, mapped into the synchronous network frames on the plurality of links, into an asynchronous network frame mapped into a synchronous network frame on a single link, and which, in accordance with a prescribed rule, distributes an asynchronous network frame, mapped into a synchronous network frame on the single link and flowing from the synchronous network to the asynchronous network, among the asynchronous network frames mapped into the synchronous network frames on the plurality of links, and supplies the thus mapped asynchronous network frames to the first mapping/demapping unit. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290511 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MERGING CLUSTERS OF WIRELESS NODES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system includes a first cluster having multiple first wireless nodes. One first node is configured to act as a first cluster master, and other first nodes are configured to receive time synchronization information provided by the first cluster master. The system also includes a second cluster having one or more second wireless nodes. One second node is configured to act as a second cluster master, and any other second nodes configured to receive time synchronization information provided by the second cluster master. The system further includes a manager configured to merge the clusters into a combined cluster. One of the nodes is configured to act as a single cluster master for the combined cluster, and the other nodes are configured to receive time synchronization information provided by the single cluster master. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290512 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SYSTEM FOR TRACKING CONTAINERS - A wireless data communications network system for establishing communication between a server and a plurality of containers that are loaded onto a cargo vessel. The system includes a data communications device configured to establish and manage a pre-configured wireless data communications network and to communicate with the server through a local area network, and a plurality of electronic tracking devices each having a wireless transceiver and routing capabilities and configured to be joined to a container and to connect to the wireless data communications network upon being activated. The data communications device is configured to intermittently perform a network scan to locate each tracking device connected to the network and reconfigure the network topology to include each connected tracking devices such that the data communications device maintains mutual communication with each connected tracking device using the routing capabilities of the tracking devices. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090296600 | Method and Device for Analysis and Visualization of a Network - A method for analysis and visualization of a network is disclosed. The analysis method is based on the use of the steepest ascent graph (SAG). Specifically, the method: (i) uses the SAG to define subregions, in a way that allows iterative refinement; (ii) presents a new and highly efficient way of calculating the SAG; (iii) uses the SAG, and the definitions in (i), as the foundation of a novel method for displaying the structure of the network in a two-dimensional visualization. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296601 | JOIN KEY PROVISIONING OF WIRELESS DEVICES - Wireless devices are provisioned to join a wireless mesh network by writing an individual or common join key and network identification information to the wireless device, and creating an association of the wireless device with a gateway of the network by providing the gateway with a unique device identifier for the wireless device. The writing of the join key to the wireless device is achieved without revealing the join key to a user. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296602 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE ACCESS WITHIN A NETWORK - Methods and systems for media access control allow master and slave nodes of a network to communicate using the same carrier while avoiding collisions of transmissions. At least one slave node is an implantable device. Master nodes initiate all data exchange sequences, and slave nodes are responsive to the data exchange sequences. The exchange sequences begin by master nodes contending for use of the carrier through a countdown procedure. A set order of communications occurs between a master node who won the contention and a slave node being communicated with by the master node to transfer a data frame. Contention is then repeated to determine the next master node that is allowed to transfer a data frame. New master nodes entering the network employ a discovery process to poll for existing devices in the network. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296603 | Methods and Apparatuses for Communicating With Wireless Peripheral Devices - A wireless communication system includes a wireless peripheral device, a computer device, and a wireless interface capable of communicating with the peripheral device and the computer device. The wireless interface is configured to receive a communication directed to the wireless peripheral device from the computer, transmit wireless signals using a plurality of wireless technology standards at the same time to the wireless peripheral device, and receive an acknowledgement message from the wireless peripheral device. The acknowledgement message identifies at least one wireless technology standard utilized by the wireless peripheral device. The wireless interface is further configured to cancel transmission of any unacknowledged wireless signals, the unacknowledged wireless signals being those wireless signals not utilized by the wireless peripheral device, and forward the communication to the wireless peripheral device using one of the at least one wireless technology standards utilized by the wireless peripheral device. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296604 | OPTIMIZING NETWORK CONFIGURATION FROM ESTABLISHED USAGE PATTERNS OF ACCESS POINTS - A wireless network configuration device can include a first communication port configured to access a plurality of nodes positioned in a geographic area, a first storage unit configured to store statistical information from the plurality of nodes with respect to communication between the plurality of nodes and the at least one wireless devices. In addition, the wireless network configuration device can include a processor configured to determine an optimized configuration with respect to the plurality of nodes based on the statistical information, and a second communication port configured to provide data with respect to the optimized configuration to the plurality of nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes are adjusted based on the data. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090303902 | Multicast mesh routing protocol - A method for a node to select a route to join a multicast group in a wireless mesh network, including establishing the route between the node and the multicast group using media access control addresses is described. A method for determining a multicast group leader of the multicast group of a wireless mesh network using media access control addresses is also described. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303903 | TECHNIQUE FOR SHIFTING NETWORK POINTS OR LINEAR FACILITIES IN A NETWORK PLAN - A computer-implemented method receives a set of data regarding a layout of a network, where the data specifies the interconnection of linear facilities and specifies at least one network point that is disconnected from the network. The computer-implemented method further determines a closest one of the linear facilities to the at least one network point based on the set of data and shifts the at least one network point to connect the at least one network point to the network based on a distance between a vertex associated with the closest one of the linear facilities and the at least one network point. The computer-implemented method also shifts the closest one of the linear facilities to connect the at least one network point in the network based on a distance associated with a linear projection from the at least one network point to the closest one of the linear facilities. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303904 | System and Method for Multi-Topology Support - A system and method for providing multi-topology support in RSVP-TE in a multi-protocol label switching network is provided. A method includes reserving path states for a traffic engineered label switched path (TE LSP), and releasing the reserved path states. The TE LSP is established within a single network topology in an environment of multiple network topologies, and the reserving path states includes sending a first resource reservation protocol with traffic engineering (RSVP-TE) message containing multi-topology information. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303905 | SENSOR NODE IDENTIFICATION METHOD FOR HIERARCHICAL SENSOR NETWORK, AND COMPONENT THEREFOR - A sensor node identification method by a first component of a first layer in a hierarchical sensor network includes: receiving a sensing request including sensor node identification information from a second component of a second layer prior to the first layer; modifying the sensor node identification information by removing an identifier of the first layer from the sensor node identification information when an identifier of the first layer matches an identifier of the first component among the sensor node identification information; and transmitting a sensing request including the modified sensor node identification information to a third component of a third layer subsequent to the first layer. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090310509 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - The present invention provides a communication system and a communication method for linking the switching of a transmission path with the switching of an application according to the change of a communication condition caused by the movement of a user in a mobile environment. A change of the communication condition caused by the movement of the user is always monitored and the transmission path is switched according to the state change of the transmission path. Here, the state of the transmission path between the terminal and the communication counter part terminal is obtained and compared to a priority reference for each of the applications, thereby selecting a transmission path appropriate for the application becomes possible and a service in corresponding to the communication condition can be provided by changing a content to that appropriate for the transmission path, simultaneously. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310510 | FUTURE FORWARDING ZONES IN AD HOC NETWORKING SERVICE - A method, system, and computer program product for enabling the transmission of data from a mobile device to a target device via one or more carrier mobile devices, in a communication network. A proxy mobile carrier (PMC) utility facilitates transmission of data from the originating mobile device to a target device in a network which is inaccessible to the originating mobile device. The PMC utility employs a collection of enhanced transmission enabling components (ETECs) to enable the data transfer via one or more carrier mobile devices. The ETECs include a message creation component, a network zone identification component, a future forwarding zone prediction component, a message acceptor component, a storage component, an inter-node communication component, and a message delivery component. By initiating specific interactions between the ETECs, the PMC utility facilitates the transmission of data from the mobile device to the target device via carrier mobiles. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310511 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING AND MANAGING COMMUNICATION NETWORK NODES AT THE MAC SUBLAYER - Methods are disclosed for generating a data packet at a sending node of the network that conforms to a media access control (MAC) layer protocol for network communications. The data packet includes a MAC header and a data segment, wherein data in said data segment is encoded as a type-length-value element identifying a value for an operating parameter of the network. The data packet is transmitted from the sending node to a receiving node. At the receiving node, the data packet is processed at the MAC sublayer of network protocols to retrieve said element and determine the value for the operating parameter. Operating parameters within the receiving node are adjusted to conform to the determined value of the operating parameter. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310512 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING ROUTER CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for creating one or more router configurations in a network are disclosed. For example, the method receives a request to create a router configuration, and retrieves automatically one or more templates in response to the request. The method then instantiates the router configuration by applying the one or more templates. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310513 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING ROUTER CONFIGURATION TEMPLATES - A method and apparatus for creating router configuration templates are disclosed. For example, the method creates one or more command strings for performing at least one of: a context substitution, or a functional substitution, and stores the one or more command strings as the router configuration template. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310514 | METHOD OF CHANGING CHANNELS AND CONFIGURING A SUB NETWORK IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of changing channels of a first device in a wireless network, which includes a first coordinator and at least one device, comprises searching whether another channel other than a first channel which is currently used in the wireless network is available, changing the first channel to a second channel among at least one or more available channels as a result of the searching step, and transmitting data to a second device or receiving data from the second device through the second channel. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310515 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SETTING UP CONNECTION BETWEEN MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION IN MULTI-HOP RELAY NETWORK - The invention relates to methods and devices for setting up connection for wireless relay network, wherein, mobile station utilizes the primary transmission path from itself and relay stations in the initial ranging and network entry procedure to send a request signal to base station. After the base station receives the request signal, it allocates a transmission path for the mobile station, and sends the information to the relay station on the path along the primary transmission path, and sends a response message to the mobile station. When the mobile station and the related relay stations obtain the corresponding response message and transmission path information, the signal sent by the mobile station is sent to the base station via relay stations along the transmission path. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310516 | DENSE MESH NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A frame groupcast system for a mesh node in a mesh network having a plurality of mesh nodes includes a transceiver that receives a groupcast frame and a groupcast determination module that determines whether to forward the received groupcast frame based on at least one measurement. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310517 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERY OF PEER TO PEER OVERLAYING NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for discovery of peer-to-peer overlay networks. In an aspect, a method includes receiving a request to discover information about overlay networks of interest, generating a search query that comprises at least one parameter associated with the overlay networks of interest, and transmitting the search query to nodes on a local area network. In another aspect, an apparatus includes a memory comprising an overlay database of meta-data associated with one or more known overlay networks and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to obtain a search query that comprises at least one parameter associated with overlay networks of interest, determine one or more selected overlay networks from the overlay database based on the at least one parameter, and transmit meta-data associated with the one or more selected overlay networks in response to the search query. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310518 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMAL PARTICIPATION OF DEVICES IN A PEER TO PEER OVERLAY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for optimal participation of devices in a peer-to-peer overlay network. A method for dynamically configuring a node includes operating on an overlay network using a first participation mode, obtaining at least one configuration parameter, selecting a second participation mode for operation on the overlay network based on local policy and the at least one configuration parameter, and configuring the node to participate on the overlay network based on the second participation mode. An apparatus for dynamic node configuration includes a memory coupled to a processor and configured to operate on an overlay network using a first participation mode, obtain at least one configuration parameter, select a second participation mode for operation on the overlay network based on local policy and the at least one configuration parameter, and configure the node to participate on the overlay network based on the second participation mode. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310519 | ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT METHOD AND TRANSMISSION METHOD OF MOBILE OF MOBILE NODES FOR HIERARCHICAL ROUTING IN LOWPANS - An address assignment method of a mobile node, for hierarchical routing in a low-power wireless personal area network (LoWPAN), includes (a) classifying a plurality of fixed nodes in a hierarchical way, (b) designating a management node and a head node of a lower level than the level of the management node in the fixed nodes, (c) determining if the mobile node can communicate with the head node, and (d) assigning an address to the mobile node through a neighboring head node, which can communicate with the mobile node when the mobile node cannot communicate with the head node. Therefore, addresses may be assigned without limitation until the addresses for the mobile nodes are exhausted. Furthermore, even when the mobile node having an assigned address from a first region moves from the first region to a second region, the packet may be sent or received through the hierarchical routing. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090316600 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND SERVER APPARATUS - In a telecommunications carrier network system to provide such a service that a global IP network can be used as a communication infrastructure of a company, especially in a network system in which a setting interface is opened so that a user can freely perform a setting change on a use service, plural users can simultaneously perform setting changes. In a control request classified unit to classify a setting change request from a user terminal, request contents are classified for each of control target node equipments and each of interfaces, and are stored in a control request management unit. An admission control unit collectively judges admission or non-admission of the request for each of control targets. A control request publishing unit collectively orders admissible requests to the same node equipment also when setting update to the node equipment is performed. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316601 | System And Method For Positioning In A Wireless Network - A method for wireless communication includes receiving a first scan report generated by a first node of a wireless communication network. The scan report includes identification information for a plurality of nodes coupled to the wireless communication network. The plurality of nodes comprises a second node whose location is unknown. The scan report also includes a plurality of time values, each time value corresponding to a communication time between the first node and each of the plurality of nodes. The method further includes determining a first plurality of distances using the first plurality of time values. Each distance of the first plurality of distances corresponds to a distance between the first node and each of the plurality of nodes. In addition, the method includes determining location information for the second node utilizing the plurality of distances. Further, the method includes providing a service to at least one wireless device utilizing the location information. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316602 | Method and System for Network Topology Discovery - Methods and apparatus for topology discovery of a network having heterogeneous network devices are disclosed. A network appliance communicates with the network devices to acquire device descriptors and characterize the network devices accordingly. Topology discovery is based on device characteristics, media-access data, and encoded connectivity patterns, where each connectivity pattern is defined by devices of specific device types and respective media-access data. A topology deduction module of the network appliance synthesizes a network image starting with unconnected devices and progressively incorporating detected connectivity patterns. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316603 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING SYSTEM INFORMATION MODIFICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate improved management of a system information modification in a wireless communication environment. Various techniques can be utilized as described herein to provide respective users with information indicative of changes to specific blocks or elements within a set of system information, thereby simplifying and accelerating acquisition of new system information after a modification. In a first example, a bitmap is generated and transmitted upon a system information modification that indicates which blocks(s) and/or element(s) of the system information changed in the modification, thereby allowing an associated user to abstain from reading or processing unchanged system information. In a second example, respective block(s) and/or element(s) of the system information can include an internal value tag that indicates to a receiving entity whether the corresponding block(s) or element(s) have changed, thereby allowing a user to discard unchanged block(s) or element(s) without performing further processing. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316604 | CONCENTRATOR FOR MULTIPLEXING ACCESS POINT TO WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiplexing communications from multiple downstream access points to one or more upstream access points. In particular, a concentrator component is provided that can establish a single transport layer connection with an upstream access point along with multiple application layer connections over the single transport layer connection for each of multiple downstream access points and/or related mobile devices. The downstream access points and/or mobile devices can provide identifiers to the concentrator component, which can utilize the identifiers to track communications with the upstream access points. In this regard, the upstream access points can additionally include identifiers received from the concentrator component in subsequent communications to facilitate identifying the appropriate downstream access point and/or mobile device. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316605 | METHODS TO DETECT WIRELESS STATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - In one exemplary embodiment, a process for detecting a phone includes monitoring wirelessly transmitted traffic between first and second stations. Next, the process determines whether the traffic sent in both directions between the first and second stations are close to each other in term of traffic volume. The process identifies a total frames count of a number of frames of an identical frame size transmitted, where the number of frames is greater than any number of frames of a same size. The process calculates the percentage of the count that was just collected out of the count of the total frames. The process identifies the first station as a phone if the calculated percentage is over a first threshold and the total frames count is over a second threshold. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090323552 | Systems and Methods for Managing Virtual Collaboration Systems Spread Over Different Networks - Systems and methods for managing virtual collaboration systems are disclosed herein. A virtual collaboration system includes a distributor communicatively coupled to a first network and a second network having different network characteristics from the first network, the distributor configured to receive first media streams from at least one first network node, and to transmit the first media streams to at least one second network node; and a management subsystem adapted to dynamically configure a topology of a virtual collaborative event, wherein configuration of the topology includes a determination of media stream connections among the distributor and the at least one first network node based, at least in part, on at least one policy, and wherein the media stream connections establish and maintain virtual relationships among the at least one first network node and the at least one second network node. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323553 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ENABLING A TRANSPARENT ETHERNET SWITCH - A system and method of enabling a transparent Ethernet switch are disclosed. According to an aspect, a network switch is disclosed. The network switch can include a plurality of physical ports configured to communicate data via a network. The network switch can further include a memory configured to store a first forwarding database, and a plurality of aggregate zone entries within the first forwarding database. The aggregate zone entries can also include a port identifier of first port of the plurality of physical ports to be used as a transparent port within a first aggregate zone. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323554 | INTER-OFFICE COMMUNICATION METHODS AND DEVICES - The system provides a low cost way of providing high speed point to point communications between two offices, as well as Internet access, which exploits the use of low cost access technologies, such as ADSL, in such a way that (a) no CO component is required to deploy the solution, (b) the two offices could have different types of communication technologies available, and (c) more than two offices can form an overlay network, whereby each pair of offices has a virtual single high throughput pipe available which is achieved through aggregation of Internet access services at each office. The proposed system allows intranet communication links or Internet connections to be aggregated, thereby enabling faster and more reliable communications. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323555 | System and Method for Controlling and Configuring a Router - Methods and systems for configuring a network are provided. A method may include monitoring properties of a connection between a network device and a network. The method may also include detecting a change in the properties of the connection. The method may also include verifying the connection to the network is provided by a service provider when the change in the properties is detected and providing network configuration options based on the change. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20100002601 | METHODS FOR HARDWARE REDUCTION AND OVERALL PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The aim of the present invention is a method to achieve the customization of the communication network of a multicore communication system. This goal is achieved thanks to a method to design a multicore communication system, said communication system comprising a communication network having a plurality of switches and several elements communicating through the communication network, said method comprising the steps of: a) defining the communication network topology, comprising a number of switches, the architecture of said switches and the interconnection between said switches, b) defining routes to communicate among the elements through the switches according to the application running on the system, c) marking the input-to-output connections used within the switches traversed by these routes, d) removing all or part of the electronic components related to the non-marked connections. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002602 | System operable to enable mobile access - The present invention relates to a system ( | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002603 | NETWORK ELEMENT CONFIGURATION SCHEME - In a configuration scheme for one or more network elements, a network management entity determines a set of at least one parameter value from a set of operable parameter values and sends the determined set to a network element. The network element then selects a parameter value from the received set and uses the selected parameter value to configure one or more aspects of the network element. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002604 | METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS USING AN IP ADDRESS BASED ON GEO POSITION - Method of routing data over a network in which contact is made with a home network to determine the reported geo-position, using this geo-position to transmit data to the device over a path through a node in which the node reads the geo-position, accesses a list of possible recipients and their geo-positions, compares its location to the positions, selects a recipient based at least in part on the proximity of the recipient to the device, and transmits the data over the best path. Eventually, the device becomes the recipient. A geo-position may be transmitted as part of an IP address, or as geo-position data or XML tagged geo-position information contained in a data packet or IP addressed message or IP addressed voice calls (VoIP). The geo-position information can be generated from a GPS receiver. This method and/or IP address may be used in a method of doing business in which the geo-position is used to identify the source and location for delivery. This information may be incorporated into a purchase order or confirmation receipt. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002605 | RELAY NODE - A relay node comprising a reception station for receiving a route trace control message including routing information on a path used for data transfer from a starting node to a terminal node from the preceding node on the path, an editing section for, if the home node is boundary node located at the boundary of a routing information shielding section on the path, editing so that a portion on the routing information shielding section of the routing information included in the route trace control message received by the reception section cannot be identified, and a transmission section for sending out a route trace control message after the edition to the node of the subsequent stage, which is located on the path. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100008253 | VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (VPN) TOPOLOGY IDENTIFIER - Various embodiments are disclosed relating to the identification of virtual private network (VPN) topologies. In an example embodiment, a plurality of edge routers associated with a network may be discovered, each edge router including one or more virtual routing and forwarding entities (VRFs). One or more route targets (RTs) associated with each of the VRFs may be determined, wherein corresponding RTs between two or more VRFs are associated with connectivity between the two or more VRFs via the network. The VRFs may be sorted into one or more groups based upon the corresponding RTs of the VRFs. A representative VRF (rVRF) may be identified for each of the one or more groups of VRFs. The rVRFs may be sorted into one or more VPNs and a topology for each VPN may be determined. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008254 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INSTANCE IDENTIFIER BASED ON A UNIQUE DEVICE IDENTIFIER - A method and apparatus for use in a communications network whereby an Instance Identifier (ID) is created to uniquely identify a device such as a mobile device or User Equipment (UE) in the communications network. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008255 | MESH NETWORK SERVICES FOR DEVICES SUPPORTING DYNAMIC DIRECTION INFORMATION - With the addition of directional information in the environment, a variety of service(s) can be provided on top of user identification or interaction with specific object(s) of interest. For instance, a user can opt into a mesh network and leverage services available via the mesh network. The user can also contribute to knowledge within the mesh network by allowing for information related to the user to be aggregated and employed by others, e.g., targeted provisioning of services. The interaction with the mesh network can occur passively (e.g., as a background application not generally visible to the user), or actively where for example the user can initiate collecting or logging of information from/to the mesh network. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008256 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - In a wireless sensor network having a plurality of mobile sensor nodes ( | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008257 | INFERRING CONNECTIVITY IN THE PRESENCE OF CONFLICTING NETWORK DATA - The connectivity information provided by a variety of inference engines is integrated to provide a set of inferred links within a network. A consolidation is performed among inference engines that operate at a base level of connectivity detail to create a model of the network at this base level. The connectivity information provided by inference engines at each subsequent higher level of connectivity abstraction is then overlaid on the base level connectivity. By separately consolidating the connectivity information at each level of abstraction, the rules for dealing with conflicts can be simplified and/or better focused to resolve the conflict. By assuming that the more detailed lower level information is likely to be more accurate, rules can be developed to modify the connectivity models produced by the higher level techniques to conform to the lower level connectivity details while still maintaining the integrity of the higher level connectivity models. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008258 | ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE - In an access point identifier configuration scheme, different procedures are used for configuring (e.g., updating) different types of access points. For example, the criteria used to determine which identifiers are to be assigned to mobile access points may be different than the criteria used to determine which identifiers are to be assigned to stationary access points. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008259 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE IDENTIFICATION AND ACQUISITION OF ACCESS POINTS - Systems, apparatus and methods for facilitating identification and/or acquisition of an access point are provided. Methods can include transmitting or receiving access point information (“API”) indicative of an identification of the access point (“AP”). The API can be provided at the AP through hardwiring or receipt of configuration information input by a user or transmitted to the AP by a network operator through Over-The-Air (“OTA”) signaling. The API can be computer-readable and, in some embodiments, the API can also be human-readable. The API can be transmitted on a paging channel from which user equipment (“UE”) can receive information. The frequency at which the API is transmitted can be fixed, dynamic and/or configurable. Upon receipt of the API, acquisition of the AP is attempted if the AP is determined to be a permitted AP. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008260 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING CONTROL TUNNEL AND DIRECT TUNNEL IN IPV4 NETWORK-BASED IPV6 SERVICE PROVIDING SYSTEM - Provided is a method for configuring a control tunnel and a direct tunnel in an IPv4 network-based IPv6 service providing system. To provide IPv6 service, when a random request terminal receives a tunnel response message from a control server by using service information downloaded from a portal server at the time of initialization, the request terminal configures a control tunnel with the control server, and is registered to the control server. The request terminal transmits and receives a direct tunnel request message and a direct tunnel response message with a counterpart terminal by using its terminal information learned during the control tunnel configuration, i.e., network position information and status information, thereby configuring a direct tunnel. Thus, IPv6 communication is made through IPv4 based IPv6 tunneling, so that IPv6 application services that are not yet widely used can easily come into wide use. Also, only software change of each terminal and a control server is required without changing existing network equipment, so that a cost burden of a service provider can be minimized. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008261 | Methods and Devices for Discovering a Gateway and for Routing Towards said Gateway in a Hybrid Wireless Network - A gateway ( | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008262 | SIGNALING APPARATUS AND SIGNALING METHOD - A signaling apparatus is applied to a node constituting a network including internal network to network interface (INNI) domains having INNI interfaces between a plurality of networks in an area and external network to network interface (ENNI) domains having ENNI interfaces that connect the INNI domains. The apparatus includes a processing unit that processes a signaling message for setting a path when an end-to-end path that passes through the INNI domains and the ENNI domains that connect the INNI domains is set in response to the signaling message, a storing unit that holds information on types of links between an own node and adjacent nodes, and a judging unit that judges whether the own node is a connection end point of the INNI domains or the ENNI domains with reference to route information in the message and the information on the types of the links held in the storing unit. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008263 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING SUBSCRIBER SYSTEMS IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A wireless network may be managed by identifying one or more wireless subscriber systems included in a lobe pool of a wireless network, identifying at least one candidate subscriber system outside of the lobe pool with which to enable communications, and reconfiguring the antenna such that the lobe pool includes the identified candidate subscriber system. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100014441 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR STRATEGIC NETWORK PLANNING - A system and method for strategic network planning includes a service forecast module that determines a forecasted service need for additional telecommunication network services. A network equipment module is in communication with the service forecast module. The network equipment module is operable to determine an equipment need for telecommunications network equipment in response to the determined forecasted service need. The equipment need includes a list of equipment that is desired to meet the forecasted service need. A task module is also in communication with the network equipment module. The task module is operable to determine task needs in response to the determined equipment need. The task needs include a list of tasks that need to be completed to meet the equipment need. A project module is also in communication with the task module. The project module is operable to calculate a project start date. The project start date is calculated in response to the determined task needs. The project module is further operable to automatically initiate at least one task by the project start date. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100020718 | SHARED COMMUNITY STORAGE NETWORK - A hardware and/or software facility for durably and securely storing data within a shared community storage network. A user may have a storage device that they intend to share with others in the network. All or a portion of the storage device is registered with the community storage network as a storage node. Once registered with the network, third party data may be stored on the storage node and remotely accessed by third parties. In addition, data stored on the storage device by the user may be stored in the shared community storage network by encrypting the data, adding redundancy, and distributing it to other storage nodes within the storage network. Data that is stored in the storage network is accessible to the user even if their storage device is inaccessible or fails. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020719 | AUTOMATIC MAINTENANCE OF A DISTRIBUTED SOURCE TREE (DST) NETWORK - In one embodiment, an automatically maintained, distributed source tree (DST) network has a plurality of fully connected internal nodes. One or more internal nodes may be connected to one or more external nodes. A first internal node synchronizes its link-state database with another internal node by sending and receiving respective Reduced Sequence Number Packet-Data-Units (PDUs) (RSNPs). An RSNP includes summary information for link-state packets (LSPs) (1) originated by the first internal node, (2) received by the first internal node from the other internal node, and (3) received from and/or originated by external nodes. If an internal link fails, then the corresponding end-nodes may recover and maintain automatic DST operation by entering either relay-mode or switch-mode operation. In relay-mode operation, an end-node tunnels packets to the other end-node via an intermediary node. In switch-mode operation, an intermediary node is selected to forward packets from one end-node to the other end-node. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020720 | SIGNALING FRAMEWORK FOR NEGOTIATING AND EXECUTING COMPOSITION OF REGISTRIES - Systems, methods, devices and software for negotiating and executing registry composition are described. Signaling frameworks for both of these aspects of registry composition are provided. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020721 | Arrangement and Method Relating to Routing of IP Traffic in Mobile Wireless Newtorks - The present invention relates to a proactive optimized link state protocol and a node with routing means supporting such a protocol implementing multipoint relaying for distribution of control messages, e.g. comprising hello messages, which are extended and comprise neighbour information, link status information and resource related information, and second control messages, e.g. TC messages comprising information relating to MPR selectors which are extended to also hold information of a shared information repository ( | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020722 | Method for Discovering the Physical Topology Of A Telecommunications Network - A network (NW | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020723 | TRAIN CAR-TO-CAR COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A train car-to-car communication device includes: a terminal; an intra-composition transmission line connected to the terminal within the same composition for transmitting information; a composition-to-composition communication relay unit connected to the intra-composition transmission line for receiving first information from the terminal within the composition and transmitting the first information to an adjacent composition, and receiving second information from the adjacent composition and transmitting the second information to the terminal within the composition of interest; and a composition-to-composition transmission line for connecting the composition-to-composition communication relay units of the adjacent compositions and transmitting the information, and the composition-to-composition communication relay unit determines a difference between composition directions of the composition as a transmission source of the received information and the composition to which the composition-to-composition communication relay unit of interest belongs, and rewrites to invert direction-dependent information contained in the received information if the composition directions are different. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020724 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING AN INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Substation automation (SA) systems are disclosed such as systems for configuring an International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 61850 standard-compliant Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) in a SA system. A proxy IED is a NCC gateway device enhanced for converting data between non-IEC 61850 and IEC 61850 communication protocols. Proxy IED is configured, based on a set of mappings, which are coded in the SA configuration description (SCD) file. The SCD file can include mappings for data conversion between non-IEC 61850 and IEC 61850 communication protocols. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100027441 | System and Method for Configuring a Network - A system and method for configuring a network are disclosed. A method may include storing identifying information associated with one or more network devices on a computer-readable medium in an information handling system prior to delivery of the information handling system to a user. The method may also include determining whether the identifying information stored on the information handling system is associated with the network access point. The method may further include automatically configuring network parameters for communication between the network access point and the information handling system in response to a determination that the identifying information stored on the information handling system is associated with the network access point. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027442 | CONSTRUCTING SCALABLE OVERLAYS FOR PUB-SUB WITH MANY TOPICS: THE GREEDY JOIN-LEAVE ALGORITHM - A method and system for constructing a single topic-connected overlay network are disclosed. A link contribution array, which stores sets of edges in an order according contribution values, is provided. A highest contribution index indicates a highest element in the link contribution array. The method includes performing, at every iteration, a Greedy Merge (GM) algorithm for selecting an edge from the highest element in the link contribution array, removing the selected edge from the link contribution array, and adding the selected edge to a set of overlay edges. After the selected edge is added to the set of overlay edges, contribution values of other edges are updated. The GM algorithm terminates when all elements in the link contribution array become empty. As an output, the GM algorithm generates a single topic-connected overlay network for all topics. A Greedy Join (GJ) and Greedy Leave (GL) functions are also disclosed. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027443 | ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS BETWEEN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVICES IN A GROUP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IMPLEMENTED OVER A WIDE AREA NETWORK - A method and apparatus is provided for establishing communication pathways between infrastructure devices in a wide area communication network prior to transmission of a group message packet by a source wireless communication device (WCD). In one implementation, the infrastructure devices (IDs) can include a home ID of the source WCD, a first ID and a second ID. A home steward module (HSM) of the source WCD generates a distribution list (DL) for communications from the source WCD to a first communication group (CG), and communicates it to an envoy packet duplicator module (EPDM) located at the first ID. The first CG includes, for example, a first destination WCD. A first network socket of the EPDM is communicated from the HSM to a second envoy module (located at the second ID) for the first destination WCD. The HSM maps a second network socket for the second envoy module to an identifier of the first destination WCD, and communicates this mapping to the EPDM. A first communication connection can then be established between the first network socket and the second network socket. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027444 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS FOR WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICES - A method and system for establishing a connection for a wireless network device is provided. It allows a station to send a trigger signal to a multimedia receiving device. Upon receiving the trigger signal, the multimedia receiving device is prompted to reply to the station with a response signal. Upon receiving the response signal, the station is prompted to clone an identity information of the multimedia receiving device as its own identity information. The station is then allowed to be connected with a wireless network access device. By this way, the time for cloning the identity information of the multimedia receiving device in the station can be shortened, thus the overall connection establishment time can be reduced after the wireless network device is restarted. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100034117 | PARALLEL VLAN AND NON-VLAN DEVICE CONFIGURATION - A cloning device driver system includes a subsystem to configure a virtual local area network (VLAN) switch port configuration for tagged operation and a subsystem to configure a non-virtual local area network (non-VLAN) switch port configuration for tagged operation. In operation, the cloning device driver system allows modification of the non-VLAN switch port configuration independent of the VLAN port configuration, thereby allowing an information signal to pass to a physical layer (PHY) of an open system interconnection (OSI) device. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034118 | Control Frame Handling By a Provider Backbone Bridge - A method and Bridge in a Provider Backbone Bridge Network (PBBN) for enabling frames from a Higher Layer Entity attached alternatively to a Provider Instance Port (PIP) on an I-Component of a Backbone Edge Bridge or to a Customer Backbone Port on a B-Component of the Backbone Edge Bridge, to reach an intended entity in the PBBN. A Virtual Instance Port Service Access Point (VIP SAP) is configured for every VIP and every Higher Layer Entity configured on the I-Component. An Enhanced VIP Port Connectivity function utilizes the VIP SAP to tunnel customer-initiated Layer 2 Control Protocols (L2CPs). A Special Multiplexed SAP handles the frames of the Higher Layer Entity, and is assigned an I-SID value that is universally recognized to identify the L2CPs. A Service Instance Multiplex Entity utilizes the Special Multiplexed SAP to transfer frames between the PIP or the Customer Backbone Port and the entity inside the PBBN. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034119 | NETWORKED CONTROL SYSTEM USING LOGICAL ADDRESSES - A networked control system ( | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100039958 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING APPLICATION TERMINALS IN HOME NETWORK - A device, a system, and a method for automatically configuring application terminals in a home network are disclosed. The method is as follows. A home gateway receives identifier information of an application terminal sent by the application terminal through a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). The identifier information of the application terminal is sent to a public network through a DHCP message, so as to determine a DHCP server corresponding to an automatic configuration server (ACS) of the application terminal. Address information of the ACS of the application terminal is obtained from the DHCP server on the public network through a DHCP message. The address information is transmitted to the application terminal, so that the application terminal obtains configuration information from the ACS according to the address information to perform an auto-configuration. Thus, a problem that the application terminal in a home network cannot directly obtain an ACS Universal Resource Locator (URL) through a DHCP message is solved, so that an auto-configuration of the application terminal is realized. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039959 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR MANAGING ACCESS RESOURCES IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments relate to managing access resources in a network. Methods include receiving a request for network service, the request including a required class of service; accessing a storage device that specifies routers and bandwidth available on the routers; selecting a router from the specified routers and a port on the selected router to perform the requested service, the selecting including verifying that the bandwidth available on the selected router and port can perform the requested service, where the bandwidth is divided into a plurality of capacity classes and the bandwidth in each class can perform the requested service if the capacity class corresponds to the required class of service; transmitting instructions to a network configuration system to initiate activation of the requested service on the selected router and port; and updating the storage device to reflect the requested service being activated on the selected router and port. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100046394 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus searches for another network after a network is created, participates in another network in accordance with a role, in communication parameter setting processing, of a communication apparatus existing in another network, and executes the communication parameter setting processing. After the communication apparatus decides to receive the communication parameters from another communication apparatus, the communication apparatus determines an activation state of a providing function of a provider apparatus of the communication parameters, and requests the provider apparatus to provide the communication parameters in accordance with the determination. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046395 | INCREMENTAL AND TARGETED AUTO-DISCOVERY OF NETWORK DEVICES - A method and/or system is configured to improve the results of an auto-detection of network devices based on the causes of detection failures in preceding runs of the auto-detection process. As each device that is believed to be in the network is found to be undiscovered, the identification of the device and information regarding the cause(s) of non-discovery are stored. Prior to the next auto-detection run, one or more of the discovery parameters are modified, based on the causes associated with the undiscovered devices. The extent to which the discovery parameters are modified is preferably based on the apparent stability of the network, or upon the detection of changes to the network. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046396 | ADAPTIVE MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR WIRELESS TRANSFER NETWORK CONTAINING BASE STATION AND WIRELESS RELAY STATIONS - An adaptive management method for a wireless communication network comprising a base station and wireless relay stations is disclosed, and the method is applied in a wireless communication network group comprising a base station and wireless relay stations subordinated to the base station. The method comprises the following steps of: (a) a management node in the wireless communication network group constructing a wireless network topology information structure of the group; (b) the management node updating the wireless network topology information of the group when a network topology relationship of the wireless communication network group changes; (c) the management node utilizing the wireless network topology information of the group and a corresponding strategy to manage wireless relay stations and mobile terminals subordinated to the management node. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046397 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR FACILITATING THE DESIGN AND ASSIGNMENT OF ETHERNET VLANS - A computer implemented method for facilitating creation of virtual local area networks (VLANs). The method includes: receiving a VLAN name, a class of service and two or more access ports; determining switches and trunks associated with the access ports; searching a VLAN database for the VLAN; and creating a VLAN if said searching does not result in locating the VLAN. The creating includes: selecting a starting access port from the two or more access ports; mapping a base path from the starting access port to another of the access ports, wherein the base path includes one or more of the switches and one or more of the trunks; and adding the base path to the VLAN including the starting access port and said another of the access ports. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046398 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY REALIZING CONNECTION BETWEEN MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND MANAGED DEVICE - A method for automatically realizing a connection between a management device and a managed device is provided, which includes the following steps. The managed device acquires connection configuration parameters. The managed device establishes the connection according to the connection configuration parameters with the management device. A system for automatically realizing a connection between a management device and a managed device is also provided. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046399 | RENDEZVOUSING RESOURCE REQUESTS WITH CORRESPONDING RESOURCES - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for rendezvousing resource requests with corresponding resources. Doubly linked sorted lists are traversed using modulo arithmetic in both directions. Sorted lists can be partitioned based on a multiple proximity metrics. Node routing tables provide a logarithmic index to nodes within the ID space of the federation infrastructure to facilitate more efficient routing. Messages can be routed to nodes within a ring and proximally routed to nodes in other partitioned rings. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100054153 | Communicating Information Between Core And Edge Network Elements - In particular embodiments, a network element filters information sent to a neighboring network element. In the embodiments, the core network element may determine whether the neighboring network element is an edge network element or a core network element. If the neighboring network element is an edge network element, the core network element may set a filter, remove traffic engineering information according to the filter, and send the remaining information to the neighboring network element. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054154 | IP ASSIGNMENT SCHEME FOR DYNAMIC PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKS - An approach for assigning IP network addresses and for performing name resolution and service discovery in infrastructure mode and/or ad-hoc mode peer-to-peer networks. The size of an ad-hoc network and/or the size of infrastructure network basic service sets may be limited to a selected number of peer stations. A first portion of an IP network address assigned to stations joining a network may be predetermined by the network to be joined and a second portion of the IP network address may be selected dynamically, as each new station joins the network. Stations may generate layer 2 messages that include an information element containing information that supports peer-to-peer service discovery, name resolution and IP network address assignment across multiple ad-hoc and infrastructure networks. A peer-to-peer station may dynamically connect to available ad-hoc or infrastructure networks to access required services, as needed. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054155 | UPDATE METHOD OF WIRELESS RELAY STATION LINK RELATION - A method for updating a connection relationship of a wireless relay station, comprises the following steps of: (a) a wireless relay station RS | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100061268 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - According to this invention, whether to automatically install the device driver of a discovered network device can be set in accordance with the network configuration of a connected network. A client terminal stores, for each network, network configuration information capable of specifying a network, and mode setting information describing whether or not to install the device driver of a network UPnP device upon connection to the network. When the client terminal is connected to a given network, a Plug and Play mode setting utility reads out mode setting information which matches the connected network configuration. In accordance with the setting information, the Plug and Play mode setting utility switches whether or not to send a message to the OS upon reception of a Hello message, or whether or not to transmit a Probe message requested by the OS onto the network. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061269 | Differentiated services for unicast and multicast frames in layer 2 topologies - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving information on layer 2 topologies at a network device in a core network, mapping one or more Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) to the layer 2 topologies to provide differentiated services in said layer 2 topologies, defining multiple paths for each of the layer 2 topologies, and forwarding a packet received at the network device on one of the multiple paths. An apparatus for providing differentiated services in layer 2 topologies is also disclosed. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061270 | NETWORK MOVEMENT DETECTION METHOD IN MOBILE NODE OF DSMIP6 ENVIRONMENT - There is provided a movement detection method of a mobile node in a DSMIP6 environment. The movement detection method includes performing neighbor unreachability detection in a network to which a mobile node moves, confirming network movement detection and simultaneously performing IPv4 address allocation when the neighbor unreachability detection fails, performing router discovery at the same time as the IPv4 address allocation, recognizing the movement detection into the IPv4 network when the IPv4 address allocation succeeds, and recognizing the movement detection into the IPv6 network when the router discovery and the IPv6 router discovery succeed. Therefore, the movement detection method can be useful to continuously perform operations as defined in a DSMIP6 specification so as to confirm whether the network to which the mobile node moves is an IPv6 network or an IPv4 network and detect movement to the confirmed network, and to perform a binding update in time. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061271 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENABLING DISCOVERY OF WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless device (A) in a first antenna sector ( | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061272 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING MESH NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS USING A MESH NETWORK PROTOCOL - The following describes data structures, communication protocol formats and process flows for controlling and facilitating secure communications between the nodes of a mesh network, such as utility meters and gateway nodes comprising a utility network. The enabled processes include association, information exchange, route discovery and maintenance and the like for instituting and maintaining a secure mesh network. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061273 | Wireless Base Station Apparatus, Network Configuration Administering System, Network Configuration Administering Apparatus, And Network Configuration Administering Method - A wireless base station apparatus includes an acquiring unit that acquires position information concerning the wireless base station apparatus; a transmitting unit that transmits the position information to a management apparatus; a receiving unit that receives, from the management apparatus, connection destination information that the management apparatus obtains from search processing based on the position information; and a setting unit that sets the connection destination information as a connection destination. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100067402 | MIDDLEWARE COMPONENTS FOR BUNDLING SERVICE INVOCATIONS - A machine readable medium having instructions stored thereon to cause the machine to execute a method is provided. The method includes analyzing a received client request and available statistics to determine whether the request is likely to succeed and whether the request should be bundled with other requests. If the request is determined to not be likely to succeed, an error message is outputted to the client. If the request is determined to be likely to succeed but should not be bundled with other requests, a first service provider relevant to the request is invoked. If the request is determined to be likely to succeed and should be bundled with other requests, the request is bundled with the other requests and, subsequently, the first and/or a second service provider relevant to the bundled requests is invoked. The available statistics are then updated. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067403 | DIRECT DEVICE TO DEVICE CONFIGURATION TRANSFER - Systems and methodologies for direct device-to-device transfer of configuration information, such as network information, are provided herein. As described herein, network keys and other information can be transferred from a device that stores and/or utilizes the information to one or more devices to be initialized on a corresponding network. Network information can be communicated using audio tones, light pulses, and/or other similar signals to facilitate transfer of network information using one or more hardware components present at devices involved in the transfer for other purposes and without requiring specialized hardware. Systems and methodologies disclosed herein enable new devices to a network to be programmed by an already-programmed device, thereby reducing the need for off-site network initialization in cases where a small number of devices are to be added to an existing population. In addition, secure transfer of network information without exposing the information in a transferable format is facilitated. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067404 | CLUSTER COUPLER UNIT AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING A PLURALITY OF CLUSTERS IN A TIME-TRIGGERED NETWORK - The invention relates to a time triggered network used in particular in an automotive network having a plurality of clusters. Each cluster (A-X) includes a plurality of nodes ( | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067405 | CORE NETWORK DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Disclosed are a core network device, a radio communication base station device, and a radio communication method which continuously provides a multicast service to a terminal connected to eNB in an overlap PA. An M-UPE ( | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067406 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD TO OUTPUT IDENTIFIER, AND COMPUTER USABLE MEDIUM THEREFOR - A wireless communication device capable of outputting an identifier of an existing wireless network to an output unit is provided. The wireless communication device includes an identifier obtaining unit to obtain identifiers from a plurality of access points, a judging unit to judge whether each of the access points operates in a specific operation mode based on each of the obtained identifiers, a determining unit to determine an identifier is a first identifier if the access point which provided the identifier does not operate in the specific operation mode, and determine the identifier is a second identifier if the access point which provided the identifier operates in the specific operation mode, and an output control unit to output the first identifier to the output unit, such that the first identifier is shown by the output unit in a manner that the first identifier is distinguished from the second identifier. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100074140 | DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method and system for managing routing in a wireless network, the method comprising receiving an indication that a route to a first node via a routing node is invalid; and deleting, from routing information, information indicating the route to the first node via the routing node. Other embodiments of the invention relate to a method and system for managing routing in a wireless network, the method comprising receiving a message from a descendant node via a routing node; determining whether routing information indicates a route to the descendant node via the routing node; if the routing information does not indicate the route, adding information to the routing information indicating the route to the descendant node via the routing node; and forwarding the message to a destination node. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074141 | System and Method for Visually Creating, Editing, Manipulating, Verifying, and/or Animating Desired Topologies of a Mobile Ad Hoc Network and/or for Generating Mobility-Pattern Data - A method and apparatus for creating virtual topologies for a mobile ad hoc network comprising generating at least two nodes representing transmitters and/or receivers in the network; each of said at least two nodes having parameters (which may be for example, location, direction, velocity, receiving/transmitting capability); generating a bidirectional or unidirectional link between two nodes when appropriate; storing the specifications of the topology of the network in memory; whereby the stored topologies are adapted to be inputted into a test-bed system capable of emulating a mobile ad-hoc network. Optionally, the images of the nodes and links are displayed on a display and/or may be stored on a programmable storage medium. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074142 | METHOD FOR GAP ANALYSIS FOR NETWORK TOPOLOGY INSPECTION IN ETHERNET-BASED NETWORK - A method for gap analysis for topology inspection to recognize a topology of a deep segment through gap discovery in an Ethernet network, includes: a gap division process of dividing a gap into atomic gaps that are no longer divided through path crossing test (PCT); and a gap interpretation process of analyzing a final result of the PCT when the atomic gap is generated, to interpret a topology of the gap. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074143 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY CHANGING NETWORK NODE BEHAVIOR - The present disclosure pertains to systems and methods for dynamically changing network node behavior. In one exemplary embodiment, a system comprises a plurality of nodes defining a wireless sensor network, and the plurality of nodes includes at least a first node and a second node. The first node has an output interface, a virtual machine, a stack, and a communication device. The stack is configured to packetize payload data into data packets, and the communication device is configured to communicate the data packets via wireless signals through the wireless sensor network. The output interface is coupled to an apparatus, and the second node is configured to transmit a script image through the wireless sensor network to the first node via at least one data packet. The first node is configured to run the script image on the virtual machine such that the apparatus is controlled by the script image. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074144 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING NODES WITHIN ANYCAST GROUP, AND ASSISTANCE METHOD AND DEVICE THEREFOR - A method for configuring, in a preset node within an anycast group, non-preset nodes within the group and a control device therefor are provided. The method comprises: generating one or more address configuration messages based on the predetermined configuration address information; and sending to each of non-preset nodes within the anycast group the address configuration message corresponding to the non-preset node. A method for assistant configuration of non-preset nodes within an anycast group and an assistance control device therefor are also provided. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074145 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR USING PREDEFINED NETWORK ADDRESSES IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for using predefined network addresses in wireless sensor networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a system comprises a first node and a plurality of nodes defining a wireless sensor network. The wireless sensor network is configured to allow nodes to dynamically join, and each of the plurality of nodes has a respective network address for the wireless sensor network. The first node has a predefined network address that identifies the first node in the wireless sensor network, and the predefined network address is known to the first node prior to the first node joining the wireless sensor network such that the first node is able to immediately communicate via the wireless sensor network using the predefined network address upon joining the wireless sensor network. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074146 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTIVELY DISABLING ROUTING TABLE PURGES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for disabling routing table purges in wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a node is for use in a wireless sensor network and comprises memory that is configured to store a routing table specifying at least one data route through the wireless sensor network. The node also comprises logic that is configured to track time and to automatically purge at least one entry of the routing table based on the tracked time thereby forcing a rediscovery of a data route for the purged entry. The logic is further configured to selectively disable automatic routing table purges based on user input. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074147 | Overlay Network Infrastructure - A method and apparatus for processing an overlay network infrastructure. In one embodiment, the method comprises a plurality of transparent access points (TAPs). Each TAP is communicably coupled between one or more clients and servers and a wide area network (WAN) to enable the one or more clients to communicate with the one or more servers, and is coupled to other of the TAPs via permanently, established secure links. The overlay network also comprises a controller coupled to each of the TAPs via a secure connection to configure the TAPs with information to enable each TAP to know what services are available and from which of the TAPs each of the services can be accessed. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100080145 | Throttling Network Traffic Generated By A Network Discovery Tool During A Discovery Scan - This invention describes a method to limit the number of concurrent discovery processes into networks based upon the network traffic volume and discovery duration per device. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080146 | JOINING A MESH NETWORK IN A MULTIPLE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Wireless mesh network nodes in a mesh network are operable to join a desired wireless mesh network in a multi-network environment. The nodes search for a compatible mesh network, find a compatible mesh network, join the found compatible mesh network, indicate whether the joined mesh network is the desired mesh network, and receive input causing the network node to withdraw from the joined mesh network and search for other mesh networks to join if desired network has not been joined. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080147 | METHODS FOR RECONCILING TRUNK GROUP IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION AMONG VARIOUS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - A method includes retrieving a first data set from a switch within a network, the first data set including a set of switch records. Among the switch records included in the first data set is a first switch record associated with and including a field identifying a first trunk group from a set of trunk groups included within the switch. A second data set is retrieved from a configuration management system configured to facilitate an operation associated with the network. The second data set includes a plurality of configuration records, which includes a first configuration record associated with and including a field identifying the first trunk group. When the field included in the first configuration record differs from the field included in the first switch record a report is produced. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100085892 | OVERLAY NETWORK COORDINATION REDUNDANCY - An overlay network coordinator redundancy method and apparatus are disclosed having network coordinator functionality latent in a plurality of application-layer network elements, coupled with a precedence schema provided to all application-layer routers which together provide resiliency and rapid recovery in the event of a hardware failure of the acting overlay network coordinator. The overlay network coordinator redundancy system is particularly useful for overcoming overlay network reliability dependencies upon a single coordinator known in the art. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085893 | SENSOR NODES IN MULTIPLE SENSOR NETWORK, METHOD FOR CREATING GRID-BASED TREE OF SENSOR NODES AND SPATIAL QUERY PROCESSING SYSTEM USING GRID-BASED TREE - A method for creating a grid-based tree in a multiple sensor network includes: dividing an entire area in which a base station node and a plurality of sensor nodes are disposed into grid areas; assigning a grid ID to each of the grid areas; setting, sequentially from the base station node to each of the sensor node, level information, candidate child nodes and candidate parent nodes; storing a grid ID of a grid area in which the respective nodes locate; selecting, for the respective sensor nodes, a parent node based on the grid ID, the level information, and the candidate parent nodes; and calculating, for the respective nodes, minimum bounding rectangles each of which includes a child node of corresponding node and nodes descended from the child node. The grid-based tree is calculated by using the minimum bounding rectangles. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085894 | Apparatus And Method For Mapping A Wired Network - The present disclosure relates to a device, system and method for generating an electrical wiring diagram of an electrical network containing nodes by determining node locations with respect to other nodes and mapping the nodes. The nodes may include a processor, a sensor and a low voltage power supply and may be configured to supply and detect an electrical signal. A processor may also be provided, which may be configured to identify the node locations in the network relative to other nodes and performing the function of mapping. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085895 | System and Method For Preparing And Exhibiting A Network Coverage Map - Systems and methods by which network coverage in a specific area can be exhibited to a user of a mobile node. Information stored on an information server may be used in an application which is capable of exhibiting the network coverage in a specific area. The network coverage may be based, for example, on an operating carrier, a carrier and its roaming partners or on a specific type of network. The information stored on the information server can be downloaded by a mobile node, thereby permitting to observe the coverage area for a network type(s) in which the user is interested. The coverage information may be exhibited, for example, in the form of a visual coverage map. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085896 | EXTENSION CONNECTION METHOD AND ROUTE SELECTION DEVICE - When receiving an extension connection request from a first mobile terminal, a first route selection device selects a first extension connection route from among a plurality of extension connection routes and transmits the type of the first extension connection route and calling-side address information used on the first extension connection route to a second route selection device. The second route selection device selects a second extension connection route from among the plurality of extension connection routes and transmits the type of the second extension connection route and called-side address information used on the second extension connection route to the first route selection device. If the second extension connection route coincides with the first extension connection route, an extension connection is established between the first mobile terminal and the second mobile terminal via the first extension connection route. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085897 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECONFIGURING NETWORK ROUTES - A method and apparatus for ensuring that every path in an IP network that interconnects a pair of VoIP network elements comprises diverse network routes and is engineered with adequate bandwidth to support VoIP phone calls are disclosed. In the event that a single point of failure or inadequate bandwidth is detected between a pair of VoIP network elements, an alarm is issued and network engineers are notified to reconfigure the routes between the VoIP network element pair. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100091684 | System and Method for Discovery of Dynamically Assigned Information Handling System IP Addresses - A network manager tracks network nodes in an IPv6 network by identifying server nodes that dynamically-assign network addresses, such as DHCP server nodes, retrieving prefix information from the DHCP server nodes, and querying a range of network addresses determined from application of the prefix information to identify client nodes of each DHCP server node. In one embodiment, the prefix information comprises a start prefix value that identifies the starting address of the range and a prefix length value that determines the number of addresses in the range. For example, the network manager sends echo messages to each address in the range by starting at an address determined from the start prefix value and incrementing the network address for a number of increments equal to at least the prefix length value. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091685 | Method and System for Deducing Network Routes by Querying Routers - A method and system for detecting and correcting invalid network paths in a network having a plurality of routers and a set of global invariant rules imbedded in the network including querying a subset of a routing table data structure defining network paths wherein said subset includes a plurality of routing table entries and comparing a network routing table entry with an earlier network routing table entry for the same node. The method and system also includes detecting inconsistencies between the newer network routing table entry and the earlier network routing table entry, and invalidating the network entries of the older network routing table that are inconsistent with the newer entries. The method and system also includes reconstructing the routing structure by replacing the invalidated network routing table entries with new routing table entries that minimize violation of the invariant protocols. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091686 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO RESET A DEVICE OF A WIRELESS NETWORK AND WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE - The invention relates to resetting devices of a wireless network, particularly wireless home control networks, for example lighting control networks in buildings. It is an object of the invention to provide an improved method and system to reset devices of a wireless network and an improved wireless network device. According to an embodiment of the invention, an all overruled reset signal ( | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100097956 | MULTI-INTERFACE MANAGEMENT CONFIGURATION METHOD AND GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE FOR CONNECTION MANAGER - A terminal device includes interfaces that establish links to networks. The networks can be wired, wireless, and the like. The terminal device includes a connection manager that manages the network connections based on configured parameters. Based on the configuration parameters it may compare network performance of different links in the device and it may switch or connect to a link having the best connectivity. Parameters are set to configure the connection manager and how it operates. The parameters can be set via a graphical user interface by the user or alternatively by the operator administrator. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097957 | DISCOVERY OF MULTIPLE INTER-NODE LINKS IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORKS - An extension to reactive ad-hoc routing protocols in multi-hop wireless mesh networks. The protocol discovers bi-directional links during route establishment, particularly multiple links between a single pair of nodes. Source and intermediate nodes transmit a route request, at least one of the nodes transmitting the route request on more than one wireless interface. Upon receiving a route request, each node creates at least one reverse link to the node from which the route request was received. The destination and intermediate nodes transmit, via at least one of the reverse links, at least one route reply which enables a node receiving the route reply to identify one or more wireless interfaces of the node transmitting the route reply. Upon receiving a route reply, each node creates at least one forward link to the node from which the route reply was received. Routes may then be established using any discovered bidirectional link. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097958 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TO NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a wireless communication system, an apparatus and method for managing an uplink communication between a network and a plurality of terminals is achieved by transmitting a response condition parameter from the network to the plurality of terminals subscribing to a multicast service. The parameter is associated with controlling the uplink communication of the plurality of terminals. The terminal then applies the response control parameter to a predetermined test and responds to the network if the terminal determines that it is qualified to respond to the network in response to a result of the predetermined test. The network evaluates whether the parameter needs to be transmitted to the plurality of terminals and whether the parameter needs to be updated based on at least part of responses received by the network. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100103841 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESSLY CONNECTING DIVERSE AD-HOC NETWORK GROUPS - A wireless connection system and method are provided to connect diverse Ad-hoc network groups. A first Ad-hoc network group has a first network node and a first edge node wirelessly connecting with each other. The second Ad-hoc network group has a second network node and a second edge node wirelessly connecting with each other without connecting the first Ad-hoc network group. The first and second edge nodes have multiple wireless modules respectively. One of the wireless modules is used to connect wireless with other network nodes in the same Ad-hoc network group. The rest extra wireless module(s) is used to connect wirelessly with another extra wireless module(s) of the edge node(s) in different Ad-hoc network group(s). Therefore, the independent first and second Ad-hoc network groups are now capable of wirelessly connecting with each other. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103842 | SELF-ASSIGNMENT OF DETECTORS AND WORKERS AMONG ACCESS DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A self-assignment method for assigning detector and working devices among a plurality of access devices in a wireless network begins by performing wireless data collection with the access devices during an automated calibration period. During this time, each access device receives beacons from one or more other transmitting access devices. The method records radio frequency (RF) data associated with beacons received during the wireless data collection, and thereafter automatically designates at least one of the access devices as a detector device, based upon the recorded RF data. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103843 | METHOD, TERMINAL, AND ADDRESS SERVER FOR CONFIGURING A TERMINAL - The invention relates to a method for configuring a terminal (EG | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103844 | Method for connecting to wireless LAN access point and apparatus using the same - A method and system for connecting to a wireless LAN Access Point (AP) using position information and an apparatus using the same. The method and system includes scanning APs in a preset period, determining a current position of an AP access apparatus based on the scanned APs, calculating distances between the current position of the AP access apparatus and each of positions of one or more user-designated APs, controlling a scan period in response to the calculated distances, and, when the user-designated APs are scanned, accessing the scanned user-designated APs. In scanning the nearby positioned wireless LAN AP and accessing the scanned AP, the power consumption can be reduced and the access time to AP can also be reduced. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103845 | CELL RELAY MOBILITY PROCEDURES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate performing intra-cluster and inter-cluster reselection for relay eNBs. In intra-cluster reselection, a relay eNB can reselect a disparate relay eNB and indicate its identifier in a bearer list update message. The disparate relay eNB and upstream eNBs (including the donor eNB) can update routing tables based at least in part on the identifier. In addition, the relay eNB can provide identifiers of downstream relay eNBs to facilitate updating routing tables for those identifiers as well. In an inter-cluster reselection, relay eNBs can release connection to downstream relay eNBs and re-attach to a wireless network to receive an identifier from a new donor eNB in the new cluster. Alternatively, the relay eNB can request an identifier from the donor eNB during reselection, notify downstream relay eNBs of the reselection, and/or request identifiers for one or more downstream relay eNBs. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100110928 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ADVERTISE NETWORK ROUTES TO IMPLEMENT A HYBRID NETWORK TOPOLOGY - Example methods and apparatus to advertise network routes to implement a hybrid network topology are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving a route advertisement from a first node and identifying a first destination internet protocol address associated with the route advertisement. When the first destination internet protocol address matches a second destination internet protocol address, the route advertisement is associated with a first route target value equal to an import route target value of a second node. The first network node is a first spoke node in a hub-and-spoke network, and the second network node is a second spoke node in the hub-and-spoke network. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110929 | TRANSMISSION WITH HOPPING FOR PEER-PEER COMMUNICATION - Techniques for transmitting signals using time hopping or time and frequency hopping are described. In one design, a terminal selects different slots to use for transmission in multiple frames with time hopping. Each frame includes multiple slots, and each slot covers a particular time duration. The selected slots are at different time locations in the multiple frames. In another design, a terminal selects different resource units to use for transmission in multiple frames with time and frequency hopping. The selected resource units are at different time and frequency locations in the multiple frames. For both designs, the terminal sends a signal (e.g., a peer discovery signal) in the selected slots or resource units in the multiple frames. The terminal may detect for signals (e.g., peer discovery signals) from other terminals in slots not used for transmission by the terminal. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110930 | ENERGY-EFFICEINT NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY FOR MOBILE WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - A node device ( | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110931 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING AN ADDRESS OF DEVICE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK (WPAN) AND WPAN DEVICE - The present invention relates to a method of efficiently assigning addresses in a WPAN and a WPAN device. The address assignment method of the present invention is performed by a higher device. Address assignment information for determining an address to be assigned to a lower device, is managed. An address is assigned to a lower device that requests connection from the higher device based on the address assignment information. The address assignment information is updated to a address value as the address value is assigned, and the updated address assignment information is transmitted to lower devices. If an update of address assignment information is requested by the lower device that assigned an address value to a device lower thereto, the address assignment information is updated and the updated address assignment information is transmitted to lower devices. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110932 | NETWORK OPTIMISATION SYSTEMS - We describe a 3D computer network optimisation tool using network management data including one or more of: network device data including hardware identification data, interface data characterising one or more interfaces of a said network device, firmware identification data for a said network device, operating system identification data for a said network device; information flow data relating to information flow within the network including network device information flow load data and link bandwidth data/statistical information flow data; as well as environmental data for a network device such as temperature or power consumption data and/or physical network device location data. The tool also uses captured network data and sniffer data from communication links; and connectivity of the network devices. A three-dimensional (3D) visualisation module constructs a 3D representation of said network including 3D representations of said network devices in conjunction with a representation of said connectivity in three dimensions. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100118733 | METHODS AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING ADAPTIVE DECENTRALIZED TRAFFIC SCHEDULING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatus relating to scheduling of air link resources, e.g., traffic segments, in wireless communications are described. Various described methods and apparatus are well suited to wireless peer to peer networks in which traffic scheduling is decentralized, e.g. an ad hoc peer to peer network. A first wireless terminal receives a transmission request and quality of service information from a second wireless terminal corresponding to a connection. The first wireless terminal decides not to receiver yield, determines a request response transmission power level as a function of the received quality of service information, and transmits, at the determined power level, a generated request response signal. By controllably adjusting the transmission power level of a request response, transmitter yielding decisions of lower priority links are impacted, since lower priority links measure and use received power level information corresponding to request responses of higher priority links in their transmitter yielding decisions. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118734 | HOST DISCOVERY ACROSS DIFFERENT ADDRESS SPACES - The “dual stack” capability of a network supporting two or more address spaces is used to perform host discovery in the network address space of one network address format using the network address space of another network format (e.g., via a PING sweep in the network address space of the other network format). The host discovery can be performed using addressing in a smaller network address space (e.g., IPv4 network address format) to discover hosts in a larger network address space (e.g., IPv6 network address format), or vice versa. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118735 | LARGE FRAME PATH MTU DISCOVERY AND COMMUNICATION FOR FCOE DEVICES - Embodiments of the invention relate to performing network communications according to an existing protocol by using frames that are larger than those usually allowed by the existing protocol. Thus, embodiments of the present invention provide for an extension of the existing protocol which allows for the use of larger frames. The larger frames may result from the use of larger payloads and their size may be defined in terms of the payload size. Embodiments provide for use of various negotiation and initialization mechanisms of the existing protocol with additional modifications to allow for the negotiation of the use of larger frames. These modifications may provide for end to end negotiation of a larger frame or payload size. Some embodiments ensure that the negotiations are performed in such a manner that devices that feature the improvements of the present invention can communicate with devices that do not feature these improvements. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118736 | Routing method and wireless network system - A routing method of a wireless network system is provided. Paths of the wireless network system are divided into down-stream and up-stream paths. The up-stream paths are reset for each period, or whenever a network is changed, or whenever transmission of data fails more than a predetermined number of times. Accordingly, it is possible to secure an average lifetime of a wireless network system by previously preventing a bottleneck from occurring at a specific node, increase a transmission speed of data by reducing the hop count to the sink node connected to the information collector, and reduce power consumption of a battery. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118737 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONSTRUCTING SYNCHRONOUS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided are a method and apparatus for using a synchronous sensor network medium access control (MAC) protocol such as a ZigBee or IEEE 802.15.4 low-rate wireless personal area network (WPAN). Also provided are a method and apparatus for constructing a ubiquitous sensor network (USN) of which a life is increased by using power beacons and reducing the number of unnecessary control packets (beacon packets), thereby reducing an initialization time between nodes and preventing beacon collision. According to the present invention, a beacon packet channel having a large output power and a data channel of which a transmission range is restricted by reducing an output power to be less than that of the beacon packet channel, may be simultaneously used. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100128630 | ACCESS POINT PLANNING MECHANISM - A method for inserting an access point unit into a wireless telecommunications network, comprising: performing a self installation process in the access point unit, wherein during said self installation process, the access point unit automatically detects physical and RF layer parameters of access points around it, and selects its own physical and RF layer parameters according thereto, and/or performing a self-interconnection process in the access point unit wherein the access point unit contacts at least one feeder; and said feeder determines whether or not to permit connection of said access point unit to it. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128631 | Approximating Node-Weighted Steiner Network of Terminals - According to one method for approximating a network of terminals, a graph comprising nodes and edges connecting at least some of the nodes is received. The nodes include terminals and non-terminal nodes. The non-terminal nodes are each associated with a weight. The terminals are each initialized to a value. The values of the terminals are incremented by a given amount until the values of the terminals reach a sufficient amount to acquire at least one of the non-terminal nodes that connects at least two of the terminals based on the weight of the at least one of the non-terminal nodes. Upon the values of the terminals reaching the sufficient amount, the at least one of the non-terminal nodes and the edges connecting the at least one of the non-terminal nodes to the at least two of the terminals are acquired to form a connected component in the network of terminals. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128632 | Methods and Devices for Wire-Based Configuration of Wireless Devices - The invention relates to a method for configuring a wireless interface of a first electronic device, comprising establishing a wired Universal Serial Bus (USB) connection with a second electronic device having a wireless interface; negotiating, via said USB connection, a configuration for said wireless interface with said second electronic device, said configuration enabling a wireless connection between said first and said second electronic device; and configuring said wireless interface of said first electronic device according to said configuration. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128633 | Reverse engineering peering at Internet Exchange Point - A technique for examining the relationships of autonomous systems (ASes) participating in an Internet Exchange Point (IXP) utilizes packet tracing servers proximate the IXPs. Where such packet tracing servers cannot be found in the participating ASes, the methodology identifies additional vantage points by looking at a list of ASes that are one hop away from the ASes at the IXP. The choice of one-hop away ASes is made judiciously by picking ones that have better connectivity, based on past-data. Plural-hop ASes may also be used where necessary. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128634 | PROTOCOL FOR CONFIGURING A WIRELESS NETWORK - A target device joins a wireless network by attempting to locate an existing routing device in a predefined neighborhood of the wireless network, designating the existing routing device as a master routing device if the existing routing device is located in the predefined neighborhood, where the master routing device is a primary recipient of data from the target device, and attempting to locate endpoint devices in the predefined neighborhood if the existing routing device is not located in the predefined neighborhood. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128635 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SEGREGATED AND INDEPENDENT COMMAND AND CONTROL OF WIRELESS SERVICE SELECTION, ROUTING, TRANSPORT AND/OR DELIVERY - Systems and methods of configuring a wireless device are disclosed. An exemplary embodiment selects at least one of a Carrier Network and transport technology and a service provider via at least one of the Control Channel and command and instruction link; separately selects at least one of a transport network and Carrier Network selected from one of the plurality of alternative transport networks or Carrier Networks; and wirelessly communicates voice and data using the selected transport technology and the service provider over the selected transport network and/or Carrier Network | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128636 | SENSOR NETWORK WITH RAPID, INTUITIVE CONFIGURATION - A network system for obtaining monitoring information from a patient that includes one or more sensing devices is disclosed. The network is configured by positioning a parent node and a child node within close proximity to each other. An input device on each of the parent and child nodes is actuated to begin an association procedure. When the parent and child devices are within a close proximity to each other, the child device becomes associated with the parent device. Various techniques for determining the proximity of the parent device to the child device are possible to ensure the correct association between the child device and the parent device. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128637 | NETWORK-CENTRIC DETERMINATION OF NODE PROCESSING DELAY - Apparatus and methods are directed to calibrating a delay within a wireless access point for determining a position of a mobile station. One method includes receiving an initial packet at an eavesdropping device, receiving a response packet, sent by another entity, at the eavesdropping device, computing a time difference based upon the packet arrival times, and providing the time difference to a position determination entity. Another method includes providing a request to appropriate eavesdropping devices to send information, receiving, from each appropriate eavesdropping device, a time difference which represents a difference in a time of arrival of a packet transmitted by the wireless access point and a time of arrival of a packet transmitted by the mobile station, determining a processing delay estimate based upon the time differences, and determining a position of the mobile station based upon the processing delay estimate and the received time differences. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128638 | HIERARCHICAL SHORTEST PATH FIRST NETWORK ROUTING PROTOCOL - A hierarchical shortest path first (HSPF) protocol, routers of a network are grouped in areas, and routing and client subscription information are distributed through all levels of the network hierarchy in the same way. Each level of the hierarchy identifies its connections with its peers that have the same level of hierarchy, and represents areas outside its own as individual nodes. The number of levels of hierarchy is not limited to any particular number, and each level performs the same operations to share routing information and generate routes for data. Distribution of link-state and client subscription information begins at the router level, and continues up the levels of the hierarchy until distributed through the network. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100135187 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR MOVING OBJECT - Provided are a system and a method for controlling a network configuration for a moving object. A monitoring device attached to the moving object, that is, a container loading a cargo, recognizes loading and moving circumstances of the container, construct a network with other containers according to the circumstances and performs connection/disconnection of the container to/from a network and maintenance of the connection until the container departs the origin and arrives at a destination through overland transportation and marine transportation. Accordingly, the state of the container is monitored, monitoring information is transmitted to a container administrator and the power of the monitoring device which constructs an optimized network with other monitoring devices according to container circumstances is saved. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135188 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING CONTINUOUS PACKET CONNECTIVITY TECHNOLOGY SUPPORT CAPABILITY INFORMATION - A method and system for acquiring continuous packet connectivity technology support capability information. The method comprises the following steps: sending a radio link establishing request message or a radio link adding request message to a drift radio network controller when it is monitored that a UE needs to establish or add a radio link with a cell dominated by the drift radio network controller, by means of a serving radio network controller; adding a continuous packet connectivity technology support capability information of an adjacent cell into a radio link establishing response message or a radio link adding response message after the radio link establishing request message or the radio link adding request message is received, and returning the radio link establishing response message or the radio link adding response message to the serving radio network controller, by means of the drift radio network controller; acquiring the continuous packet connectivity technology support capability information of the adjacent cell from the radio link establishing response message or the radio link adding response message, after the radio link establishing response message or the radio link adding response message is received, by means of the serving radio network controller. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135189 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CLOCK TRACING RELATION AND APPARATUS FOR COMPUTING CLOCK TRACING RELATION - A method for establishing clock tracing relations and an apparatus for computing clock tracing relations are disclosed. The method includes: computing a Shortest Path Tree (SPT) from a clock source access node to other nodes in a network; selecting nodes governed by the clock source access node according to the SPT and the source information corresponding to the SPT; and establishing clock tracing relations from the clock source access node to the governed node consecutively along the SPT. The apparatus for computing clock tracing relations includes: a path computing unit, a source selecting unit, and a path issuing unit. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100142401 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Determining A Network Identifier Of A Node Providing A Type Of Service For A Geospatial Region - Methods and systems are described for determining a network identifier of a node providing a type of service for a geospatial region. In one aspect, input indicating a query region and a type of service is received. A query message is generated, including information identifying the type of service and the region, and sent for delivery to a network directory service representing a domain having a domain region at least partially including the query region. A response message from the network directory service is received including a network identifier of a node, in the domain, providing the identified type of service. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142402 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Determining A Master Module in a Dynamic Distributed Device Environment - An apparatus for determining a master module in a dynamic distributed device environment may include a processor. The processor may be configured to calculate a connectivity stability factor for a module. The module may be included on a device configured to be connected to a distributed device network. The distributed device network may be defined as a network where devices leave or enter the network at any time, such as a smart space. The processor of the apparatus may also be configured to weigh the connectivity stability factor of the module against neighboring connectivity stability factors associated with neighboring modules, and assign a role of master module to the module based on a determination that the connectivity stability factor of the module describes a more stable module than the connectivity stability factors of the neighboring modules. Associated methods and computer program products may also be provided. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142403 | DISCOVERY AND CONFIGURATION METHOD FOR A NETWORK NODE - A method for discovering neighboring network nodes by a network node connected to a configuration server, wherein said configuration servers compares geographical coordinates of the network node with geographical coordinates of other network nodes stored in a data base and transmits a set of identifiers of matching neighboring network nodes to said network node. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142404 | Discovery of Disconnected Components in a Distributed Communication Network - A system, method, and network node for discovering network nodes and management information distributed in different strongly connected components, SCCs, in a traffic network. When a network node in a first SCC receives a request at an application layer for network management information, the node determines whether it can reach other nodes at the application layer. If not, the node utilizes a functional overlay layer known as the Data Discovery and Distribution, D | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142405 | METHOD FOR JOINING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO A WIRELESS TRANSMISSION NETWORK - A method for a device to join a wireless communication network, after the device accesses to the wireless communication network group through a source node, the method comprising the following steps of: (a) if the device needs a handover, completes the handover successfully by accessing to a target node and establishes a service connection, proceeding to step (b), otherwise proceeding to step (c); (b) a management node of the wireless communication network group to which the target node accessed to by the device belongs updating a stored wireless network topology information of the wireless network group, to complete the joining of said wireless communication device, and the method ending; (c) a management node of the wireless communication network group to which the source node accessed to by the device belongs updating a stored wireless network topology information of the wireless communication network group, to complete the joining of said device. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142406 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BUILDING COMPONENT APPLICATIONS USING METADATA DEFINED MAPPING BETWEEN MESSAGE AND DATA DOMAINS - It is desirable to drive down the complexity involved in developing the wireless application by reducing the need to do any explicit coding, as well as reducing device resources utilized by the application when provisioned. Having an intelligent wireless device runtime environment (Device Runtime) that provides a set of basic services to manage the wireless application as a series if application components, and their interactions, can simplify the development effort and reduce resource allocation. The wireless application is described as a set of components. The data domain for this category of applications is defined using atomic data components. The communication between the device and a server is defined using atomic message components. Both message and data components are described in metadata using a structured definition language such as XML. The relationships between the message and data components are embedded in the XML definitions in the form of message/data mappings. Typically, outgoing messages are derived from some underlying data component and incoming messages affect the current state (or data representation) of the application. It is therefore apparent that the metadata defined mapping relationship is preferable between the expression of data and message components. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142407 | CONNECTION IDENTIFIER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method and system are proposed for establishing a requested connection between a source node and a destination node in a telecommunications network. The system and method are described in relation to a 3GPP network, but are applicable to other types of networks. The method includes generating a source application identifier for the connection within the source node, retrieving a source node identifier for the source node and transmitting the source application identifier and the source node identifier to the destination to provide a source connection identifier for the requested connection between the source node and the destination node. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100150019 | Routing Method in Asymmetric Networks - A method for establishing or reinforcing a path through an asymmetric network of interconnected nodes includes storing navigation data at one or more nodes, for use by an agent in traveling from that node to a subsequent node, while ultimately traveling from a first terminal node (for example, a source node) to a second terminal node (for example, a destination node). As the agent travels from a first terminal node to a second terminal node via an intermediate node, the agent modifies the navigation data intended for use by an agent traveling from the second terminal node to the first terminal node via the intermediate node. Agents traveling complementary routes reinforce each other paths, allowing paths to be determined and reinforced. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150020 | BACKUP ROUTE GENERATION IN BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL - A method is provided for generating a backup route. Here, a route and a route distinguisher type associated with the route are received and a backup route is generated based on attributes of the route. A particular backup route distinguisher type that is associated with the route distinguisher type is assigned to the backup route. The backup route with the backup route distinguisher type are then advertised. Another method is provided that identifies the backup route. When the route and its route distinguisher type are received from the advertisement, an identification is made as to whether the route distinguisher type is assigned to a backup route. The route may then be designated as a backup route based on the identification. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150021 | DEVICE-OPTIMIZED TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION FOR MULTI-MODE, MULTI-MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - An approach is provided for receiving information from a plurality of communication services in a plurality of communication service formats and adjusting the information into another communication service format that is configured for receipt by a device and for communication to a user. A transmission session is established between a device and one of the plurality of communication services. Information from the one communication service is adjusted from a first communication service format into the another communication service format, seamlessly. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150022 | System and Method for a Relay Protocol Stack - A layer two relay node having a relay radio resource configuration entity. The relay radio resource configuration entity is configured to receive resource configuration information from an access node. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150023 | Method and node for the control of a connection in a communication network - A Method for controlling an establishment or a modification of a connection according to a packet based transmission scheme in a communication network ( | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150024 | Network Router and Method of Configuring a Network Router - Disclosed is a method of configuring routing information in a network router linked into a network. The network router has a forwarding table. The method comprises removing the forwarding table entries which are not used. A network router configured in accordance with the method has a forwarding table comprising only forwarding table entries that are used. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150025 | CONFIGURATION PREPROCESSOR LANGUAGE - A system includes network elements and a network provisioning and control system by which connection of network elements to a broadband network is controlled. The network provisioning and control system includes a configuration rendering engine that operates to configure the network elements connected to the network. Network element configuration templates are stored in the network provisioning and control system, each template including predetermined configuration data and conditional configuration data. A network element connected to the network and requiring configuration is detected and a template relating to the specific network element to be configured is determined. The system is interrogated. A configuration statement for the network element based on the selected template is determined using the predetermined configuration data and the determined, discrete values of the conditional configuration data. The network element is configured using the configuration statement. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150026 | UPDATING NODE PRESENCE BASED ON COMMUNICATION PATHWAY - A data communications network, for which presence information is maintained for wireless data communication devices forming nodes of the network, includes: a presence server; and a plurality of nodes formed by the wireless data communication devices, each of the devices configured to send periodic check-in messages to the presence server. The presence server is configured to send an acknowledgment in response to a check-in message. Each of the wireless data communication devices is configured to reset a timer associated with the sending of the check-in messages by it upon (i) communicating, as an intermediate node, a check-in message originating at another node, and (ii) communicating, as an intermediate node, a corresponding acknowledgment originating at the presence server. The presence server is configured to update presence information of wireless data communication device from which a check-in message originates and each intermediate node. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150027 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF PLANNING AND DEPLOYING AN AD HOC MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORK - Wireless ad hoc networking enhancements are disclosed to enable deployment of networks with greater coverage. Analysis is provided which examines the environment and structures in which the wireless network operates and identifies location to place additional access points. Spanning network coverage may be computed along with the identification of coverage holes and hot spots for areas of busy communications. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100157842 | Method and System for Discovering Isolated Network Fragments - A computer readable storage medium includes a set of instructions executable by a processor. The instructions are operable to receive a node indication for each of a plurality of undamaged backbone nodes of a communication network; receive a link indication for each of a plurality of backbone links connected between undamaged backbone nodes of the communication network; and assign a fragment identifier to each of a plurality of backbone fragments, each of the backbone fragments comprising one or more of the backbone nodes, wherein the one or more backbone nodes comprising each backbone fragment indicates connectivity between the one or more backbone nodes. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157843 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING ROUTING IN A NETWORK - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a server in communication with a first network element where the server includes a controller to determine routing values associated with a plurality of second network elements where the second network elements are interfaced with the first network elements where the first network elements and the second network elements utilize Interior Gateway Routing Protocol and where the routing values include at least one of routing algorithm constants, service provider routing identifiers, and size of largest deliverable packets, detect a mismatch among the routing values, determine a target routing value when the mismatch is detected and transmit the target routing value to at least one of the second network elements, where the routing values are adjusted in response to the transmitted routing value to match each other. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157844 | RESILIENT ATTACHMENT TO PROVIDER LINK STATE BRIDGING (PLSB) NETWORKS - A method system for interfacing a client system in a first network domain with a Provider Link State Bridging (PLSB) network domain. At least two Backbone Edge Bridges (BEBs) of the PLSB domain | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157845 | System and Method for Relay Node Selection - A method for recommending a relay node to which a user agent attaches. The method includes recommending the relay node based on a relay node selection rank. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157846 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DETERMINING A NETWORK DATA PATH - Methods and systems for path determining a network data path are described. In one embodiment, equal cost multiple paths (ECMPs) for a proposed TE tunnel on a network may be determined. The proposed TE tunnel may extend between a head-end tunneling capable router and a tail-end tunneling capable router. The network may further comprise inter router links extending between tunneling capable routers. For each inter router link of at least a portion of the inter router links, a usage count may be established for that inter router link. The usage count may be the number of ECMPs for the proposed TE tunnel that use that inter router link. A tunnel path may be selected from the ECMPs for the proposed TE tunnel that has the lowest usage count of the inter router links. The selected tunnel path may be added to a model of the network. Additional methods and systems are disclosed. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157847 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING REDUNDANCY FOR AN ACCESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing redundancy for an access network are disclosed. For example, the method receives an access network structure, and removes one or more unnecessary 2D edges or 3D edges from a simplex cover for the access network structure. The method then performs a search on the simplex cover; and, generates a new access network structure that includes the redundancy. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157848 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AND UTILIZING LOCAL MAPS AND ANNOTATIONS IN LOCATION DETERMINATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for retrieving a local map for a given area. One or more signals wirelessly transmitted from one or more wireless network elements may be received by a mobile device. The mobile device may identify an associated local map based at least in part on the received one or more signals. The associated local map and annotations associated with the associated local map may subsequently be obtained. The associated local map utilizes a predefined coordinate system. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157849 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH DEVICE - A method and a device for data communication between a first instance and a network are provided, wherein the first instance is connected via a first interface with the network. In the novel method, the first instance is connected with the network via at least one second interface. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100165873 | UPLINK AND DOWNLINK CHANNEL CONFIGURATION METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A disclosed downlink channel configuration method in a radio communication system includes a step of including a broadcast channel, a paging channel, and a downlink shared channel as transport channels; a step of including as a physical channel a physical downlink shared channel to which the downlink shared channel of the transport channel is mapped; and a step of sharing the downlink shared channel by plural users without using a dedicated channel separately allocated to each of the users. In a preferred embodiment, as the physical channels, there are further included a physical broadcast channel as an independent radio resource to which the broadcast channel of the transport channel is mapped and a physical paging channel as an independent radio resource to which the paging channel of the transport channel is mapped. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165874 | Differentiating Blade Destination and Traffic Types in a Multi-Root PCIe Environment - Mechanisms for differentiating traffic types per host system blade in a multi-root PCI Express environment are provided. The mechanisms generate a first mapping data structure that, for each single-root virtual hierarchy in the multi-root data processing system, associates a plurality of traffic classes with a plurality of priority groups and maps each traffic class in the plurality of traffic classes to a corresponding virtual channel in a plurality of virtual channels. Moreover, a second mapping data structure is generated that maps each virtual channel in the plurality of virtual channels to corresponding per host system blade virtual links in a plurality of virtual links of the multi-root data processing system. Traffic of a particular priority group is routed from a single-root virtual hierarchy to a particular virtual link in the plurality of the virtual links based on the first mapping data structure and second mapping data structure. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165875 | AD HOC NETWORK INITIATION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to improve network performance for ad hoc network initiation. Example embodiments include a new operational sequence for wireless devices initiating the use of an ad hoc network. The example embodiments require appropriately enabled wireless devices to only respond to probe request frames from other similarly appropriately enabled wireless devices. In this manner, two devices may avoid the time consuming effort of combining two different ad hoc networks into a single ad hoc network so that the two devices can communicate. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165876 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTED DYNAMIC NETWORK PROVISIONING - In one embodiment, a method includes detecting a virtual resource hosted by a host device, selecting a configuration template associated with the virtual resource, and providing a provisioning instruction to a virtual switch module hosted by the host device based on the configuration template. The host device is operatively coupled to a network device. The detecting is at the network device; the selecting is at the network device; and the providing is at the network device. The virtual switch module is in communication with the virtual resource. The configuration template associated with the virtual resource is selected from a library of configuration templates accessible to the network device. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165877 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTED DYNAMIC NETWORK PROVISIONING - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a device identifier associated with a virtual resource, determining a configuration template identifier based on the device identifier, and selecting a configuration template from a library of configuration templates based on the configuration template identifier. The receiving, determining, and selecting are at a network device. The virtual resource is hosted by a host device. The device identifier is received from the host device. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165878 | Communication Module with Network Isolation and Communication Filter - Aspects of the invention provide apparatuses, systems, and computer readable media for protecting a programmable logic controller (PLC) | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165879 | WIRELESS PROVISIONING A DEVICE FOR A NETWORK USING A SOFT ACCESS POINT - A computing device for provisioning a wireless device for connection to a wireless network via a legacy access point. The wireless device supports a wireless protected setup protocol for obtaining the network profile of the network. A user requests the computing device discover wireless devices for provisioning. In response to the user input, the computing device is configured as a soft access point and broadcasts a beacon signal indicating that the access point supports a wireless protected setup protocol, such as Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A request for provisioning is then received by the computing device from the wireless device. A network profile is transmitted from the computing device to the wireless device in accordance with the wireless protected setup protocol. The wireless device may use the profile to connect to the network via the legacy access point using the network profile. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165880 | METHODS FOR SUPPORTING RAPID NETWORK TOPOLOGY CHANGES WITH LOW OVERHEAD COSTS AND DEVICES OF THE SAME - The present invention discloses a wireless communication method of supporting rapid changes in network topology. The present method may include broadcasting the first protocol message using the first broadcast cycle, the first protocol message being used for establishing a routing information between a node and destination node; and broadcasting the second protocol message using the second broadcast cycle, the second protocol message being used for establishing a link information between the node and a neighbor node, wherein the first broadcast cycle is different from the second broadcast cycle, and the first broadcast cycle is dynamically adjusted depending on a corresponding a detailed message contained in a plurality of segments in the first protocol message so as to reduce a number of broadcast of the first protocol message and the second protocol message. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165881 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP A LOGIC CONNECTING PATH IN A CONNECTION-ORIENTED PACKET-SWITCHED COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The subject matter relates to a method for setting up a logic end-to-end connecting path of a selectable first bandwidth from a starting nodal point to a target nodal point in a connection-oriented packet-switched communication network, including: determining a plurality of physical end-to-end data transmission paths from the starting nodal point to the target nodal point having second bandwidths corresponding to the logic connecting path to be set up; selecting one or more of the determined physical data transmission paths such that the second bandwidth of the physical data transmission paths in sum corresponds at least to the first bandwidth of the logic connecting path; and signaling the at least one selected physical data transmission path for setting up the logic connecting path. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165882 | CENTRALIZED CONTROL OF PEER DISCOVERY PILOT TRANSMISSION - Techniques for centralized control of peer discovery pilot transmission are described. In an aspect, a designated network entity (e.g., a base station or a network controller) may control transmission of peer discovery pilots by stations located within its coverage area. In one design, the network entity may receive signaling triggering peer discovery pilot transmission. The network entity may direct each of at least one station to transmit a peer discovery pilot to allow one or more stations to detect the at least one station. The peer discovery pilot may include at least one synchronization signal or at least one reference signal. The network entity may receive pilot measurements from the one or more stations for peer discovery pilots from peer stations and/or reference signals from base stations. The network entity may determine whether or not to select peer-to-peer communication for two stations based on the pilot measurements. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100172266 | DYNAMIC NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR A NETWORK DEVICE - A network services profile can be associated with a unique device identifier, such as a MAC address, rather than an IP address. When a network device is connected to a network, a network management server can recognize the unique device identifier and retrieve the network services profile. The network management server can automatically enables network services indicated in the network services profile. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172267 | System and Method for Cooperative Data Transfer - A method for cooperative data transfer includes establishing a primary wireless connection with a primary access station. The primary wireless connection uses a primary synchronization channel that is transmitted during a first frame of a super frame. The super frame comprises a plurality of frames. The method also includes detecting a secondary synchronization channel generated by an alternate access station during a subsequent frame of the super frame. The method further includes determining whether the detected secondary synchronization channel has a signal strength greater than a threshold signal strength. The method additionally includes receiving permission to begin a cooperative data transfer operation with both the primary access station and the alternate access station. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172268 | Systems and methods for coordinating the coverage and capacity of a wireless base station - A communications base station is installed at a selected new location and the base station, prior to going “on line” monitors the wireless traffic from other base stations within interference range of the new base station's coverage area. The new base station also monitors the wireless traffic between mobile devices within its coverage area and these other base stations. Based upon these monitored conditions, as well as other known conditions, the new base station then determines the transmitting parameter configuration it should imply in order to achieve a desired optimization between capacity and coverage area. After the new base station is on line, a central control can monitor the entire network to determine if any additional changes are necessary and if so the new transceiver, or any other transceiver, can be instructed to monitor itself with respect to interference and to take corrective action to improve overall network coverage and capacity. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172269 | METHOD FOR REPRESENTING NODES IN NETWORK - A method and computer program product for creating a data structure for representing a plurality of nodes in a network. One or more data fields are created corresponding to the plurality of nodes for storing information related to the nodes. One or more references are also created for each node such that each reference refers to a node adjacent to the corresponding node. The data fields and the references are then stored in a plurality of secondary data structures. Thereafter, each node is associated with a secondary data structure which includes the data fields and the references corresponding to the associated node. Subsequently, the data structure may be created for storing the secondary data structures. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100177659 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATING INDIVIDUALS INSIDE A BUILDING - A system and a method for locating one or more mobile objects in a detection space is disclosed. The system has a number of detection terminals ( | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177660 | Wireless network devices for use in a wireless communication network - Various wireless network components that offer increased flexibility, ease of use, functionality and performance in many demanding applications in diverse fields of use, namely: a wireless multi-function network device for use on a wireless communication network, that can serve multiple functions and dynamically switch and reconfigure from a network router into a network coordinator in the event that the originally designated network coordinator is permanently or temporally disabled; a wireless mesh-type communication network, including a plurality of wireless network router devices, each capable of performing the functions of a network controller/coordinator; a wireless network router device for use on a wireless communication network, and employing an integrated phased-array antenna structure, supporting the spatial isolation of multi-regions, and utilizing beam steering principles of operation, for illuminating multiple wireless network end-devices over separate regions; a network gateway device that supports a USB-type communication interface and RF-based wireless communication interface; a network protocol translation (NPT) based gateway device for use in a wireless communication network; and wireless network coordinator device for automatically establishing a Personal Area Network (PAN) on a wireless communication network, and having a compact housing with an electrical wall plug integrated therein having electrical prongs for plugging into a standard electrical wall socket. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177661 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC CREATION OF ROLE BASED TALK GROUPS - A system and method for dynamic creation of role based call groups are provided. The method includes associating attributes with a plurality of radio units and defining a communication group based on the attributes. The communication group has a plurality of required attributes establishing minimum criteria for the communication group. The method further includes dynamically maintaining the communication group with radio units that satisfy the required attributes. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177662 | Reverse Call Set Up Via An Interconnection Between Different Networks - To set up connections via interconnections between different networks ( | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177663 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling Connectivity in a Communication Network - A method and apparatus for providing connectivity with a public communication services network ( | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177664 | METHODS FOR CONFIGURING SENDER AND RECEIVER ANTENNAS, CORRESPONDING STORAGE MEANS AND NODES - Methods for configuring antennas of first and second nodes of a wireless communications network clocked by transmission cycles, each cycle being divided into time slots, the first node and second nodes having first and second time slots for transmitting data in the first mode, the first node having a third time slot for transmitting data to the second node in a second mode, are proposed. The configuring method, on the second node side, comprises steps of determining a receiving configuration of the antenna of the second node, verifying that the determined receiving configuration is invariant, relative to a receiving configuration previously used for receiving data transmitted from the first node to the second node in the second mode; in the event of negative verification: sending a predetermined signal in the second mode, by using a sending configuration that is determined based on the determined receiving configuration; configuring, during the third time slot, the antenna of the second node by using this determined receiving configuration. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177665 | Method for Managing Hidden Stations in a Centrally Controlled Network - The embodiments of the present invention provide methods, devices, and systems enabling a central coordinator to manage hidden stations via a proxy central coordinator, where a hidden station is discovered based on beacons and made known to other networked devices via transmitted lists. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177666 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRACKING CLOCK SOURCES - A method and an apparatus for tracking a clock source are disclosed herein. The method includes determining a best clock source to be tracked by a device according to a best clock source tracked by a slave candidate port in the device and distributing the best clock source tracked by the device through a master candidate port in a master state. Through the embodiments of the present disclosure, the clock source selection of the device converges quickly. Moreover, because the slave candidate port is determined according to the network planning, the planning of the transport network is observed. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100182932 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product Providing Group Resource Allocation for Reducing Signaling Overhead - Exemplary embodiments of this invention provide a reduction in signaling overhead by allocating radio resources to subscriber stations (SSs) based on a group of connection identifiers (CIDs), where the group corresponds to a plurality of connections. The use of these exemplary embodiments can be particularly beneficial for certain applications, such as voice over internet protocol (VoIP) applications, by removing unnecessary signaling overhead. In one exemplary embodiment of the invention, a method includes: receiving signaling that assigns a subscriber station to a particular group of subscriber stations or that removes an already assigned subscriber station from the particular group of subscriber stations; and transmitting an acknowledgment that confirms receipt of the signaling. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182933 | Method And Switching Device For Stack Port Configuration - The invention provides a method and switching device for configuring stack ports. A switching device in a stacking system searches in the neighbor information table to determine whether the neighbor ID carried in a stack link negotiation packet is contained in the table after it receives the stack link negotiation packet on one of its physical ports that is enabled with the stacking function. If the neighbor ID is contained in the table, the switching device adds the physical port to the stack port corresponding to the neighbor ID in the neighbor information table; if it is not contained in the table, the switching device creates a stack port not in use, creates a binding between the neighbor ID and the stack port, and adds the physical port to the stack port. The present invention can automatically configure stack ports, greatly reducing the configuration work of administrators, and avoiding stacking device faults caused by manual configuration errors at the same time. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182934 | DISTRIBUTED CONNECTION-ORIENTED SERVICES FOR SWITCHED COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Method and apparatus providing connection-oriented services for packet switched data communications networks. Directory services include distributed discovery of MAC addresses and protocol alias addresses. Topology services include a link state topology exchange among switches, which provides each switch with a complete topology graph of the network. This enables an access switch receiving a data packet to determine a complete path from a source end system to a destination end system. Another service includes resolution of broadcast frames to unicast frames, in order to reduce the amount of broadcast traffic. Policy restrictions may be applied prior to connection setup. Path determination services enable multiple paths from a source to a destination. Connection management includes source routed mapping of connections on the desired path. A distributed call rerouting service is provided wherein if a link on an active path fails, each switch receives a topology change notification and unmaps any connection involving the failed link. A broadcast/unknown service provides restricted flooding of nonresolvable packets. Furthermore, connection-oriented switching is provided based on the source and destination MAC addresses as a connection identifier. Still further, resolution of networks outside the switch domain is enabled by access switches listening for network and server route advertisements and maintaining best routes to said networks and servers. The best route metrics may be combined with best path metrics to determine a path from a first access switch to an egress switch connected to the external network. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182935 | Computer-Implemented Method For Facilitating Ancillary Use Of A Wireless Service Device For Excess Transmission Bandwidth - A computer-implemented method for facilitating ancillary use of a wireless service device is provided. A multiplicity of wireless service devices interoperable on a service network are discovered. A primary function performable by a subscriber and an ancillary function performable by a non-subscriber through use of each device through arrangement with the service network and based on availability of capacity for excess transmission bandwidth are determined. The devices that includes an available capacity to perform the ancillary function over the service network are identified. The ancillary function is performed using independent processing at least one of the devices. The ancillary function is also performed using distributed processing in conjunction with at least one other of the devices through the combination, modification and integration of data from the two or more such devices. The subscribers are compensated with payment in exchange for the performance of the ancillary function on their respective device. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182936 | TOPOLOGY DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION - A network comprises a plurality of interconnected switches that implement a topology database synchronization technique in which each switch determines whether its topology database has already been transmitted to a neighboring switch when a new link is formed to the neighboring switch. When a new electrical connection is detected, the local switch determines whether any of its other ports have already been connected to the same neighboring switch. If no other port on the local switch has been connected to the neighboring switch, the local switch transmits its topology database to the neighboring switch. If the local switch determines that it has already been connected to the neighboring switch via another one of its ports, the local switch does not yet again copy of the database to the neighboring switch. Also, link state record updates are propagated via only one inter-switch link to a neighboring switch, not all possible links. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100189010 | NETWORK EDGE SWITCH CONFIGURATION BASED ON CONNECTION PROFILE - Connection profiles are created and stored. The connection profiles are for connections for sources to connect to a network. The connection profiles identify network attributes for the connections and each connection profile includes a status of available or subscribed. A connection profile is assigned to a requested connection for a source. The network attributes for the assigned connection are sent to an edge switch for the source to configure the edge switch to accept traffic for the source. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189011 | MULTI-TIER WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH A SECURE NETWORK DISCOVERY PROTOCOL - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of an infrastructure-less wireless home mesh networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, ad hoc wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. A further embodiment includes identification of a wireless home mesh network. Once identified, one or more proprietary messages may be exchanged in a secure manner to establish connections with a home electronics device as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the home network. A home electronics device may wirelessly communicate to route data within one or more nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189012 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND CONNECTION SETUP METHOD FOR USE IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless communication terminal comprises a trigger reception section, a join request reception section, and a connection setup section. The trigger reception section receives a predetermined trigger. The join request reception section receives a join request to a wireless network by wireless communication from an external terminal which doesn't join the wireless network of the wireless communication terminal. The connection setup section which performs connection setup to join the wireless network for each join request received by the join request reception section from a plurality of external terminals during a reception period corresponding to one trigger received by the trigger reception section, and doesn't perform the connection setup for the join request received from the external terminal after expiration of the reception period. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189013 | Plug-In-Playable Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus for communicating between devices is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises: detecting, at a switch, a notification signal from the previously undetected repeater, configuring the previously undetected repeater to operate with the switch; and receiving, at the switch, a periodic communication signal from the previously undetected repeater that establishes a communication connection between the previously undetected repeater and the switch to form a new wireless coverage cell. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100195531 | METHOD OF ROUTING VIRTUAL LINKS IN A FRAME-SWITCHING NETWORK WITH GUARANTEED DETERMINISM - A method for routing virtual links in a frame switching network including a plurality of source terminals and/or destination of the frames, frame switches being connected together through physical connections, each virtual link being defined, for a point-to-point type, by a path through the network between a source terminal and a destination terminal and, for a multipoint type, by a plurality of paths through the network between a source terminal and a plurality of destination terminals. The method carries out routing of the links while observing a segregation constraint with regard to triplets of consecutive switches belonging to the oriented loops, so as to allow verification of determinism of the network. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195532 | SIGNALLING WITHIN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Sounding reference signal presence information is incorporated into an uplink data resource assignment for a user equipment, and the uplink data assignment including the sounding reference signal presence information is sent to the user equipment. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195533 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE METHOD - A control unit ( | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195534 | METHOD FOR ACCELERATING TERMINAL OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ACCESSING NETWORK - A method for accelerating network accessing of a terminal in a wireless communication system, comprises: a wireless terminal receiving system parameter information, and after obtaining system information of a base station identifier (BS ID) and a network access provider identifier (NAP ID), immediately judging validity of the NAP ID, or validity of both the NAP ID and the BS ID; if a result of the judgment is “valid”, the terminal proceeding to a subsequent flow of the network discovery and selection according to information stored in the terminal, otherwise, carrying out a new flow of network discovery and selection. The method avoids continuing to perform processes such as message receiving and decoding in the case that a NAP ID or a BS ID is invalid according to a flow in the current protocol, thereby increasing the speed of network accessing of a terminal. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195535 | Methods, Networks and Network Nodes for Selecting a Route - The invention relates to methods, networks and network nodes for setting up a route in a packet-switched network comprising network nodes which are connected to one another for data engineering purposes, where the route connects a starting node to a destination node through intermediate nodes. The route is set up with a distance correlation to a reference route which has already been set up in the network. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195536 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS OF REPORTING LOCATION INFORMATION THROUGH FAST-FEEDBACK CHANNELS IN WIMAX SYSTEM - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure may allow for reducing the amount of overhead associated with transmitting location information from a mobile station to a base station. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100202320 | UTILIZING AD-HOC NETWORK PATHWAY SUPPORT VIA COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A user end-point device may determine a plurality of personal communication devices that are operable to provide ad-hoc network pathway support when communicatively coupled to the user end-point device, and negotiate with the personal communication devices for incentives for facilitating ad-hoc network communication via one or more connections between the devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the personal communication devices. The personal communication devices receive traffic intended for the user end-point device, and the received traffic is stored, buffered, and/or queued in the personal communication devices. Various types of communication are available during ad-hoc network pathway support, comprising multicast and snoop communications. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed based on incentives and/or availability of resources in the personal communication devices. The user end-point device is operable to reconstruct data from plurality of packets received directly and via the personal communication devices. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202321 | IPv6 ADDRESSING OVER NON-IPv6 SYSTEMS - A system includes an access node having an associated identifier. The access node is configured to insert the identifier into a network connection request. The system includes an IP edge service node connected to the access node and configured to receive the network connection request. The IP edge service node is further configured to store the inserted identifier and to insert the identifier into an Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) address request transmitted according to dynamic host configuration protocol version 6 (DHCPv6) through an established network connection based on the network connection request. The system further includes a server configured to receive the IPv6 address request and assign an IPv6 address based on the IPv6 address request. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202322 | Method for Terminating Connection to Wireless Relay Station - A method for terminating connections to wireless relay stations (RS), applied in a system comprising a wireless communication network set, which comprises a base station (BS) and RSs subordinated to the base station. The method comprises: (a) a wireless RS, RS | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202323 | PATH ESTABLISHMENT METHOD, ACCESS NETWORK SWITCHING METHOD, ACCESS NETWORK SWITCHING APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, AND PROXY ACCESS NETWORK SWITCHING APPARATUS - In a mobile communication system including a mobile station, an access apparatus for performing connection control between the mobile station and an access network, and an access network switching apparatus for switching access networks to communicate with the mobile station, the mobile station establishes a first path to communicate with the access apparatus, when the mobile station enters a coverage area of the access apparatus. The access apparatus establishes a second path to communicate with the access network switching apparatus when the first path is established. The access network switching apparatus switches the access networks when a predetermined condition is satisfied. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100208615 | Method and apparatus for provisioning a network element - Methods and apparatuses are disclosed for configuring a Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) interface within Virtual Private LAN Service using Multi-Protocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP). Previously, the only ways to enable PBB interfaces for transmission were by learning, which poses security and scalability concerns due to flooding, or by manual configuration, which is impractical for large networks. Embodiments of the present invention enable custom topologies to be built in a controlled manner, which has not previously been possible for PBB over VPLS. By using MP-BGP messages to exchange PBB interface information between nodes, peering relationships are established, and communities may be built with any desired topology. Previously, PBB has only been used as a connectionless bridge; embodiments of the present invention use PBB as a connection between edge nodes. Network designers are provided increased flexibility, and security and congestion are improved, benefiting end users. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208616 | Node registering method - A method is described for registering a node of an underlying network at an overlay network, characterized in that the node of the underlying network registers at a registration node which initiates a propagation of registration information towards the overlay network. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208617 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REALIZING LOCATION MANAGEMENT OF MULTIHOMED TERMINALS IN UNIVERSAL NETWORK - In Universal Network, there is disclosed a method and system for realizing location management of multihomed terminals, the system comprises home domains and foreign domains, in which the home domains of a multihomed terminal refer to the domains managing the multihomed terminal; the other domains are the foreign domains of the multihomed terminal; each domain includes at least one Identifier Mapping Server and one Accessing-Switching Router; the Identifier Mapping Server memorizes and manages the mapping information; and the Accessing-Switching Router allocates the mapping information for multihomed terminals. This invention facilitates the implement of multihoming in the Internet and makes the network resources be used efficiently. Especially, the Internet service providers can manage the multihomed terminals easily and efficiently. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208618 | METHOD FOR DETECTING HIDDEN STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYSTEM THEREFOR - Disclosed is a method for detecting a hidden station in a specific station constituting a wireless communication network that includes receiving a frame after a lapse of an idle state interval longer than a predetermined waiting time; determining that there is a hidden station, if a size of the received frame is equal to a size of an Acknowledge (ACK) frame; and determining that there is no hidden station, if the size of the received frame is not equal to the size of the ACK frame. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208619 | Method to Dynamically Create a Virtual Network - A method creates a virtual network dynamically, with automated configuration for the new virtual network to function. The virtual network creation is initiated by a network node sending a request for a virtual network to a network controller. The network controller services the request, creating the virtual network by automatically configuring at least one network switch in the physical network. The network controller automatically determines a configuration for the virtual network using virtual network information, and creates the virtual network by configuring network switches according to the configuration. The virtual network can be configured for particular applications. From a user's point of view, the user connects to a network node. The network node then initiates the creation of the virtual network transparently to the user. The resource-intensive manual configurations of the conventional approach in creating new virtual networks are thus avoided. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100214948 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONFIGURING A DEVICE IN A NETWORK - The invention provides a method, apparatus and computer program product for ensuring that a device ( | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214949 | Distributed data center access switch - In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a processor configured for operation in a control plane in a distributed virtual switch in communication with a plurality of virtual machines each having a virtual interface. The processor is operable to identify other control planes in the distributed virtual switch, assign a virtual interface identifier to one of the virtual interfaces, receive a configuration for the virtual interface, and share the configuration with the other control planes in the distributed virtual switch. The virtual interface identifier provides a unique identifier for the virtual interface across all of the control planes. The apparatus further includes memory for storing the configuration of the virtual interface. A method for operating a network device associated with a control in the distributed virtual switch is also disclosed. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214950 | HIGH AVAILABILITY AND MULTIPATHING FOR FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET - A physical Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) switch defines a multipath virtual FCoE switch to provide uninterrupted storage access between N_PORTs of an FCoE host and a Fibre Channel (FC) storage target, for example, in response to an F_PORT failure. Through the multipath virtual FCoE switch, the fabric is configured with multiple physical paths available between the FCoE hosts and FC targets. The multipath virtual FCoE switch is defined between or among multiple physical FCoE switches coupled to the Ethernet fabric. One of the F_PORTs is designated as being in the primary FCoE path, while any other F_PORTs sharing the virtual FCoE switch are reserved for standby paths in case the primary FCoE path is disabled. When a failure to a primary FCoE path is detected, a standby path is promoted to become a new primary FCoE path and subsequent traffic is routed in both directions through the new primary FCoE path. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214951 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION INVESTIGATING DEVICE, NETWORK CONFIGURATION INVESTIGATING PROGRAM, NETWORK CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND NETWORK CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A network configuration management method has a step of sequentially propagating a network ticket that a network configuration monitoring node has issued to each of a predetermined number of nodes (predetermined number of nodes| 08-26-2010 | |
| 20100214952 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ORGANIZING A NETWORK - Methods, apparatus and computer program products for providing an autonomously organizing network enable a cellular network to maintain stable operation despite unpredictable addition or removal of network devices. In addition, a network operator can create a scalable deployment that provides for operational efficiency and reduced cost burden of new equipment by enabling many existing processes to remain relevant. A method for providing such a network provides for collecting radio data from a first peer device, collecting topological data from the first peer device or a second peer device, creating a message from the topological and the radio data, and sending the message to a network device. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214953 | DEVICE DISCOVERY AND CHANNEL SELECTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A method and apparatus for device discovery and channel selection in a wireless networking environment are described. As part of an automatic network configuration process, a super node sequentially traverses the available channels, broadcasting discovery messages including the channel switching schedule. Wireless nodes that receive those broadcast messages switch channels in lock step with the super node, sending discovery replies on those channels over which the broadcast discovery messages are successfully received. An association is generated identifying accessible nodes and the channels through which those nodes may be accessed. An optimum channel may then be selected based on this association information. Sub-nodes may repeat the broadcast discovery messages, and relay any discovery replies to the super node. The super node may then identify sub-nodes that may be used as proxies to access nodes that would otherwise be inaccessible. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214954 | Reliable Neighbor Node Discovery - Methods and systems for reliable neighbor discovery in wireless ad hoc networks are provided herein. In one aspect, embodiments of the present invention provide methods and systems for analyzing the quality of a communication link. In embodiments, several factors affecting link quality may be incorporated in the analysis, and basic and/or complex statistical and/or probabilistic analysis may be used. In another aspect, embodiments of the present invention provide methods and systems for neighbor node discovery that adapt to network and/or node operating conditions and that dynamically maintain a neighbor node set at a given node according to these conditions. In a further aspect, embodiments of the present invention extend the utility of neighbor node discovery beyond the customary role of data routing support into the problem of deploying an ad hoc network by providing a display module for displaying node connectivity information. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214955 | Methods and Arrangements in a Mobile Telecommunications Network - The basic concept of the present invention is to utilize the terminal as an auxiliary information collector in networks where the regular network-based information collection is not possible and/or for providing information that complements the information that the network-based Access Awareness Entity collects by itself. The terminal collects information related to the access network directly, through retrieval of explicitly available information, and indirectly, through measurements and statistics. The collected information is delivered to the network-based Access Awareness Entity. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100220630 | SELF-CONFIGURING, SELF-OPTIMIZING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A system and associated method provides for a wireless local area network (WLAN) that permits mobile units to communicate with an external, wired network. Nodes in the WLAN include multiple components, such as a base module, antenna module, and one or more wireless modules. Indeed, this system can employ two or more wireless modules that employ different short-range wireless protocols, such as IEEE 802.11-type and Bluetooth protocols. The nodes may perform self-discovery to determine modules within the node and associated functionality, as well as identify neighboring nodes to thereby establish a mesh-type network. Nodes can be configured to provide connectivity to the wired network, while others (access points) communicate wirelessly with mobile devices. The nodes may then be interconnected wirelessly, or via wires. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220631 | Method for Bring-Up of Voice Over Internet Protocol Telephones - A system and method for implementing telephony devices in a distributed network environment is disclosed. The present invention provides for voice transmissions to be given a dedicated virtual local area network (“VLAN”) for packet transmission and reception to prevent poor quality of service. Non-voice data packets are transmitted on a separate VLAN. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100226279 | System and method for effectively populating a mesh network model - A system and method for populating a mesh network model includes peer devices that are configured to transmit peer device signals by utilizing a wireless broadcasting procedure. Mobile devices wirelessly detect the peer device signals to produce wireless scan data corresponding to the peer devices. A location server may then receive the wireless scan data for performing a location estimation calculation procedure with the wireless scan data to thereby determine location coordinates for effectively populating the mesh network model. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226280 | REMOTE SECURE ROUTER CONFIGURATION - Systems and methods for securing a data communication network are described herein. An illustrative system includes a first router and an external storage device. The external storage device contains data that configures the first router. The external storage device is remotely coupled to the first router to configure the first router. The data that configures the first router includes the definition of a secure data path between the first router and a second router. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226281 | TRUNKING WITH PORT AGGREGATION FOR FABRIC PORTS IN A FIBRE CHANNEL FABRIC AND ATTACHED DEVICES - Trunking with port aggregation for fabric ports in a Fibre Channel (FC) fabric and attached devices is described. In some examples, a method of establishing a connection between a node and the FC fabric includes: negotiating a first link between a first trunking node port in the node with a first trunking fabric port in the FC fabric; creating a trunking port channel with the first link as a first member, the trunking port channel supporting a plurality of virtual fabrics; logging in a logical interface for each of the plurality of virtual fabrics to the FC fabric over the trunking port channel; negotiating a second link between a second trunking node port in the node and a second trunking fabric port in the FC fabric; and adding the second link to the trunking port channel as a second member aggregated with the first member. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226282 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXPORTING STRUCTURED DATA IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An apparatus is provided in one example embodiment and includes a network element configured to receive a plurality of packets. The network element is configured to couple to a module, the module being configured to generate a data record that is based on information associated with the packets and capable of being interpreted according to a template in which multiple information elements can be positioned to create a hierarchical relationship within structured data. The structured data further includes references to the information elements. The network element further including an export module configured to export the data record to a next destination. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226283 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for use in a communications network in which a Mobile Node accesses the communications network via a proxy node. The proxy node is arranged to handle mobility signalling on behalf of the Mobile Node. At a mobility anchor function, such as a Local Mobility Anchor, a first Care-of-Address associated with the Mobile Node is registered. When the mobility anchor function receives a registration request to register a second Care-of-Address associated with the Mobile Node, it sends a request message to the proxy node acting on behalf of the Mobile Node. The request message instructs the proxy node to check whether the Mobile Node is reachable using the first Care-of-Address. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226284 | WIRELESS SOCIAL NETWORKING - A first device may communicate by joining a wireless mesh network that includes at least one wireless device configured to operate a wireless routing protocol, discovering a group of other wireless devices configured to participate in the wireless mesh network, and accessing an interest metric for a second wireless device in the group of other wireless devices. The interest metric is based in part on a network topology from the wireless mesh network. The interest metric is related to an interest threshold and it is determined whether relating the interest metric to the interest threshold supports enabling messaging communications. If so, messaging communications may be enabled. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100232316 | FORCED MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) LEARNING IN BRIDGED ETHERNET NETWORKS - A system, method, and Ethernet bridge utilizing forced MAC learning to set up a path from an originating node, PON ( | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232317 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH NETWORK TOPOLOGY VISUALIZER - An apparatus and method for a wireless home mesh network with a network topology visualizer is described. In one embodiment, the method may include displaying the network topology of a wireless home mesh network. The mobile nodes and stationary nodes of the wireless home mesh network may wirelessly communicate to share topology information regarding the wireless home mesh network. The topology information may include local connectivity information of a node, such as the direct neighbors of the node and the neighbors' neighbor information. In one embodiment, the local connectivity information is combined with the received node information to form an interactive global topology map of the wireless home mesh network to display for a user. In another embodiment, the combined topology information may be stored for offline processing. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232318 | RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL (RACH) OPTIMIZATION FOR A SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK (SON) - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate optimizing parameters for random access in a wireless communication environment. A network manager can select centrally optimized parameters for random access that mitigate interference among RACH attempts and/or mitigate uplink interference due to RACH in a SON. Moreover, a base station can select locally optimized parameters for random access that mitigate a number of access attempts, mitigate interference among RACH attempts, and/or mitigate uplink interference due to RACH. The centrally optimized parameters can include PRACH configurations, root sequence parameters, ranges for one or more MAC parameters (e.g., initial transmit power, power ramp step, maximum number of preamble transmissions, contention resolution timer, . . . ), and so forth. Further, the locally optimized parameters can include sequence length, one or more MAC parameters (e.g., initial received target power of the random access preamble, power ramp step, contention resolution timer, maximum number of preamble transmissions, . . . ), etc. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232319 | RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM RECORDED THEREIN, RELAY NODE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A recording medium, relay node and method are provided. The recording medium having recorded therein a communication program causing non-real time communication to be executed by first and second node groups in a network for conducting real time communication between the nodes through relay devices connecting the first and second node groups. The communication program causing a computer of a local node to execute causing a local node selected from the first node group to set a path leading from the local node to another node selected from the second node group, causing the local node to receive data on the non-real time communication from the other nodes of the first node group than the local node to the other nodes of the second node group than the another node; and transferring from the local node to the another node, the data received, using the path set in the setting. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232320 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SYSTEM FOR TRACKING CONTAINER - A wireless data communications network system for establishing communication between a server and a plurality of containers that are loaded onto a cargo vessel. The system includes a data communications device configured to establish and manage a pre-configured wireless data communications network and to communicate with the server through a local area network, and a plurality of electronic tracking devices each having a wireless transceiver and routing capabilities and configured to be joined to a container and to connect to the wireless data communications network upon being activated. The data communications device is configured to intermittently perform a network scan to locate each tracking device connected to the network and reconfigure the network topology to include each connected tracking devices such that the data communications device maintains mutual communication with each connected tracking device using the routing capabilities of the tracking devices. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232321 | Controlling Visibility of a Wireless Device in Discoverable Mode - A wireless device in a discoverable mode controls its visibility by determining whether to ignore or respond to an inquiry, received from an inquiring device, based at least in part on one or more properties of the inquiring device. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100238836 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TIMELY DELIVERY OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT VIA A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for timely delivery of multimedia content via a femtocell are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive data via an upstream path and transmit data via a downstream path. One of the upstream path and downstream path may comprise a cellular path and the other may comprise a non-cellular path. One or both of the upstream path and the downstream path may be audio video bridging (AVB) paths. Data may be stored in the femtocell based on timing characteristics of one or both of the upstream path and the downstream path. Data may be delivered to the femtocell utilizing best effort delivery and the data may be forwarded by the femtocell with guaranteed quality of service. Resources in the femtocell may be reserved and/or synchronized, utilizing AVB protocols, for communication of one or more data streams. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238837 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR VIRTUAL NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND PARTITION HANDOVER - A method, apparatus and system for virtual network configuration and partition handover are provided. The virtual network configuration method includes the following steps: The serving edge device obtains a target virtual network identifier and a corresponding interface identifier, uses the target virtual network identifier and the corresponding interface identifier to generate a Layer-2 Control (L2C) protocol packet, and sends out the L2C protocol packet; the communication proxy device that receives the L2C protocol packet obtains the target virtual network identifier and the corresponding interface identifier from the L2C protocol packet, and sets up a mapping relation between a target virtual network and an interface. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238838 | MULTI-TIER WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH A SECURE NETWORK DISCOVERY PROTOCOL - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of an infrastructure-less wireless home mesh networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, ad hoc wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. A further embodiment includes identification of a wireless home mesh network. Once identified, one or more proprietary messages may be exchanged in a secure manner to establish connections with a home electronics device as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the home network. A home electronics device may wirelessly communicate to route data within one or more nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238839 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIP MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION - The invention includes a method and apparatus for providing SIP message prioritization between network elements along at least a portion of an end-to-end path between a SIP client and a SIP server. The method includes determining a SIP message prioritization policy and distributing the SIP message prioritization policy toward a prioritizing network element adapted to assign message priority levels to respective received SIP messages using the SIP message prioritization policy, process the received SIP messages according to the respective assigned message priority levels, and transmit the prioritized SIP messages toward at least one network element in a manner for propagating the respective assigned message priority levels to the at least one network element. The prioritizing network elements include SIP network elements and non-SIP network elements. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100246435 | Method and apparatus for new cell discovery - To address the need for new techniques to improve the discovery of neighbor cells, methods such as those depicted in diagrams | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246436 | USER-CONTROLLED NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR HANDLING MULTIPLE CLASSES OF SERVICE - A process and system for user-controlled configuration of an Internet-protocol (IP) network wherein the user may supply input for generating a network classification profile (NCP), which includes a number of classes of service (COSs) for prioritizing network traffic. Network packets belonging to a COS may be classified according to a packet parameter. The NCP may be used to prioritize packets sent to the network from a network ingress router. A queuing profile for scheduling packets received from the network based on the NCP may also be generated and used by a network egress router. The packet parameter may be based on information in the packet header. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246437 | Network Topology - A network including a hierarchical structure of nodes is described. The structure of nodes includes n layers including n−1 layers of switch nodes and 1 layer of computational nodes. Each layer in the structure can include m | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246438 | NETWORK NODE LOCATION DISCOVERY - Techniques are generally described for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network. In some examples, methods for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network may comprise one or more of solving an objective function to determine a first set of locations of one or more of the plurality of communication devices, wherein the objective function is subject to one or more constraints; resolving either the objective function or a modified variant of the objective function, to determine a second set of locations of the communication devices; comparing the first set of locations with the second set of locations; and determining the locations of the communication devices based at least in part on said comparing. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246439 | COMMUNICATION OF LOCATION INFORMATION FOR AN IP TELEPHONY COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Techniques for providing location information describing a communication device configured to exchange telephony information over a computer network. A switching device of the computer network receives a first message according to a node-to-node communication protocol, the first message indicating that the endpoint communication device includes a configuration for a mode of operation on behalf of a telephone service account. The switching device determines from the first message an identifier of the telephone service account and sends the determined identifier in a second message via the computer network, the second message in support of a location service. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246440 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF THE CELL SIZE PARAMETER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate automatically configuring a network configuration parameter (e.g., cell size parameter, . . . ) in a wireless communication environment. Size of an area served by a cell associated with a base station can be detected automatically by the base station. For example, size of the area served by the cell can be detected based upon location information of UE(s) served by the cell, a path loss between the base station and the UE(s) served by the cell, and/or a transmit power level of a reference signal sent by the base station. Moreover, a value of a network configuration parameter (e.g., cell size parameter, . . . ) can be automatically assigned by the base station as a function of a comparison between the size of the area served by the cell and a set of thresholds. For instance, the set of thresholds can be configurable by a network operator. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246441 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING PACKET SERVICE - The present invention provides a packet service electronic monitoring method in a wireless portable Internet system and an apparatus using the same. In the packet service electronic monitoring method, a packet service electronic monitoring start request is transmitted to a packet subscriber station (PSS) from a law enforcement agency and the packet service electronic monitoring is started. When the PSS attempts a packet service, electronic monitoring call information of the PSS is transmitted to the law enforcement agency, and an electronic monitoring subscriber packet of the PSS is transmitted to the law enforcement agency when the PSS is provided with the packet service. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246442 | DISTRIBUTED SCHEDULING OF QUIET-PERIOD FOR IN-SERVICE CHANNEL MONITORING - In a distributed-control cognitive radio network, each secondary user ( | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100254283 | CMTS PLANT TOPOLOGY FAULT MANAGEMENT - A cable television plant may include fiber nodes, cable modems, a management information base (MIB), and a cable modem termination system (CMTS). The CMTS may include logic to apply information from the MIB to determine the suitability of resources assigned to the fiber nodes from particular MAC domains for providing data communications. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254284 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE METHOD - In a communication system | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254285 | INFORMATION COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A receiver is configured to receive a wireless connection request from a predetermined external terminal. A wireless connection information generator is configured to generate wireless connection setting information, based on the wireless connection request. A storage is configured to store the generated wireless connection setting information. A transmitter is configured to transmit the generated wireless connection setting information to the predetermined external terminal. A connector is configured to make wireless connection to the predetermined external terminal, based on the wireless connection setting information. A detector is configured to determine whether a communication state of the predetermined external terminal confirms to one of predetermined conditions. A wireless connection setting information update unit is configured to nullify, erase or update a part or all of the wireless connection setting information stored in the storage, when a communication state of the predetermined external terminal conforms to one of the predetermined conditions. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254286 | TECHNIQUES FOR DISCOVERING SERVICES PROVIDED IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for discovering services provided in a wireless network, comprising enabling devices equipped with radio interfaces to advertise the services it provides and discover services offered by other nearby devices without establishing a network connection with the devices. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100260064 | ADHOC NETWORKING - This invention provides a method of transmitting and receiving packets containing data and positional information for a plurality of devices in a radio frequency network in combination with a global positioning system. The periodic position coordinates of each said device are determined using the global positioning system. The position coordinates are transmitted from each device at staggered points in time that are randomized, and the randomizing operation is performed in discrete steps, wherein the time period of each discrete step is of adequate duration for one device to transmit a positional update. A positional update table and proximity table is created and maintained for each device, and these tables are transmitted to every other device in the network at periodic intervals. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260065 | Constructing a Data Pipeline Having Scalability and Low Latency - A method and a system are provided for constructing a data pipeline having scalability and low latency. In one example, the system provides a primary data distributor cluster. The system provides one or more non-primary data distributor clusters. The system arranges a cascade configuration that includes the primary data distributor cluster and the one or more non-primary data distributor clusters. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260066 | NETWORK DISCOVERY AND DATA TRANSFER USING SNMP IN AN ELECTRIC POWER TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein are systems and methods for performing network discovery and file transfer utilizing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). According to one embodiment, a manager queries an agent device to obtain an agent device's neighbor address table comprising IP addresses of neighboring devices. IP addresses comprised in the agent device's neighbor address table may be added to a network inventory. The manager device may then iteratively query each device in the network inventory until each of the plurality of agent devices have been queried. According to one embodiment, a device may divide a data file into a plurality of sequenced partitions. A plurality of packets may be created containing the sequenced partitions. A receiving device may reconstruct the data file using the sequenced partitions. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260067 | CONNECTIVITY ARCHITECTURE FOR SERVICE DISCOVERY - A system including a billboard that may comprise a common memory space allocated amongst at least two devices. Service nodes created on the billboard may represent services offered by the at least two devices. Service nodes may interact with each other on the billboard in order to perform inquiries for required services. For example, an application residing in the at least two devices may access the billboard in order to locate service nodes pertaining to a desired service. Information available from service nodes may include service property and usable transport information. A direction connection may then be made between the application and the service after a service node is selected. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260068 | Method for Neighbor Set Selection for Handover in a Home Access Environment - A macro wireless communication system includes a base station and a femto access point for communicating with user equipment (UE), such as handset, whereby the UE receives information regarding the network relationships between the base station and the femto access point. A home profile setting may be stored in the UE. When the UE communicates with a femto access point that is identified in the home profile, the UE adapts a neighbor listing provided by the home femto access point. Alternatively, the base station stores a list of the UE and its corresponding home femto access point, along with the neighbor list of the femto access point. When a UE is connected to the base station and that base station is in neighbor list of the UE's home femto access point, a message is sent to the UE to forward an appropriate neighbor list to simplify handovers. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260069 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND CONNECTION SETUP METHOD OF WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless communication terminal comprises a trigger receiving unit, a participation request receiving unit, and a connection setup unit. The trigger receiving unit receives a predetermined trigger. The participation request receiving unit receives requests to participate in a wireless network from an external terminal which does not participate in the wireless network in which the wireless communication terminal has participated, using wireless communication. The connection setup unit makes each of participation requests received by the participation request receiving unit from a plurality of external terminals correspond to one trigger received by the trigger receiving unit. The connection setup unit performs a connection setup which makes each of the plurality of external terminals participate in the wireless network in response to each of the participation requests, in the order in which the participation requests are received. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100265845 | Wireless Local Area Network, Adapter Unit and Equipment - Equipment for a wireless local area network comprises at least one adapter unit ( | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265846 | SERVER DISCOVERY IN A NEIGHBOUR NETWORK OF AN IP NODE - The invention describes a method for discovering a server in a neighbour network of an IP node or IP network, said method comprising obtaining inter-network routing information describing a network reachability between networks, determining at least one routing path including the IP node or IP network in the inter-network routing information, selecting a first network on the determined at least one routing path, said first network being located at or close to the IP node or IP network, determining at least one first address, prefix or domain name associated with the selected first network, transmitting at least one server discovery request message for an address, prefix or domain name associated with the selected first network, and receiving at least one reply message containing an address or domain name of a server located in the selected first network, thus discovering a server in the neighborhood of the IP node or IP network. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265847 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING CARRIER IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of configuring a carrier in a multi-carrier system by a User Equipment (UE) includes receiving, from the first cell, barred-cell information instructing a first cell to be designated as a barred-cell, receiving, from a second cell corresponding to a second carrier, carrier configuration information, instructing a configuration of a first carrier corresponding to the first cell, and configuring a selected carrier based on either the designation of the barred-cell or the carrier configuration information. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100271974 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REJOINING SLEEPING SUBNETS IN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A system and method for joining nodes from a first and a second subnet into a network. A probability is established that a node within the first subnet will enter scout mode during its sleep interval, wherein the probability is less than 100%. If the node enters scout mode, a message is broadcasted from the node in scout mode to other nodes inviting nodes in other subnets to join with the first subnet, wherein the message includes the node's network identifier. If the message broadcasted by the node in scout mode is detected by a node in a second subnet, the node in the second subnet determines whether nodes in the second subnet have the same network identifier as the network identifier in the message broadcast by the node in scout mode. If the nodes in the second subnet have the same network identifier as the network identifier in the message broadcast by the node in scout mode, the nodes in the first and second subnets are combined into a combined network. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100271975 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEPLOYING NETWORK ELEMENTS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a server having a controller adapted to determine at least one network element to be designated as being in a probation mode where the network element is operably coupled to an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network and is adapted to utilize Session Initiation Protocol, and determine communication devices to be designated as testing devices where the communication devices are user end point devices, wherein use of the network element for communication between user end points over the IMS network is limited to the testing devices. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100271976 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENCAPSULATING POINT TO POINT (PPP) OVER ETHERNET FRAMES - Techniques for negotiating Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) sessions over an Ethernet network include receiving configuration data that indicates a first node is connected to a second node thorough an Ethernet network that supports Ethernet frame payload sizes larger than 1500 octets. Request data is received at the first node from the second node. The request data indicates a request for PPP communications between the first node and the second node using a requested PPP payload size greater than 1492 octets. A particular PPP payload size greater than 1492 octets is determined. Response data is sent from the first node to the second node. The response data indicates that the particular PPP payload size greater than 1492 octets is to be used for PPP communications between the first node and the second node. These techniques allow better utilization of Ethernet Jumbo, Giant and Baby Giant frames. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100271977 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING NETWORK CONNECTION STATUS IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for decreasing the number of bearer connections by transmitting a data packet in order to determine a network connection status at a time of bearer connection necessarily performed by a portable terminal together with a location registration message. Reduced battery consumption in the portable terminal is achieved because of the reduced number of bearer connections. The apparatus includes a transmission time determination unit for reconfiguring a data packet transmission time to a time of bearer connection necessarily performed by the portable terminal when a data packet is transmitted to determine the network connection status, and a controller for providing control to transmit the data packet is transmitted while connecting the bearer at the reconfigured data packet transmission time, wherein the reconfigured data packet transmission time may be advanced or delayed of the initial transmission time. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100271978 | BROADCAST/MULTICAST BASED NETWORK DISCOVERY - Embodiments of the invention relate to apparatus, system, and method for use of WLAN access enabled mobile devices such as notebooks and handheld communication devices. In particular, embodiments of the invention relate to methodology whereby WiFi enabled devices can automatically select the appropriate service provider, in a power efficient manner, thereby taking advantage of different services offered by different service providers. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100278069 | Flow Path Discovery In Network To Guarantee Multiple Metric QoS Constraints - Route discovery for an end-to-end path in a network is performed for a flow. A path is attempted to be discovered that satisfies QoS constraints for multiple metrics for the flow. The route discovery includes determining whether a path request for a path satisfying the QoS constraints is feasible, infeasible or undecideable based on information in a local QoS table. If the path request is determined to be undecideable, route discovery is performed with neighbors. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278070 | Method of private addressing in proxy mobile IP networks - A method is disclosed, by which a local mobility anchor (LMA) In a proxy mobile IP network can perform address assignment for a mobile node in cooperation with network address translation, so that the mobile node can be configured with a private HoA. In one embodiment, the LMA obtains the NAI of a mobile node (MN) that is: (i) operating as an IPv4 host and (ii) seeking entry to the network as its home network. The LMA identifies a DHCP server located in the network and serving at least one NAT, and sends it a request message in which the ClientId is set equal to the NAI of the mobile node. The LMA receives a private HoA from the DHCP server, which it forwards in a PBA message to a mobile access gateway (MAG) connected to the MN. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278071 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING A DEVICE ON A NETWORK - A method for detecting a monitored device on one of a plurality of subnets of a network. The method includes receiving, in a processing server, network database information from a local router on a same subnet as the processing server, the network database information identifying the plurality of subnets of the network. A subnet list is generated based on the received network database information, and stored in a memory. Further, the monitored device is discovered based on a search of the plurality of subnets included in the stored subnet list. The method further includes storing an identification of the discovered monitored device in a monitored device database. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278072 | SELECTING WIRELESS MESH NODE LOCATIONS - Locations for deploying mesh nodes in a wireless network are determined based on a Terminal Steiner tree (TST). The TST that is formulated from an input graph and client locations in the wireless network is determined. The input graph includes signal strength values for pairs of mesh node-to-client location and mesh node-to-mesh node links and mesh node locations for deploying the mesh nodes are selected from the Steiner nodes in the TST. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278073 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING NETWORK TOPOLOGY OF A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK IN MULTI PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) BASED VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS (VPNs) - Presented is a method and system of determining network topology of a virtual private network in Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) based Virtual Private Networks (MPLS/VPNs). The method includes obtaining VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) details of at least one virtual private network, determining any variations in network configuration and determining, from said network configuration variations, network topology of the at least one virtual private network. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278074 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE ABSOLUTE GRANT MAPPING TABLE FOR BASE STATION - A method for configuring an absolute grant mapping relationship table for a base station, comprises: a radio network controller notifying the base station of the absolute grant mapping relationship table used by an enhanced dedicated channel absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) through a signaling, and the base station returning a response message to the radio network controller after storing the configured information. The present invention allows the absolute grant mapping relationship table used by the base station to be consistent with an absolute grant mapping relationship table of which a user equipment is notified via the air interface to use, so as to ensure that the absolute grant values corresponding to the base station and the user equipment are obtained from the same absolute grant mapping relationship table, and allocation and use of the power resource by the base station and the user equipment are consistent. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278075 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD - The invention makes it possible to manage the wireless resources of each network even if network separation, disappearance, and recreation are repeated. The invention includes a management apparatus ( | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278076 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF VIRTUAL NETWORK SWITCHES - In general, techniques are described in which a plurality of network switches automatically configure themselves to operate as a single virtual network switch. A virtual switch is a collection of individual switch devices that operate like as single network switch. As described herein, network switches in a network that are capable of participating in a virtual switch may automatically discover one another. The participating network switches may then elect one of the participating switches as a master switch. The master switch may generate forwarding information and store the forwarding information in the participating switches, including the master switch. The forwarding information causes the participating switches to act like a single network switch. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278077 | DEVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT FOR AD HOC NETWORKS - A wireless device transmits beacon packets at periodically occurring time intervals across a wireless channel. When the wireless communications device has not formed a piconet with one or more remote devices, the device scans the wireless channel for a predetermined amount of time immediately following each of the periodically occurring time intervals. During this time a remote device may respond to the beacon packet. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100284301 | DYNAMIC FAULT-TOLERANT CONFIGURATION SUPPORT AND RE-CONFIGURATION OF A BRAIDED RING NETWORK - A method of configuring a node comprises receiving a first message having a count field value from a first direct link; receiving a second message having a count field value from a first skip link; adjusting the count field value in the first message by a first adjustment amount; adjusting the count field value in the second message by a second adjustment amount; comparing the adjusted count field value in the first message with the adjusted count field value in the second message; if the adjusted count field value in the first message matches the adjusted count field value in the second message, using the adjusted count field value in the first message to determine a node identity for the node; and processing subsequent messages based on the node identity. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284302 | AUTO-BINDING SDP RSVP LSP TUNNEL - The invention is directed to an apparatus and method for providing automatic binding of Virtual Private Routed Network (VPRN) over MPLS SDP RSVP LSP tunnels in a provider-managed IP/MPLS network. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284303 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING AND EXCHANGING INFORMATION FOR COVERAGE OPTIMIZATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The subject specification is directed towards generating and exchanging information for coverage optimization in wireless networks. Aspects are disclosed for facilitating a distributed coverage optimization. A communication is established with at least one external entity, and a coverage-related measurement is received from the at least one external entity. A coverage parameter is then self-optimized as a function of the coverage-related measurement. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284304 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ESTABLISH TRUST AND SECURE CONNECTION VIA A MUTUALLY TRUSTED INTERMEDIARY - Systems and methods for establishing secure communications between two network elements through a trusted intermediary when no direct communication path is available. Separate secure communication links are established between the network elements and the trusted intermediary to facilitate secure end to end communication. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284305 | SETTING UP A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - A method for setting up a VPN is described. The VPN is set up in a backbone network having a plurality of PE routers for controlling the transfer of IP traffic to and from CE routers in satellite networks. In a PE router, a VRF is configured for the VPN and populated with local routes for the VPN. A VRF IP loopback address is assigned for the VRF, and a PE IP loopback address is assigned for the ingress PE router. A local route with the VRF and PE IP loopback addresses is then advertised to other PE routers in the backbone network. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284306 | BINDING UPDATING METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL USED BY THE METHOD - Disclosed is a technique for providing a binding updating method and the like, capable of reducing the number of messages, and hence the power consumption of terminals and processing time required for binding update between terminals. According to the technique, the method includes the following steps: A predetermined mobile terminal sends a mobile terminal as the next destination first and second messages including predetermined information for each of other mobile terminals based on a predetermined order of message transmission. A mobile terminal that has received the first and second messages acquires predetermined information addressed to its own terminal, adds predetermined information for each of mobile terminals other than its own terminal to the first and second messages, and sends the first and second messages to a mobile terminal as the next destination based on the predetermined order of message transmission. A mobile terminal that has acquired all pieces of predetermined information addressed to its own terminal generates authentication information for each of the other mobile terminals based on the predetermined information, and creates and sends a third message including the authentication information for each of the other mobile terminals. A terminal that has received the third message updates binding information when the authentication information included in the third message is valid. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284307 | Service Management System for a Telecommunications Network - A communication line is installed in a network by automating a design phase and a configuration phase for the service and by automating failure recovery in either of the phases. In the design phase, an optimal route for the communication line is found, and the network components are provisioned and assigned. If the assigned network components are not available or can not be validated, the components causing the failure are marked, and the design phase is retried without the marked components. After the design phase, the configuration phase begins. The circuit design is tested against actual network components. If the test is passed, the actual network is configured according to the circuit design and the circuit is activated. If there is a network component failure during the configuration phase, the good route elements in the design are released while the failed network components are marked. The design phase is retried. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284308 | Method, System and Apparatus for Implementing L2VPN between Autonomous Systems - A method, a system, and an apparatus for implementing a layer-2 virtual private network (L2VPN) between autonomous systems (ASs) are disclosed. The method includes: receiving a first L2VPN mapping packet from a first AS; parsing the first L2VPN mapping packet to obtain a first label carried in the first L2VPN mapping packet, applying for a second label which is different from the first label carried in the first L2VPN mapping packet, and generating a second L2VPN mapping packet according to the second label; and sending the second L2VPN mapping packet to a second AS. When multiple VPN users need to establish a multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) L2VPN between ASs, the MPLS L2VPN can be established between ASs through the technical solution under the present invention as long as a link exists between the ASs, thus providing high extensibility, high security, and convenient management of the inter-AS L2VPN. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100290365 | MULTI-LEVEL HOSTED INBOUND ADMINISTRATION FOR A TELEPHONY SYSTEM - A multi-level hosted inbound administration platform for a packet-switched telephony system is provided. The platform provides services for managing the distribution and features of direct inward dialing numbers (DIDs). The platform allows a client to import or purchase DIDs, make DIDs available to sub-distributors, and provision them to end-users. The platform allows sub-distributors to reserve and activate DIDs, make DIDs available to downstream sub-distributors, and provision them to end-users. The platform provides a billing structure for DID usage, with charges being applied on a one-time, monthly, or variable basis. The platform also allows clients and sub-distributors to charge for inbound services based on per-minute or per-usage charges. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290366 | CONFIGURING NETWORK DEVICES - Improved systems and methods for configuring network devices are provided. Aspects of the invention relate to novel QoS configuration parameters and methods for using QoS configuration parameters to reduce impacts caused by security breach within a network. In one embodiment, a QoS configuration parameter is selected from a plurality of configuration parameters on a central database based upon unique identifying information of a network device and a status signal. In one embodiment, each configuration parameter comprises at least a first parameter for configuring a communication speed of the network device and a second parameter configurable to alter the ability of the network device to communicate with another device in the network. Further aspects of the invention relate to providing improved services to an end user. In one embodiment, services may be customized to an end user and allow increased flexibility for both the service provider and the end user. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100296411 | Transaction Topology Discovery Using Constraints - Determining a transaction topology of a network through generating and solving an adjacency matrix. A transaction is performed in a network and a list of statistics generated by the transaction is collected. The statistics provide a calculation of the number of inbound transactions and the number of outbound transactions for each node. A matrix structure is composed with the statistic. Constraints are applied to the matrix structure and a solution set of topology structures for the network is determined. The solution set of topology structures may be refined as needed with application of additional constraints. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296412 | Method, Device, and System for Establishing Label Switching Path in Fast Rerouting Switching - A method, device, and system for establishing a label switching path (LSP) in fast rerouting (FRR) switching are provided, which can ensure that an ingress point and a merge point (MP) refresh path information in time. The method includes that first messages are respectively sent to an ingress point and an MP on an LSP, where the first messages carry information of holding a path refreshing state, so that the ingress point and MP determine the time of holding the path refreshing state according to the information of holding the path refreshing state; and second messages are respectively sent to the ingress point and the MP in the time of holding the path refreshing state, where the second messages carry information of refreshing a path state, so that the ingress point and MP establish the LSP according to the information of refreshing the path state. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296413 | System and Method for Multicast Transmission - A system and method for multicast transmission are disclosed. In one embodiment, a virtual exchange network including interconnected nodes is embedded within a network. A sender is disposed in communication with a root node and receivers are disposed in communication with a set of edge nodes. The sender publishes a packetized data stream to which the receivers subscribe. The packetized data stream is promulgated by implicit signaling through optimum virtual exchange network connections from the sender through the virtual exchange network to the receivers. The interconnected nodes, responsive to receiving the published packetized data stream, are adapted to multicast N instances of the published packetized data stream to N recipients selected from the group consisting of receivers and other of the interconnected nodes. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296414 | SUPPORTING VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS USING A FIRST NETWORK TOPOLOGY FOR FORWARDING AND A SUBSET OF THE FIRST NETWORK TOPOLOGY OR A SMALLER TOPOLOGY FOR SIGNALING - Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) are supported in which customers may use popular internet gateway protocol (IGPs) without the need to convert such IGPs, running on customer devices to a single protocol, such as the border gateway protocol (BGP). Scaling problems, which might otherwise occur when multiple instances of an IGP flood link state information, are avoided by using a flooding topology which is smaller than a forwarding topology. The flooding topology may be a fully connected sub-set of the forwarding topology. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296415 | Method and Apparatus for use in a Communications Network - A method is provided for use in a communications network in which a plurality of accesses are available to a user entity for accessing a network resource, comprising: determining a set of active rules, each rule specifying respective preferences, at least relatively, for at least some of the plurality of accesses, with potential for conflict between the rules of the set concerning which access is most preferred; deriving from the set of active rules network discovery and selection rules a new rule specifying respective preferences, at least relatively, for at least some of the plurality of accesses; and selecting an access for use by the user entity based on the new rule. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100302973 | Enterprise Virtual Private LAN Services - Example embodiments are directed to methods of configuring a virtual private local area network service for an enterprise. At least one method includes assigning a virtual private local area network instance to a first node within a network. A first node attempts to establish a label distribution protocol session between the first node and at least one other node within the network based on an interior gateway protocol map. The interior gateway protocol map identifies the at least one other node and nodes connected to the at least one other node. The virtual private local area network service is established based on the label distribution protocol sessions that are established. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100302974 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION DATA, DATA GATHERING SYSTEM FOR A MOBILE OBJECT, A DEVICE ON THE MOBILE OBJECT FOR THE DATA GATHERING SYSTEM, A NETWORK SYSTEM FOR ORGANIZING VEHICLES, AND A ON-VEHICLE DEVICE FOR THE SYSTEM - There are provided a method and a device for providing communication data that provide communication data for identifying a device on a mobile object that communicates through an LAN in accordance with a predetermined communication protocol to the device on a mobile object installed on a mobile object without a communication data provision problem caused due to a manual operation, a data gathering method and a system for a mobile object using the method and the device, the device on a mobile object for the system, a network system for organizing vehicles, and an on-vehicle device for the system. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100309812 | METHOD FOR LOGICAL DEPLOYMENT, UNDEPLOYMENT AND MONITORING OF A TARGET IP NETWORK - The method is applied to configure, reconfigure and monitor globally a plurality of network elements (NE | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309813 | DETECTION AND SUPPORT OF A DUAL-STACK CAPABLE HOST - A network processing device is configured to receive a configuration message from a host device and forward the configuration message to a server. The configuration message can be configured to request the server assign an Internet Protocol (IP) address to the host device. The network processing device can be configured to send at least one probe message to the host device responsive to receiving the configuration message. The network processing device can be configured to determine whether the host device intends to continue utilizing a previously assigned IP address in addition to the IP address requested by the configuration message based, at least in part, on any responses to the at least one probe message received from the host device. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309814 | ALLOCATING INTERLACE MULTIPLEX PAIRS FOR MULTICAST SERVICES - The present invention provides a method implemented in a control entity within a wireless communication system. The method includes selecting, at the control entity, a plurality of sectors in response to receiving requests for a multicast service from mobile units located within the plurality of sectors. The method also includes allocating, at the control entity, one or more interlace-multiplex pairs for providing the multicast service to the mobile units within the plurality of sectors. One or more of the interlace-multiplex pairs are allocated based on a priority list that ranks priorities of the plurality of interlace-multiplex pairs according to how many of the plurality of sectors provide the multicast service using the corresponding interlace-multiplex pair. The method also includes establishing a call flow over an air interface to the mobile units using the allocated interlace-multiplex pair(s). | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309815 | NETWORK ASSOCIATION IN AN ENVIRONMENT WITH HIDDEN NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention perform a preliminary scan for information automatically transmitted by available wireless access points. The information transmitted by access points (e.g., identity information) and information derived from the transmission (e.g., signal strength) is used to prioritize the available wireless access points before direct scanning takes place. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309816 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR END-TO-END MANAGEMENT OF ENERGY EFFICIENT NETWORKING PROTOCOLS - Aspects of a method and system for end-to-end management of energy efficient networking protocols are provided. In this regard, a path between two network nodes may be determined and one or more messages may be generated. The one or more messages may be communicated to one or more network nodes along the determined path and may configure an EEN control policy and/or one or more (EEN) parameters in those network nodes. The one or more generated messages may comprise a distinct marking that may, upon detection by the network nodes along the determined path, trigger configuration of the EEN control policy and/or EEN parameters within the one or more network nodes. The one or more messages may be may be utilized to enable and disable EEN in one or more network nodes along the path. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309817 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A NETWORK - A decentralised method is disclosed of deciding a common configuration parameter in a network. The network comprises at least one node designated to perform the method. In the method, a designated node makes a local decision relating to the configuration parameter in dependence upon information relating to its local operating environment (M | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309818 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING NETWORK IN WIRELESS NETWORK AND DEVICE - A method of controlling a network at a coordinator of a wireless network comprises receiving a beacon, which includes at least one of transmission coverage information associated with signal transmission coverage of the wireless network and ACK packet information indicating a type of an ACK packet transmitted from a plurality of devices for acknowledgement during reception of data packets, from a coordinator of the wireless network; receiving the data packets from a transmitting device of the wireless network; and transmitting an ACK packet having an ACK packet type determined based on the ACK packet type information included in the beacon to the transmitting device as a signal for acknowledgement of the data packets. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100315971 | METHOD AND APPARTUS FOR INCREASING PERFORMANCE OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for increasing performance of a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes determining ( | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100315972 | DISCOVERY AND REDISCOVERY PROTOCOL METHOD AND SYSTEM - A management station discovers agent devices connected to a network by broadcasting discovery messages having a session number and waiting for discovery acknowledge unicast messages from at least some of the discovery aware agent devices connected to the network. The management station receives the discovery acknowledge unicast messages from the agent devices and each message comprises the session number and an address uniquely identifying the agent device sending the discovery acknowledge unicast message. The management station then sends a unicast registration message having a sequence number based on the session number of the discovery message. At that point, the agent device will be registered permitting further communication to the registered discovery aware agent device. The management station will send, periodically, rediscovery messages having the same session number as the discovery message. The discovery aware agent devices connected to the network which have not previously responded to a discovery or rediscovery message having the same session number or have not received a registration message with a sequence number related to the session number will respond to subsequent rediscovery messages. The agent devices will not respond to subsequent rediscovery messages if the agent device has previously received a unicast registration message with a sequence number related to the session number of the multicast discovery message or the subsequent multicast rediscovery message. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100315973 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DOMAIN MANAGING DEVICE, EDGE DEVICE AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A technique disclosed enables a node having a plurality of interfaces to conduct connection of the plurality of interfaces simultaneously in a communication network domain. A mobile node having a plurality of interfaces connects one of the interfaces with a MAG (mobile access gateway) | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100315974 | Mobility In a Wireless Enterprise Network - A method for configuring a network is described, the method comprising: receiving, from a first radio node in the network, network information associated with one or more second radio nodes in the network; generating a network relation table, the network relation table comprising network information associated with the first radio node and the one or more second radio nodes; and performing a handoff to a third radio node in the network using the network relation table. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100315975 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING PHYSICAL CONNECTIVITY IN A DYNAMIC NETWORK - There are provided a system and a method of determining a physical connectivity of a new node connected to a dynamic communication network comprising a plurality of connecting nodes each comprising a plurality of ports. The method comprises: (a) responsive to automatically discovering a new node connected to the dynamic communication network, obtaining address data characterizing a network address of said discovered new node; (b) querying all known connecting nodes and generating a port dataset representing all ports thereof which have registered address data characterizing the network address of said discovered new node; (c) defining, by analyzing the generated port dataset, a port and respective connecting node which said discovered new node is directly connected to. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100315976 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - In order to prevent a communication-parameter automatic setting process from being performed by unintended communication apparatuses, a communication terminal having detected a plurality of communication-parameter providing apparatuses sends a notification indicating that the plurality of providing apparatuses exist to another terminal. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100315977 | SHRINK WRAP TECHNIQUE FOR ENCLOSING MULTIPLE POLYGONS - A computer-implemented method receives a list of polygonal vertices associated with multiple polygons located in proximity to one another in a two-dimensional region and analyzes the polygonal vertices. The method automatically generates, based on the analysis, a polygonal hull that encloses the multiple polygons such that a line segment connecting any two polygonal vertices of the multiple polygons falls completely inside the generated polygonal hull. The multiple polygons may correspond to a two-dimensional geographic region. The computer-implemented method may be used for geographic regional segmentation. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100322103 | Method and Network for Implementing Computer Voice Communication Based on Wireless Communication Terminal - A method and network for implementing computer voice communication based on wireless communication terminal is provided. The method comprises: configuring the network before carrying out the voice communication, establishing connection between a computer and a wireless communication terminal via an interface, configuring the same coding and decoding protocols for voice signals between them, establishing voice communication connection between the computer and a communication device at an opposite end, and the computer and the wireless communication terminal sending and receiving voice signals between them via the interface. The network comprises a computer, a wireless communication terminal, a wireless communication network and a communication device at an opposite end. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322104 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTRIBUTING CRYPTO CARDS TO MULTIPLE CORES - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for distributed operation of a plurality of cryptographic cards in a multi-core system. In various embodiments, a plurality of cryptographic cards providing encryption/decryption resources are assigned to a plurality of packet processing engines in operation on a multi-core processing system. The packet processing engines can be configured to operate in user space of a system, and can access cryptographic resources via memory allocations mapped from kernel space to user space. A method for use with the multi-card/multi-core system can comprise detecting, by a kernel of the multi-core system, a plurality of cryptographic cards available to the system, identifying, by a configurator of the multi-core system, a plurality of packet processing engines configured to operate in user space on a plurality of cores of the multi-core system, and determining, by a card distribution manager, a distribution layout that identifies an assignment of the plurality of cryptographic cards to the plurality of packet processing engines. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322105 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS VIA A CONFIGURABLE MULTI-USE ETHERNET PHY - Aspects of a method and system for network communications via a configurable multi-use Ethernet PHY are provided. In this regard, an Ethernet PHY may be configured based on characteristics of a network link over which the Ethernet PHY communicates, and a rate at which data is conveyed from a MAC to the Ethernet PHY may be controlled via a carrier sense signal of the MII. The carrier sense signal may be controlled based on a rate at which the Ethernet PHY transmits data over the network link. The Ethernet PHY may be configured based on a length of the network link and/or on a grade of the network link, where exemplary grades may comprise Cat-1 through Cat-7a cable. The Ethernet PHY may be configured into one of a plurality of modes comprising an Ethernet over digital subscriber line (DSL) mode, an extended reach mode, and a standard Ethernet mode. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322106 | METHODS AND NODES FOR SETTING UP MULTIPLE PACKET DATA CONNECTIONS OF A USER EQUIPMENT TOWARD AN ACCESS POINT - Methods, a local mobility anchor (LMA) and a mobility access gateway (MAG) are provided for supporting multiple connections of a user equipment (UE) towards a given access point. As a UE connection is set up, the MAG provides a unique identifier (UID) for the connection and sends it toward the LMA. The LMA stores the UID along with an identity of the UE, an address of the MAG and an access point name in a binding cache entry. As the UE sets up an additional connection towards the same access point, the MAG provides another UID, which is also sent to the LMA. The LMA stores a distinct binding cache entry for that distinct UID. If a given connection is released or handed over to another MAG, a UID corresponding to the given connection is used at the LMA to release or update the proper binding cache entry. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322107 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK, METHOD OF GENERATING NEIGHBOR LIST IN THE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK, AND CONTROL DEVICE THEREFOR - In a wireless communication system, a base station control device has following two steps on the basis of latitude/longitude information obtained from a GPS, that is, a first step of recognizing, from the positional information obtained from the GPS, the fact that base stations in new and old systems are installed at the same location, and a second step of linking a neighbor list of the old system to a neighbor list of the new system with use of the result of the first step. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322108 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FLEXIBLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT OF MULTIPLE CUSTOMER VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - The invention comprises a method and apparatus for deriving at least one router configuration of at least one datacenter edge router and at least one provider edge router to support at least one datacenter managing at least one customer virtual private network. Specifically, the method comprises assigning at least one datacenter profile to the at least one datacenter, and assigning a datacenter profile route-target to the at least one datacenter profile. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322109 | INTERFERENCE MITIGATION METHOD IN CELLULAR SYSTEM BASED ON ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS - An inter-cell interference mitigation method in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDM)-based cellular system includes: dividing wireless resources into a resource group for fractional frequency reuse and a resource group for removing inter-cell interference; and re-dividing the resource group for fractional frequency reuse into particular resource groups numbering the same as a number of cell types of fractional frequency reuse, and applying a maximum transmission power to a particular resource group according to a cell type for fractional frequency reuse. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100329147 | Inter-node link aggregation system and method - A method and apparatus for link aggregation in a data communications network. A dual-layer link aggregation is formed, including two peer nodes, each connected to at least a third node. The dual-layer link aggregation is formed of a peer link aggregation of ports for communicating with a peer node, distant link aggregation of ports for communicating with a third node, and an outer-layer link aggregation of the ports included in the peer link aggregation and the distant link aggregation. The third node may implement an inter-node link aggregation aggregating links to each of the peer nodes. Packets may be received and forwarded by the peer nodes in such a manner as to each link aggregation to be active simultaneously. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329148 | Apparatus and method for adding and deleting relay link in communication system - An apparatus and a method effectively adds and deletes a relay link in a communication system that includes a multiple relay system. The apparatus and method include determining by a relay mode controller whether to add or delete the relay link with consideration of at least one of a movement velocity of User Equipment (UE), a signal intensity of a Node-B and at least one relay station, and a channel state value of the UE. When addition or deletion of the relay link is determined, a message requesting addition of the relay link or a message informing deletion of the relay link is transmitted by a signaling processor to a relay station corresponding to the relay link whose addition or deletion has been determined. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329149 | UNIVERSAL CONNECTIONS DATA COLLECTION - Universal connection data collection solution for monitoring, collecting and reporting connection data and/or attributes for endpoint computing devices making a connection to a network for use in analyzing user behavior and device connectivity efficiencies. Embodiments include IP connections wherein the universal connections data collection module is notified by the OS of IP connection events. Embodiments may include a standalone mode of the universal connections data collection solution and add-on modes wherein the universal connections data collection solution integrates with a third party connection manager using an API to communicate. The universal connections data collection solution monitors the state of network connections by enumerating connections, comparing the list of active connections to the last known snapshot of the network state to determine a network state change (e.g., new connection, change in connection state, disconnection), and periodically updating the statics of the connected network. Network connection details may be exported in the form of connection logs. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329150 | CONFIGURATION OF A NODE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - It is an object of the present invention to bring some automatism into the configuration process of access network nodes in communications networks. This object is achieved by a method for configuring an access network node in a communications network comprising a first access network node and at least a second access network node, which method comprises the steps of:—receiving configuration information from said at least second access network node in said first access network node, and—configuring said first access network node with configuration parameter settings based on said transferred configuration information. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329151 | Apparatus and System for Coupling and Decoupling Initiator Devices to a Network Using an Arbitrated Loop Without Disrupting the Network - The present invention enables the coupling and decoupling of multiple processing devices to a network without disrupting the network. In an embodiment, the invention provides a switch having a network port and several initiator ports each configured for coupling to a processing device. The switch is configured to route data from the network port to the initiator ports and from the initiator ports to the network port. A management agent facilitates operation of the switch by processing port initializations, replying to device registration requests, and processing predetermined unsolicited discovery commands. During operation, the management agent enables configuration changes caused, for example, by the coupling and/or decoupling of processing device to initiator ports. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329152 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ORGANIZING, MANAGING, AND SELECTIVELY DISTRIBUTING ROUTING INFORMATION IN A SIGNALING MESSAGE ROUTING NODE - Methods, systems, and computer program products for managing and selectively distributing routing information in a routing node are disclosed. In one implementation, a method for selectively distributing routing information in a routing node includes organizing internal signaling resources are organized so as to facilitate the efficient mapping of signaling system 7 (SS7) message transfer part (MTP) signaling protocol attributes to Internet protocol (IP)-based signaling resources. A routing status information sharing hierarchy is defined, which enables routing status information to be efficiently shared among members of a signaling mateset group. Members of a signaling mateset replicate and distribute SS7 MTP network management information across non-MTP signaling connections, such as IP connections. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329153 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INSTALLING AND DISTRIBUTING ROUTES - A method and device for installing and distributing routes are disclosed. The routes are classified and installed respectively according to route types. Therefore, the distributed storage of a Forwarding Information Base (FIB) is automated, massive manual configuration work is avoided, and the problem of oversized FIB of the router as a result of fast growth of the routing table is solved. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20110002239 | Determining the Location of a Femtocell - A server may automatically attempt to locate a femtocell. Information may be obtained from the femtocell or neighboring femtocells to determine location. Servers associated with the femtocell may be contacted using that information to determine the femtocells location. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002240 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CREATING A TRANSITIVE OPTIMZED FLOW PATH - Traffic paths based on common devices available in a network are optimized, controlled, manipulated and created. The new paths used to optimize are not limited to the original OSI layer and/or original networks. Thus, various kinds of users/computers/devices, working in the same or in different abstraction layer networks, are combined into one collective virtual network providing the ability to compute and utilize the best (optimal) traffic path for each flow at each given time. The traffic path can be constructed especially for each flow. All or most devices and layer networks are combined in a collective virtual network when computing and constructing an optimized path for a flow. Thus, there is no need to add additional headers to a flow thereby eliminating the addition of overhead to the flow. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002241 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND DEVICES FOR MONITORING ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS USING WIRELESS SENSOR NODES - A wireless sensor node may be wirelessly registered with a first central node and may be automatically configured based at least in part on wireless communications with the first central node. The same wireless sensor node may subsequently be wirelessly registered with a second central node and may be automatically reconfigured based at least in part on wireless communications with the second central node. Environmental characteristics are detected using the wireless sensor node. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110007662 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OBTAINING PHYSICAL LOCATION INFORMATION FOR NETWORKED DEVICES - The invention provides systems and methods for determining the physical location of a device connected to a network. The location information is stored in a wiring database that correlates the location information with an address present in every protocol data unit (PDU) thus enabling a network administrator to quickly locate an offending device. The invention provides systems and methods for validating reported physical location information using network topology. In another aspect, the invention provides systems and methods for maintaining the integrity of a wiring database storing physical locations of devices by motivating users to report relocation of devices to the network administrator. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007663 | Determining Placement of Nodes Within a Wireless Network - A system of nodes including processors within a wireless sensor network includes an arrangement of the nodes with data connections therebetween within the wireless sensor network, wherein the data connections are limited to a set of distinct, non-intersecting paths, wherein each source node of the nodes is connected with a root nodes of the nodes by at least a predetermined number of the paths | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007664 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LINK ADAPTIVE ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS - Aspects of a method and system for link adaptive Ethernet communications are provided. In this regard, characteristics of a cable attached to a network device may be determined, and the network device may be configured based on the determined characteristics. One or more of a plurality of Ethernet PHYs within the network device may be selected to be utilized for communicating over the cable based on the determined characteristics of the cable. The selected Ethernet PHYs may be configured based on the determined characteristics. A modulation scheme utilized by the selected Ethernet PHYs may be configured based on the determined characteristics. A modulation scheme utilized by each of the selected Ethernet PHYs may be configured independently from a modulation scheme utilized by other ones of the selected Ethernet PHYs. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007665 | DESIGN AND CONTROL SYSTEMS, COMMISSIONING TOOLS, CONFIGURATION ADAPTERS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS AND WIRED NETWORKS DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND AUTOMATIC FORMATION - Design and control systems, commissioning tools, configuration adapters and a method for wireless and wired networks design, installation and automatic formation, including binding of the networks devices are provided. In the design system a scheme that uniquely identifies each network device by its type and its physical location is created and information for logical binding between the devices is prepared. In the design system is also created a device mapping that maps between the devices on the scheme and their network configuration data such as, radio IDs and startup attribute sets and wired communication link address. The data prepared in the design system is transferred to or accessed by a master controller and dedicated commissioning tools in the control system. According to devices' physical locations, appropriate configuration data is loaded from the commissioning tools into the devices through dedicated configuration adapters. The devices and their configuration adapters not necessarily have to be powered-up during configuration data loading. After power-up, the devices automatically update themselves with the loaded configuration data and the control system may initialize itself and identifies all the devices. The master controller in the control system uses the design system defined binding information and transmits binding commands for creating logical links between the devices and so networks may be automatically formed. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007666 | DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA NETWORK WITH PARAMETER JOIN MECHANISM - The present invention relates to a digital multimedia network with a parameter join mechanism comprising at least one apparatus, wherein a requesting device parameter of a source apparatus updates a local parameter group list (PGL) by adding an entry for each device parameter of a target apparatus which joins said parameter group (PG). | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007667 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING I-SIDS IN GMPLS CONTROLLED ETERNET PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGED NETWORKS - A system and method of automatically configuring a Service Instance Identifier (I-SID) in a Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching (GMPLS) controlled network. The method begins by identifying a specific I-SID for a specific service in the GMPLS controlled network. Next, the identified I-SID is automatically configured within a Backbone Edge Bridge (BEB) with a Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE) extension. The automatic configuration may be implemented by several different embodiments. In one embodiment, the I-SID may be carried in a SESSION_ATTRIBUTE object. In another embodiment, the I-SID may be mapped to a Short Call ID field in a Session object. Alternatively, the I-SID may be carried in an Endpoint ID Type-Length-Value (TLV). The I-SID may also be carried in a new TLV in a LSP_ATTRIBUTES or CALL | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007668 | DYNAMIC MBSFN AREA CONFIGURATION METHOD IN CONSIDERATION OF RADIO RESOURCE EFFICIENCY AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method and system determines an absolute Multicast-Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) configuration based on a threshold. First saved radio resources and first wasted radio resources are calculated. The absolute MBSFN configuration is set as the final MBSFN configuration when the first saved radio resources are greater than or equal to the first wasted radio resources. When untrue, the absolute MBSFN configuration plus an adjacent cell pool is set as the final MBSFN configuration based on the final MBSFN configuration achieving a maximum value of second saved radio resources minus second wasted radio resources. When both of these conditions are untrue, the absolute MBSFN configuration minus an MBSFN cell pool is set as the final MBSFN configuration based on the final MBSFN configuration achieving a maximum value of third saved radio resources minus third wasted radio resources. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110013539 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING INTERNETWORK COMMUNICATIONS AMONG A PLURALITY OF NETWORKS - A system for managing internetwork communications among a plurality of networks includes: (a) a plurality of edge network nodes; each respective edge network node being coupled to manage internetwork communications between a respective own network and other networks of the plurality of networks than the respective own network; and (b) at least one gateway-capable edge network node communicatingly coupled with each respective network node. Each respective edge network node includes a native communication network management unit for managing communications by the respective edge network node using a native communication protocol. Each respective edge network node includes an overlay communication network management unit for managing communications by the respective edge network node using an overlay communication protocol. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013540 | DISCOVERY TECHNIQUE FOR PHYSICAL MEDIA INTERFACE AGGREGATION - Various discovery techniques are described for physical media interface aggregation. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110019582 | Coordinated Neighbor Discovery of Radio Access Point Devices and Macro Base Stations - Techniques are provided for coordinated neighbor discovery in a wireless network served by radio access point devices that provide service in relatively small coverage areas in the wireless network. A controller apparatus sends to radio access point devices, data identifying a group of radio access point devices to which each radio access point device is assigned. The controller apparatus sends coordinating data for a neighbor discovery session during which a particular radio access point device in the group is configured to transmit a signal at maximum power during a time interval while all other radio access point devices in the group are configured to attempt to receive the signal, and to repeat the same during other time intervals during the neighbor discovery session when a different particular radio access point is configured to transmit a signal at maximum power until all of the radio access point devices in a group have transmitted. Each radio access point device generates discovery results data for signals received from one or more other radio access point devices during the neighbor discovery session. A neighbor list is generated for each radio access point device based on the discovery results. The neighbor list comprises a list of identifiers of radio access point devices that are candidates for handover of service. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019583 | Method And System For Remote Identification Of A Network Node - A method for remote identification of a network node of a network is described herein. The network includes a plurality of network nodes and each network node of the plurality of network nodes corresponds to an identifier. An activation signal is received by the network node. In response to receiving the activation signal, a message including information identifying the network node is sent. The identifier corresponding to the network node is determined by a remote node of the network based on the message. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019584 | CARRIER ETHERNET SERVICE DISCOVERY, CORRELATION METHODOLOGY AND APPARATUS - In an example embodiment, a method of service discovery and correlation is provided. In example embodiments, a network management system discovers, categorizes, and stores data on network elements (e.g., devices, provisioning, relationships, protocols, and topology) in a carrier network. Using a unique set of rules, relational groupings based on the discovered network elements may be created. The relational groupings, in turn, facilitate creation of a centralized carrier service view. By correlating the results of the discovery process with the centralized carrier service view, fault management, availability of service, and other observations of services can be deduced. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019585 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCALABLE SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE - A switching fabric, within a network switching device, may comprise a plurality of dedicated interface modules to enable the switching fabric to interface with a plurality of switching support subsystems. The switching support subsystems may comprise a memory subsystem, a content address memory (CAM) subsystem, a packet processing subsystem, and a physical layer (PHY) subsystem. The switching fabric may be operable to determine capacity and/or capability of each of the plurality of switching support subsystems; and to configure each of the plurality of dedicated interface modules based on the determined capacity and/or capability of a corresponding switching support subsystem. The switching fabric also comprises an inter-switch interface module to enable coupling the network switching device to a plurality of other network switching devices, to form a multi-device switching mesh that enable sharing of resources and/or aggregation of switching capabilities of the network switching devices. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019586 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT DESIGN - A method of designing a network circuit for a telecommunications network is disclosed. The method includes storing first model data in a database representing a first model of the telecommunications network. Second model data is received representing a second model of the telecommunications network. The second model data defines node groups, each representing a plurality of network nodes of the first network model, and interconnections between node groups, each representing connectivity between node groups in the first network model. The method involves searching the second model data to select a route from a start node group to an end node group, the route specifying a plurality of node groups connected by interconnections in the second network model; and searching the first model data to select a circuit from a node of the start node group to a node of the end node group. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019587 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC INFORMATION EXCHANGE ON LOCATION AWARE MESH NETWORK DEVICES - A method and system for dynamic information exchange on mesh network devices. The dynamic information exchange includes allowing a mesh network device to communicate location information with a network device at pre-determined physical location and invite social contacts of the mesh network device to come to the pre-determined physical location. The network device sends various types of electronic messages (e.g., text message, e-mail, etc.) on a mesh network and/or a non-mesh communications network (e.g., the Internet, etc.) and to social networking sites. The dynamic information exchange also includes exchanging plural activity messages including a security identification authorization message for allowing access to a secure area, a building management message for automatically and dynamically managing heating, ventilation and/or air conditioning (HVAC) and/or an emergency location message for providing three-dimensional (3D) emergency location information. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019588 | METHOD OF ROUTING A DATA PACKET IN A NETWORK AND AN ASSOCIATED DEVICE - A method of routing a data packet in a telecommunications network, said packet comprising a primary destination address and a destination port number. On reception of said packet, the following steps are executed: determining a port mask defining a range of port numbers to which the destination port number belongs; selecting an identifier of a destination piece of equipment of the packet from a plurality of equipment identifiers associated with said destination address on the basis of the port mask; and routing the packet to the destination piece of equipment on the basis of said identifier. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110026432 | SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE MANAGER - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate a synchronous bus architecture for multi-radio coexistence associated with a wireless device. As described herein, a system of buses operating in a synchronous manner, combined with optional on-chip and/or other supplemental buses, can be utilized to couple respective radios and/or other related endpoints to a coexistence management platform, thereby facilitating management of coexistence between multiple radios in a unified and scalable manner. As further described herein, communication between a coexistence manager and its respective managed endpoints can be facilitated through the use of a single bus or multiple buses (e.g., external buses, on-chip and/or other internal buses, etc.) that can operate concurrently and/or in an otherwise cooperative manner to facilitate expedited conveyance of radio event notifications and their corresponding responses. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026433 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SERVER - A server judges whether a withdrawn terminal is included in a first communication group, wherein the withdrawn terminal is a terminal which is provided with sending permission in a second communication group and not provided with sending permission in the first communication group. The server sends a notice of withdrawal of the withdrawn terminal from the second communication group, when judged that the withdrawn terminal is included in the first communication group. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026434 | LOCALIZATION OF LUMINAIRES - A node detection system includes an array of nodes ( | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026435 | HOME AGENT DISCOVERY UPON CHANGING THE MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SCHEME - The invention relates to a method for discovering a home agent serving a mobile node upon the mobile node changing its mobility management scheme in a packet-switched network and the implementation of such method in a mobile node or home agent. In order to propose a home agent discover scheme that maintains session continuity in a seamless manner upon a mobile node changing its mobility management scheme, a mobile node comprises information on its location prior to changing the mobility management scheme to one of the first signaling messages transmitted upon changing the mobility management scheme (home agent discovery message). The receiving node uses this information to identify the home agent serving the mobile node or to provide a hint to the home agent where the mobile node is registered in a response message to the mobile node. This approach may also be used for path optimization when a mobile node moves from a trusted to an un-trusted access network. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026436 | REMOTE CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL OF LOCAL DEVICES VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for the remote configuration and control of a access devices via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. The broadband access gateway may comprise a wireless interface and a broadband network connection for exchanging information via, for example, a digital subscriber loop, a cable connection, a T1 connection, and T3 network connection. A user using any of a plurality of access devices may communicate with the broadband access gateway via the wireless interface or the broadband network connection to make remote requests of another of the access devices. Such requests may comprise, for example, accessing, recording, playing, exchanging, transmitting, receiving, converting, translating of multimedia information. The remote requests may include enabling, disabling, configuring, monitoring, administering, and scheduling of smart appliances and premise systems such as, for example, security, heating, and cooling systems. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110032842 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEAMLESS ROAMING THROUGH THE USE OF ROUTING UPDATE MESSAGES - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method for managing seamless roaming of a wireless node of a plurality of nodes forming a wireless network comprises detecting, recovering and transmitting operations. The detecting operation involves detecting receipt of a Disassociation message from the wireless node by a first node of the plurality of nodes. The wireless node is roaming and seeking to establish a new communication with a second node of the plurality of nodes. The recovering operation involves addressing information from the Disassociation message by the first node, where the addressing information identifies the second node of the plurality of nodes. The transmitting operation involves transmitting a Route Update message to at least the second node of the plurality of nodes. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110032843 | SETTING UP A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK USING VIRTUAL LAN IDENTIFIERS - A method for setting up a VPN is described. The VPN is set up in a backbone network having a plurality of PE routers for controlling the transfer of IP traffic to and from CE routers in satellite networks. In a PE router, a VRF is configured for the VPN and populated with local routes for the VPN. A VLAN identifier is assigned for the VPN, and advertised to other PE routers in the backbone network. Alternatively, the VLAN identifier may be determined by a predetermined mapping algorithm so it will be unique to the VPN in all PE routers, in which case the advertisement to other PE routers may contain an implicit NULL label. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110038278 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING ACCESS CONTROL DEVICES - Described herein are systems and methods for configuring access control devices. In overview, some embodiments provide for a method whereby a smartcard is used to configure a disconnected access control device. A user presents this smartcard to a connected access control device which, in response to the presentation of this card, allows the user to download to the smartcard one or more aspects of configuration data for a specified disconnected access control device. The user subsequently presents the smartcard to the relevant disconnected access control device, which uploads and selectively applies the one or more aspects of configuration data. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110038279 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ASSIGNING PCI OF HOME BASE STATION - An apparatus and method for assigning a Physical Cell Identity (PCI) of a Home eNodeB (HeNB) are provided. The apparatus may distribute PCIs into a plurality of PCI groups, and may enable a PCI group to be assigned to a cell so that the assigned PCI group may be different from a PCI group assigned to a neighboring cell, and that an unassigned PCI in the assigned PCI group may be assigned to an HeNB within a single cell. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110038280 | USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SYSTEM, AND CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD FOR USE WITH THE USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - Disclosed are user equipment and a base station in a carrier aggregation system, and a call admission method thereof. The user equipment includes a plurality of physical layers, and the base station provides multiple component carriers. When messages for connection setup are transmitted and received between the user equipment and base station, the messages include information about what component carriers are selected by the physical layers, information about what component carriers are selectable by the physical layers, and information about calculations for uplink timing alignment, and call admission control and load balancing is performed based on the information included in the messages. Accordingly, in the carrier aggregation system, quicker call admission and load balancing are achieved. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110044204 | Scalable solutions for IP rigidity - An overlay network of connection ID (called CID) processing nodes, called C-nodes, is deployed to solve joint IP mobility, NAT traversal, and path identity problems, in a unified framework. The CIDs can either be globally unique or unique at local C-nodes. CIDs can be modified along a path, and each connection is enabled to send packets in multiple paths via multiple IP networks. It is also possible to direct a path to traverse through a particular node. Double-sided/single-sided mobility, with double-sided/single-sided NAT traversal problems are solved using C-nodes deployed as terminal software, gateways, or relays. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044205 | AUTOMATIC NETWORK MAPPING FROM A HOST CONTROL DEVICE - Disclosed are methods, and control devices ( | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044206 | Node Placement Method within a Wireless Network, Such as a Wireless Local Area Network - The disclosure includes a method of and associated system for placing nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method includes receiving user-specified parameters regarding the network. The parameters can include a layout of a building or other space, and requirements for the WLAN. An algorithm then employs these parameters to automatically create and optimized layout of multiple wireless access points for the WLAN. The method can display the layout and provide various types of information to the user. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044207 | INTELLIGENT SENSOR OPEN ARCHITECTURE FOR A CONTAINER SECURITY SYSTEM - A system and method for interfacing with sensors using an open architecture and standards based approach is provided. A sensor controller located on each container and any variety of one or more sensors are equipped with complementary short range wireless communications devices. The sensor may adhere to a predefined interface specification such that it may be automatically commissioned into, and operation in conjunction with the sensor controller and the container security system. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044208 | WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method and apparatus for setting up a wireless ad-hoc network, the method including: interchanging a terminal identifier and Wi-Fi protected setup (WPS) capability information with other terminals of the wireless ad-hoc network; selecting a role as a registrar or an enrollee based on the interchanged terminal identifier and the interchanged WPS capability information of the wireless ad-hoc network; and optionally registering in the registrar based on the selected role. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110051622 | System, Method and Network Node for Checking the Consistency of Node Relationship Information in the Nodes of a Strongly Connected Network - A system, method, and network node for checking the consistency of node relations in the nodes of a strongly connected network. An initiating network node initiates a request to check the consistency of node relations in the network. Each receiving node that receives the request determines whether defined relations received from the initiating node are symmetrically reflected by defined relations stored in the receiving network node. A local result is temporarily stored. The receiving node also identifies other nodes, if any, with which the receiving node has defined relations, and sends consistency-checking requests to the identified nodes. As responses are received from all of the identified nodes, the receiving network node aggregates the results with the stored local result and sends an aggregated response to the initiating node reporting the consistency or inconsistency of all of the receiving node's defined relations. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051623 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADMINISTRATION OF STORAGE OBJECTS - An exemplary embodiment of the present invention provides a method of generating a representation of a storage network. The method includes obtaining an request from a client system to view contents of a node in a tree model. The method also includes receiving tree information corresponding to the node and adding the tree information to the tree model. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051624 | DEFINING AN OPTIMAL TOPOLOGY FOR A GROUP OF LOGICAL SWITCHES - A Layer 2 network switch fabric is partitionable into a plurality of virtual fabrics. A network switch chassis is partitionable into a plurality of logical switches, each of which may be associated with one of the virtual fabrics, including a base switch. Logical switches in multiple network switch chassis are connected by logical connections, such as logical inter-switch links that use physical connections, such as extended inter-switch links between base switches, for data transport. A topology of logical connections is established that balances competing metrics, such as robustness and scalability, while maintaining alignment with the topology of the physical connections. A topology factor allows establishing different topologies with different balances between the competing metrics | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051625 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE DISCOVERY OF RADIO ACCESS NETWORK ELEMENTS AND EXCHANGE OF CAPABILITY AND DATA ATTRIBUTES BETWEEN THOSE ELEMENTS - The present apparatus comprises a radio access network element having at least one processor, and at least one memory operably connected to the at least one processor, whereby the radio access network element is adapted to execute instructions stored in the memory comprising discovery of at least one other element in a radio access network. The radio access element further comprises instructions for removal or addition of network elements, instructions for determining a paging area and instructions for forwarding messages from a mobile to a controller in another domain. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110058499 | METHOD FOR INFERRING PHYSICAL NETWORK TOPOLOGY FROM END-TO-END MEASUREMENT - A method for inferring end-to-end network topology and to accurately determine a layer-3 routing tree between one sender and a set of receivers in the presence of anonymous routers in a network. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058500 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication device is provided. The device is connectable to a first wireless network including an access point and a second wireless network including a terminal having an access point function. The device includes a setting section which stores setup data in a volatile storage area, a communication section which performs wireless communication using the setup data stored in the volatile storage area, and a determination section which determines which wireless networks the device is to be connected to. If the device is to be connected to the first wireless network, the setting section stores first setup data from the access point into the volatile storage area and a non-volatile storage area. If the device is to be connected to the second wireless network, the setting section stores second setup data from the terminal into the volatile storage area without storing it into the non-volatile storage area. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058501 | NODE APPARATUS AND ROUTE CALCULATION METHOD - A node apparatus in a communication network, includes: a processing unit which, in the node apparatus, performs adding and dropping of a frame signal onto the communication network; and a storage unit which stores topology information having link information that specifies each link existing in the communication network, wherein information that specifies the processing unit provided in the node apparatus is included in the topology information as the link information concerning a link connected to the node apparatus. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110063993 | Automatic Low Noise Frequency Selection - Automatic low noise frequency selection for a touch sensitive device is disclosed. A low noise stimulation frequency can be automatically selected by device logic without intervention of the device processor to stimulate the device to sense a touch event at the device. The device logic can automatically select a set of low noise frequencies from among various frequencies based on the amount of noise introduced by the device at the various frequencies, where the frequencies with the lower noise amounts can be selected. The device logic can also automatically select a low noise frequency from among the selected set as the low noise stimulation frequency. The device logic can be implemented partially or entirely in hardware. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110063994 | Secure And Rapid Networking Configuration Of Information Handling Systems And Peripherals - A near field communication device, such as an RFID wand, transmits network configuration information to non-volatile memory of a networking device while the networking device is powered down, and even packaged at a retail store. The networking device powers up, reads the network configuration information, and applies the network configuration to automatically interface the networking device with a wireless network. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110063995 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprises transceiver circuitry configured to receive information from a fixed network node, initiate sending information toward the fixed network node and initiate communication with at least one peer node, the peer node being a mobile node. The apparatus further comprises a memory configured to store information received from the fixed network node, and logic circuitry operably connected to the memory, configured to derive internet protocol address information from the information received from the fixed node and to initiate sending the internet protocol address information to the at least one peer node. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110063996 | QOS IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORKS THROUGH PATH CHANNEL ACCESS THROTTLING - A path configuration message is sent to nodes in a multi-hop network along a path between a source node and destination nodes. The path configuration message includes path information and one or more special channel access parameters associated with the path information. The path configuration message temporarily changes the channel access priority for packets matching the path information in the special message. The nodes along the path therefore have higher channel access priority relative to other nearby nodes and other traffic flows. At the end of the a length of a time determined by a time to live parameter in the special message, the nodes resume using default channel access parameters in place of the special channel access parameters for packets matching the path information. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110063997 | INTERWORKING BETWEEN WIMAX AND 3GPP NETWORKS - One object of the present invention is an architecture for interworking between WiMAX and 3GPP networks, said architecture comprising: an interworking node IWK which connects with the 3GPP Packet Core Network using 3GPP Gi interface, face, and with the WiMAX Connectivity Service Network CSN using WiMAX R3 interface. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110063998 | SERIAL NETWORKING FIBER OPTIC INFLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Serial networking dedicated fiber optic inflight entertainment (IFE) systems, methods therefor and components thereof, that exhibit improved configuration and failover attributes through implementation of novel network configuration protocols. In some aspects of the invention, such an IFE system comprises a plurality of head end line replaceable units (HE-LRUs) and a plurality of serial networking line replaceable units (SN-LRUs), wherein each of the SN-LRUs individually detects that a closed system network has been formed between the plurality of HE-LRUs and the plurality of SN-LRUs based on a plurality of packets sourced by at least one of the HE-LRUs and received on a plurality of ports of each of the SN-LRUs, and wherein in response to detecting that the closed system network has been formed one of the SN-LRUs blocks one of its ports based on further detecting that the SN-LRU is a middle SN-LRU. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110063999 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING A WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK - The invention describes a method of establishing a wireless multi-hop network (NW), in particular a ZigBee-type network, comprising a plurality of devices ( | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110069633 | ANTENNA ARRAY, NETWORK PLANNING SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD FOR RELAYING RADIO SIGNALS WITH INDEPENDENTLY CONFIGURABLE BEAM PATTERN SHAPES USING A LOCAL KNOWLEDGE - The present disclosure provides an antenna array ( | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069634 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO IMPLEMENT SCALABLE ROUTING IN NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus to implement scalable routing in network communication systems are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves selecting a plurality of virtual private networks in a communication network and selecting a candidate hub router from a plurality of routers in the communication network. The example method also involves determining a plurality of least memory utilization costs associated with assigning different quantities of spoke routers to the candidate hub router. Each of the least memory utilization costs and corresponding quantity of spoke routers is associated with a corresponding one of the plurality of virtual private networks. For each of the least memory utilization costs, a bandwidth usage of a corresponding one of the quantities of spoke routers is identified. The candidate hub router is selected to operate as a hub router for one of the quantities of spoke routers associated with a corresponding one of the bandwidth usages that does not exceed a bandwidth capacity of the candidate hub router. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069635 | IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM FOR A MULTIMODE WIRELESS DEVICE - System and method for managing connections in a mobile device. A first application may be executing on the mobile device. A first application request, including first quality of service (QOS) parameters and first connection information for the first application, may be received. The first QOS parameters and the first connection information may be stored in a routing table. A first connection for the first application may be established based on the first QOS parameters and the first connection information. A second application may be executing on the mobile device. A second application request, including second QOS parameters and second connection information for the second application, may be received. The second QOS parameters and the second connection information may be stored in the routing table. A second connection for the second application may be established based on the second QOS parameters and the second connection information. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069636 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AD-HOC COMMUNICATIONS OVER MILLIMETER WAVE WIRELESS CHANNELS IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method and system for wireless data communication for peer wireless stations in a network is provided. A pair of peer wireless stations perform discovery on a predefined wireless communication channel to discover each other. Upon peer wireless stations successfully discovering one another, a wireless communication channel is selected to setup a connection between the peer wireless stations for data communication on the selected wireless communication channel. The peer wireless stations then perform connection setup and data communication over the selected wireless channel. In one implementation, the network comprises a wireless local area network (WLAN) for ad-hoc Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS) peer-to-peer communication. Further, the peer wireless stations conduct millimeter wave (mmWave) directional data transmissions between the peer wireless stations on the selected wireless data communication channel. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069637 | System and Method for Control Channel Search Space Location Indication for a Relay Backhaul Link - A system and method for providing a control channel search space location indication for a relay backhaul link are provided. A method for controller operation includes configuring a set of resource blocks for transmission of a relay control channel for a relay node, and transmitting the configuration of the set of resource blocks to the relay node using high layer signaling. The relay control channel is located within the set of resource blocks. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069638 | COGNITIVE COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATING METHOD THEREOF - Object: To provide a mechanism and a function of a system that can determine a communication method and the like effectively utilizing frequency resources, considering priority of each communication, in a cognitive communication network system of a frequency shared type or the like assuming that a given frequency band is shared by a plurality of systems in use. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069639 | Withdrawing Multiple Advertised Routes Based On A Single Tag Which May Be Of Particular Use In Border Gateway Protocol - Advertised routes are associated with a particular tag in a routing database in a second router. A first router subsequently sends one or more messages associated with a route withdraw operation that specifies the particular tag, such that second router can identify, based on the particular tag, a set including multiple routes, and remove those multiple routes from its routing database. For example, the tag may be a Border Gateway Protocol attribute, a Border Gateway Protocol communities attribute, or some other indication, numeric quantity, or opaque value. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069640 | Wireless Access Point - An electronic assembly includes a power supply, a wireless access point, and wired network connectivity. Power for the wireless access point may come from the power supply, or alternatively, from power through the wired network. The power supply can also provide removable power to a portable information device. The wireless access point may optionally be configured to communicate wirelessly only with one particular wireless client. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110075589 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SOLICITED ACTIVATION FOR PROTECTED WIRELESS NETWORKING - Methods and apparatus that enable solicited access to a secure wireless network having complex security protocols. In one embodiment, such solicited access is performed using a streamlined or reduced number of steps and includes an exemplary active/passive scanning protocol and use of an optimized service discovery protocol (SDP). Furthermore, multiple aspects of the invention are directed to improving and enhancing user experience, including a reduction of “human” interaction requirements for secure network operation (such as changing settings, entering addresses, etc.), and furthermore, integrated utilization of human readable text. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075590 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING HOSTS ON AN IPV6 NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for discovering hosts on an Internet Protocol (IP) version 6 (IPv6) network are disclosed. An example implementation includes probing a network to determine an Internet Protocol (IP) version 4 (IPv4) address that is in use on the network; determining a Media Access Control (MAC) address associated with the IPv4 address; determining a local-prefix; determining a first IP version 6 (IPv6) address, the first IPv6 address including the MAC address and the local-prefix; determining a second IPv6 address, the second IPv6 address including the MAC address and the local-prefix and the second IPv6 address being different than the first IPv6 address; probing the network to determine if the first IPv6 address is in use; probing the network to determine if the second IPv6 address is in use; and storing an indication of whether at least one of the first or second IPv6 address is in use. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110080845 | Intelligent Node-Matching And Control Configuration For The Wireless Network - The present invention is a configuration to detect and control the wireless network inside a building that fixes the location of networking device inside the building; wherein, the networking device consists of a gateway, a server and a LAN coordinator while the networking device is installed at the network exit end of the building for the gateway to be linked with the supply device from external network; then a plurality of wireless network nodes equipped with a transmit/receive unit, a indicating unit and a power supply unit are taken, irregularly distributed and erected in the building; furthermore, every wireless network node can be interconnected to the LAN coordinator while the wireless network nodes are interconnected with one another as well. Thus a configuration can not only enhance the reliability of linking signals for the wireless network, but also facilitate the nodes within the wireless network to accomplish thereof performance of simple installation and reconditioning. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080846 | Determining Paths In A Network With Asymmetric Switches - According to particular embodiments, determining paths in a network with asymmetric switches includes receiving a graph representing the network. Each asymmetric switch has defined degree connectivity between one or more pairs of degrees of the asymmetric switch. The graph is transformed to yield a transformed graph that accounts for the asymmetric switches. A routing process is applied to the transformed graph to yield one or more paths through the network. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080847 | Self-Discovery of an RF Configuration for a Wireless System - A RF distribution system determines its configuration and verifies the consistency of the determined configuration. Based on a device identifier, the RF distribution system may individually instruct each RF component to provide a generated signal. Consequently, a first RF component may modulate a signal on a first port. If a second RF component detects a modulated signal on a second port, then the RF distribution system deems that the two RF components are connected together. The procedure may be repeated for the remaining RF components so that the RF configuration of the RF distribution system may be determined. The determined RF configuration may be further verified for operational consistency. The RF distribution system may also scan a RF spectrum, determine a set of frequencies that provides RF compatibility with the RF distribution system based on the scanning, and configure the RF components in accordance with the set of frequencies. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080848 | ROUTING GRAPHS FOR BUILDINGS USING SCHEMATICS - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to systems, methods, etc. for creating a routing graph based at least partly on building information, which may include relatively low-detail schematics. For certain example implementations, a method may include obtaining building information descriptive of at least a portion of a building structure and superimposing a grid of points onto the building information. The building information may be analyzed using the superimposed grid of points by projecting multiple rays from multiple points of the superimposed grid of points. At least one routing graph may be created responsive to the analyzing and based at least in part on the superimposed grid of points and the building information. Other example implementations are described herein. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080849 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FLEXIBLE EQUIVALENT PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK MANAGEMENT IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A portable terminal and a method for management of an equivalent Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) in a portable terminal is provided. The method includes obtaining equivalent PLMN information from a network, classifying at least one equivalent PLMN by using a tag of the at least one equivalent PLMN included in the equivalent PLMN information, adding the at least one equivalent PLMN included in the one equivalent PLMN information to an equivalent PLMN list together with the tag, and deleting the equivalent PLMN if an equivalent PLMN, which includes a tag value corresponding to a process for obtaining the equivalent PLMN information and which is included in the list and is not included in the equivalent PLMN information, is stored in the equivalent PLMN list. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080850 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING SERVICE ("SRV") NODE SELECTION - Systems and methods for providing SRV node selection are provided. The method may include using a node in a home communications network. The communications network may include a plurality of nodes and a coaxial cable. The method may include using an entry node to submit a query message in selected fields of a Device Attribute Information Element in L2ME protocol. The entry node may require an advanced service. The entry node may not be aware which node of the plurality of nodes is the node selected for supporting the advanced service on the network. The selected fields may include vendor specific fields. The method may further include distributing the query message to the plurality of nodes. In response to the query message, the method may further include determining which of the plurality of nodes can be selected for supporting the advanced service on the network. The method may also include disseminating the information regarding which of the plurality of nodes can be selected for supporting the advanced service on the network to each of the plurality of nodes which can be selected for supporting the advanced service on the network. The method may further include determining whether there is a one the plurality of nodes which has been selected for supporting the advanced service on the network. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110085467 | Method and Apparatus for Clustering Based Optimal Fiber Ring Deployment - A computer readable storage medium stores a set of instructions executable by a processor. The instructions are operable to receive a data set including data corresponding to a set of nodes, the data corresponding to each of the nodes including a node prize, a node cost, and a node value that is the difference between the node prize and the node cost; select one or more of the nodes for inclusion in a cluster, the cluster comprising the one or more of the nodes, two or more external links from nodes in the cluster to a network, and one or more internal links between nodes if the cluster comprises two or more nodes, each of the internal links having an internal link cost, each of the external links having an external link cost; and determine a plan for incorporating the one or more nodes in the cluster into the network, the incorporating comprising building the cluster by building the two or more external links and the one or more internal links. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085468 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A CONFIGURABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to systems and methods for configuring a communication device based, at least in part, on a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceiver. An SFP transceiver may be utilized in connection with a communication device that transmits data according to a variety of communication protocols. In various embodiments, the configuration may be based upon an SFP configuration value stored in a machine-readable storage medium in the SFP transceiver. In certain embodiments, the SFP configuration value may be an input, together with other values associated with the SFP transceiver and a secret key, to an algorithm for generating a license entitlement key. Certain embodiments may allow for the configuration of a communication device and/or distribution of license entitlement keys in the field. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085469 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DETERMINE A CAPACITY FOR A NETWORK LAYER TOPOLOGY - Methods and apparatus to determine a capacity for a network topology are disclosed herein. An example method is described, which includes receiving a network layer topology comprising a plurality of network layer links, applying weights to the network layer links, selecting one of a plurality of traffic elements, the selected traffic element comprising endpoint nodes and a traffic demand, determining, for one or more of the network layer links, whether the selected traffic element may be routed on the network layer link without adding capacity to the network layer link, applying penalties to the weights associated with the network layer links that cannot support the selected traffic element without adding capacity, determining, based on the weights and penalties of the network layer links, a routing path including one or more of the network layer links between the endpoint nodes, adding the selected traffic element to the network layer links on the routing path, and determining the capacity of the network layer links based on the selected traffic element. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085470 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INTEGRATED SIGNAL PROCESSING FOR IP-BASED CONVERGENCE NETWORK - In an apparatus and method for integrated signal processing for an IP-based wired and wireless convergence network, based on an ID of a second user acquired in response to a service call request from a first user terminal, a unique address corresponding to the ID is acquired. The location address corresponding to the unique address, acquired from the address information of the terminals being stored and managed, i.e., the transport address of the second user terminal, is acquired. An IP connection request is sent to the acquired transport address of the second user terminal and the transport address of the first user terminal, and upon completion of the IP connection, data traffic for the requested service is transferred. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085471 | System and Method for Communicating in a Wireless Communications System - A system and method for communicating in a wireless communications system are provided. A communications system includes a macro subnet, and a macro subnet controller coupled to a core network and to the macro subnet. The macro subnet provides a hierarchical topology for a subset of communications devices in the communications system that are in the macro subnet, and the macro subnet controller manages connections of communications devices in the macro subnet, manages network topology, manages data delivery, and manages security in the macro subnet. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085472 | Novel topology selection and broadcast method for rule-based link state routing - An apparatus and method are provided for optimizing the link-state information that is to be broadcast in a routing domain of a communication network for QoS rule-based link-state routing. The routers include any device capable of implementing the routing primitives. The apparatus and method involve pruning the link-state information using local neighborhood information that has been discovered. The local link-state is pruned so that the QoS optimal paths are preserved for link-state routing. Pruning of the potential optimal paths is carried out to minimize the information broadcast to the intra domain routers in an autonomous system/routing domain. The apparatus and method also involve broadcasting the selected link-state information. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085473 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMITTER, RECEIVER, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION CABLE - The present invention relates to a communication system, a transmitter, a receiver, a communication method, a program, and a communication cable for providing high-speed bidirectional communication while maintaining compatibility. When an HDMI (R) source | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110090816 | FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH THAT ENABLES END DEVICES IN DIFFERENT FABRICS TO COMMUNICATE WITH ONE ANOTHER WHILE RETAINING THEIR UNIQUE FIBRE CHANNEL DOMAIN_IDs - A Fibre Channel Switch which enables end devices in different Fabrics to communicate with one another while retaining their unique Fibre Channel Domain_IDs. The Switch is coupled to a first fabric having a first set of end devices and a second fabric having a second set of end devices. The Switch is configured to enable communication by the first set of end devices associated with the first fabric with the second set of end devices associated with the second set of end devices using the unique Domain_IDs of each of the first set and the second set of end devices. In one embodiment of the invention, the first and second fabrics are first and second Virtual Storage Array Networks (VSANs) respectively. In an alternative embodiment, the first fabric and the second fabric are separate physical fabrics. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090817 | SENDING METHOD, RECEIVING METHOD, SENDING DEVICE, AND RECEIVING DEVICE FOR SIGNALS IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A sending method, a receiving method, a sending device, and a receiving device for signals in a multi-carrier system are provided. The sending method includes the following steps. Sequences are generated according to Cell-IDs used as parameters. The Cell-IDs satisfy predefined function corresponding relations between the Cell-IDs of multiple carriers in the same cell, and the predefined function corresponding relations include: corresponding relations between results obtained from rounding down quotients resulting from dividing the Cell-IDs of the carriers by N, where N is any integer greater than or equal to 0 and smaller than or equal to a maximum value of the Cell-IDs. Signals formed by the sequences or formed due to action of the sequences are sent. The methods and devices facilitate cell planning for the multi-carrier system, and avoid the uplink pilot interference between different cells. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090818 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHOD - An example system includes one or more handsets and a base unit including interface circuitry. The interface circuitry is configured for landline communication over a telephone network landline, wireless communication with the one or more handsets and wireless communication with one or more cellular telephones, each of the one or more cellular telephones being adapted for communication over a cellular telephone network. The interface circuitry is further configured to allow the handsets to make or receive landline or cell phone calls. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090819 | Method, Apparatus and System for Virtual Network Configuration and Partition Handover - A method, apparatus and system for virtual network configuration and partition handover are provided. The virtual network configuration method includes the following steps: The serving edge device obtains a target virtual network identifier and a corresponding interface identifier, uses the target virtual network identifier and the corresponding interface identifier to generate a Layer-2 Control (L2C) protocol packet, and sends out the L2C protocol packet; the communication proxy device that receives the L2C protocol packet obtains the target virtual network identifier and the corresponding interface identifier from the L2C protocol packet, and sets up a mapping relation between a target virtual network and an interface. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110096695 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISCOVERING A PURE HUB-AND-SPOKE TOPOLOGY - Presented is a method and system for determining network topology of a Virtual Private Network (VPN) in a Wide Area Network (WAN). The method includes obtaining a list of CE (customer edge) routers in a network, obtaining a list of prefixes advertised by each CE router, iterating, for each prefix, the list of prefixes advertised by all CE routers, verifying, in case a potential hub CE router already exists, whether the second CE router and the potential hub CE router are same, marking, in case a potential hub CE router does not exist, the second CE router as the potential hub CE router, and marking, if there exists a potential hub CE router that advertises every other prefix in the network, the potential hub CE router as hub site and other CE routers as spoke sites. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096696 | POINTING, ACQUISITION AND TRACKING IN A NETWORKED COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A system for pointing, acquisition, and tracking in a networked communications system is disclosed. A first communications device of the networked communications system may include a PAT module for establishing PAT links with other communications elements in the networked communications system. A second communications device may also include a PAT module for establishing PAT links with other communications elements in the networked communications system. A communications node may also include a PAT module for establishing PAT links with other communications elements in the networked communications system. A first PAT link is formable between the first communications device and the communications node. A second PAT link is formable between the second communications device and the communications node, and a third PAT link is formable between the first communications device and the second communications device through the communications node. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096697 | Automatic Selection of Geographic Area Specific Behavior - A wireless communication device configured for automatic selection of geographic specific behavior is described. The circuitry is configured to receive a message with system information from the network that is mandatorily sent from a base station. The circuitry is also configured to determine the geographic area from the system information using a lookup table. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110103257 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING DEVICES IN A NETWORK - In one embodiment, a method includes identifying whether there is a first device in a network that is expected to be associated with a discovery protocol but does not have the discovery protocol turned on. The method also includes providing a notification to a management arrangement when the first device is identified. The management arrangement manages the network, and the notification indicates that the first device is expected to be associated with the discovery protocol but does not have the discovery protocol turned on. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103258 | SELECTIVE NETWORK MERGING - Subsets of isolated communications networks are selectively merged without merging the entire isolated communications networks, and devices are imported across isolated communications networks without merging the isolated communications networks. The presently disclosed technology provides for improved scalability, performance, and security in logical networks spanning two or more physical communications networks. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103259 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING A VIRTUAL NETWORK SWITCH - In one embodiment, a method includes sending a configuration signal to a virtual network switch module within a control plane of a communications network. The configuration signal is configured to define a first network rule at the virtual network switch module. The method also includes configuring a packet forwarding module such that the packet forwarding module implements a second network rule, and receiving status information from the virtual network switch module and status information from the packet forwarding module. The status information is received via the control plane. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103260 | BINDING CACHE CREATING METHOD, BINDING CACHE CREATING SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, AND MOBILE NODE - Disclosed is a technique to, when a mobile node including a plurality of interfaces roams in a home domain, reduce signaling to create a client-based binding cache in a home agent and manages the same. When a MN ( | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103261 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING DIAMETER SESSION FOR PACKET FLOW BASED CHARGING - A method and system for establishing a Diameter session between a TPF and a CRF is disclosed. The Diameter session between the TPF and CRF can be established for each bearer of each subscriber. The Diameter session can also be established for the bearers with a same APN of each subscriber. The Diameter session can also be established with respect for all the bearers of a subscriber. The method and system improves the mechanism for establishing Diameter sessions and makes the implementation of the charging flow more integrated. Moreover, the multiple ways for establishing Diameter sessions between the TPF and the CRF provided in the present invention can be flexibly selected according to the practical charging applications. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103262 | MULTI-LEVEL INTERCONNECTION NETWORK - A method and system for providing a multi-level interconnection network is provided. A multi-level interconnection network comprises basic cells that are aggregated into higher level cells at each level of the network. At the first level, the basic cells are aggregated into first level cells. Each first level cell is an aggregation of a number of basic cells that is one more than the number of devices in a basic cell. The basic cells of a first level cell are fully connected; that is, each basic cell has a first level link or connection to each other basic cell. In a first level cell, each device of a basic cell has a first level link to each other basic cell. The multi-level interconnection network has higher level cells that are aggregations of lower level cells in a similar manner. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103263 | Implementation of VPNs over a Link State Protocol Controlled Ethernet Network - Nodes on a link state protocol controlled Ethernet network implement a link state routing protocol such as IS-IS. Nodes assign an IP address or I-SID value per VRF and then advertise the IP addresses or I-SID values in IS-IS LSAs. When a packet is to be forwarded on the VPN, the ingress node identifies the VRF for the packet and performs an IP lookup in customer address space in the VRF to determine the next hop and the IP address or I-SID value of the VRF on the egress node. The ingress node prepends an I-SID or IP header to identify the VRFs and then creates a MAC header to allow the packet to be forwarded to the egress node on the link state protocol controlled Ethernet network. When the packet is received at the egress node, the MAC header is stripped from the packet and the appended I-SID or IP header is used to identify the egress VRF. A customer address space IP lookup is then performed in the identified VRF on the egress node using the information in the client IP header to determine how to forward the packet. Customer reachability information within a VPN may be exchanged between VRFs using iBGP, or directly by using link state protocol LSAs tagged with the relevant I-SID. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110110267 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR APPLICATION LEVEL LOAD BALANCING IN A PUBLISH/SUBSCRIBE MESSAGE ARCHITECTURE - A method of publishing a message includes receiving a subscription request at a first remote relay from a first client and transmitting a subscription message from the remote relay to each of a first set of central relays. The method also includes receiving a publication request at a second remote relay from a second client and transmitting a publication message from the second remote relay to a first central relay of the first set of central relays and a second central relay of a second set of central relays. The method further includes determining, at the first central relay, that a target matches at least a portion of a pattern, transmitting the message string from the first central relay to the first remote relay, determining, at the first remote relay, that the target matches at least a portion of the pattern, and transmitting the message string to the first client. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110268 | MODEL-BASED VIRTUAL NETWORKING - Architecture that facilitates the virtual specification of a connection between physical endpoints. A network can be defined as an abstract connectivity model expressed in terms of the connectivity intent, rather than any specific technology. The connectivity model is translated into configuration settings, policies, firewall rules, etc., to implement the connectivity intent based on available physical networks and devices capabilities. The connectivity model defines the connectivity semantics of the network and controls the communication between the physical nodes in the physical network. The resultant virtual network may be a virtual overlay that is independent of the physical layer. Alternatively, the virtual overlay can also include elements and abstracts of the physical network(s). Moreover, automatic network security rules (e.g., Internet Protocol security-IPSec) can be derived from the connectivity model of the network. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110269 | Maintaining Distributed Hash Tables In An Overlay Network - A method of maintaining routing tables at nodes of an overlay network, where a routing table of a given node contains, for each of a set of neighbouring successor and predecessor nodes, a mapping between an overlay network address of the node and a physical locator of the node. The method comprises, upon or immediately prior to departure of a node from the overlay network, sending a Leave request from the departing node (or one of the neighbouring nodes of the departing node aware of the departure) to each neighbouring node (or each other neighbouring node of the departing node), indicating the departure and containing one or more mappings for nodes not contained within the routing table of the recipient node. Each neighbouring node (or each other neighbouring node) receives the Leave request and uses said mapping(s) to update its routing table. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110270 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECONSTRUCTING THE NETWORK TOPOLOGY IN WIRELESS RELAY COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A solution of reconstructing the network topology according to the traffic related information of each cell is proposed in the present invention, so as to achieve self-optimization of network. The traffic related information of a cell includes the traffic related information applicable to network topology reconstruction, or load related information as is named, including but not limited to time-frequency resource related amount that is used by the traffic data in the cell, traffic throughout of each cell or the wireless channel quality of each cell for transmitting traffic data, etc. The solutions in the present invention realize the network topology reconstruction according to traffic related information of multiple cells, therefore the network capacity and service quality could be effectively improved and the wireless relay communication network is applicable to those areas with unpredictable traffic distribution. And the network topology reconstruction function in the present invention can simplify network planning and network management, so that network deployment cost and maintenance and management expenses could be saved. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110116413 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network communication device ( | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116414 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided are a bridge system, a network management server, and communication methods at the bridge system and the network management server for efficient communication in a wireless sensor network (WSN). The communication method at the network management server includes communicating with bridge systems connected with a plurality of radio frequency (RF) regions within a personal area network (PAN) composed of sensor nodes using the same wireless channel, in which radio signals of the sensor nodes within the PAN reach the bridge systems, searching for a new channel to be used and an alternative bridge system which is to perform a channel change into the new channel based on information about the bridge systems upon receipt of an association failure report message from an error bridge system which is reported of an association failure from the RF region from among the bridge systems, sending a channel change request message to the found alternative bridge system, and adjusting channel information for the found alternative bridge system to the new channel and replacing information about sensor nodes connected to the found alternative bridge system with information about sensor nodes that are newly connected with the found alternative bridge system through the new channel. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116415 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A first station for communicating with a second station is disclosed. The first station may include a storage unit configured to store relationship information defining a communication relationship between the first station and the second station. The first station may also include a communication unit configured to communicate with the second station and with an access point. The communication relationship may be maintained when the communication unit begins communicating with the access point. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110122796 | USING POSITION FOR NODE GROUPING - A computer algorithm for grouping a derived spatial arrangement of wireless communication nodes. The wireless communication nodes form a wireless communication network and are configured to control the operation of luminaires in a lighting array. The position of each node in the communication network corresponds to the position of a particular luminaire in the lighting array. The algorithm divides the arrangement of nodes into a plurality of spatial groups, each of which is defined by a line which joins the group's member nodes together. The groups are ranked according to their statistical attributes and a number of groups are selected as control groups, such that the member nodes, and hence luminaires, of each control group may be controlled by a single switch or sensor. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122797 | Method and system for dynamic estimation and predictive route generation - The preferred embodiments of the present invention are directed to methods and systems for dynamic route estimation and prediction using discrete sampled location updates from various mobile devices for the purpose of providing a graphical representation of a mobile device's route along a known network path of map data. The embodiments also provide supplemental route metrics, such as traveled distance, elapsed time, etc., and the capability to assign destination points for the purpose of providing the ability to modify location update points in an application, such as a route planner, and/or to store the dynamically generated route based on various preferences for later retrieval. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122798 | POWERLINE CARRIER ZERO-CROSSING TRANSFORMER MAPPING WITH ASYMMETRIC RF RETURN PATH - Techniques are disclosed by which RF mesh networks can identify utility distribution topologies by using power line communication combined with wireless networking to identify the mapping of transformers and other distribution equipment at a back office system server. At a specified time, an item of distribution equipment signals a unique identifier by introducing a phase shift in the electric power being delivered by that equipment. A meter node detects and decodes these temporal shifts to obtain an identifier of equipment supplying the power to it. Upon ascertaining this identification, the meter node sends an acknowledgment to thereby register with that equipment. The association of the particular customer's premises with the equipment is also sent to a back office system, to enable a map of the correspondence between meter and the equipment to be generated. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110128886 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZED INITIAL CONFIGURATION DISTRIBUTION FOR CYCLIC SLEEPING DEVICES - Various embodiments include a method and system for optimizing the initial configuration of cyclic sleeping devices on a wireless network. The devices, or nodes, may need additional configuration by a configuration device after being placed on the network. Some nodes may sleep and not report in to the configuration device causing the configuration device to reach out to these non-reporting nodes. The configuration device may have limited resources with which to transmit the configuration to the nodes, and so the network can be efficiently configured if the configuration device reaches out to non-reporting nodes when it does not expect to use its transmission resources to configure a reporting node. This can be accomplished by maintaining a list of nodes yet to be configured, using the node configuration and reporting times to determine periods in which the configuration device's transmission resources will be idle, contacting non-reporting nodes during those periods. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128887 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - One embodiment of the invention includes a method of managing network communications in a network device. The network device includes software components and modules. Some of the components control the interaction between modules, while other components perform specific functions for associated modules. A module manager component controls the creation and destruction of modules as well as their interactions. A communications manager component manages network communications in the network device. The network communications is supported by creating a number of modules that are associated with components that implement different parts of a network protocol. As a result of the use of the modules, a component need not know which other component(s) it depends upon, nor need it know which other component(s) depend upon it. This allows components to be used together very easily in many different configurations. The modules also allow the same component to be used by multiple modules. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128888 | DISTRIBUTION OF ROUTES IN A NETWORK OF ROUTERS - An autonomous system comprises a plurality of routers within a packet transmission network, respective links joining the routers according to a topology of routers. At the level of a first router of the autonomous system which is joined to a second router, for a route exiting the autonomous system through an exit router, a path is determined between the second router and the exit router according to performance criteria. Next, the route is announced to the second router if the first router is situated on the previously determined path. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110134792 | Method and Apparatus for a Hub in Daisy Chain Configuration - A connector hub comprising a number of cable interfaces is used to allow a number of network devices connected to a network to be connected in a free-form manner, yet still maintain a daisy chain configuration. A cable comprising at least two conductors, wherein the conductors are preferably a twisted pair of copper wire, is used to connect each of the network devices to a cable interface on the connector hub, so that each network device only has a single cable connected to it. The connector hub connects a master or primary network device to the network devices connected by a cable to the cable interfaces of the connector in a daisy chain configuration. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134793 | PREVENTING LOOPS ON NETWORK TOPOLOGIES BUILT WITH VIRTUAL SWITCHES AND VMS - A method and apparatus is disclosed for preventing loops on a network topology which includes virtual switches and virtual machines. For example, a virtualization management application may prevent loops from being introduced into a network topology where a virtual machine forwards traffic between any two (or more) virtual network interface cards (vNICs). A method to prevent loops may include receiving a request to create a virtual network interface (vNIC) for a virtual machine (VM) instance on a computing system, and in response to determining that the requested vNIC is to be connected to the same network segment as an existing vNIC of the VM instance, failing the request to generate the requested vNIC. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134794 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF LIGHTING CONTROLLERS - A lighting system controller is provided that is configured to automatically discover lighting controllers. In a particular example, the lighting system controller is configured to scan a network for lighting controllers that match a set of search criteria. According to this example, the lighting system controller is configured to present any such discovered lighting controllers to a user in a user interface. In this example, the user interface includes elements configured to allow a user to designate one or more of the discovered lighting controllers for centralized management. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134795 | UNIFIED NETWORK PLANNING AND PROVISIONING - An exemplary system includes a network systems database storing order information and diversity information and a link utilization database storing link utilization information. A data manager is configured to validate diversity and link utilization of the order information using the link utilization information and the diversity information. An exemplary method includes storing order information and diversity information in the network systems database, and storing link utilization information in the link utilization database. The method further includes accessing the order information, the diversity information, and the link utilization information with the data manager, and validating diversity and link utilization of the order information with the data manager using the link utilization information and the diversity information. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134796 | Information communication system, connection setting apparatus and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing connection setting program - A connection setting apparatus includes: a device-registered section to register first and second device information specifying a first and a second information-communication device, respectively; a physical-connection-port-information-acquiring section to acquire a physical connection port information from a first information output port of the first information communication device; a logical-connection-port-information-acquiring-section to acquire a logical connection port information from the second information output port of the second information communication device; a connection-port-display section to display a mark representing the first physical connection port specified by the physical connection port information and a mark representing the second information communication device; a selection section to select the first physical connection port and the second information communication device to be communication parties in information communication by a selection operation to the marks; and a correspondence-registering section to register a logical correspondence between the logical connection port and the first physical connection port. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134797 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A wireless mesh network has a plurality of nodes. One of the nodes, referred to as a “topology building node,” is configured to discover a topology of the network. In this regard, a multicast topology message is transmitted via at least one node of the network. Each node that receive such message transmits a topology multicast reply to the topology building node which adds the transmitting node to the topology if the transmitting node is not already identified by the topology. Upon adding a node to the topology, the topology building node transmits a topology multicast command to the added node thereby causing such node to transmit a multicast topology message. Accordingly, the topology eventually receives a topology multicast reply from each node of the network allowing such node to build a complete topology of the network. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134798 | SYSTEM TO CONFIGURE AND MANAGE ROUTERS THROUGH WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method for configuring a router is disclosed. The method comprises providing router configuration information. The router configuration information is sent to the router over a cellular data network. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134799 | AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKING - A software architecture providing ad hoc wireless networking capabilities. The software architecture may be compatible with wireless devices, such as UWB devices operating according to the WLP communication protocol. The software architecture may include user mode and kernel mode modules, and may include a multiplexing driver framework to enable system connection to multiple ad hoc networks. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134800 | Reverse Engineering Peering At Internet Exchange Points - A technique for examining the relationships of autonomous systems (ASes) participating in an Internet Exchange Point (IXP) utilizes packet tracing servers proximate the IXPs. Where such packet tracing servers cannot be found in the participating ASes, the methodology identifies additional vantage points by looking at a list of ASes that are one hop away from the ASes at the IXP. The choice of one-hop away ASes is made judiciously by picking ones that have better connectivity, based on past-data. Plural-hop ASes may also be used where necessary. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110141942 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GROWING NEXT GENERATION NETWORK USING MODULAR DESIGN - A method and system for growing a next generation network (NGN) using a modular design are disclosed. For example, the method defines a growth core module to support a specific number of subscribers, wherein the growth core module is assigned a module identifier (ID). The method upgrades existing network entities that will be impacted by an installation of the growth core module in the existing IMS network, and installs the growth core module in the IMS network. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110141943 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING PHYSICAL LAYER CONNECTIVITY - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to a system and method for monitoring connectivity between a switch having switch ports and a patch panel having patch panel ports connected by removable cords. The system may include an identification device physically shaped to fit a cavity of the switch port, a communication cord having identification wires to connect the switch port to a patch panel port, a microcontroller mounted on the patch panel to read a unique identification number of the identification device in order to identify a connection between the switch port and the patch panel port and a management station to receive the unique identification from the microcontroller and to store data regarding the connection of the switch port and the patch panel port. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110141944 | TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY OF A PRIVATE NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and system for determining devices connected to a private network through a gateway. A Network Management System (NMS) through the use of inquiries and Port Address Translation (PAT) commands is able to determine the topology of the network of devices within a private network and thus communicate with them. This is achieved through the use of Port Address Translation (PAT) initiated by the NMS to set a port for each device connected to the gateway. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110141945 | PREFIX DELEGATION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for automated prefix delegation for a network entity in a communication network. A network entity receives from a first neighbouring network entity a first prefix that relate to the first neighbouring network entity, and a path length to a core network entity via the first neighbouring network entity. The network entity also receives from a second neighbouring network entity a second prefix that relates to the second neighbouring network entity, and a path length to a core network entity via the second neighbouring network entity. The network entity then selects a neighbouring network entity on the basis of the path length to the core network entity, and delegates a prefix for the network entity by concatenating the prefix of the selected neighbouring network entity with an identifier for the network entity. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110141946 | Reestablishment of the Interface between MME and Node B Using a Backoff time - The present invention relates to systems and methods for re-establishing an interrupted connection between nodes in a wireless network. More particularly, the present invention relates to systems and methods for re-establishing the connection in such a way to avoid excessive signaling load. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110149796 | DisplayPort Auxiliary Channel Active Buffer with Auxiliary Channel/Display Data Channel Combiner for Fast Auxiliary Channel - A system and a method for exchanging communication data between devices using a bi-directional communication channel are disclosed. A combiner is coupled to a source device via first bi-directional configuration channel and to a sink device via a second bi-directional configuration channel. Upon receiving data from the first bi-directional configuration channel and not receiving data from the second bi-directional configuration channel, the combiner transmits the received data to the sink device using the second bi-directional configuration channel and prevents data transmission from the sink device to the source device using the second bi-directional configuration channel. Similarly, upon receiving data from the second bi-directional configuration channel and not receiving from the first bi-directional configuration channel, the combiner prevents data transmission from the source device to the sink device and transmits the received data to the source device using the first bi-directional configuration channel. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149797 | MULTI-RADIO CONNECTION MANAGEMENT AND BUNDLING USING WEB BROWSERS - A method to enable browsers to manage connections across access networks is disclosed. The method manages network connections using a simple standard browser with the least amount of user interaction for all connections. The method uses standardized WiMAX activation and provisioning schemes for the management of connection profiles across the different access technologies. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149798 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING USING CONFIGURED TRANSMISSION DIRECTIONALITY - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of communicating using configured antenna directionality. For example, a wireless communication unit of a wireless communication device may detect another wireless communication device based on one or more beacons, to configure a directional wireless transmission scheme for communicating with the other wireless communication device based on the one or more beacons, and to establish a wireless communication link with the other wireless communication device using the directional wireless transmission scheme. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149799 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTI-HOP PEER DISCOVERY IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for supporting multi-hop peer discovery in peer-to-peer wireless networks are disclosed. One method supports multi-hop peer discovery using a first peer having a first unique identification code. The method includes decoding a second peer discovery signal to obtain a second unique identification code and a second local identification code of a second peer received during a peer-to-peer discovery channel, determining whether to select the second peer based on a predetermined criterion; and transmitting a first peer discovery signal having the first unique identification code, the second local identification code and a hop count when the predetermined criterion is satisfied. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149800 | Managing Virtual Local Area Network Domains - In one embodiment, a computer-implemented method of managing a virtual local area network (VLAN) domain associated with a network is provided. In this embodiment, the method comprises: defining a VLAN domain comprising a list of a plurality of connectively coupled ports of the network associated with the VLAN domain; and assigning at least one VLAN associated with the plurality of connectively coupled ports. In another embodiment, a system for managing virtual local area networks (VLANs) in a network is provided. In this embodiment, the system comprises a network provisioning module for defining a VLAN domain comprising a list of a plurality of connectively coupled ports of the network associated with the VLAN domain and assigning at least one VLAN associated with the plurality of connectively coupled ports. The system further comprises a a network monitoring system operable to gather actual network element configuration data from a plurality of network elements associated with one or more VLAN domains, wherein the actual network element configuration data identifies one or more VLANs that at least some of the plurality of network elements are actually allocated to; and a VLAN services module operable to correlate the actual network element configuration data with administrative VLAN data. The administrative VLAN data identifies one or more VLANs recognized by a business process. In one particular embodiment, the system is further operable to determine one or more VLANs that are not commonly identified in both the actual network element configuration data and the administrative VLAN data. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149801 | ARRANGEMENT FOR AN ENHANCED COMMUNICATION NETWORK TAP PORT AGGREGATOR AND METHODS THEREOF - An arrangement in a network device for facilitating multiple connection speeds with a network is provided. The arrangement includes a set of network ports that includes a set of input network ports for receiving data traffic and a set of output network ports for outputting the data traffic from the network device. The arrangement also includes a logic component configured for managing the data traffic and for aggregating the data traffic. The arrangement further includes a monitoring port that is configured to receive the aggregated data traffic. The arrangement also includes a plurality of physical layer interfaces, wherein each physical layer interface is configured to support the multiple connection speeds. The arrangement moreover includes a media access controller that is configured to support at least a single connection speed of the multiple connection speeds. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149802 | METHOD FOR PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM FOR PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE CONFIGURATION - An invention concerns a method for enabling Service configuration by a plurality of Personal Network Entities connected to a Personal Network comprising a Personal Network Application Server accessible via IP Multimedia Subsystem domain, a primary Personal Network Entity holding a subscription to control the Personal Network and a plurality of secondary Personal Network Entities controlled by the primary Personal Network Entity, the method comprising the following steps: —associating to each PNE configuration rights describing the services to be configured by each of the PNE, —storing the PNE identities, and configuration rights associated to each PNE in a Configuration Element (PNRCE), —sending to the PN Application Server (AS) a configuration request based on the stored configuration rights. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149803 | COMMISSIONING A NETWORK SYSTEM - A wireless network system ( | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149804 | PROXY MECHANISM FOR MESH-TYPE NETWORKS - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for connecting a mesh type network via an access device (C) to another network ( | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110158125 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING AND UTILIZING COMMUNICATIONS SHORTCUTS - Various methods for generating and utilizing communications shortcuts are provided. One example method includes associating a contact information detail to an unassigned shortcut for implementing one of at least one communications method associated with the contact information detail, and configuring the unassigned shortcut to initiate a communication session with a party associated with the contact information detail in response to a selection of the unassigned shortcut. Similar and related example methods and example apparatuses are also provided. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158126 | High speed wireless infrastructure - High speed wireless infrastructures and techniques are provided. Wireless radios are situated within an enterprise, each radio positioned at the end of the wireless frequency range for that of a neighboring radio. Each radio wireless transmits using direction steerable antennas at 60 Gigahertz. At lease one radio is interfaced to a back-end enterprise information server. Each radio capable of interfacing to a consumer's wireless device within the enterprise when that wireless device is within range of the directional steerable antennas. The wireless radios and the back-end information server combine to form a high speed wireless communication network within the enterprise. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158127 | WIRELESS EXTENDER SECURE DISCOVERY AND PROVISIONING - According to embodiments of the invention, a first wireless access point discovers a second wireless access point, the first wireless access point tunes its radio and privacy settings, without user input, based upon parameters automatically exchanged in response to the discovery of the second wireless access point, and a secure direct wireless connection is established between the first and second wireless access points using the radio and privacy settings. Adding the first wireless to an existing mesh network includes a determination of the best available direct wireless connection. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110164530 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING MUTUAL AND TRANSITIVE CORRELATION OVER A WIRELESS CHANNEL TO FORM LINKS AND DELIVER TARGETED CONTENT MESSAGES - A wireless node configured to store information, discover another wireless node by correlating the stored information with assist information from said another wireless node, and determine whether to establish a wireless link with said another wireless node based, at least in part, on the correlation. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110164531 | Systems and Methods for Wireless Network Routing Using Radio Frequency Distance-Based Virtual Node Locations - Devices and methods used in a wireless network employing geographical routing using virtual node locations. Such virtual node locations can be computed by a central computer that gathers information from some or all of the nodes. Each node may, for example, identify itself and its neighbors and provide a value indicative of the radio frequency (RF) distance to such neighbors. Examples of RF distance indicators include, but are not limited to, received signal strength indication (RSSI) and packet success rate (PSR). Geographic coordinates for none or some of the nodes may also be used to determine the virtual coordinates. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110164532 | USER APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A user apparatus to which radio access schemes of a single-carrier scheme and a multicarrier scheme are applied includes: a radio access scheme setting unit configured to set a radio access scheme; a discrete Fourier transform unit configured to perform discrete Fourier transform on a modulated symbol sequence when the radio access scheme is the single-carrier scheme; a serial parallel conversion unit configured to perform serial parallel conversion on the modulated symbol sequence when the radio access scheme is the multicarrier scheme; a frequency domain signal generation unit configured to assign radio resources to the modulated symbol sequence on which discrete Fourier transform has been performed or to the demodulated symbol sequence on which serial parallel conversion has been performed so as to generate a signal in the frequency domain; a waveform shaping filter configured to perform waveform shaping on the signal in the frequency domain; a transmission signal generation unit configured to perform inverse fast Fourier transform on the signal in the frequency domain on which waveform shaping has been performed so as to generate a transmission signal; and a transmission unit configured to transmit the transmission signal by radio. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110170452 | Auto-Configuring Multi-Layer Network - An auto-configuring multi-layer network including different communication protocols, namely both wired and wireless protocols, interchangeably and indifferently to interconnect various devices such as, for example, controllers, actuators, alarms, sensors, interfaces, etc. The auto-configuring multi-layer network uses a virtualization functionality that mirrors devices from one layer having a given communication protocol unto another layer having a different communication protocol. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110170453 | OPTIMIZED RESOURCE USAGE WITH NETWORK INITIATED QoS - A Quality of Service (QoS) interface maps virtual-to-real QoS instances and vice versa in order to make transparent to a network and to user equipment when network-initiated QoS is not supported by both. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110170454 | TERMINALS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTINUAL SERVICE MULTIPLEX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - A method for sending, a method for receiving, a system for sending, and a terminal for receiving continual service multiplex configuration information. Wherein, a multiplex service server configures service information for each service according to multimedia broadcasting data of a mobile multimedia broadcasting service, encapsulates a service identifier of each service and the corresponding service information into the continual service multiplex configuration information, and sends the continual service multiplex configuration information to a terminal via a broadcasting network; wherein, the service information includes at least demodulation information and program information, and the program information is used to distinguish a type of each service. The methods, system and terminal can speed up processing for the mobile multimedia broadcasting service and improve the user experience, and even in the case of having not received ESG, the terminal can also acquire the necessary information for processing and playing the service data. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110176453 | Method of configuring interfaces between a plurality of communication nodes - One embodiment includes monitoring, for each communication node, at least one factor of interest and a plurality of potential influencing factors associated with the factor of interest. The factor of interest characterizes an operating condition of the communication node, and the plurality of potential influencing factors each have a potential influence on the operating condition. For each factor of interest for each communication node, a predictor coefficient for one or more of the potential influencing factors associated with the factor of interest is determined. The predictor coefficient indicates a predicted level of influence the potential influencing factor has on the factor of interest. For each communication node, interfaces are configured between the communication node and other communication nodes based on the determined predictor coefficients. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176454 | System and Methods for Designing Network Surveillance Systems - Systems and methods for efficiently configuring network surveillance systems are disclosed. A network surveillance system is designed by selecting a first component for the network surveillance system. The surveillance performance index for the first component is determined. A second component for the network surveillance system is then selected based on the surveillance performance index of the first component. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176455 | COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN MOBILE TERMINAL PROGRAM, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A location information provision system | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176456 | CONNECTION SETTING APPARATUS, CONNECTION SETTING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A connection setting apparatus of configuring settings for connection with an external network is provided. The connection setting apparatus has a connector arranged and adapted to be connectable with a USB connector provided on a data communication card that is used to establish communication with the external network. In the connection setting apparatus, a storage is arranged and adapted to store identification information for identifying a carrier and a mobile communication network corresponding to the data communication card, in correlation with a connection setting provided for the carrier and the mobile communication network. The connection setting apparatus also has an acquirer arranged and adapted to obtain the identification information of the data communication card from the data communication card connected to the connector. The connection setting apparatus further has a setter arranged and adapted to specify a connection setting in correlation with the obtained identification information and actually configure connection settings based on the specified connection setting. This arrangement assures easy configuration of the network connection settings according to a simple algorithm. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176457 | ESTABLISHMENT OF AD-HOC NETWORKS BETWEEN MULTIPLE DEVICES - A method of configuring an ad-hoc wireless network between an authenticator and a plurality of wireless devices seeking authentication includes assigning a wireless device as the authenticator and receiving a first setup message transmitted from a first device seeking authentication to the authenticator and initiating a first handshake process between the authenticator and the first device seeking authentication. The method also includes receiving a second setup message transmitted from a second device seeking authentication to the authenticator. The second setup message is received by the authenticator prior to completion of the first handshake process. The method further includes initiating a second handshake process between the authenticator and the second device seeking authentication. The second handshake process is initiated prior to completion of the first handshake process. Moreover, the method includes completing the first handshake process and completing the second handshake process. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110182205 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICE DISCOVERY - A method and apparatus for conducting remote discovery of services across different local networks. A service discovery gateway in one local network issues a request for discovery information on the services in the opposite local network, embedded in a presence subscribe message over an IMS network. Discovery information is then received in a generic format embedded in a presence notify message over the IMS network. The received discovery information has been collected by a service discovery gateway in the first local network using a local service discovery protocol in the first local network. The received discovery information is announced to devices in the second local network, using a local service discovery protocol valid within the second local network. Thereby, local services can be provided and utilized across different local networks, even when different device-specific service discovery protocols are used within the local networks. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110182206 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ASSOCIATING A GATEWAY CONTROL SESSION WITH AN INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTIVITY ACCESS NETWORK (IP-CAN) SESSION - An apparatus and method for associating a gateway control session with an Internet protocol connectivity access network (IP-CAN) session comprising receiving an IP address for a home agent/local mobility agent (HA/LMA); receiving an access terminal (AT) network access identifier (NAI); and associating the gateway control session with the IP-CAN session using the IP address and NAI. In one aspect, a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) receives an access point name (APN) information as: a Vendor Specific Option of either an IP control protocol (IPCP) or an IPv6 control protocol, a configuration option in a Vendor Specific Network Control Protocol, or a dynamic host configuration protocol extension for associating the sessions. The PCRF receives an AT IP address allocation and subsequently establishes the gateway control session to associate two sessions. The PCRF receives a correlation identifier in the gateway control session and in the IP-CAN session to associate two sessions. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110182207 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROGRAM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication device including a communication unit, a storage unit that stores information of one wireless communication device forming a same communication group as the wireless communication device, received by the communication unit, and a control unit that discloses the information of the one wireless communication device during an information disclosure period initiated based on user operation for connecting the one wireless communication device forming the communication group and another wireless communication device and does not disclose the information of the one wireless communication device during another period. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110182208 | POWER SAVING CONTROL FOR NETWORK SYSTEM - A network system including a plurality of devices connected to one another via a network includes a grouping processing section configured to, from among the plurality of devices, perform grouping of devices having at least one predetermined item common thereto in terms of device usage, and a representative selection section configured to select one of the devices having been grouped as a representative device. Further, the network system includes a control section configured to cause non-representative devices, which are remaining devices resulting from excluding the representative device from the devices having been grouped, to perform synchronously a mode switching operation for switching between a normal mode and a power saving mode in which an amount of power consumption is smaller than that in the normal mode, and cause the representative device to perform the mode switching operation independently of the mode switching operation performed by the non-representative devices. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110188403 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING MOBILE SERVICES DELIVERY - A method and apparatus for analyzing mobile services delivery to provide a coherent, path-based awareness of the mobile services and the corresponding underlying transport elements supporting each service or path. In various embodiments, configuration information, status information and connections information associated with elements within a network such as a Long Term Evolution (LTE) wireless network are used to help infer or determine the connections between network elements to be managed. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110188404 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMAL SERVICE CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION BASED ON MULTI-AGENT SIMULATION - A method, and system employing the method, for service channel reconfiguration at a service outlet includes generating service transaction data of a service outlet, generating queue management system (QMS) data of the service outlet, and generating cost and profit data for the service outlet. Data is extracted from the service transaction data and the QMS data relating to specified parameters including customer experience data, and customer demand data. The service transaction data and the QMS data is integrated with the cost and profit data providing a unified objective function. Stochastic service processes and customer behavior data are modeled. The unified objective function is evaluated using the stochastic service processes and customer behavior data model, and the service channel function of the service outlet is reconfigured using the unified objective function. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110188405 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FINDING STAR STRUCTURES AS COMMUNITIES IN NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention provide systems, methods, apparatuses and program products providing methods to define and find relationships in network environments. Embodiments of the invention utilize relationship definitions for defining network environment relationships as star structures within the network of interest and automatically discover these star structures in networks. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110188406 | Message Transport System Using Publication and Subscription Mechanisms - A message transport system may use a publication subscription mechanism to connect nodes and transport messages through the nodes. Each node may establish connections to other nodes, and subscription requests and publication notifications may be passed across the nodes to establish paths for messages. When a message is published, the message may be passed over those connections for which a subscription is active. A path identifier may be added to the message as it is passed between nodes, and the path identifier may be used by a subscribing node for identification of the information being received. When a subscriber notification is removed, the path may be deconstructed across multiple nodes. The nodes may be arranged such that each node is agnostic to any connections past the nodes to which it is connected, and may allow any node to subscribe to any information published within the network. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110188407 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING DEVICES ON A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method, apparatus, and system for discovering devices on a local area network. The method comprises sending a DNS request from a host networking element, receiving the DNS request at one or more devices, and responding to the host networking element with one or more DNS responses. The DNS request comprises one or more particular domain names. The one or more DNS responses comprise local network address information for the one or more VoIP devices. The apparatus comprises means for filtering a set of network traffic for a DNS request, means for responding to a DNS request with a local network address, and means for forwarding the DNS request to another device. The system comprises a computer for generating a DNS request for a particular domain, and one or more VoIP devices for receiving the DNS request and sending a DNS response to the computer with a local network address for the VoIP device. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110188408 | METHOD OF SELECTIVELY APPLYING A PDCP FUNCTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a wireless communication system and terminal for providing a wireless communication service, and more particularly, a method of selectively applying a PDCP function based on data characteristic transmitted through a radio bearer in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from a UMTS, Long Term Evolution (LTE) System or LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) system. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110188409 | Communication Network Topology Determination - A communication network topology is determined by evaluating costs of states each representing a possible assignment of hubs and remote nodes to nodes of the communication network. The hubs connect to a central network, the remote nodes connect wirelessly to the hubs and obtain connectivity to the central network through the hubs. The cost of each state is determined based on costs for configuring each node as a hub or a remote node, uplink frequencies for sending data from the remote nodes to corresponding hubs, and downlink frequencies for sending data from the hubs to corresponding remote nodes. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110194456 | HYBRID COVERAGE PLANNER AND COST ESTIMATOR - A dynamic network planning and cost estimation tool for designing, enhancing and deploying telecommunication networks that administers supplied definition data including service descriptions, equipment specifications and empirical network design and demographic data by storing that information and making it accessible to the tool. A user can provide a target coverage area along with some definitions related to the target area, such as services to include or exclude, equipment types to include or excludes, etc. Based on the available equipment and services, calculations are run to determine how many pieces of the equipment are required to provide full coverage, as well as meet desired throughput and data packet delivery requirements. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110194457 | Identification Device for Identifying The End of a Network Cable and Network System Having The Same - An identification device for identifying the end of a network cable comprises a transmitting unit, an address-storing unit, and a control unit. The transmitting unit is electrically connected to a switch; the address-storing unit is electrically to the transmitting unit, the address-storing unit storing a MAC address; and a control unit is electrically connected to the address-storing unit. When the identification device receives a request signal, the control unit delivers the MAC address to the transmitting unit. Then the MAC address is delivered to a server via the switch. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110194458 | NETWORK MODE SWITCHING METHOD AND SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Disclosed is a method of switching modes in a serial data communication network comprising a plurality of interconnected nodes, each of said nodes comprising a plurality of mode-dependent configurations, the method including, during a first mode, issuing an instruction to said nodes, said instruction identifying a next mode of the data communication network; terminating said first mode; and following said termination, reconfiguring each of said nodes in accordance with the configuration corresponding to said next mode identified by said instruction. A serial data communication network implementing such a method is also disclosed. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110194459 | REGISTRATION OF PRIVATE USER IDENTITIES AND CONTACT ADDRESSES IN AN IMS NETWORK - The present invention faces the issues of registering more than one IMPI and more than one contact address within a single registration procedure in an IMS network. Thus, the present invention provides for a method and a HSS to allow the implicit registration of more than one IMPI, or the implicit registration of more than one contact address, or both, upon explicit registration of a subscriber with a given IMPI/IMPU pair and a given contact address. In particular, the invention provides for a method including the steps of configuring subscriber data for the subscriber at the HSS with at least one implicit registration set selected from: a set of IMPI's associated with a given IMPI or with a given IMPU, and a set of contact addresses per IMPI basis; downloading from the HSS towards the S-CSCF the implicit registration set; and building up a corresponding data model therein. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110199936 | IMPLEMENTATION OF SWITCHES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A routing device such as either a 1:N demultiplexer or N:1 multiplexer can provide a power dissipation proportional to log | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110199937 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for configuring a wireless network having a plurality of nodes to which a mobile device attaches to access the network, a plurality of gateways (GTW) and a mobile management entity (MME), includes the steps of: each GTW providing to the MME a code giving its identity and information identifying the nodes that the respective GTW serves; and the MME sending the code and information identifying the nodes that the respective GTW serves to nodes of the network at which the code and information is stored. The plurality of nodes may include home nodes. The network may be, for example, an LTE network. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110199938 | COMMUNICATING CONSTRAINT INFORMATION FOR DETERMINING A PATH SUBJECT TO SUCH CONSTRAINTS - Path determination constraints may be encoded in the form of a program having one or more instructions. Each of instructions may include an operation code, and operands (or pointers to locations where operands are stored). In this way, an extensible, interoperable way for a nodes (e.g., label-switching routers) to communicate constraints within a network is provided. Such constraints may be inserted (e.g., as one or more CONSTRAINT objects) into signaling messages (e.g., a PATH RSVP message). By enabling the signaling of constraints, the determination of constraint-based (label-switched) paths can be distributed among a number of (label-switching) routers or other nodes. Upon receiving a message with constraints (e.g., a CONSTRAINT object(s)), a node may (i) ignore the constraints if the node is a tail-end node (label-switching router), (ii) apply the constraints to a link if the next hop in the (label-switched) path is strict, and/or (iii) perform a constraint-based path determination to a next hop if the next hop is loose. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110199939 | PATH COMPUTATION METHOD, NODE DEVICE AND PATH COMPUTATION ELEMENT - A path computation method is provided. A node device and a path computation element (PCE) are also provided correspondingly. The path computation method includes: sending a path computation request message to the PCE after receiving a client-side service transmission request, the path computation request message carrying identifiers of a source node and a destination node that access a client-side service and carrying a path concatenation constraint; and receiving the path computation response message carrying path information returned by the PCE, the path information being obtained by the PCE through computation according to the identifiers of the source node and the destination node that accesses a client-side service, the concatenation constraint, and concatenation capabilities of each interface of nodes in a network. The technical solution of the present invention is simpler and more convenient, which obviously reduces the complexity of the specific implementation. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110199940 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING ROUTE - The embodiment of the present invention provides a method for establishing a route, which includes searching a target node by a node from a first level node group according to first level route information, returning to query a result or data saved by the target node if the target node is found, otherwise executing the following step; searching a target node by the node from a higher level node group according to higher level route information, returning to query a result or the data saved by the target node if the target node is found, otherwise repeating the step. Through the hierarchical communication system, most of the flows of daily service operations in the communication network are limited within a small region, thereby preventing from excessively occupying the band width of a backbone network being originally not wide enough. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110205932 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A TARGET CELL IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method for detecting a target cell by a mobile device, the method comprising storing traversed paths of the mobile device, the stored traversed paths each comprising information to identify cells in a sequence of cells traversed by the mobile device referenced to the target cell, compiling information identifying cells traversed by the device in real time to produce current path information, comparing the current path information to the stored traversed paths and inferring from the comparison a relative proximity of the mobile device to the target cell and adapting a search for the target cell based on the relative proximity. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110205933 | ROUTING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method for routing data over a telecommunications carrier network including at least two switching devices defining at least one physical link, the method including defining in advance a plurality of traffic flows, each associated with specific routing through at least one of the physical links in the network; configuring a routing system according to the traffic flows; collecting data of traffic transmitted over at least some of the traffic flows, calculating traffic statistics, from the collected data, for each of the flows in the network; and re-calculating the routing system configuration utilizing the calculated traffic statistics. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110205934 | Method and System for 10GBase-T Start-Up - Certain aspects for the start-up procedure of transceivers supporting higher data rates over twisted-pair copper cabling are provided for 10 Gbit/sec Ethernet links (10GBASE-T). During a PMA (physical medium attachment) training period of the start-up procedure, long PMA training frames are exchanged periodically between link partners. A significant portion of each PMA training frame consists of known pseudo random sequences simultaneously transmitted over four wire pairs. PMA training frames include an InfoField for exchanging parameters and control information between link partners. For example, the InfoField's payload comprises fields for indicating current transmit power backoff (PBO), next PBO, requested PBO, transition count, control information, and for communicating precoder coefficients. Information in InfoFields is repeated and is not necessary that a link partner decodes every InfoField. For example, by occasionally reading the transition count, a link partner can determine when a change in transmit PBO and/or a state transition is to occur. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110211493 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING A DEMARCATION DEVICE - The present application discloses, among other things, an improved demarcation device. In some embodiments, the demarcation device includes: a physical layer module for receiving frames transmitted to the device; and a device configuration protocol layer configured to: (a) receive the frame after the frame is received from the physical layer, (b) determine whether the frame is a valid device configuration protocol data unit (DCPDU), and (c) execute a command if the frame is a valid DCPDU. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110216669 | System and Method to Enable Large MTUs in Data Center Ethernet Networks - A method of configuring a port on a network device includes receiving a frame of information, determining that the frame includes maximum transmission unit (MTU) information, and configuring a prioritized receive queue on the port with an MTU size based on the MTU information. The MTU size is different than another MTU size of another prioritized receive queue on the port. A network interface includes a port, a de-multiplexer coupled to an output or the port, and prioritized receive queues that each have an MTTU size. A first prioritized receive queue has an MTU size different than a second prioritized receive queue. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110222433 | Automatic address configuration of vehicle network devices during installation - A method for automatic network address configuration of network devices during installation is described. According to the method, a network address is configured on the devices and a check is performed as to whether the address is already in use. If not, a device is configured on the network. The method allows configuration of multiple identical devices with different network addresses. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110222434 | Method and Apparatus for Deploying a Wireless Network - A method for deploying a wireless network in accordance with particular embodiments includes deploying one or more base stations configured to provide wireless connections between the one or more base stations and one or more endpoints. The method also includes deploying one or more remote transceivers configured to provide wireless connections between the one or more remote transceivers and one or more endpoints. The method further includes modifying at least one base station of the one or more base stations. The modified base station is configured to control the one or more remote transceivers. The method additionally includes modifying at least one remote transceiver of the one or more remote transceivers. The modified remote transceiver is configured to control the at least one remote transceiver without receiving control information from the at least one base station. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110222435 | Method and System for a Radio Frequency Management in a Mesh Network with a Path Distance Factor - A method and system for radio frequency management (RFM) in a mesh network using a path distance factor (PDF) is disclosed. According to one embodiment, a computer-implemented method, comprises calculating a path distance factor (PDF) between a first mesh router and a portal. A frame is transmitted to a second mesh router, wherein the frame includes the path distance factor. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110222436 | TOPOLOGY DETEMINATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - There is provided a method of determining the topology of a base station in a communications network. The base stations sends a configuration request message to a configuration node, and subsequently receives from the configuration node a configuration response message, the configuration response message including topology information relating to the base station. This topology information can be used in allowing the base station to most efficiently set up a communication with another base station. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110222437 | PATH CALCULATING METHOD, PROGRAM AND CALCULATING APPARATUS - A calculating apparatus calculates a shortest path connecting two nodes of a network. A shortest-path group, which is a set of shortest paths having node Y as their starting points, can be calculated at once by having calculated a shortest path having node Y as its starting point for each of other nodes. When the shortest-path group having node Y as the starting point is calculated and further if a group of shortest paths having node X as their starting points is stored beforehand in a storing unit, then path portions, which belong to the group of shortest paths having node X as the starting points and further which are paths extending from node Y to the nodes located downstream from node Y, are utilized as part of a result of calculation of the shortest path group having node Y as the starting point. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110228699 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP NETWORK FOR IP COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE TERMINAL - A method is provided for setting up a network for Internet Protocol (IP) communication between mobile terminals. A first mobile terminal determines a second mobile terminal that will communicate with the first mobile terminal. The first mobile terminal generates network setup information of the first mobile terminal for the IP communication and performs network setup using the network setup information. The first mobile terminal generates a network setup message including network setup information of the second mobile terminal, and sends the network setup message to the second mobile terminal. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110228700 | Subframe Allocation for In-Band Relay Nodes - A coordinating node avoids or reduces interference between relay nodes by coordinating subframe allocation for the interfering relay nodes. The coordinating node identifies the interfering relay nodes that require the same subframe allocation and provides the necessary signaling so that the involved nodes get information concerning the subframe allocations. The system may be implemented using a centralized node (e.g., OAM) or distributed coordinating nodes. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110228701 | MOBILE BROADBAND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, SUCH AS A DEPLOYABLE SELF-CONTAINED PORTABLE SYSTEM - Systems and methods for establishing IT services in edge environments are described. In some examples, the system comprises a transportable housing capable of being carried by personnel, a plurality of commercial off-the-shelf components contained in the housing and coupled together and configured to provide the broadband communications network, a management subsystem operatively coupled to the plurality of components, a network connection subsystem defined by at least a first portion of the plurality of components and configured to establish access to the broadband communications network, and a connection subsystem defined by at least a second portion of the plurality of components and that provides a user with a connection to the broadband communications network via the network connection subsystem | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110228702 | System and Method for Providing Network Resiliency - The invention is directed toward an automated system and process to provide resiliency to a network infrastructure where traditional established methods tend to fail. The system analyzes the underlying physical characteristics of the network topology to identify physically diverse backup routing paths among nodes in the network. The system takes as input the number of diverse paths desired and a characteristic(s) used to choose the most desirable paths, such as delay, flow, or cost. The invention searches for multiple solutions for the selected number of diverse paths within the network. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110228703 | Configuring Signaling Radio Bearer Information In a User Equipment Protocol Stack - In accordance with the teachings described herein, systems and methods are provided for configuring signaling radio bearer information in a user equipment protocol stack. A wireless network may be used that includes a radio access network for transmitting information between a user equipment device and a core network. An instruction may be received to generate a signaling radio bearer configuration information element (IE) that includes configuration information for a pre-selected number of signaling radio bearers. The signaling radio bearer configuration IE may then be generated, while ensuring that the signaling radio bearer configuration IE includes configuration information for a required minimum number of signaling radio bearers. The signaling radio bearer configuration information element may be transmitted from the radio access network to the user equipment device for use in configuring the signaling radio bearers in the user equipment device. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110228704 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SEEKING A WIRELESS NETWORK FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - The disclosure relates to a system and method for initiating a command relating to one network that an electronic communication device may be in communication with, depending on triggering conditions relating to another network that the device may be in communication with. The communication device comprises: a network connection to initiate a command relating to the network after satisfaction of a predetermined condition relating to another network relating to the communication device; and a communication system to process communications between the device and the network and between the device and another network. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110228705 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK TRANSIT LINK TOPOLOGY OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method and configuration manager generates a routing topology for a wireless mesh network. The wireless mesh network has a plurality of internal nodes, at least one edge node, and at least one originating device. A plurality of potential routing solutions is determined which contain a plurality of paths through the wireless mesh network from the at least one originating device to the at least one edge node such that data communicated from the at least one originating device reaches the at least one edge node in no more than a predetermined number of hops. Each potential routing solution is based on at least one measured wireless communication parameter between internal nodes. Metric calculations for each potential routing solution are computed to determine a preferred routing solution. The wireless mesh network is configured to route traffic using the preferred routing solution. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110235544 | Method For Optimizing Network Mapping Tool Discovery - In accordance with one aspect of the embodiments of this invention there is a method to operate a network mapping tool. The method includes performing a network mapping operation over a first set of ports to generate a list of hosts that are found to be alive; performing a sequential scan on only those hosts in the list to detect the operating system of each host in the list; and performing a parallel port scan to detect characteristics of only those hosts in the list. The characteristics can include an identification of at least applications and services running on the hosts in the list. The second set of ports can be a full set of ports. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110235545 | MAC-Address Based Virtual Route Aggregation - An autonomous system includes at least some packet network devices that are capable of operating in a virtual route aggregation environment and some packet network devices that are not capable of operating in a virtual route aggregation environment. The autonomous system includes at least one egress border router, at least one aggregation router and at least one intermediate router. The egress border router uses an interior border gateway protocol to distribute a label message to the other routers in the autonomous system, the label message including a next hop MAC address associated with either an external router or the egress border router. The egress border router and the intermediate router using information included in the label message to contrast layer 2 table entries and the aggregation router using information included in the label message to construct a layer 3 table entry. The aggregation router receives a packet with a virtual prefix that corresponds to a virtual prefix in a list of virtual prefixes stored by the aggregation router, and routes the packet over a virtual path corresponding to one of the virtual prefixes. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110235546 | MANAGING A DATA NETWORK CONNECTION FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS BASED ON USER LOCATION - Providing for select Internet Protocol traffic offload (SIPTO) in a mobile communication environment is described herein. By way of example, SIPTO traffic can be facilitated via local packet gateways (P-GWs) that provide an interface to the Internet or a like data network, in addition to a centralized gateway GPRS support node (GGSN). Eligibility for SIPTO can be on a user equipment (UE) by UE basis; for instance, relying on stored subscription or account information to determine SIPTO eligibility. In particular aspects, eligibility for SIPTO can also be based on a packet network by packet network basis, or a combination of the foregoing. This enables flexibility in determining whether SIPTO can be established for a given UE in a given location, and can be based for instance on UE capability, subscription status information, data network capability, tariff rates, and so on, as well as different legal requirements of government jurisdictions. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110235547 | CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD AND CONTROL INFORMATION RECEIVING TERMINAL - A control information transmission method and a control information receiving terminal are provided. The transmission method comprises: notifying a terminal of setting information of control information in a downlink subframe (S | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110235548 | MANAGING HIERARCHICALLY ORGANIZED SUBSCRIBER PROFILES - Methods are provided for managing hierarchically organized subscriber profiles. According to one embodiment, a policy engine of a VR defines services available to subscribers in terms of profile identifiers. A scalable subscriber profile database is established having a memory requirement dependent upon the number of available service contexts by hierarchically organizing profile identifiers as leaf profile identifiers, which explicitly define services, and intermediate profile identifiers, which indirectly represent services. The policy engine receives a first-level profile identifier and determines whether it is among those stored in the database. If not, then it obtains service profile information associated with the first-level profile identifier. If the first-level profile identifier is an intermediate profile identifier having leaf profile identifiers, then it further obtains them and associated profile information and stores this information in the database. The first-level profile identifier and the associated service profile information are also stored in the database. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110243030 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING PROTECTION PATHS IN A MULTI-DOMAIN NETWORK - Systems and methods for determining multiple paths in a multi-domain network are provided. In some embodiment, a method for determining multiple paths in a network is provided. The method may include determining a first path between a source node and a destination node and determining a second path disjoint from the first path. In some embodiments, to determine the second path includes determining which ingress nodes are available in a domain that includes the destination node, where the available ingress nodes are not part of the first path, and implementing a disjoint path algorithm for each of the available ingress nodes. To determine the first path includes implementing forward path calculations. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243031 | APPARATUS AND METHODS RELATED TO THE PACKAGING AND CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE OF A DISTRIBUTED SWITCH FABRIC - In some embodiments, a system includes a chassis having a group of horizontal slots in which a first group of line cards is disposed and a group of vertical slots in which a second group of line cards is disposed. Each port of a line card from the first group of line cards is operatively coupled to a different line card from the second group of line cards when the system is in a first configuration. A first set of ports and a second set of ports of a line card from the first group of line cards are operatively coupled to a first line card and a second line card from the second group of line cards, respectively, when the system is in a second configuration. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243032 | Method For Energy Efficient Configuration Of Ports Of A Logical Communication Channel - A method for energy efficient configuration of a physical port of a plurality of physical ports of a network device is described herein. One or more physical ports of the plurality of physical ports may be aggregated to a logical port in a logical communication channel between the network device and another device. A configuration of the one or more physical ports is determined. The configuration includes one or more parameters which are monitored. The physical port of the plurality of physical ports is selected and a configuration state of the selected physical port is modified upon detection of an event based on the one or more parameters. The modified configuration state is one of an active port state, an active port state with a limited bandwidth utilization rate, and a standby port state. The selected port is reconfigured according to the modified configuration state. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243033 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for automatic access in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a scanner for scanning surrounding Access Points (APs) by receiving beacon messages from the APs, a determiner for detecting an AP, a WPS button of which has been pressed, from one or more scanned APs and for determining if there are two or more detected APs, and a configurator for, when there are two or more detected APs, transmitting a message including a Medium Access Control (MAC) address of an AP, which has been selected among the detected APs by an input of a user, to the AP and for performing a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) with the selected AP, thereby accessing a wireless Local Area Network (LAN). | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243034 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - Disclosed are a communication system, a base station apparatus, a mobile station apparatus, and a method for communication, which facilitate efficient administration of information for settings maintained by base station apparatuses and mobile station apparatuses in a system involving a plurality of component carriers. A mobile communications system configured of the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus administers the system information of one or more component carriers possessing select spectrum width from the system spectrum. When a component carrier is added to the mobile station apparatus, the system applies the system information belonging to the component carriers already connected to the system to the component carrier added thereto. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110249592 | NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD WITH AUTO-NEGOTIATION MECHANISM, NETWORK APPARATUS HAVING AUTO-NEGOTIATION MECHANISM AND NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD - A network connection method with an auto-negotiation mechanism is applied to a first network apparatus, where the first network apparatus supports a plurality of connection modes, and the method includes: transmitting a plurality of indication signals to a second network apparatus to prepare to establish a link between the first network apparatus and the second network apparatus, where the plurality of indication signals correspond to the plurality of connection modes respectively; counting a number of times that the first network apparatus enters a transmit disable state to generate a counting value; and when the counting value reaches a threshold value, disabling a specific connection mode of the plurality of connection modes supported by the first network apparatus. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110249593 | DEVICE CAPABLE OF NOTIFYING OPERATION STATE CHANGE THEREOF THROUGH NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION METHOD OF THE DEVICE - A method of notifying an operation state change of a device, the method involving forming a network of devices used by a user and that perform network communication; when an operation state change of a first device in the network occurs, searching for at least one device currently being used by the user in the network of devices; and transmitting information regarding the operation state change of the first device to the at least one device, wherein the information regarding the operation state change of the first device is displayed on a display unit of the at least one device. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110255441 | Method And Apparatus For Reconfiguring IC Architectures - A reconfigurable hardware architecture, in the form of a System-on-Chip | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110255442 | METHOD OF REDUCING OCCURRENCE OF MASKED NODES, A NODE AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method of reducing occurrence of masked nodes in a communication network comprising at least three communication nodes operating in the same frequency band and wherein a first node and a second node are within a radio communication range of each other, a third node being within the radio communication range of the second node, but outside the range of the first node. First control information is exchanged between the first node and the second node for establishing a data communication link between them. Then the second node detects intention of the third node to establish a data communication link and prevents the third node from establishing the data communication link. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110255443 | VIRTUAL ROUTERS FOR GMPLS NETWORKS - Virtual routers that abstract photonic sub-domains are provided for GMPLS networks. A virtual router uses a link viability matrix to keep track of the set of viable connections between inputs and outputs of a photonic sub-domain. A virtual router may receive RSVP-TE signaling messages and either allocate a working input to output link pair or, if explicitly signaled, verify that the requested link is currently viable. A virtual router also advertises, in its link state updates, the current set of possible outputs for any input link. Shortest path computations can be implemented utilizing virtual routers by modifying a topology graph in accordance with the link viability matrix of the virtual router. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110261720 | System and Method for Unique Identifier Exchange During Auto-Negotiation - A system and method for unique identifier exchange during auto-negotiation. Wired networks can include non-conformant bridges and/or repeaters that can erroneously forward link protocol frames such as LLDP. These present a problem for higher layer protocols that attempt to manage properties of the link. The unique identifiers exchanged during auto-negotiation can be passed up to higher layers for an integrity check of unique identifiers exchanged using higher layer protocols. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110261721 | METHOD AND SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE FOR A SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK - A method and system architecture for a self-organizing network (SON) includes a first cell having a first user equipment classifier for determining one of cell edge and cell central. The SON also includes a second cell having a second user equipment classifier for determining one of cell edge and cell central. The system architecture and method provide a first transmit time interval (TTI) schema for user equipment within the area of coverage associated with the first cell and a TTI schema for user equipment within the area of coverage associated with the second cell, the second TTI schema differing from the first TTI schema. The user equipment is classified as cell centre or cell edge in dependence upon at least one of QoS requirement, geometry, periodic PSMM and CQI reports. The TTI schemas are used for “cell edge” user equipment by the respective cells. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110261722 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, FORWARDING NODE, PATH MANAGEMENT SERVER, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system comprises a path management server that configures forwarding path information that is configured by arranging link IDs for identifying communication interfaces provided in respective forwarding nodes in a forwarding path of a data transfer network or links extending between said respective forwarding nodes and neighboring nodes thereof. For packets to which is added a header containing the forwarding path information, a forwarding node performs packet forwarding processing in accordance with the forwarding path information. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110267977 | Method and Apparatus for Assisted Network Discovery - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a user equipment configured to receive local network connectivity information over a first wireless interface, determine a scanning strategy based at least in part on the received information, and discover a local network over a second wireless interface using at least in part the determined scanning strategy. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110267978 | CONFIGURING COMPONENT CARRIERS IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - A system and method for configuring component carriers in carrier aggregation is disclosed. The method comprises communicating a carrier aggregation capability for a selected UE to an enhanced Node B (eNode B) configured to provide service for a plurality of UEs. A plurality of component carriers at the eNode B can be configured for the selected UE based on the carrier aggregation capability of the selected UE. A component carrier configuration message is broadcast from the eNode B containing component carrier configuration information that is common to the plurality of UEs. Specific configuration information that is specific to the selected UE is communicated using dedicated communication signaling. Selected configured component carriers are then activated by the eNode B for the selected UE. Activation can be based on the UE's quality of service needs, bandwidth needs, and strength of signal for the component carriers. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110267979 | Communication system control apparatus, control method, and program - A control apparatus comprises: a switch extraction unit extracting a second switch adjacent to a first switch that stops in a communication system including a plurality of switches having a predetermined topology; a flow extraction unit extracting a flow transferred to the first switch after the second switch from a plurality of flows passing through the communication system; a path determination unit determining, assuming that, among the plurality of switches, switches located at start and end nodes of the flow are third and fourth switches, respectively, a path from the second switch to the fourth switch, based on a topology obtained by excluding the first switch from the predetermined topology; and a path generation unit connecting a path from the third switch to the second switch in an initial path of the flow and a path determined by the path determination unit to generate a new path of the flow. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110267980 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HINT-BASED DISCOVERY OF PATH SUPPORTING INFRASTRUCTURE - A method and apparatus for rapidly discovering unknown or unmanaged portions of network using hints defining possible transport layer infrastructure topology and the like | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110274007 | Method of Handling Measurement Gap Configuration and Communication Device Thereof - A method of handling measurement gap configuration for a network in a wireless communication system comprising a mobile device capable of receiving and/or transmitting on a plurality of component carriers is disclosed. The method comprises configuring at least a measurement gap configuration each for at least a component carrier of the plurality of component carriers, to the mobile device. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110274008 | Configurable switch for asymmetric communication - A networking device including at least two asymmetric communication ports. at least one of the asymmetric communication ports is a self-configurable asymmetric port and the self-configurable asymmetric port is configured automatically and able to support high throughput communications. Also disclosed a switch supporting uncompressed video comprising self-configurable asymmetric ports. The switch configured to automatically set the self-configurable asymmetric ports to support direction of communication of asymmetric end-devices coupled to the self-configurable asymmetric ports. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110280151 | PROVISIONING FOR ENTERPRISE SERVICES - Configuring a communication system. Configuring a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) system to respond to a configuration telephone number by routing call control for the configuration number to an Service Management Platform (SMP). Determining an enterprise extension associated with an enterprise account in the domain of the SMP. Directing a mobile communication device associated with the enterprise account to call the configuration telephone number, and to communicate the determined enterprise extension and an authentication token of the enterprise account. Receiving, at the PBX system, a call on the configuration telephone number. Routing the call to the SMP. Receiving the determined enterprise extension at the SMP. Determining the PBX system port of the call. Directing the mobile communication device to communicate the authentication token. Receiving the authentication token. Upon receipt of an authentication token equivalent to the directed authentication token, associating the enterprise account with the determined PBX system port. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110280152 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication device including a control unit that controls the wireless communication device to act as a group owner or a client, and a communication unit that communicates with another wireless communication device according to control by the control unit, and, when a communication group having a topology where the wireless communication device acts as a group owner and the another wireless communication device acts as a client of the wireless communication device is formed, and a new wireless communication device to enter the communication group appears, the control unit determines whether or not to change a topology of the communication group. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110280153 | System, Apparatus for Content Delivery for Internet Traffic and Methods Thereof - In one embodiment, a method of serving media includes receiving a request to serve media content to an user equipment, and receiving caching information regarding the media content. The caching information includes information regarding whether the media content requested by the user equipment is cacheable. A first media server is assigned from a hierarchical set of media servers to serve the user equipment if the media content to be served is cacheable. The hierarchical set of media servers includes a plurality of first type of media servers deployed in a plurality of layer2 (L2) access networks. The user equipment is coupled to the content delivery network through a layer2 access network of the plurality of L2 access networks. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110280154 | Method and Apparatus for Management of a Global Wireless Sensor Network - Methods and apparatus for global wireless sensor network architecture and protocol for remote supervision, asset control and operational management based on localized clusters of autonomous sensor/supervision/operational sensor nodes capable of ad hoc interconnection with nearby nodes and connection to gateway nodes with increased network functionality. These localized cluster nodes send data to gateway nodes either directly or through multi-hop transactions. The gateway nodes are, in turn, connected to other gateway nodes and operations control centers either through wireless or wired data communications links. Utilizing the Internet for long range interconnectivity, the network is scaleable to a global level. The resulting network is based on an ad hoc mesh topology to allow flexibility in network modification and expansion and is comprised of a tiered structure defined by increasing functionality. A current application for this technology is the remote control and supervision of lighting systems for facilities and municipalities on a local, national and/or global basis from centralized regional operations centers. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110280155 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING APN SUBSCRIPTION CONFIGURATION - A method and an apparatus for updating an Access Point Name (APN) subscription configuration are disclosed. The method includes: receiving an update request message sent by a network element, where the update request message carries the first APN information, Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (GW) information and an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI); obtaining the second APN information of the corresponding user according to the IMSI; and updating a wild card APN subscription configuration of the corresponding user according to the first APN information if the first APN information is different from the second APN information and the corresponding user subscribes to a wild card APN. The embodiments of the present invention reduce unnecessary signaling interactions between the Home Subscriber Server (HSS) and other network elements, enhance the data transmission performance of the network, and reduce the unnecessary overhead of the HSS. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110280156 | Method and Apparatus for a Wireless Home Mesh Network with Network Topology Visualizer - An apparatus and method for a wireless home mesh network with a network topology visualizer is described. In one embodiment, the method may include collecting node topology information by a node of a wireless home mesh network, where the node topology information includes a list of neighbor nodes for the node. Thereafter, a communication socket is opened, and a node topology packet, including a lust of neighbor nodes, is transmitted in order to produce a global network topology map. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110286356 | BROADCAST CONTROL OF ACCESS TERMINAL RADIO EVENT HANDLING - Radio event handling at access terminals is controlled at a granularity other than access terminal-level granularity through the use of broadcast control values. For example, a network entity such as an access point may broadcast control values to control radio event handling (e.g., radio event logging and/or reporting) at access terminals in the vicinity of the access point. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110286357 | FABRIC FORMATION FOR VIRTUAL CLUSTER SWITCHING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch system. The switch includes a port to couple to a second switch and a control mechanism configured. During operation, the control mechanism receives from the second switch a set of configuration information. Based on the received configuration information, the control mechanism invites the second switch to join a virtual cluster switch. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110286358 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING A ROUTE OF A CONNECTION - The present invention provides a method for establishing a route of a connection, which comprises: a route relation group is configured on a service node responsible for route calculation; the route relation group comprises a connection in which the service node is contained and other connections having route relation with the connection; when a route of a connection is requested to be established, the service node responsible for route calculation confirms the route of the connection according to the route relation group configured on the service node, and then establishes the route of the connection. A device for establishing a route of a connection is also provided in the present invention. With the present invention, the problem of high probability of route conflict in the existing connection route establishment process can be solved. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110286359 | ROUTE SETUP SERVER, ROUTE SETUP METHOD AND ROUTE SETUP PROGRAM - A route setup server has a storage unit, an IP routing unit and a flow management unit. A routing determination table indicating a router node assigned to an IP router among the plurality of nodes is stored in the storage unit. The IP routing unit has a software-based IP routing module having a same function as an IP router with respect to each router node. The flow management unit refers to the routing determination table to check whether or not a requestor node of a route setup request corresponds to any router node. The IP routing unit performs packet IP routing by using the software-based IP routing module associated with the corresponding router node to update a header of the packet. After that, the requestor node of the route setup request is updated to a destination node designated by a destination MAC address of the packet. Such the processing is repeated and thus the communication route is determined. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110286360 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMPLY CONFIGURING A SUBSCRIBER APPLIANCE FOR PERFORMING A SERVICE CONTROLLED BY A SEPARATE SERVICE PROVIDER - A method and apparatus for configuring an appliance, such as a network node, for performing a service, such as communicating with a network, controlled by a service provider include inserting into an Ethernet port on the appliance an Ethernet couple on a device that is usually small compared to the appliance. The device is configured to send through the Ethernet couple without human intervention an Internet Protocol (IP) data packet that is directed to a logical port of an established standard, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) port 80. The IP data packet includes appliance configuration data in a message form for the established standard, such as an HTTP POST. As a result, the appliance is configured automatically for performing the service controlled by the service provider. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110292831 | EXPANDABLE NETWORK SYSTEM AND REDUNDANT METHOD FOR THE SAME - Disclosed are an expandable network system and a redundant method applied to the system. According to one embodiment, the network system may be a ring-type or linear-type network system. A plurality of network nodes form one or more sub-networks. Many interconnected sub-networks form another network. While the network system is initialized, the method defines the role of each network port of each network node in each sub-network. Concurrently, every network port interconnected between the sub-networks is also defined to be a blocked port or a forward port. This mechanism defining the role of each port not only prevents the possible broadcast storm occurred in the network system, but also modifies the network signaling path by re-defining the roles of the ports while the connection changes. Therefore, the expandable network system and the method achieve a fast-redundant connection scheme, and the more flexible network-expanding function. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110292832 | Generating Network Topology Parameters and Monitoring a Communications Network Domain - A method of generating network topology parameters of a communications network domain comprising a plurality of network nodes and a plurality of interconnecting links. The method comprises: identifying network nodes configured to interface with one or more other network domains as summarized nodes; and generating network topology parameters for one or more pairs of summarized nodes. The network topology parameters are dependent on the transmission parameters of one or more identified paths between said pair of summarized nodes. At least one said path comprises at least one other network node and respective interconnecting links. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110292833 | PORT TABLE FLUSHING IN ETHERNET NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for flushing port tables in an Ethernet network that includes a Root Bridge node ( | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110299423 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR QOS SUPPORT IN UBIQUITOUS SENSOR - The present invention relates to a system and to a method for QoS (Quality of Service) support in a ubiquitous sensor network. The system for QoS support in a ubiquitous sensor network includes a mesh coordinator and nodes. The mesh coordinator organizes a super frame containing a dedicated QoS data transmission period, and synchronizes each of the nodes constituted into one network with the abovementioned super frame. The nodes create a beacon frame containing information on whether or not to set QoS, to broadcast the beacon frame in a dedicated beacon period of the super frame if QoS data transmission is needed, to create a QoS data frame with a set priority, and to transmit the QoS data frame to the dedicated QoS data transmission period of the super frame in the case of transmitting QoS data. The present invention divides QoS data from general data to improve the quality of data transmission and ensure stability, and prioritizes QoS data to transmit the most important data among QoS data in a quick and stable manner. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110299424 | SWITCHING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP VIRTUAL LAN - A switching apparatus having a plurality of ports, includes: switch information storage to store an output port identifier for a combination of an input port identifier, an input virtual path identifier, and a destination address; a detector to detect a first input virtual path identifier and a first destination address assigned to an input packet; a searcher to search the switch information storage for a first output port identifier based on a first input port identifier that identifies a port to which the input packet has been input, the first input virtual path identifier, and the first destination address; and a packet switch to transfer the input packet to a port identified by the first output port identifier. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110305165 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PHYSICAL-LAYER HANDSHAKING FOR TIMING ROLE TRANSITION - Aspects of a method and system for physical-layer handshaking for timing role transition are provided. Prior to changing the timing role of a first Ethernet device, the first Ethernet device may communicate over an Ethernet link to a second Ethernet PHY utilizing a first set of one or more PCS code-groups. In response to a determination to change the timing role of the first Ethernet device, the first Ethernet device may communicate one or more IDLE symbols over the Ethernet link to the second Ethernet device. The IDLE symbol(s) may be generated utilizing a second set of one or more PCS code-groups. The first set of PCS code-group(s) may be mutually exclusive with the second set of PCS code-group(s). In response to detecting a received Ethernet physical layer symbol corresponding to the second set of PCS code-groups, the second Ethernet device may make a determination to change its timing role. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110305166 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - For each radio base stations ( | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110310769 | Methods and Apparatuses for Machine Type Communication - A Machine Type Communication (MTC) method for an MTC device to configure a plurality of MTC logical channels associated with an MTC application is provided The method comprises the steps of: configuring, in a Medium Access Control (MAC) layer, the MTC logical channels independently from a Common Control Channel (CCCH), a Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH), and a Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH), wherein the MTC logical channels include a Machine Type Communication Traffic Channel (MTCTCH) and a Machine Type Communication Control Channel (MTCCCH); carrying uplink and downlink traffic data dedicated for the MTC application executed by the MTC device in the MTCTCH; and carrying uplink and downlink control data dedicated for the MTC application executed by the MTC device in the MTCCCH. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310770 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR MESH AND STAR TOPOLOGY STRUCTURE WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method of achieving wireless sensor network (WSN) communication in a mesh and star topology network (MSTN), including: a) connecting a plurality of nodes in a WSN to form a mesh and star hybrid topology structure; b) based on the topology structure, defining a superframe structure based on IEEE 802.15.4-2006; c) based on the topology structure and superframe structure, defining methods for long period data processing, connectivity assessment, medium access control, channel measurement, frequency hopping, beacon frame formation, and two-stage resource allocation; d) based on the topology structure, superframe structure, and methods, defining a method for network establishment; and e) based on the network establishment method, defining a method for MSTN communications. The method features real-time communication, high reliability, and low energy consumption. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110317584 | NODE-BASED QUALITY-OF-SERVICE MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for scheduling network communications in a managed network can include a Network Controller discovering a plurality of network nodes; the Network Controller classifying the discovered network nodes into two or more classifications of node for node-level prioritization of network communications; the Network Controller receiving reservation requests from at least some of the plurality of network nodes, wherein the reservation requests request one or more time slots for their respective network nodes in an upcoming communication window; and the Network Controller assigning time slots in the upcoming communication window to one or more network nodes in response to reservation requests, wherein the assignment is based on a priority of the network nodes and wherein the priority is assigned to the nodes according to their classification. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110317585 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRAFFIC OFFLOAD IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for reducing backhaul traffic in a broadband wireless access system are provided. The method includes receiving an uplink packet including a contents request from a Mobile Station (MS), determining whether the requested contents have been cached, if it is determined that the contents have not been cached, acquiring the contents from a corresponding server, transmitting the contents to the MS, and if it is determined that the contents have not been cached, caching the contents. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110317586 | EVENT-TRIGGERED PEER DISCOVERY - Techniques for supporting peer-to-peer (P2P) communication are disclosed. In an aspect, a device performs peer discovery based on trigger events. In one design, the device detects an event triggering peer discovery, which may be an application becoming active on the device, a change in the position of the device, the device being turned on, etc. The device performs peer discovery based on detection of the event triggering peer discovery. In one design, the device starts peer discovery in response to detecting the trigger event. In another design, the device changes at least one characteristic (e.g., the periodicity) of peer discovery in response to detecting the trigger event. In another design, a device determines an application becoming active on the device. The device transmits a query (e.g., in a proximity detection signal) to request for a service from a peer device to support the application. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110317587 | Methods and systems for time sensitive networks - A packet based switched multimedia network which consolidates networking of high throughput, time sensitive data, and control streams, with Ethernet data networking over home span. The multimedia network may support in parallel, over the same home span cabling infrastructure, high quality networking including time sensitive data streams, such as HDMI, USB, and Ethernet, transparent network attachment for legacy devices, multi stream, and low power modes. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110317588 | AUTODISCOVERY FOR VIRTUAL NETWORKS - The present invention facilitates automatic discovery of VPN-related information, which relates to the existence or association of VPNs as supported by provider edge devices in a core network. In particular, the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is used to facilitate the automatic discovery, and the provider edge devices are capable of subsequently and automatically triggering Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) processes to facilitate signaling over LDP sessions within the core network. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20120002569 | Swarm intelligence based methods to enable cooperative communication in a mesh network - A method and device are described for determining at a node in a mesh network, cooperation with other nodes in forwarding messages and packets in a mesh network. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120002570 | Coordinating and Establishing Communication Networks Between Communication Devices - In a multipoint mesh network, communications for establishing the network between multiple communication terminals may be coordinated such that connection request signals are not transmitted from both terminals in a pair of terminals to each other. In one example, a multipoint connection start terminal may be configured to request connections with each of the communication terminals participating in the mesh network. The multipoint connection start terminal may then receive a connection permission signal from each of the terminals to which a request signal was sent. The multipoint connection start terminal may subsequently generate terminal designation information specifying which terminals are to request connections with which other terminals so as to avoid communication overlap. This terminal designation information may then be transmitted to each of the other communication terminals participating in the mesh network. Additionally or alternatively, the terminal designation information may include authentication information for authenticating the connection request and/or permissions. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120002571 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - Apparatuses and methods to establish communications between devices. In one embodiment, a method of sharing data includes, without requiring a proxy device and without requiring a server to enable communications, receiving a request transmitted by a requesting device, authenticating the requesting device, and establishing a connection between the requesting device and a requested device. The requesting device and the requested device are dissimilar communication devices having dissimilar communications standards. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120008526 | Ad Hoc Formation and Tracking of Location-Sharing Groups - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for forming and tracking a location-sharing group are disclosed. The location-sharing group can be performed ad hoc without the assistance of a central server. A geofence can be defined that encloses the current locations of the participating devices in the location-sharing group. The geographic location of the location-sharing group as a whole can be tracked and provided to the participating devices in the location-sharing group. Group-level location-sharing can be enabled. Departure of a participating device from the location-sharing group can be detected based on the current location and the coverage radius of each device in the location-sharing group. Entry of points of interest into the geofence of the location-sharing group can be detected and notified to the participating devices in the location-sharing group. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120008527 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ROUTING DECISIONS IN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method for supporting routing decisions in a wireless mesh network, wherein the network ( | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120014284 | VIRTUALIZED SHARED PROTECTION CAPACITY - The present disclosure relates a network, a network element, a system, and a method providing an efficient allocation of protection capacity for network connections and/or services. These may be for services within a given Virtual Private Network (VPN) or Virtual Machine (VM) instance flow. Network ingress/egress ports are designed to be VM instance aware while transit ports may or may not be depending on network element capability or configuration. A centralized policy management and a distributed control plane are used to discover and allocate resources to and among the VPNs or VM instances. Algorithms for efficient allocation and release of protection capacity may be coordinated between the centralized policy management and the distributed control plane. Additional coupling of attributes such as latency may provide more sophisticated path selection algorithms including efficient sharing of protection capacity. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120014285 | SELF-CONFIGURING, SELF-OPTIMIZING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A system and associated method provides for a wireless local area network (WLAN) that permits mobile units to communicate with an external, wired network. Nodes in the WLAN include multiple components, such as a base module, antenna module, and one or more wireless modules. Indeed, this system can employ two or more wireless modules that employ different short-range wireless protocols, such as IEEE 802.11-type and Bluetooth protocols. The nodes may perform self-discovery to determine modules within the node and associated functionality, as well as identify neighboring nodes to thereby establish a mesh-type network. Nodes can be configured to provide connectivity to the wired network, while others (access points) communicate wirelessly with mobile devices. The nodes may then be interconnected wirelessly, or via wires. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120014286 | Configuration method and configuration device for the backhaul link in a long term evolution system - The present invention provides a configuration method for a backhaul link in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and the method includes: when a network side configures a relay subframe, configuring the relay subframe to be a Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) subframe on a downlink access link, configuring a relay subframe to be a unicast subframe or non-MBSFN subframe on a downlink backhaul link. And meanwhile, the present invention provides a configuration device for the backhaul link in the LTE system, which includes: a configuration unit for configuring a relay subframe to be a unicast subframe or non-MBSFN subframe on a downlink backhaul link when a relay subframe is configured by the network side and configured to be an MBSFN subframe on a downlink access link. The present invention improves the communication efficiency of the backhaul link and the access flexibility of UE in the cell covered by the base station. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120014287 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING GROUP DELETION INFORMATION - A method for transmitting and receiving group configuration information on a user equipment is disclosed. The user equipment receives information on group deletion of the user equipment from a base station. The user equipment transmits an acknowledgement (ACK) signal about the received information on the group deletion to the base station. In this case, the information on the group deletion is configured as a separate extended header type or a type that an extended header is piggybacked on a specific downlink packet to be transmitted to the user equipment. Preferably, the user equipment decodes the received information on the group deletion of the user equipment. The user equipment successfully decodes the information on the group deletion and is then able to transmit the acknowledgement (ACK) signal about the received information on the group deletion to the base station. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120020242 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DETERMINE AND IMPLEMENT MULTIDIMENSIONAL NETWORK TOPOLOGIES - Methods and apparatus to determine and implement multidimensional network topologies are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein comprises receiving an input parameter for determining a multidimensional network topology for a network interconnecting a plurality of devices, and determining a set of multidimensional network topologies, each multidimensional network topology of the set comprising a respective plurality of nodes to interconnect the plurality of devices, each node in each multidimensional network topology of the set being fully connected with all neighbor nodes in each dimension of the multidimensional network topology, and each multidimensional network topology of the set satisfying a first constraint based on the input parameter. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020243 | ACCESS POINT CONFIGURED FOR STATION GROUP MANAGEMENT AND METHOD FOR MANAGING STATION-MANAGEMENT GROUPS - Embodiments of an access point configured for station group management and a method for managing station-management groups in a wireless network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the access point may transmit a group allocation message to selected stations and establish a station-management group to include stations from which response frames are received. The access point may also transmit DL MU-MIMO transmissions to the stations of the station-management group using a MU-MIMO technique. When explicit group deletion is employed, the access point may explicitly delete some stations from the station-management group by transmitting a group deletion message to the stations of the group. When implicit group deletion is employed, the access point may implicitly delete some stations from the station-management group after a predetermined period of time indicated in the group allocation message by refraining from transmitting DL MU-MIMO transmissions or group update messages to the stations of the group. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020244 | METHOD FOR EXCHANGE OF ROUTING MESSAGES IN A WIRELESS MESHED COMMUNICATION NETWORK - In a method for exchanging routing messages in a wireless meshed communication network with network nodes and a root node, a routing tree is set up with data transmission paths. The root node sends routing requests at regular time intervals to set up the paths, wherein a request contains a specification for a first bidirectional path mode or a second unidirectional path mode. At a respective node, a first field is used to indicate a first or a second node state. If, upon receipt of a request, the first field is in the first state, a routing response is always sent and otherwise not. Next, the node checks the mode specified in the request, ensuring that the respective mode is set. In case of a node to root data transmission, a node also ensures that the first field of the respective network node is in the first state. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020245 | Mobile router and method for autosynching predetermined content - A method is provided for providing digital entertainment to a customer having a mobile router comprising a first wireless local area network having a customer mobile device coupled thereto. The method comprises: providing a source of the digital entertainment data; coupling the source to the customer mobile device via the router and the first wireless local area network; operating the source with the router such that the source automatically downloads predetermined digital entertainment data to the customer mobile device via the wireless local area network and the router. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020246 | NETWORK PLANNING AND OPTIMIZATION OF EQUIPMENT DEPLOYMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide systems, devices and methods for improving the efficient deployment and configuration of networking equipment within a network build-out. In certain embodiments of the invention, an iterative analysis of inter-node equipment placement and connectivity, and inter- and intra-node traffic flow is performed to identify a preferred deployment solution. This analysis of deployment optimization takes into account both configurations from a network node perspective as well as from a network system perspective. Deployment solutions are iteratively progressed and analyzed to determine a preferred solution based on both the cost of deployment and satisfaction of the network demands. In various embodiments of the invention, a baseline marker is generated from which the accuracy of the solution may be approximated that suggests to an engineer whether the deployment is approaching an optimal solution. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020247 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING RADIO RESOURCE BY A MAC LAYER OF TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and user equipment providing wireless communication services, and a method of transmitting and receiving data between a terminal and a base station in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and more particularly, to a method of configuring radio resource(s) by a MAC layer of the terminal, and it may be an object of the present invention is to provide an improved method of configuring radio resource(s) in a wireless communication system in order to minimize the waste of the radio resource(s) and/or the contention of the radio resource. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020248 | SELECTION OF TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS FOR WIRELESS CONNECTION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program for selecting one or more radio communication schemes for an end-to-end connection. Peers of the end-to-end connection negotiate ( | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120026915 | ZONING FOR DISTANCE PRICING AND NETWORK ENGINEERING IN CONNECTIONLESS AND CONNECTION-ORIENTED NETWORKS - Described are a system and method for establishing zone-based pricing for services transported over connectionless and connection-oriented networks. The connectivity network supporting the service is partitioned into one or more zones. A node connected to a packet transport network receives a packet associated with the service. The packet has information that is used to identify one of the zones of the connectivity network to which the packet can be transmitted. Service providers are thus able to use zoning to apply a pricing structure for services traditionally lacking distance-based pricing, such as Ethernet, Storage, and Internet Protocol services. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120026916 | Method and System for Transporting Configuration Protocol Messages Across a Distribution System (DS) in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) - Aspects of a method and system for transporting configuration messages across a DS in a WLAN are presented. Aspects of a method for enabling communication of information in a secure communication system may comprise configuring a wireless client station located in a client network based on configuration information received from a configurator. The configurator is located in a configurator network that is located external to and communicatively coupled to the client network. Aspects of a system for enabling communication of information in a secure communication system may comprise a configurator located in a configurator network that is located external to and communicatively coupled to a client network. The configurator configures a wireless client station located in the client network based on configuration information transmitted by the configurator to the wireless client station. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120026917 | SERVER-CENTRIC HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR MODULAR DATA CENTERS - Disclosed are systems and methods for network architecture that is a server-centric network architectural design. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120033583 | Policy-Based Network and Service Domain Selection for Legacy Non-IP Telecommunication Services Over Heterogeneous Networks - A method includes receiving, by a policy manager, a legacy service request for a terminal disposed in an access area including a plurality of networks. The method includes determining, by the policy manager, an optimal delivery network from the plurality of networks to handle the legacy service request. The method includes transmitting, by the policy manager, the legacy service request to the optimal delivery network. The method includes forwarding, by the optimal delivery network, the legacy service request to the terminal disposed in the access area. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033584 | ENERGY EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION IN A NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for data packet transmissions between a source node and a destination node in a network, the method comprising: —the nodes being configured with an initial sleeping time period duration SP | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120039212 | In-Vehicle Networking Based Services - In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a process for providing in-vehicle networking services is presented. The process may be implemented to establish a first network between a sub-management server (SMS) and a main server, wherein the SMS utilizes a first networking mechanism to communicate with the main server. The process may establish a second ad-hoc network between the SMS and a plurality of mobile devices, wherein each of the plurality of mobile devices utilizes a second networking mechanism to communicate with the SMS. The process may further transmit a first network message from the SMS to the main server, upon receiving by the SMS the first networking message from one of the plurality of mobile devices. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120039213 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CORRESPONDING APPARATUS - The present invention introduces a method for the network to optimize the route for user's local IP access, without affecting the access to operator's core network. With this mechanism, no excessive signalling is needed for the optimization. The present invention is also applicable to the corporate network that has multiple home NodeBs or home eNodeBs. Finer grain control on the services to be provided over different home NodeB or home eNodeB is also possible. Further, path optimization and continuation of the service upon handover can be controlled, and hence flexibility of the service can be secured. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120039214 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING CONNECTION TYPE INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RADIO RESOURCE OF HOME (E)NODEB - A method for providing connection type information in a network entity comprises: receiving, by the network entity, a connection request message including access mode information indicating at least one of an open access mode, a closed access mode, and a hybrid access mode, from a Home (e)NodeB having received a request from a terminal; determining, by the network entity, a connection type of the terminal based on the access mode information and the terminal's subscriber information; and transmitting, by the network entity, a connection accept message including information about the determined connection type, to the Home (e)NodeB, such that the Home (e) NodeB performs a radio resource control function with respect to the connection with the terminal. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120039215 | METHOD FOR SETTING A PERIOD IN A BAN - A method for setting a period in a body area network (BAN) having two or more types of virtual basic service sets (BSSs) according to a type of a supported application is provided. The method includes: transmitting BAN BSS type information of a BAN BSS corresponding to an application to be supported by a device (DEV) to a central point (CP); receiving BAN BSS configuration information corresponding to the BAN BSS type information; and transmitting data to the CP in an active period according to duty cycle information included in the BAN BSS configuration information. Accordingly, the BAN BSS can be suitably managed for the application. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120039216 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING COORDINATED MULTIPLE POINT TRANSMISSION - The present invention discloses a method for implementing coordinated multiple point transmission CoMP, including: configuring, by the network side, a range setting group to a user equipment, UE, and acquiring the original mapping pattern of various cells in the group; receiving the channel information of various cells in the group returned by the UE; selecting, by the network side, cells for practically sending data to the UE currently, determining the update mapping patterns for the cells selected in the group performing CoMP, and controlling the selected various cells to send a physical downlink shared channel to the UE according to the update mapping pattern. The present invention further discloses an apparatus for implementing CoMP In accordance with the method and apparatus for implementing CoMP of the present invention, the mapping patterns of the cells for practically sending data to a UE are updated by acquiring the CRS and CSI-RS mapping locations of the original mapping pattern of cells of the range setting group to get the update mapping pattern for use in the CoMP, so that it is possible to meet the design principle of CRS and CSI-RS and guarantee the normal application of CoMP at the same time. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120044833 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RANGING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL THEREOF - Disclosed is a method for configuring a ranging channel in various frame structures and using the same in a communication system. A ranging channel is effectively configured according to a data structure, namely, frame structure, transmitted and received between a mobile station (MS) and a base station (BS) in a wireless communication system, and ranging information is transmitted therethrough to thereby improve performance of a communication channel and resource efficiency. In the wireless communication system, a ranging channel is configured by using a time interval, such as an idle time, an idle symbol, an RTG, a TTG, and the like, not actually used for transmission of data or a signal in a data structure, namely, in a frame structure, transmitted and received between an MS and a BS, to transmit ranging information, so the channel performance and resource efficiency can be improved. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120057502 | Methods and Apparatus For Separating Home Agent Functionality - MIP Home Agent (HA) architectures are described that decompose, e.g., split, packet forwarding control functionality from actual data packet forwarding operations performed by a conventional MIP HA. This places MIP routing control in a node which is distinct from the tunnel end-points which perform packet forwarding operations to direct packets including a mobile's Home Address. Tunneling establishment and control functionality is implemented by what is referred to herein as decomposed HA (DHA) while data packet forwarding and redirection is performed, under the control of the DHA, by a tunneling agent (TA) node. The tunneling agent node serves as the data packet redirection node for a mobile as it moves from one location to another and may be located outside of a firewall used to protect the DHA. Tunnel endpoint nodes (Mobile Nodes and/or Access Nodes) send tunnel packets to the tunnel agent whilst directing control signaling packets to the DHA. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120057503 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS POINTS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus and a system for controlling access points. The method includes: receiving load information on working APs in a coverage area; judging a current overall capacity of the coverage area according to the load information; and controlling APs in the coverage area according to a judgment result. A network management server includes a first receiving module, a first judgment module, and a first control module. The system includes the network management server, working APs, and non-working APs. The embodiments of the present invention also provide another method for controlling APs, a primary working AP, and a system for controlling APs. In the embodiments of the present invention, APs in the same coverage area are automatically controlled to turn on or off according to the service traffic; resources are utilized rationally; labor costs are saved; and the work efficiency is improved. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120063354 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF SUBSTATION REMOTE TERMINALS WITH A CENTRAL CONTROLLER - Systems and methods for the configuration of substation remote terminals with a central controller are provided. A message identifying a current status of a remote terminal unit (“RTU”) associated with a remote power substation may be received by a central controller associated with a power system. Based upon an analysis of the received message, a request for configuration data associated with the RTU may be communicated by the central controller to the RTU. In response to the request, the configuration data may be received by the central controller from the RTU. Based upon the received configuration data, the central controller may update a configuration database comprising information associated with the configuration of the RTU. In this regard, supervisory control and data acquisitions operations with the RTU by the central controller may be facilitated. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063355 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PROVIDING SUPPORT-CALL DATA PURSUANT TO A WIRELESS DEVICE SUPPORT CALL - An apparatus, and an associated method, facilitates communication of mobile-station data to a support center so that a support issue related to the mobile station can best be addressed by the support-center personnel. A user of the mobile station initiates a call to the support center, and a voice connection is formed between the mobile station and the support center. A support-call data signal generator generates a data signal containing support-call data. The data signal is sent, in-band on a voice channel defined by the voice connection and delivered to the support center. The data is used at the support center to respond to the support issue or inquiry. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063356 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROLLING A SWITCHING HUB FOR POWER SAVING - A CPU of an image forming apparatus controls, according to establishment of a sleep change condition, a MAC/PHY in a network unit to change the image forming apparatus from a link-up state to a link-down state. The CPU controls the image forming apparatus to change from a normal mode to a deep sleep mode. A CPU of the network unit controls, according to the change of the image forming apparatus from the normal mode to the deep sleep mode, the MAC/PHY to change the link-down state of the image forming apparatus to the link-upstate. The CPU controls the MAC/PHY to transmit a MAC address necessary for causing the image forming apparatus to participate in VLAN to a switching hub. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063357 | CONFIGURING COMPONENT CARRIERS IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - Technology for configuring component carriers in carrier aggregation is disclosed. One method comprises scanning for an enhanced Node B (eNode B) with a user equipment (UE). An eNode B is selected by the UE. The UE is attached to an available carrier provided by the eNode B. The available carrier is designated as a Primary Component Carrier (PCC). The PCC is configured as a component carrier pair comprising a downlink primary component carrier (DL PCC) and an uplink primary component carrier (UL PCC). Mobility management and security input information is received at the UE from the eNode B via the DL PCC and the UL PCC. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063358 | CONFIGURING COMPONENT CARRIERS IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - A system and method for configuring component carriers in carrier aggregation is disclosed. The method comprises communicating a carrier aggregation capability for a selected UE to an enhanced Node B (eNode B) configured to provide service for a plurality of UEs. A plurality of component carriers at the eNode B can be configured for the selected UE based on the carrier aggregation capability of the selected UE. A component carrier configuration message is broadcast from the eNode B containing component carrier configuration information that is common to the plurality of UEs. Specific configuration information that is specific to the selected UE is communicated using dedicated communication signaling. Selected configured component carriers are then activated by the eNode B for the selected UE. Activation can be based on the UE's quality of service needs, bandwidth needs, and strength of signal for the component carriers. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063359 | Wireless Connection Method and Device - A wireless connection method is applicable to establishing a wireless connection device between an uplink device and a downlink device, and includes obtaining uplink wireless configuration information, and configuring a downlink with the obtained uplink wireless configuration information. A wireless connection is established with the uplink device based on the uplink wireless configuration information and, after successful connection establishment, a wireless connection is established with the downlink device based on the uplink wireless configuration information. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063360 | PATH SETTING DEVICE AND PATH SETTING METHOD - Disclosed is a path setting device capable of setting a distribution path of packets more speedily, when the originator of information is switched. The terminal ( | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063361 | System and Method for Remote Radio Unit Finding and Topology Structure Establishment - The present invention discloses a system and method for discovering a remote radio unit and establishing a topology structure, which include: a base band unit sending a remote radio unit discovery message to a link connecting with a remote radio unit after starting, and the remote radio unit discovery message including a level number of a remote radio unit, and setting this level number to a minimal value; a remote radio unit which receives said remote radio unit discovery message storing the level number in the remote radio unit discovery message, and sending said remote radio unit discovery message to a next level remote radio unit connecting with said remote radio unit after adding 1 to the level number in said remote radio unit discovery message; and the remote radio unit feeding the level number back to said base band unit after obtaining the level number. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120069769 | SYMBOL DETECTION METHOD FOR MIMO SYSTEMS BASED ON PATH FINDING - A symbol detection method for an MIMO system based on path finding, which is a novel nonlinear signal detection algorithm called the MACO (Modified Ant Colony Optimization) algorithm in the present invention. The MACO algorithm is improved from the conventional ant colony optimization algorithm and applied to an MIMO (Multiple-Input Multiple-Output) system. The MIMO system increases the utility efficiency of spectrum but computational complexity of signal detection in the receiving terminals is suffered. The present invention simulates the foraging behavior of ants and pheromone to achieve superior performance and low computational complexity in signal detection of an MIMO system. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120069770 | OPEN NETWORK CONNECTIONS - One or more logical network connection points are provided within an electronic communications network. The logical network connections are provided via an interface between one or more connectivity plane devices and a network connected application, service, or control plane function in the electronic communication network. The network connected application, service, or control plane function registers itself as a logical network resident (NR) with a function in the connectivity plane that provides a logical network connection between the network resident and another logical network connection point. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120076045 | TERMINAL CONFIGURABLE FOR USE WITHIN AN UNKNOWN REGULATORY DOMAIN - A terminal for use within an unknown regulatory domain, and a computer program product and method for configuring the terminal, are provided. The terminal can comprise first program instructions to actively scan one or more domain independent channels in a frequency band, second program instructions to configure the terminal for use in the unknown regulatory domain in response to the terminal receiving regulatory domain information as a result of actively scanning one or more of the domain independent channels, third program instructions to passively scan one or more domain dependent channels in the frequency band in response to the terminal not receiving the regulatory domain information as a result of actively scanning one or more of the domain independent channels, and fourth program instructions to configure the terminal for use in the unknown regulatory domain in response to passively scanning one or more domain dependent channels in the frequency band. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120076046 | Method for Inheriting Attribute of Forwarding Adjacency in Multilayer Network and Corresponding Multilayer Network - The present invention provides a method for inheriting an attribute of a FA in a multilayer network, which comprises: returning information of a first attribute of each link on a FA LSP in a path computation reply message to an upper layer head node, and initiating connection setup; a head node on the FA LSP constructing the first attribute of this FA according to information of the first attribute of each link on the FA LSP included in a path message sent from a upstream node and storing the first attribute of this FA, and sending information of the first attribute of this FA to a downstream node; and c) the tail node on the FA LSP obtaining information of the first attribute of this FA and storing the first attribute of this FA. The present invention also provides a multilayer network. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120076047 | MAINTAINING CURRENT CELL LOCATION INFORMATION IN A CELLULAR ACCESS NETWORK - A method, femto Base Station, and network service node for connecting a User Equipment UE, to local devices in a local network. The femtoBS includes a femtoBS part and a Packet Data Network Gateway, PDN-GW, part comprising a subset of PDN-GW functions. The UE sends a PDN connection request that includes a special Access Point Name, APN, which indicates the request ts for local IP access. The network service node, such as a Mobility Management Entity, MME1 includes a gateway selection mechanism that, based on the special APN1 selects the PDN GW part of the femtoBS device to serve the connection. A route optimization function in the femtoBS shortcuts the traffic between the femtoBS part and the PDN GW part, providing direct access to the local network. The UE may access the Internet through a residential gateway in the local network and a fixed access connection. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120076048 | LOAD SHARING AND REDUNDANCY SCHEME - Methods and apparatus for providing a device for forwarding packets in a network are disclosed. A first router and a second router having a shared set of interfaces are provided, enabling the first router and the second router to share forwarding data for forwarding packets on the shared set of interfaces. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120076049 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION BETWEEN STATIONS WITHIN A BASIC SERVICE SET - A method and system for performing peer-to-peer wireless communication between stations (STAs) within a basic service set (BSS) while maintaining connectivity with an access point (AP) in the BSS are disclosed. A source STA, an AP and a destination STA negotiate a direct link setup (DLS) channel for performing peer-to-peer communication between the source STA and the destination STA. The DLS channel may be different from a BSS channel used for communication between the AP and each of the STAs. The source STA and the destination STA then perform peer-to-peer communication on the negotiated DLS channel. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120076050 | CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - In a power line communication system, a control device sets an intra-breaker communication period during which communication is performed between communication terminals connected to a single breaker, and an inter-breaker communication priority period during which communication is performed between communication terminals connected to different breakers from each other. The control device operates filters so that the filters allow signals that travel via breakers to pass through the filters during the inter-breaker communication priority period, and so that the filters block signals that travel via breakers from passing through the filters during the intra-breaker communication period. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120082061 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A WIRELESS FEEDER NETWORK - An apparatus and method are provided for controlling a wireless feeder network which connects access base stations to a communications network. The wireless feeder network comprises a plurality of feeder base stations connected to the communications network and a plurality of feeder terminals connected to the plurality of access base stations. A sounding schedule is determined for the wireless feeder network in dependence on a visibility matrix, the visibility matrix indicative of visibility via the wireless feeder network between each of the plurality of feeder base stations and each of the plurality of feeder terminals. Then a sounding procedure within the wireless feeder network is controlled in accordance with the sounding schedule. The visibility matrix enables a coordinated sounding procedure to be carried out, allowing more accurate channel metrics for the wireless channels of the network to be determined which are not adversely affected by interference between elements of the network. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120082062 | ADVANCED COMMISSIONING OF WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEMS - A wireless network system and a method of commissioning a wireless network system is described. The network system comprises at least a network device ( | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120087277 | NETWORK PROTECTION METHOD AND NETWORK PROTECTION ARCHITECTURE - The invention provides a network protection method and a network protection architecture. In a network, one or more protected local networks are determined according to practical situations and a protection characteristic set of the local network is set; a link in the protected links of the protection characteristic is set as a protection link; and whether a protection switching request exists is judged, if the protection switching request does not exist, a node to which the protection link belongs blocks a port connected with the protection link; and if the protection switching request exists, a node of the protection switching request blocks a designated port of the protection switching request, and the node to which the protection link belongs unblocks the port connected with the protection link. This solution is suitable for networks with various kinds of topologies, when a protocol channel of a protection protocol for a transmit path of a protocol frame indicating the existence of the protection switching request is set up in the protection characteristic set, the protection protocol is prevented from being implemented on each node. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087278 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING CONTROL PACKET - A method of generating a control packet by using a first apparatus including a plurality of medium access control (MAC) layers, the method comprising: generating dynamic tone pairing (DTP) reception setup information indicating whether to receive DTP information for each of a plurality of links from a second apparatus; and generating a control packet including the DTP reception setup information. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087279 | Encapsulation of Higher-Layer Control Messages for Local Area Network Support into a Wide Area Network Protocol - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for integration of a wireless local area network and a wide area cellular network. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include the support node receiving, from a first node, a message including a request for information representative of a configuration of a wireless local area network accessible by the first node. The method may also include providing, in response to the received message, the information representative of the configuration of the wireless local area network. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120093029 | MODELLING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A method of processing a model of a telecommunications system including a plurality of access nodes through which communications terminals can communicate data is described. The method includes dividing the communications terminals, the access nodes and the core network into different groups, for a first of the groups loading the computer program code representing the communications terminals, the access nodes or the core network of the first group into the computer memory and performing the representing with the processor within a first time period, determining an amount of the data communicated between the first group and one or more of the other groups during the first time period, and for a subsequent time period representing the first group by an amount of data corresponding to the amount of the data communicated between the first group and a second of the groups, whilst loading the computer program code into the computer memory and performing the representing of the second group within the subsequent time period. The results produced by the modeling can be used to configure the telecommunications system itself. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093030 | CROSS LAYER PATH PROVISIONING METHOD AND SYSTEM IN MULTI LAYER TRANSPORT NETWORK - Disclosed is an inter-layer path provisioning method and system in a multilayer network that may set, in response to a path setting request of an operator, an upper layer path to be interlocked with an upper layer path computation unit, set, separately from the setting of the upper layer path, a lower layer path to be interlocked with a lower layer path computation unit, and perform a connection between the set upper layer path and the set lower layer path, so that inter-layer path setting may be readily performed in a multilayer transport network. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093031 | Method, Device, and System for Processing Policy Information - A method, a device, and a system for processing policy information are provided. A method includes: obtaining applicability information and policy information according to information reported by a User Equipment (UE), where the applicability information indicates an applicability scope of the policy information and includes at least one of subscriber granularity, subscriber information, UE type, network granularity, and network identification information; and delivering the policy information and the applicability information to the UE. In the technical solution which enables the UE to obtain the applicability information herein, the UE can determine the applicability scope of the policy information according to the applicability information, and select and utilize the policy information flexibly, thereby optimizing utilization of network resources. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120099476 | Pre-Association Discovery - The present disclosure describes techniques for pre-association discovery. In some aspects a frame having information useful to identify a service provided by a wireless device is received, the service provided by the wireless device is identified based on the information of the frame and known service identification information, and the identified service is associated with the wireless device effective to enable use of the identified service. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120099477 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PLACING UNITS FOR EXECUTING AN APPLICATION IN A DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM - in a method and a device for placing units, such as motes, for executing an application in a distributed system, a placement of the units by a service layer and a communication between the units by a communication layer are provided. One field of application is for example process automation, such as in industrial or building management installations. Such installations have sensors and actuators with communication interfaces. The method and the device allow the energy demand of the installation to be reduced. Communication is preferably performed wirelessly. Network management is for example conducted according to the wireless HART protocol. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120099478 | Method and Device for Auto-Generating Goose Signal Connection Topology from Substation Level - The invention provides a method and device for auto-generating GOOSE signal connection topology from substation level based on IEC61850 standard. The method comprises the following steps: import substation configuration language (SCL) file; search all GOOSE input and output signals under each access point; match the output signals to the input signals; and generate GOOSE signal connection topology based on the result of said matching. The device comprises an importing module for importing substation configuration language file; a GOOSE signal analyzer for searching all of GOOSE input and output signals under each access point, and matching said GOOSE output signals to said GOOSE input signals; and topology data module for generating GOOSE signal connection topology based on said matching. The device comprises a storage module. The storage module comprises an input dataset for storing GOOSE input signals and an output dataset for storing GOOSE output signals and their matching input signals. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120106393 | PROTOCOLS FOR CONNECTING INTELLIGENT SERVICE MODULES IN A STORAGE AREA NETWORK - Implementations are disclosed that provide protocols for connecting an intelligent service module within a storage area network (SAN). The protocols support physical connections between the intelligent service module and a director-level switch of the SAN. In some variations, the intelligent service module may comprise a director service module (DSM), a domain-sharing leaf switch service module (LSSM), or a non-domain-sharing LSSM. The protocols provide for establishing link parameters and negotiating responsibilities between the intelligent service module and the director-level switch. In one configuration, for example, ELP and ELP_ACCEPT frames may be used to establish the link parameters. In another configuration, ESC and ESC_ACCEPT frames may be used to negotiate responsibilities between the intelligent service module and the director-level switch. Other configurations also provide an ownership status of the intelligent service module that is used to determine whether the switch can initiate management of the intelligent service module. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106394 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MIXED-MESH WIRELESS NETWORKING - A mixed mesh wireless network that includes a Mixed Mesh network | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106395 | DETERMINING A ROUTE ADVERTISEMENT IN A REACTIVE ROUTING ENVIRONMENT - In an example embodiment, a method and system is provided to determine and advertise a route advertisement in a reactive routing environment. In response to receiving a network address query with respect to a destination address at a routing device, an aggregate value, e,g, an address prefix, is determined and advertised in reply to the network address query. Determining of the aggregate value may comprise identifying within a range of network addresses represented by the aggregate value respective addresses for which the routing device does not have reachability information. The routing device may send address queries with respect to the identified addresses, to determine reachability via the routing device of those addresses. The aggregate value may be advertised conditional upon determining that a percentage of addresses within the corresponding range that can be reached via the routing device satisfies a predefined minimal coverage value. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106396 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - In an apparatus that can execute a plurality of communication parameter automatic setting methods, user-friendliness is improved. The communication apparatus selects whether to execute communication parameter setting processing with an access point or to execute communication parameter setting processing with another communication apparatus, which is different from the access point, based on a result of detecting apparatuses that is activating communication parameter setting processing. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120113862 | COMMUNICATING VIA A FEMTO ACCESS POINT WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a user of a wireless communications device (WCD) is notified when operating in a serving area of a FEMTO access point (AP). In another embodiment, the WCD can notify an application server (AS) that the WCD is served by the FEMTO AP. In another embodiment, the AS can set a service level for a server-arbitrated communication session (CS) based on the FEMTO AP serving status of participating WCDs. In another embodiment, the FEMTO AP can determine to use a downlink control or signaling channel to transmit data to the WCD. In another embodiment, based on its serving FEMTO AP status, the WCD can (i) modify its participation level in the CS and/or (ii) selectively track usage. In another embodiment, the WCD or FEMTO AP can measure performance parameters of the CS to determine whether to trigger a handoff of the WCD to a different AP. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120113863 | Dynamic Wake-up Time Adjustment Based on Designated Paths Through a Computer Network - In one embodiment, a computer network may include nodes and at least one root node. A first subset of the nodes may be located along a designated path (a directed acyclic graph (DAG)) through the computer network to the root node, where the first subset of nodes is configured to operate according to a first wake-up timer. A second subset of the nodes that are not along the designated path are in communication to at least one node of the first subset of nodes along the designated path, and operate according to a second wake-up timer that is longer than the first wake-up timer. In this manner, second subset of nodes may be awake less often, e.g., conserving energy. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120113864 | DIRECT ADDRESSING OF CONTENT ON AN EDGE NETWORK NODE - A method of operating a home-based network device, wherein said home-based network device is part of a telecommunications network. The method comprising the steps of: assigning an address to the home-based network device, wherein said address is a function of a public identity of a subscriber associated with said home-based network device. The method further comprising registering the address of said home-based network device in an addressing space containing addressing information of other home-based network devices and providing access said home-based network device to users that are not associated with said home-based network device. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120113865 | ACCESS POINT NAME LIST BASED NETWORK ACCESS MANAGEMENT - A method is performed by a device. The method includes determining whether the device is allowed to attach to an operator network based at least partially on whether all access point names in a minimum access point name list are enabled in the device. The device allows itself to attach to the operator network if it is determined that the device is allowed to attach to the operator network. The device prevents itself from attaching to the operator network if it is determined that the device is not allowed to attach to the operator network. The device can wirelessly receive a command to disable an access point name in the device. If an access point name on a detach access point name list is disabled, then the device detaches from the operator network and prevents itself from reattaching until an integrated circuit card in the device is removed and replaced. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120113866 | INTER-FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT CONTROL IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - Techniques are disclosed for signaling a capability to operate in one or more carrier aggregation configurations and measurement gap requirements corresponding to the carrier aggregation configurations. Each carrier aggregation configuration may include one or more frequency bands and a mobile terminal can provide an indication of its measurement gap requirements for all or a subset of its supported frequency bands when operating in the carrier aggregation configurations. The measurement gap requirements may correspond to a physical or logical configuration of receiver resources and the signaling may be initiated by the mobile terminal or by a base station in communication with the mobile terminal. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120120845 | PEER DISCOVERY, TARGET SELECTION, AND FLOW REPLICATION FOR INTER USER EQUIPMENT TRANSFERS - Systems, methods, and apparatus are described herein for enabling the transfer of media flow to user equipment (UE) in a network using a mobile IP (MIP) protocol. The media flow may be transferred among UEs that are members of the same group of UEs. UEs, Home Agents (HAs), and/or Session Controllers (SCs) may be implemented in the network to maintain each group and/or transfer media flow between members of the group of UEs. The media flow may be replicated before being sent to the members of the group of UEs. UEs, HAs, SCs, REPLICATORs, and/or Authorization Entities (AEs) may be implemented in replicating media flows as described herein. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120120846 | METHODS FOR CONFIGURING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION MEASUREMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus is provided. A controller determines two different sub-frame subsets for configuring a peer communications apparatus to perform channel state information measurement according to time-domain variation of a level of interference of the peer communications apparatus obtained from one or more previous measurement result(s). A transceiver transmits a configuration message carrying information regarding the two sub-frame subsets to the peer communications apparatus and receives one or more measurement result reporting message(s) carrying information regarding the measurement result(s) from the peer communications apparatus. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120120847 | LDP IGP SYNCHRONIZATION FOR BROADCAST NETWORKS - A network element that has a broadcast interface to a broadcast network becoming operational determines whether at least one alternate path exists to the broadcast network. The broadcast interface is to carry traffic on a label switched path. If an alternate path exists, the broadcast interface will not be advertised to the broadcast network until label distribution protocol (LDP) is operational with all neighbors on the broadcast interface. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120127892 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A 10/100/1G/10G BASE-T PHY DEVICE FOR SINGLE CHANNEL AND SHARED CHANNEL NETWORKS - Aspects of a method and system for utilizing a 10/100/1 G/10 GBase-T PHY device for single channel and shared channel networks are provided. In this regard, at least one switching element may be utilized to configure an Ethernet over twisted pair PHY device for communication over a single and/or shared channel. The switching element may enable switching between a transmitter being coupled to a shared channel and a receiver being coupled to a shared channel. Additionally, the switching elements may be based on whether the transmitter is connected to a standard 10/100/1 G/10 GBase-T network, or to a single and/or shared channel network, for example. In this manner, the configured PHY device may remain compatible with existing Ethernet networks. The PHY device may be configured externally and/or internally. The polarity of transmitted and/or received data may be configured based on a polarity of data received from a shared channel. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120134294 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PLANNING RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing planning of a plurality of radio network controllers in a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains input data, and determines a limit for at least one radio network controller parameter in accordance with the input data. The method determines if the limit for the at least one radio network controller parameter is exceeded and determines an optimal output for an objective function, wherein the objective function is based on a plurality of penalty factors, if the limit for the at least one radio controller parameter is exceeded. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120134295 | Base Station and Method for Storing Code Streams of Broadcasting Information - The present disclosure discloses a method for storing code streams of broadcasting information. The method includes the steps that: a base station reads configuration information to be broadcasted, fills the parameter information of the configuration information in the structure corresponding to the broadcasting information, encodes the broadcasting information to generate code streams and then stores the code streams; wherein during the storing step, the base station stores each piece of System Information (SI) of the broadcasting information in a format of code streams, the stored SI includes both the length of SI and the SI code streams. The present disclosure further discloses a corresponding base station. With the present disclosure, broadcasting information is stored in a format of code streams, thus the memory is saved extremely; each SI is stored in an identical storing area, thus the storage space is saved furthest and the efficiency is improved. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120134296 | Method and System for Determining Initiator and Terminator in Forwarding Adjacency Label Switched Path - A method for determining beginning and end nodes in a FALSP, applied to a multilayer network using an higher-layer signaling triggering model to establish the FALSP is provided, comprising: a path compute element, when a computed service path comprises FALSPs of one or more layers, encapsulating FALSP path information of each layer into a Secondary Explicit Route Object (SERO) respectively to return together with service path information through inquiry response message to a beginning node in a first layer initiating the inquiry; after receiving them, a node in the service path determining whether the node is a beginning node in the FALSP of a layer according to said FALSP path information, if yes, learning that the FALSP is the FALSP of next layer, and determining an end node in the FALSP of the next layer according to FALSP path information of the next layer. A multilayer network is also provided. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120134297 | DEVICE DETECTION APPARATUS AND PROGRAM - A device detection apparatus includes a multicast detection unit that uses multicast to detect a device and records address information of the detected device in a first storage unit while being associated with identification information of a currently connected network segment; and a unicast detection unit that detects the device related to the address information associated with the identification information which is different from the identification information of the currently connected network segment among the address information recorded in the first storage unit. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120140674 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PLANNING BASE STATION CONTROLLERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing planning of a plurality of base station controllers in a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains input data, and determines a limit for at least one base station controller parameter in accordance with the input data. The method determines if the limit for the at least one base station controller parameter is exceeded and determines an optimal output for an objective function, wherein the objective function is based on a plurality of penalty factors, if the limit for the at least one base station controller parameter is exceeded. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120140675 | Endpoint-to-Endpoint Communications Status Monitoring - Communication ability between nodes in a cluster-based computer system is tracked to inform applications executing on the nodes of the existence and quality of the endpoint-to-endpoint communications available between the nodes. Communications between a node and other nodes are tracked, and a database records the communication ability between the node and the other nodes for each link between the nodes. The tracking and recording are repeated at the other nodes. A registration by an application executing at a particular one of the nodes to receive notifications of changes in the communication ability with another node over a particular link (or in general) will cause notification of the application when the link status changes. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120140676 | WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION CONTROLLING METHOD USING DEVICE IMPACT, APPLICATION PROGRAM CONTROLLING METHOD, AND DEVICES THEREOF - Wireless network connection control method of performing control for establishing and releasing wireless network connection with another device when impacts are applied to devices, application program control method of performing control for setting and executing application program when impacts are applied to devices, and device including wireless network connection control function and application program control function which use a device impact are disclosed. According to the present invention, provided is a wireless network connection control method of a device using a device impact, including generating a corresponding impact event when physical impact applied from the outside is sensed, transceiving a search message between devices based on a time at which the impact event occurred, searching for another device in which the impact event has occurred at the same time, and performing a predetermined protocol with a corresponding device according to a search result and establishing an inter-device wireless network connection. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120140677 | Method of Transmitting or Receiving Control Information in Wireless Communication System and Apparatus of the Same - A method of transmitting control information by a base station in a wireless communication system is provided. In the method, control information is broadcast, and negative-acknowledgement (NACK) information associated with the broadcasted control information is received from at least one User Equipment (UE), and then the control information is retransmitted to at least one UE in response to the NACK information. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120140678 | Communication and Message Route Optimization and Messaging in a Mesh Network - A method and system facilitate communications between an unassociated device and a server via a mesh network and a wide area network. The method may include receiving transmissions from candidate proxy devices, wherein each candidate proxy device is associated with a mesh network. The method may include selecting a proxy device from the candidate proxy devices. The method may include communicating with a server via the proxy device and the associated mesh network. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120147782 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMAL INTERCONNECTION OF TELECOMMUNICATION NODES VIA A RELIABLE MICROWAVE CLUSTERING - A method and apparatus for providing a topology for interconnection of telecommunication nodes in a communication network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains input data, and determines values of: at least one set, at least one parameter, and at least one variable associated with the communication network in accordance with the input data. The method then determines the topology for the interconnection via microwave links of the telecommunication nodes from an objective function in accordance with the at least one set, at least one parameter, and at least one variable, wherein the objective function is based on a plurality of penalty factors. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120147783 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING CONFIGURATION DATA IN A MESH NETWORK - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving packets from a group of nodes configured to operate in a mesh network; referencing geographic information associated with the group of nodes; evaluating a subset of the group of nodes within a particular geographic area; determining a global positioning system (GPS) location and a relative location associated with the subset of the group of nodes; determining configuration data for the subset of the group of the nodes; and communicating the configuration data to the subset of the group of nodes. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120147784 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING ATTRIBUTES BASED ON FIBER CHANNEL NETWORK AND SWITCH SYSTEM - An attribute propagation method and a switch system based on a fiber channel network are disclosed. According to the present invention, after an attribute is registered on one of its ports, each switch can automatically use its port on the other side to propagate this attribute, and a next adjacent switch can register this attribute on its port on the same side, so that ports on one side of all switches can have this attribute registered automatically. Hereafter, after the attribute is registered its port on the other side, each switch can automatically use its port on said one side that has been registered to propagate this attribute reversely and a next adjacent can register this attribute on its port on the other side, so that ports on the other side of all switches can automatically have this attribute registered. In this way, there is no need to manually configure each port. Instead, the attribute can be registered automatically on ports on both sides of all switches, thus improving the configuration efficiency for port attributes. Furthermore, the present invention can enable propagation of any attribute, thus making the present invention have a high popularity. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120147785 | Method for Establishing Topology Structure of Switching Equipment, Switching Equipment and Stacking System - In the invention, a method for establishing topology structure of switching equipments, a switching equipment and a stacking system are provided. The invention relates to the field of stacking systems in data communication, and the problem of a topology discovery error caused by different starting times of switching equipments is solved. The method comprises the following steps: Step 1, when any one of the following two requirements is met, the switching equipment turns to Step 2, otherwise, the switching equipment executes the Step 1 again, wherein the first one of the two requirements is that the current time exceeds a predetermined time, which is the time for the initialization of all the switching equipments in the stacking system; and the second one of the two requirements is that the switching equipment receives a topology discovery message from another switching equipment in the stacking system; Step 2, the switching equipment sends topology discovery messages to all the other switching equipments in the stacking system; and Step 3, the switching equipment performs a topology discovery. The invention can be applied to a stacking system where switching equipments have different starting times. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120155319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHARACTERIZING INFRASTRUCTURE OF A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method and apparatus for characterizing an infrastructure of a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains a first data set from a server log, and obtains a second data set from a plurality of wireless endpoint device. The method characterizes a parameter of the infrastructure of the wireless network using the first data set and the second data set and optimizes a network resource of the wireless network based on the parameter. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155320 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC RESOURCE MANAGEMENT WITHIN A DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PLANE OF A SWITCH - In some embodiments, a switch fabric system includes multiple access switches configured to be operatively coupled to a switch fabric. The multiple access switches include multiple ports each to be operatively coupled to a peripheral processing device. A first set of ports from the multiple ports and a second set of ports from the multiple ports are managed by a first network control entity when the switch fabric system is in a first configuration. The first set of ports is managed by the first network control entity and the second set of ports is managed by a second network control entity when the switch fabric system is in a second configuration. The second network control entity is automatically initiated when the system is changed from the first configuration to the second configuration. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155321 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORK TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus providing a network topology management of a wireless communication network are disclosed. The method discovers network topology data of the wireless communication network, wherein the wireless communication network comprises a self-healing capability, and identifies a difference between the network topology data that is discovered against a stored network topology data of the wireless communication network. The method updates the stored network topology data with the difference that is identified. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155322 | Method And Apparatus For Network Node Discovery - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved network node discovery. In one method, a network node receives from a sending node a request indicating a criterion of interest to an originator node. If the network node meets the criterion, the network node sends a response to the originator node indicating that the network node meets the criterion. The network node also forwards the request to any nodes that neighbor the network node other than the sending node. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155323 | Methods, Devices, and Computer Program Products for Auditing and Repairing a Wireless Telecommunications Network Configuration - A wireless telecommunications network configuration is audited and repaired. Configuration data is received, representing a current configuration of network elements within the network. The current configuration indicates how network elements are configured within the network or routing and handling communications within the network. Fault and performance data is received representing a current level service quality of the network. The current configuration data is compared to a signature configuration of the network, the signature configuration representing how network elements should be configured within the network such that communications are routed and handled for at least one of optimal performance, disaster recovery, and operation continuity. A determination is made, based on the comparison and the collected fault and performance data, whether repairs are needed to the current configuration of the network. Repair information is provided for the network elements needing repairs based on a determination that repairs are needed. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155324 | Topology Detection of LTE Nodes - A network monitoring system probe is coupled to network interfaces and captures data packets. A monitoring system processor identifies messages specific to S1-MME interfaces and identifies GUMMEI parameters in the S1-MME interface messages. The monitoring system creates MME node entries in a network topology list, each of the MME nodes corresponding to a unique GUMMEI value. The monitoring system links individual S1-MME interfaces, SCTP associations, and MME IP addresses to a particular MME in the network topology list. Using authentication messages carried on the S6a and S1-MME interfaces, the monitoring system links individual S6a interfaces and S6a interface IP address to a particular MME in the network topology list and creates one or more HSS node entries in the network topology list. The monitoring system also creates eNodeB, S-GW, and PDN-GW nodes in the network topology list and links them to IP addresses and X2, S11, and S5/S8 interfaces. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155325 | MOBILE PHONE DOCKING STATION VPNs - A docking station includes a docking port configured to physically dock with a mobile device, wherein the docking port includes an input/output port. The docking station further includes a communication interface configured to send and receive traffic via a wired network. The docking station also includes a processing unit configured to set-up multiple Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) via the wired network and one or more other networks, assign at least one network address from multiple network addresses to each one of the multiple VPNs, and configure, via the input/output port, the mobile device to send and/or receive traffic via selected ones of the multiple VPNs. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155326 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - In a wireless sensor network system including at least one sensor network, when a network message received from a sensor node of a sensor network corresponds to a predetermined service, the wireless sensor network system forms a wireless local area network (WLAN) overlay network which is based on a WLAN system within a service area at which the sensor node is located. Data corresponding to the predetermined service is transmitted and received through the WLAN overlay network. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155327 | OWNERSHIP TRANSFER OF A LABEL SWITCHED PATH - Control of a label switched path established in a network is transferred between a management plane and a control plane of the network. A node (e.g., node C) receives a message indicating a change in control of the label switched path, the message identifying the label switched path by a cross-connection identifier corresponding to an entry in the control data stored at the node which identifies data plane ingress and egress segments cross-connected at the node. Control data at the node is updated based on the identified label switched path. The message includes a list of cross-connection identifiers for nodes (e.g., nodes C, E, and F) along the label switched path. The cross-connection identifier can be an mplsXCIndex. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120163233 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING ROUTING INFORMATION AND ROUTING APPARATUS IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting routing information in a wireless network. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method for forwarding node link information even in an environment having a limited bandwidth for transmitting routing information. A routing apparatus according to exemplary embodiment of the present invention stores network topology information in an link information unit, generates a routing update message according to a priority of each link information, and transmitting the routing update message to a network. The priority of each link information is decided based on change in network topology, and a reception time and a transmission time of link information. Accordingly, important link information can be propagated at fast speed. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163234 | CONFIGURING A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES WITH PACKET MESSAGE TRANSMISSION, AND ROUTING PACKET MESSAGE TRANSMISSION IN SUCH A NETWORK - A general wireless mesh network of communication devices with packet message transmission, especially for telemetry and automation, includes at least a single control communication device and a set of slave communication devices. The control communication device searches in the network and assigns a virtual routing number to each slave communication device. The virtual routing number reflects a distance of the slave communication device from the control communication device, expressed by the number of routings, and is stored in the slave communication device. The slave communication device, for further routing of packets in the mesh network, uses time slots assigned according to the difference between said virtual routing number and the virtual routing number of the sender of a received packet. Packet routing is based on successive flooding of the virtual routing structure and time division multiplexing. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163235 | CONFIGURATION OF USER EQUIPMENT FOR PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - Configuring a peer-to-peer (P2P) link in a multi-access wireless network includes receiving P2P configuration information from a base station at a UE supporting P2P communication. The first UE communicates directly with a second UE based on the P2P configuration information received from the base station. The first UE may send a configuration request message to the base station, and receive a responsive configuration message with the P2P configuration information from the base station, which messages may be Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages supporting P2P. In the alternative, the P2P configuration information may be provided in a system information block (SIB) broadcast by the base station. The P2P configuration information may indicate allocation of physical layer or Medium Access Control resources, or both allocated for P2P communication, and other information. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163236 | METHOD OF CHANGING CODEBOOK SETTING INFORMATION FOR INTERCELL INTERFERENCE CONTROL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING INTERCELL INTERFERENCE USING THE SAME - A method of changing codebook configuration stored in user equipment (UE) by a base station includes deciding a PMI to recommend for use in each frequency band available to the UE which is being provided with service from the base station, deciding a PMI to restrict use of for each frequency band available to the UE which is being provided with service from the base station, transmitting PMI coordination information including recommendation coordination type information and PMI information in which the PMI to recommend for use is designated for each corresponding frequency band to the UE, and transmitting PMI coordination information including restriction coordination type information and PMI information in which the PMI to restrict use of is designated for each corresponding frequency band to the UE. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163237 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING PERSONAL SPACE WITH VIRTUAL SWITCH - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for configuring a personal space using a virtual switch and more particularly, an apparatus and a method for configuring a personal space providing an integrated service supporting a person by virtually integrating devices interworked with a heterogeneous communication network using a virtual switch. The exemplary embodiment of the present invention implements virtual switching by adding a configuration for interworking between devices connecting to different communication networks to an upper rank of a network layer as an adaptation layer. The exemplary embodiment of the present invention can configure an optimal environment in a personal space and thus, rapidly implement personal services. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163238 | Base Station Self-Optimization - In a cellular radio system a message indicating a change of cell size can be transmitted to a number of affected cells, in particular, neighboring cells. The affected cells receiving such a message can be adapted to use the information in the message when determining self-optimization parameters used for control purposes. Hereby, better response times can be achieved without reducing noise sensitivity. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120170486 | HIDING A SERVICE NODE IN A NETWORK FROM A NETWORK ROUTING TOPOLOGY - Hiding a service node in a network from a network topology is provided. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus for hiding a service node in a network from a network topology, the apparatus comprising: a network interface; a processor; and one or more stored sequences of instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the processor to perform: discovering a service node in a data network in accordance with a link-state protocol wherein the service node provides a network topology dependent service other than packet forwarding; establishing a link-state adjacency with the service node and one or more packet forwarding nodes in accordance with the link-state protocol; receiving a link-state advertisement; in response to identifying the link-state advertisement as an originating link-state advertisement sent from the service node, suppressing flooding of the received link-state advertisement to the one or more packet forwarding nodes. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120170487 | Method and system for preventing repeated updating of address table in ethernet ring network protection - The present disclosure discloses a method for preventing repeated updating of an address table in Ethernet ring network protection, including: an Ethernet ring network node sends an Ethernet ring network protection protocol frame and encapsulates its own node information into the Ethernet ring network protection protocol frame; an Ethernet ring network node receives the Ethernet ring network protection protocol frame and matches the node information encapsulated in the received Ethernet ring network protection protocol frame with its own node information; and when the matching is successful, the Ethernet ring network node does not update the address table. The present disclosure further discloses a system for preventing repeated updating of an address table in Ethernet ring network protection. In the system, a matching unit is used for matching the node information encapsulated in the received Ethernet ring network protection protocol frame with the node information of an Ethernet ring network node itself; and when the matching is successful, the Ethernet ring network node does not update the address table. Through the method and system of the disclosure, the problem of repeated updating of an address table in Ethernet ring network protection in the scenario of requesting local protection switching can be solved. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120176930 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING CO-SIGNALED RETURN LABEL SWITCH PATHS - An approach is provided for establishing label switch paths associated with a new routing node of a label switch network. A new routing node is determined to be activated within a label switch network. Label pair generation logic is employed to generate a path set-up message to establish a pair of label switch paths between the new routing node and an activated routing node of the label switch network. Another path set-up message is repeatedly generated for each of a plurality of activated routing nodes within the label switch network to establish pairs of label switch paths. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120176931 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR ON-DEMAND ROUTING PROTOCOLS FOR MESH NETWORKS - Various embodiments implement a set of low overhead mechanisms to enable on-demand routing protocols. The on-demand protocols use route accumulation during discovery floods to discover when better paths have become available even if the paths that the protocols are currently using are not broken. In other words, the mechanisms (or “Route Optimizations”) enable improvements to routes even while functioning routes are available. The Route Optimization mechanisms enable nodes in the network that passively learn routing information to notify nodes that need to know of changes in the routing information when the changes are important. Learning routing information on up-to-date paths and determining nodes that would benefit from the information is performed, in some embodiments, without any explicit control packet exchange. One of the Route Optimization mechanisms includes communicating information describing an improved route from a node where the improved route diverges from a less nearly optimal route. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120176932 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, METHOD FOR FORWARDING DATA MESSAGE DURING THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS AND COMMUNICATION NODE THEREOF - The present invention provides a communication method, and a method for forwarding a data message during the communication process and a communication node. Wherein, the configuration mode for identity recognition is clarified, and under the architecture based on access identifier and location separation in the network, a specific method for implementing identity recognition is provided, and the processing performed by each network element is regulated; the requirement for the number of the coding spaces is met, meanwhile the present invention realizes the intercommunication and interconnection with the legacy IP network, realizes the compatibility with the upper application programs of IPv4/IPv6, and supports the various application programs of the IPv4/IPv6 network to transplant smoothly to the architecture based on access identifier and location separation in the network. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120176933 | System and Method for Provisioning Connections as a Distributed Digital Cross-Connect Over a Packet Network - A method includes receiving a request to provision a path associated with at least a portion of a packet network and determining whether a router is associated with the path in the packet network. The method also includes provisioning a first connection between a first gateway and a second gateway when the router is not associated with the path. The method further includes provisioning a second connection between the first gateway and the router and a third connection between the router and the second gateway when the router is associated with the path. In addition, the method includes at least one of associating and disassociating a first endpoint of the first gateway and a second endpoint of the second gateway with one or more of the connections. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120176934 | OVERLAY TRANSPORT VIRTUALIZATION - In one embodiment, an apparatus includes one or more internal interfaces in communication with one or more network devices in a first network site through a Layer 2 link, an overlay interface in communication through a Layer 3 link with a core network connected to one or more other network sites, and a table mapping addresses for network devices in the other network sites to addresses of edge devices in the same network site as the network device. The apparatus further includes a processor operable to encapsulate a packet received at one of the internal interfaces and destined for one of the network devices in the other network sites, with an IP header including a destination address of the edge device mapped to the destination network device, and forward the encapsulated packet to the core network. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120176935 | Method and System for Updating Blocked Port Information - Disclosed in the present invention is a method for updating blocked port information. The method includes: when a node to which a ring protection link belongs in an Ethernet ring network is in a pending state and after a wait to restore timer expires, updating by the node to which the ring protection link belongs in the Ethernet ring network refreshing record information of an adjacent port of the ring protection link as: information identifying a blocked port of the node to which the ring protection link belongs in the Ethernet ring network. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120176936 | NETWORK BASED ON IDENTITY IDENTIFIER AND LOCATION SEPARATION ARCHITECTURE BACKBONE NETWORK, AND NETWORK ELEMENT THEREOF - The present invention provides a network based on identity identifier and location separation architecture and each component in the network. The network based on identity identifier and location identifier separation architecture includes access networks and a backbone network, and the access networks and the backbone network have no overlap in topology relation, wherein, the access network is located at an edge of the backbone network, and is set to achieve endpoint access in the access network; the backbone network is set to achieve routing and forwarding of data messages between the endpoints which access via the access networks; in the network, an access identifier (AID) is taken as an identity identifier of an endpoint user, and a routing identifier (RID) is used as a location identifier of the endpoint. The present invention achieves the identity identifier and location separation based on the network. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120182900 | Network Device - In this disclosure, we have the following examples and teachings: (1) Integrating the NID functionality in to the small foot-print of an SFP Module, with one or more of the features below: a) Mounting a NID SoC IC to an existing SFP Printed Circuit Board (PCB); b) Using the power from the SFP module, without requiring separate external power; c) NID SoC having only 2 ports, each with its own MAC and possibly PHY layer; d) NID SoC having an embedded microprocessor, RAM and ROM; e) Running a Web portal or other remote login and management software on the NID SoC; f) Miniaturizing the NID to make it cheaper, with reduced cost of inventory, shipment, and installation; and/or g) Supporting one or more (multiple) of the following functions in NID SoC: OAM, Media conversion, Rate adaptation, Policing & marking, Shaping, SLA performance monitoring, Statistics collection, Header manipulation, Security, and/or In-band management. (2) Building the NID functionality in a Dongle that hangs off an Electrical Ethernet port that supports POE (Power over Ethernet), with one or more of the features below: a) Similar to SFP-NID, but hanging off an Electrical Ethernet port; and/or b) Using the power from the Ethernet port POE, without requiring separate external power. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120182901 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR FAST RETRANSMISSION OF PROPOSAL MESSAGES - In one aspect, the invention provides a layer 2 network device that implements a fast retransmission method that causes the layer 2 network device to transmit proposal messages more frequently than defined in the RSTP standard. By transmitting proposal messages (e.g., proposal RST BPDUs) more frequently, the network device can significantly reduce the duration of a network traffic outage caused by a lost proposal message or a lost agreement message. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120182902 | Hierarchical Fabric Control Circuits - In an embodiment, one or more fabric control circuits may be inserted in a communication fabric to control various aspects of the communications by components in the system. The fabric control circuits may be included on the interface of the components to the communication fabric, in some embodiments. In other embodiments that include a hierarchical communication fabric, fabric control circuits may alternatively or additionally be included. The fabric control circuits may be programmable, and thus may provide the ability to tune the communication fabric to meet performance and/or functionality goals. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120188905 | Methods for Coupling Information Handling Systems Through a Communications Stack - A method of coupling multiple information handling systems (IHSs) through a communications stack includes establishing connection between a first IHS and a second IHS at a layer | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120188906 | PATH COMPUTATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HETEROGENEOUS MULTI-DOMAIN NETWORKS - The present disclosure provides path computation systems and methods operating over heterogeneous multi-domain networks. Specifically, path computation systems and methods utilize PCE mechanisms with additional functionality enabling heterogeneous domain characteristics. In an exemplary embodiment, a network includes a plurality of domains with each domain having a PCE implemented either as a separate server-based application or resident application in a network node. Different methods may be utilized for determining what PCE to access for information. Instead of a list of nodes and links given in a common format, each PCE can compute a path within its domain using a node and link address/identification format of its own, without having to ensure that it can be interpreted by nodes in other domains. This path segment can be further distinguished by a path identifier that verifies that it is created for a particular domain, and avoiding misinterpretation. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120188907 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - To improve performance in devices capable of communication using multiple radio access technologies (RATs), a gap pattern may be constructed in which a first RAT is quieted during certain times to allow for a second RAT to operate without interference. Gap patterns may be constructed based on timeline constraints, such as grant scheduling and HARQ performance, or based on desired performance levels of one or more of the RATs. Gap patterns may be selected by a user equipment or base station. Gap patterns may be selected to protect information in certain subframes. Potential gap patterns may be assigned weights indicating their desirability. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120188908 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING NETWORK CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - A method and an apparatus for acquiring network configuration information are disclosed. The method includes: when a terminal device dials up and needs to carry out network data services, delivering, by a NDIS driver layer of the terminal device, a Query Network Configuration Information message to a wireless modem; and acquiring, by the NDIS driver layer, the network configuration information returned from the wireless modem, and providing an application layer of the terminal device with the acquired network configuration information. In this way, when the terminal device does not provide the function of a DHCP client, the terminal device can effectively acquire needed network configuration information to implement dial-up successfully, and can carry out network data services online, so as to ensure that normal services can be carried out on the terminal device. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120188909 | ACKNOWLEDGEMENT-BASED REROUTING OF MULTICAST TRAFFIC - Various techniques for exchanging control messages in order to gracefully reroute multicast traffic are disclosed. For example, one method involves sending a join message for a multicast group towards a root of a new multicast tree and forwarding multicast traffic, addressed to the multicast group, on a current multicast tree until an acknowledgment corresponding to the join message is received. The new multicast tree can be identified in response to detection of a topology change within the network. Until the acknowledgment is received, multicast traffic that is received via the new multicast tree can be dropped. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120188910 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - When a wireless communication network is built in an ad hoc mode, it is possible to appropriately build the wireless communication network regardless of start timings of wireless communication functions of image capturing apparatuses. In order to achieve the object, there is provided the image capturing apparatus which is capable of building a wireless communication network by wirelessly connecting to another image capturing apparatus in an ad hoc mode, and which is capable of switching between a function as a creator and a function as a joiner, including a start unit configured to start as the creator, a unit configured to execute a scan process, and a unit configured to determine based on a result of the scan process whether to function as the creator and to function as the joiner, and to control the image capturing apparatus in accordance with the determination result. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120188911 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK-CAPABLE APPLIANCES - A controlling device is used to configure an appliance for wireless network communications through use of a setup wizard installed on a computing device. The setup wizard is used to obtain from a user information required to perform communications on a wireless network via a wireless network router and a digital representation of the information obtained from the user through use of the setup wizard is provided to the controlling device. The controlling device is then used to transfer the digital representation of the information to the appliance whereupon the appliance will use the digital representation of the information to configure itself for wireless network communications. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120195228 | Method For Improved Topology Mapping In Wireless Communication Networks - A method is provided for enabling a base station to infer a compact topology graph among a set of mobile nodes in its cell, the mobile nodes having a secondary radio to enable inter-nodal communication. This methodology ensures that nodal membership information is gathered within approximately 100 ms, and additional topology information is gathered from all the mobile nodes within approximately 300 ms over Wi-Fi radios. In dense networks, this time can be reduced to within 100 ms. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120195229 | System and Method for Computing Point-To-Point Label Switched Path Crossing Multiple Domains - Disclosed is an apparatus comprising a plurality of path computation elements (PCEs) associated with a plurality of inter-coupled domains and configured to communicate with a path computation client (PCC) associated with one of the domains and to implement a Forward Search Path Computation (FSPC) for a preferred path crossing the domains from a source node in a source domain of the plurality of inter-coupled domains to a destination node in a destination domain of the plurality of inter-coupled domains, wherein the preferred path is computed without using a determined order of the domains from the source domain to the destination domain. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120195230 | METHOD FOR MULTIPLE ACCESS TO THE RADIO RESOURCES IN A MOBILE AD HOC NETWORK AND SYSTEM IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - Method for multiple access to the radio resources in a mobile ad hoc network comprising a plurality of communicating mobile terminals or nodes, having known geographical coordinates, including constructing the said network, allocating reception frequency bands to each of the said active nodes of the said network, the said frequency bands being of identical width and spaced apart by a given minimum guard band, spreading code allocation performed by each of the said receiver active nodes of the said network for each of the said neighbor transmitter nodes to which it is directly linked by an active link according to an asynchronous CDMA method, and power control performed by each of the said receiver nodes of the said network for each of the said neighbor transmitter nodes to which it is directly linked by an active link. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120201167 | Inter-Local Peer Group (LPG) Routing Method - An on-demand method of routing data between a plurality of local peer groups (LPG) of plural moving nodes comprises transmitting a route request message from a source node, relaying the route request message to a native boundary node; forwarding the route request message to a foreign boundary node, determining if the destination node is within an LPG for the foreign boundary node; relaying the route request message to another boundary node if the destination node is not within the LPG, relaying the route request message to the destination node if the destination node is within the LPG, receiving the routing request message at the destination node, transmitting a routing response to the source node, relaying the routing response to the source node through a path discovered by the route request, receiving the routing response at the source node, and transmitting the data, upon receipt of the routing response. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120201168 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MODELING A SYSTEM THAT COMPRISES NETWORKS CONNECTED ACROSS A THIRD PARTY EXTERNAL NETWORK BASED ON INCOMPLETE CONFIGURATION DATA - The present system includes a system, method and device for inferring connectivity between network devices across a third party network. Configuration data related to the network devices is examined and configuration data about the network is inferred. The inferred configuration data may be related to a communication protocol, network bandwidth, and the like. A model representing the network is then created to indicate inferred interfaces and connections through the external network between network devices. The representation may be rendered in various forms, such as a display or data exported to another system. Various studies may also be performed using the model, such as traffic, routing, or planning studies. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120207056 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS ENABLED DEVICE CONFIGURATION OVER AN ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE (AMI) - Described herein are embodiments of methods and systems for configuring a wireless-enabled device over an advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) network. In accordance with one aspect, a method is provided comprising receiving, from a first device via a first network, information about one or more wireless access points accessible by the first device. The method further comprises receiving, from a second device via a second network, configuration information for the first device for configuring the first device to connect to a wireless network through one of the one or more wireless access points; and configuring the first device using the configuration information. In one aspect, configuring the first device includes sending at least a portion of the configuration information to the first device via the first network. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120207057 | System and Method for Providing a Wireless Access Point (WAP) Having Multiple Integrated Transceivers for Use in a Hybrid Wired/Wireless Network - The method may include determining a protocol associated with a communication signal for an access point. A compatible processor may be allocated and selected from a pool of available processors and subsequently utilized to process the communication signal. In one aspect of the invention, a processor may be made compatible by updating it with compatible protocol code that may be used for processing the communication signal. The compatible protocol code may be downloaded to the processor from a memory. The processor may associate a particular protocol code with a particular portion of the memory. Accordingly, the protocol code may be retrieved from the memory based on the association. The processor may be a digital signal processor (DSP), which may be adapted to process 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and Bluetooth protocols, for example. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120207058 | METHOD AND SYSTEMS FOR DETERMINING PATH OF A VIRTUAL CONNECTION THROUGH A NETWORK - Networks and devices may communicate with each other using virtual connections. In one embodiment, a computer-implemented model is generated and includes a representation of the path of a virtual connection. The path of a virtual connection, such as an IP tunnel, is traced between its source and destination. The physical connection corresponding to such IP tunnels are found by tracing through the device configuration and routing tables at routers in the network. The path between the source and destination devices is traced until the path is terminated at the destination device, or at an interface to an external network. If the path ends at an external network, the path is traced from the destination device toward the source device until a corresponding interface to the external network is reached. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120207059 | RESOURCE CONFIGURATION METHOD, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM FOR UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - The present invention disclosed a resource configuration method for uplink control channel, The method comprises: network side equipment determines downlink carrier that exists cell specific linkage in uplink carrier set and downlink carrier set of User Equipment UE; said network side equipment configures uplink control channel resource for downlink carrier which doesn't exist cell specific linkage according to said determinate result. The method of the present invention is simple and easy to implement, it could use the method in FDD and TDD system to advance system capability of Long Term Evolution multi-carrier update system, and advancing compatibility with the present LTE system primely. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120213117 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTELLIGENTLY MAINTAINING CONNECTIVITY IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes establishing a communication pathway between a first network node and a second network node coupled to a network; forming an adjacency to a new network node coupled to the network, where a designated intermediate system (DIS) election operation is executed after the adjacency is formed in order to determine that the new network node is a newly identified DIS for the network; and communicating a message advertising connectivity to both a previously identified DIS and the newly identified DIS, where the message is communicated during a specified time interval. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213118 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER (NIC) ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL (ARP) BATCHING - A NIC of a host system may provide batching services to enable reducing and/or optimizing overall system power consumption. Batching servicing may comprise buffering received packet within the NIC for an extended period of time—longer than buffering time during normal handling of received packets—based on determination that delaying handling of the received packet by the host system is permitted. Delaying handling of received packets may enable at least one component of the host system, such as a processor, utilized during that handling to remain in power saving states. The received packet may comprise a broadcast ARP packet that does not require a response from the host system. Packets buffered in the NIC may be forwarded to the host system when one or more flushing conditions occur. Flushing conditions may comprise reception of unicast packets destined for the host system or broadcast packets requiring response from the host system. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213119 | Method And System For Configuring A Device That Has Failed To Obtain Network Address - Method and system for configuring a device that has failed to obtain a network address. In one aspect of the invention, a method for remotely configuring a device includes attempting to obtain a network address from a network server over a network, and receiving a valid network address over the network from a remote device connected to the network in response to failing to obtain the network address from the network server. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213120 | RE-CONFIGURABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND MANAGING METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus including a physical information recognizing module, an MAC information recognizing module, a coordinating module, and a re-configurable transmitting/receiving module is provided. The physical information recognizing module recognizes a set of physical information relative to at least one communication network. The MAC information recognizing module recognizes a set of MAC information relative to the at least one communication network. The coordinating module generates a set of control signals selectively based on the set of physical information and the set of MAC information. The re-configurable transmitting/receiving module is configured according to the set of control signals and is used for transmitting/receiving data via the at least one communication network. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213121 | Temporary collaborative ad-hoc network of hardware nodes to perform function - That a trigger for creating a temporary collaborative ad-hoc network of hardware nodes has occurred is detected. In response, the temporary collaborative ad-hoc network is created via intercommunication among the hardware nodes. After the temporary collaborative ad-hoc network has been created, the temporary collaborative ad-hoc network performs a given function. A particular hardware node within the temporary collaborative ad-hoc network can perform a roll call request so that it ascertains a list of the hardware nodes within the temporary collaborative ad-hoc network. Performing the roll call request can include ascertaining that a correctness of the list of the hardware nodes satisfies a threshold, such that the correctness of the list of the hardware nodes is not necessarily completely correct. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213122 | SYSTEM FOR STATION GROUP MANAGEMENT AND METHOD FOR MANAGING STATION-MANAGEMENT GROUPS - Embodiments of a system for station group management and a method for managing station-management groups in a wireless network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a system element, such as an access point, may establish a station-management group including selected stations, transmit a unicast group allocation message to a station to indicate whether the station is part of the station management group, transmit data frames to the station in a downlink (DL) multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmission, and delete the station from the station-management group. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213123 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO STATION AND PROGRAM - A first radio base station informs a second radio base station about the configuration information of a second carrier, such as NBC or EC, not having an individual first identifier, as the configuration information of the second carrier is correlated with a first carrier, such as BC, having the individual first identifier. The radio station has a function of performing communication with a radio terminal using simultaneously a plurality of carriers included in the carrier set. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120218915 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ORGANIZING, MANAGING, AND SELECTIVELY DISTRIBUTING ROUTING INFORMATION IN A SIGNALING MESSAGE ROUTING NODE - Methods, systems, and computer program products for managing and selectively distributing routing information in a routing node are disclosed. In one implementation, a method for selectively distributing routing information in a routing node includes organizing internal signaling resources are organized so as to facilitate the efficient mapping of signaling system 7 (SS7) message transfer part (MTP) signaling protocol attributes to Internet protocol (IP)-based signaling resources. A routing status information sharing hierarchy is defined, which enables routing status information to be efficiently shared among members of a signaling mateset group. Members of a signaling mateset replicate and distribute SS7 MTP network management information across non-MTP signaling connections, such as IP connections. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120218916 | Method and Apparatus for Establishing Forwarding State Using Path State Advertisements - Paths may be advertised on a network implementing a link state routing protocol by using Path State Advertisements (PSAs) that are distributed in the same manner as link state advertisements. The path state advertisements contain path entries, each of which includes a globally unique path ID and path information such as a series of nodes or links that defines the path through the network. When a PSA is received by a network element, the network element will evaluate the path entries in the PSA to determine if the PSA is relevant and, if necessary, install forwarding state for the relevant path entries. PSAS not relevant to a network element are not used to affect forwarding state on the network element. Label based forwarding may be used by the network elements to forward data along the path, in which the globally unique path ID is used as the label. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120218917 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - Described are computer-based methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, for network configuration management. In some examples, a network configuration management system generates a difference network configuration for a managed network and identifies a network change case from the difference network configuration. The network configuration management system can further select a network change case application template and select a configuration file template. The network configuration management system can further generate device configuration file for a network device and store the device configuration file. In other examples, the network configuration management system generates device configuration files for a plurality of network devices. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120224503 | DISCOVERY OF CONVENTIONAL DEVICES AND BRIDGES IN HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid network device can implement functionality for automatically detecting and locating legacy bridges in a communication network. In one embodiment, a first network device of a first class of network devices can determine that a second network device of a second class of network devices is communicatively located adjacent to at least one of a plurality of network interfaces of the first network device based, in part, on detecting that a packet originating from the second network device does not include a predetermined tag. The first network device can determine whether network segments associated with the first network device and a target network device are communicatively coupled via a network bridge device of the second class of network devices based on transmitting probe messages to the second network device and determining whether the target network device detected the probe messages. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120224504 | ALTERNATE STRUCTURE WITH IMPROVED TECHNOLOGIES FOR COMPUTER COMMUNICATION AND DATA TRANSFERS - The computer communications and data transfers in the prior art depend on costly networks and internetworks, also on the problematic and defective addressing systems and further on the time consuming elaborate intelligent routing table look-up-mapping procedure and still further on the advantageous method for source or explicit routing getting sadly confined to communications within specialized single costly network like ATM, MPLS, etc., and not being extended for end user-to-end user communications. These problems are solved by evolving an alternate structure for communications without the use of any network and based on an inexhaustible device-attached permanent addressing system, and more importantly, this system exhibiting totally blemish-less or accusation free delivery to the addressee proper. The alternate structure takes into cognizance the geographical locations of computer devices which form the basis for end user-to-end user recorded dedicated circuit connected paths and the associated improved technologies emerging there-from such as Global Communication topology (GCT), Access Provider Exchanges (APEs), Strict Prescribed Path (SPPs), Global Strict Prescribed Path Address Directory (GSPPAD), and Route Indicators (RINDs). The resulting routing/switching method and header/frame devices Data Route Compact (DRC) are getting suitably improved to achieve high speed worriless communication. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120224505 | NETWORK ADDRESS ALLOCATION METHOD - A distributed network address allocation method is disclosed. For this purpose, an apparatus is provided for use as or in a node of the network. The apparatus comprises a portion ( | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120224506 | ADVERTISING TRAFFIC ENGINEERING INFORMATION WITH THE BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL - In general, techniques are described for distributing traffic engineering (TE) link information across network routing protocol domain boundaries using a routing protocol. In one example, a network device logically located within a first routing protocol domain includes a routing protocol module executing on a control unit to execute an exterior gateway routing protocol. The routing protocol module of the network device receives an exterior gateway routing protocol advertisement from a router logically located within a second routing protocol domain and decodes traffic engineering information for a traffic engineering link from the exterior gateway routing protocol advertisement. A path computation module of the network device computes a traffic engineered path by selecting the traffic engineering link for inclusion in the traffic engineered path based on the traffic engineering information. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120224507 | CONTROLLING OF WIRELESS CONNECTION OF A PORTABLE DEVICE INCLUDING AN ILLUMINATION COMPONENT OR SWITCH - A portable media player that provides for wireless connectivity is disclosed. In some examples, the portable media player contains a button that causes the player to search for, connect with, and disconnect from wireless networks. In some examples, the button provides indicators of the connectivity of the player, such as different colors or modes of illumination. In some examples, the functionality of the button changes depending on the connectivity of the player or characteristics of the playback or navigation of media within the player. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120224508 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND AD HOC ROUTE INFORMATION ACQUIRING METHOD - A wireless communication device including a local wireless communication interface operable to establish an ad hoc network in at least one local area, and to perform communication with a destination device through the ad hoc network, includes: a route discovery unit operable to discover a communication route to the destination device in the ad hoc network; a wide area wireless communication interface operable to perform wide area wireless communication through a wide area wireless communication network; and a wide area wireless communication receiving environment monitoring unit operable to monitor receiving environment of the wide area wireless communication interface. The wide area wireless communication receiving environment monitoring unit activates the route discovery unit for getting the latest communication route in response to a change of receiving environment of the wide area wireless communication interface | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120230221 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKING - This disclosure involves methods and systems for implementing IBSS networks between peer client devices. Devices function as registrar or enrollee in the network depending upon whether they are in configured or unconfigured mode. The WPS-PBC configuration routine allows the unconfigured enrollee device to obtain the necessary network configuration profile from the configured registrar device upon a successful WPS handshake process. Once a device has received the network configuration protocol, its status is switched to configured, allowing it to function as a registrar for the network for the subsequent addition of new devices. When both devices are initially in an unconfigured state, one is chosen to act as registrar so that it can automatically generate the necessary network configuration profile and pass it along to the other device. Following this process, both devices are set to configured mode. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120230222 | Gravitational Parent Selection in Directed Acyclic Graphs - In one embodiment, a particular node in a computer network receives an indication of a number of child nodes of one or more potential parent nodes to the particular node in a primary directed acyclic graph (DAG). From this, the particular node selects a particular potential parent node with the highest number of child nodes as a secondary DAG parent for the particular node, and joins the secondary DAG at the selected secondary DAG parent (e.g., for multicast and/or broadcast message distribution). This may recursively continue, such that nodes gravitate toward parents with more children, potentially allowing parents with fewer children to relinquish their parental responsibilities. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120230223 | THIN CLIENT ENVIRONMENT PROVIDING SYSTEM, SERVER, THIN CLIENT ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT METHOD AND THIN CLIENT ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - A thin client environment providing system includes a data center including at least one hypervisor and at least one layer 2 switch, a server, and at least one terminal computer. The server includes a VLAN group reservation unit which when receiving, from the terminal computer, a virtual machine addition request, obtains, from a data center DB, information of a hypervisor group and information of the layer 2 switch corresponding to the generation destination hypervisor, extracts, from a tenant DB, the VLAN group corresponding to the information of the hypervisor group, and the information of the tenant and information of the OS, and registers the indexed VLAN group with the tenant DB to reserve the VLAN group. A VLAN structure instructing unit which, when none of the VLAN group is registered with a switch DB, registers the information of the layer 2 switch and the information of the VLAN group. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120243434 | Spatial protocol for peer to peer networking using spatial binary active matrix - Binary data is used to describe relative location and can be used to determine routing topology in wired or wireless network environments. A standardized matrix is populated based on capacity, bandwidth, and location. This method requires less data and is reduced to binary form for faster process at the Transport layer. Furthermore, the same binary sequence communicates the relative topology and is used to route data in complex and moving environments. Each numeric sequence can also communicate the bandwidth, capacity and node rating. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243435 | Provider Edge Bridge with Remote Customer Service Interface - A method and Provider Edge Bridge for providing a Virtual C-tagged User Network Interface (VUNI) service interface or a Hairpin Switching service interface. In one embodiment, the Provider Edge Bridge includes a Customer Virtual Local Area Network (C-VLAN) component; a first Service VLAN (S-VLAN) component connected to the C-VLAN component and to a Metro Ethernet Network (MEN); and a second S-VLAN component connected to the C-VLAN component, to the first S-VLAN component, and to an External Network Network Interface (E-NNI). In another embodiment, the Provider Edge Bridge includes the C-VLAN component and a single S-VLAN component connected to the C-VLAN component, to the MEN, and to the E-NNI. In both embodiments, the Provider Edge Bridge is configured to provide the VUNI service interface or the Hairpin Switching service interface without utilizing a S-VLAN mapping component. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243436 | Methods And Apparatus For Selecting A Communication Network - Network selection techniques for use in a mobile device which is configured for voice and packet data communications are described. The mobile device performs a scanning operation to identify one or more communication networks, and consults a network selection list for selecting, in accordance with assigned priorities of the list, one of the identified networks. The mobile device also determines whether a packet data service interconnection to a home network via the selected network is available. If the interconnection to the home network via the selected network is determined to be available, then the mobile device operates with voice and packet data services in the selected network. Otherwise, if the interconnection to the home network via the selected network is determined to be unavailable, then the mobile device repeats the acts of consulting and determining for the next identified network in the list. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243437 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK PROVISIONING OF MOBILE ENTITIES FOR PEER-TO-PEER SERVICE - Techniques are provided for peer-to-peer (P2P) service provisioning. For example, there is provided a method, operable by a network entity, that may involve determining a set of region-specific parameters for use in the P2P service in a coverage area. The method may involve providing the set of the region-specific parameters to at least one user equipment (UE) for configuration of the at least one UE for the P2P service, in response to the at least one UE entering the coverage area. In related aspects, the set of the region-specific parameters may include RF parameters, service discovery parameters, connection establishment parameters, and/or security parameters | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243438 | SAFE START-UP OF A NETWORK - A method for start-up of a network, including a number of nodes, which are connected via channels. The nodes exchange information in the form of messages via the channels. The transition phase of a synchronizing node from its initial phase to a synchronized phase is separated in a first integration phase and a second subsequent cold-start phase. A synchronizing node in the integration phase listens to messages being sent from nodes in the synchronized phase and only reacts to an integration message (i-frame) if the integration message is a valid message. Furthermore, a synchronizing node, wherein integration of the synchronizing node to a set of already synchronized nodes was not successful after a specifiable period, changes into the cold-start phase, in which a cold-start procedure of the node is extracted, wherein in the cold-start phase the node does not react to integration messages of a node in the synchronized phase. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243439 | Method, Media Gateway and Mobile Switching Center Emulation for Realizing Switching by Coping Topology - The present invention discloses a method for realizing a handoff by replicating topology, including: a MGW receiving an ADD Command from a MSCe, adding a new Termination to a Context, and establishing a bearer to a target office or a target base station; receiving a MODIFY Command from the MSCe, and modifying properties of the new Termination; and receiving a SUBTRACT Command from the MSCe, removing an original Termination, and according to recorded information about relationship between the new Termination and the original Termination carried by a Handover Package in one Command, playing the Tone of the original Termination to the new Termination continuously and establishing the same topology connection between the new Termination and other Terminations in the Context. The present invention also discloses a system for realizing a handoff by replicating topology, a media gate-way and a mobile switching center emulation. The present invention completes the topology replication. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120250572 | VERSATILE SOURCE PORT ENFORCEMENT FOR DATA NETWORKS - A communication switch comprises a plurality of ports and a processing unit configured to identify source ports and destination ports from the plurality of ports on a per virtual link basis. Each virtual link comprises one or more source ports via which frames are received from one or more source nodes and one or more destination ports via which received frames are forwarded to one or more destination nodes. For at least one virtual link, the processing unit is configured to accept more than one of the plurality of ports as source ports. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250573 | RULES SYSTEM VERSIONS - A rules systems version coordination method is disclosed for the initiation of a rules system version and the coordination of the rules system version with other rules system versions which may be available. Particularly, the rules system versions are coordinated so that one-and-only-one is in the Active State i.e. the state in which the Policy and Charging Rules Node (PCRN) is deriving its set of policies; rules system versions may only be promoted to the Active State from a Release State; and rules system versions may only be modified when in a Draft State, from which they may be promoted to the Release State. The rules systems version coordination method is particularly useful for providing a buffer state between rules system versions undergoing modification and the rules system version currently in service. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250574 | INCREMENTAL HIGH RADIX NETWORK SCALING - Efficient and highly-scalable network solutions are provided that utilize incremental scaling of switches, and devices connected to those switches, in an environment such as a data center. Embodiments may utilize multiple tiers of switches. Sets of switches in two different tiers may be initially connected to each other utilizing multiple connections. As network capacity needs within the computing environment increase, additional switches may be added to tiers. To connect the added switches to the switch network, the redundant connections may be utilized. Moving connections from one switch to another switch can free up ports to connect added switches in one of the tiers of switches to the switch network. The tiers of switches can be based on Clos networks, where the tiers of switches are fully connected, or other high radix or fat tree topologies that include oversubscription between tiers. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250575 | Automated Policy Generation for Mobile Communication Networks - A solution to the problem of automated policy generation for mobile ad hoc networks includes an optimization-based, utility-driven approach aimed at generating optimal policies with respect to the given network objectives. The combination of optimization heuristics and network simulation is used to solve the problem. Specifically, the problem of automated generation of network management policies based on available network plans and related information is solved by converting the policy generation into the following optimization problem: given network information and objectives as input, generate optimal policies as output. The optimization process is guided by a utility function based on performance evaluation criteria reflecting the network objectives. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250576 | WIRELESS DISPLAY DISCOVERY AND OPERATION WITH TDLS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose computer-program products for discovery of source or sink devices and their capabilities, prior to establishing a link such as a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) link. The established link may be used for different applications such as Wi-Fi Display session with the desired source or sink device. The proposed computer-program product may also be applied to devices that utilize peer to peer communication. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250577 | NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD - A program causes a pc | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250578 | MULTI-CELL OPERATION IN NON-CELL_DCH STATES - A method and wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for establishing multi-cell operation in a non-fully connected state are disclosed. The method may include the WTRU accessing a primary cell. The method may include the WTRU determining at least one potential secondary cell. The method may include the WTRU initiating access to the at least one potential secondary cell while simultaneously accessing the primary cell in a non-fully connected state. The non-fully connected state may correspond to the WTRU accessing the primary cell without dedicated radio resources being allocated to the WTRU. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250579 | NODE PLACEMENT METHOD WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK, SUCH AS A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The disclosure includes a method of and associated system for placing nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method includes receiving user-specified parameters regarding the network. The parameters can include a layout of a building or other space, and requirements for the WLAN. An algorithm then employs these parameters to automatically create and optimized layout of multiple wireless access points for the WLAN. The method can display the layout and provide various types of information to the user. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250580 | Optical Transport Switching Node with Framer - A switching node for an optical communication system has an electrical switch, coupled to switch electrical signals from an input converter to a selected one of the outputs, and has a framer for reading or writing optical transport overhead information from or to the electrical signals. A bypass path is provided so that at least some of the signals being switched can bypass the framer. This can enable each node to be more efficient or handle more signals, since the framer no longer has to process all the signals. A reduction in power consumption can result. A method of configuring the switching node can involve a management system receiving information about the network, determining a new wavelength routing configuration and sending control signals to the node to configure the switches and control which signals use the bypass path. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250581 | Ad-Hoc Surveillance Network - A method and related apparatuses, the method comprising: setting up a network of a plurality of mobile devices ( | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120257536 | Configuring Mobile Station According to Type of Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Deployment - A target access point is selected from the results of a discovery scan so that a mobile station can attempt a connection with the target access point. The mobile station determines whether the target access point belongs to a small office/home office (SOHO)-type wireless local area network (WLAN) deployment or to a corporate/enterprise-type WLAN deployment. The mobile station then configures itself according to the determination of the type of WLAN deployment to which the target access point belongs. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257537 | INTERFACE DETECTION DEVICE AND DETECTION METHOD EMPLOYING THE SAME - An interface detection device in electronic communication with a network tester to receive network packets includes a plurality of local area network (LAN) interfaces, a signal control unit and a path distribution unit. The LAN interfaces are in electronic communication with the network tester and are electrically connected in pairs. The signal control unit provides preset test data for the LAN interfaces and controls the LAN interfaces to generate corresponding verification data. The signal control unit compares the verification data with the test data, and controls the path distribution unit to automatically figure out corresponding transmission paths. The LAN interfaces are electronically communicating with each other through the connected LAN interfaces and the transmission paths to transfer the network packets. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257538 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DETERMINING ROUTE - A communication apparatus stores topology information that is shared by communication apparatuses included in a network and representing connection states between the communication apparatuses. The topology information includes port identification information for identifying ports that are connectable to each other within each communication apparatus. The communication apparatus determines a route by sequentially selecting a port that can be connected to a port, to which transmission data is input based on the port identification information. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257539 | METHOD FOR MAC ADDRESSES WITHDRAWAL IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A rationalized MAC withdrawal method for a multi-domain communication network, where at least one access node interconnects a remote node with two or more access networks. The method allows flushing, both in the access nodes and in the remote node, only MAC addresses being related to a specific access networks where a topological change has taken place, without affecting other access networks connected to the same access node. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257540 | METHOD OF MANAGING A SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method of managing a system, and associated computer program product, wherein the system includes a gateway device, a first device connected with the gateway device and a second device that is connected with the first device and has a greater number of devices intervening before the gateway device than the first device is provided. The method includes generating and displaying a connection configuration map including a symbol of the gateway device, a symbol of the first device and a symbol of the second device on a display unit of a management device. In the connection configuration map, the symbols of the gateway device, the first device and the second device are connected corresponding to actual connections, the symbol of the first device is located at a position having a shorter distance in a preset first direction from the symbol of the gateway device than the symbol of the second device, and connection interfaces of the gateway device, the first device and the second device are shown in an identifiable manner. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257541 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FRAGMENTING, TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING NETWORK TOPOLOGY INFORMATION - The invention discloses a method for fragmenting, transmitting and receiving network topology information. In the transmitting method, a BS transmits fragmentations of a neighborhood broadcast message carrying network topology information, wherein at least one of the fragmentations carries indication information which can indicate changed fragmentations. The solution can decrease the time delay of the information acquisition and subsequent operation. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257542 | USER ISOLATION BETWEEN NETWORK DEVICES - In one embodiment, a plurality of network interfaces of a network device that are configured to communicate with other network devices in a first computer network are identified as network-to-network interfaces (NNIs). Also, one or more network interfaces of the network device that are configured to provide access to the first computer network to user devices are identified as user-to-network interfaces (UNIs). One or more NNIs of the plurality of NNIs are selected to forward traffic from the network device to an aggregation device of the first network that couples the first computer network to a io second computer network. Also, one or more NNIs of the plurality of NNIs that have not been selected to forward traffic from the device to the aggregation device are designated as network-to-network interface alternates (NNI-ALTs). The one or more NNI-ALTs are treated as UNIs for user data traffic forwarding decisions. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120263073 | NETWORK SEARCH, SELECTION AND ENTRY IN WIMAX - Displayable names corresponding to identities of networks which provide service for subscriber stations are obtained, the identities of the networks and the corresponding displayable names are processed into processed information, and the processed information is transmitted. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120263074 | TIME OF DAY RULE SCHEDULER - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a policy and charging rules node (PCRN) for scheduling the operation of the PCRN, the method including: selecting a type of PCRN action to carry out; determining an update time; determining an applicable PCRN action based upon the update time and a timeframe associated with the applicable PCRN action; and performing the applicable PCRN action. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120263075 | Method and Apparatus for Exchanging Routing Information and the Establishment of Connectivity Across Multiple Network Areas - Routes may be installed across multiple link state protocol controlled Ethernet network areas by causing ABBs to leak I-SID information advertised by BEBs in a L1 network area into an L2 network area. ABBs will only leak I-SIDs for BEBs where it is the closest ABB for that BEB. Where another ABB on the L2 network also leaks the same I-SID into the L2 network area from another L1 network area, the I-SID is of multi-area interest. ABBs will advertise I-SIDs that are common to the L1 and L2 networks back into their respective L1 network. Within each L1 and L2 network area, forwarding state will be installed between network elements advertising common interest in an ISID, so that multi-area paths may be created to span the L1/L2/L1 network areas. The L1/L2/L1 network structure may recurse an arbitrary number of times. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120263076 | Long Term Evolution User Equipment Multi-Packet Data Network Parameter Based Connectivity Control - A system is provided for concurrently connecting a plurality of packet data network gateways to a serving gateway. The system includes a processor configured to evaluate an operational parameter related to a set of network components to which the serving gateway and the packet data network gateways belong. The operational parameter limits a quantity of packet data network gateways to which the serving gateway concurrently connects. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120269091 | AUTO-CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES - A network device which is connectable to a data communication network is provided. The network device includes at least two device components including a first device component. Each device component has a communication interface, which is accessible via an internal static network address, associated for communicating data. The network device further includes a node device having an internal interface for communication with the communication interface of each of the at least two device components and an external interface for communication with an external device different from the network device. The node device is configured for receiving external data from the data communication network and providing to the first device component, in response the external data and by using the internal network address of the first device component, component specific data related to the first device component. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120269092 | AUTO-CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES - It is described a network device having at least two device components and being connectable to a data communication network. Each device component has a communication interface which is accessible by using an internal network address associated therewith. The network device further includes an address translation device having an internal interface for communication with the communication interface of each of the at least two device components and an external interface for communication with an external device different from the network device and being configured for determining, based on a received target identifier, the internal network address associated with the communication interface of a first device component. The address translation device is further configured for forwarding the external data to the first device component by using the internal network address of the first device component. Further, a configuration device for providing the external data is provided. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120269093 | Neighbor Discovery for Ethernet Private Line on User Network Interfaces - The present invention relates to a network management method in an optical network for performing automatic neighbor discovery. A device ( | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120269094 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus includes an acquisition unit, a determination unit, and a control unit. The acquisition unit acquires capability information on other communication apparatuses in a network. The determination unit determines, based on the capability information acquired by the acquisition unit, whether there is a communication apparatus having a specific function, related to data communication, to be performed after processing to set communication parameters is performed. The control unit perform controls, in response to the determination unit determining that there is a communication apparatus having the specific function, to continue the processing to set the communication parameters, and performs control, in response to the determination unit determining that there is no communication apparatus having the specific function, to terminate the processing to set the communication parameters. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120275338 | Selectively Populating Forwarding Information Bases in a Packet Switch - In one embodiment, forwarding information bases (FIBs) are selectively populated in a packet switch. A packet switching device determines, based on one or more protocol signaling messages, a subset, which is less than all, on which FIBs a lookup operation may be performed for identifying forwarding information for a received particular packet. The packet switching device populates each of these FIBs, but not all of the FIBs of the packet switching device, with forwarding information corresponding to the particular forwarding value. Thus, FIB resources are consumed for only those FIBs which could actually be used, and not all of the FIBs, for forwarding packets in the data plane of the packet switching device, whether these packets are received on a primary or backup path. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275339 | Method and System of Centralized Control and Management for Fiber Channel Over Ethernet Networks - A method implemented in an FCoE controller and manager (FCM) coupled to a first fiber channel over Ethernet (FCoE) data forwarder (FDF), the method comprising sending to the first FDF a first Controlling FDF Information (CFI) request that requests the name of the first FDF, receiving from the first FDF a first CFI acceptance comprising the name of the first FDF, receiving from the first the second CFI acceptance associated with a second FDF, wherein the first CFI acceptance and the second CFI acceptance allow the FCM to develop topology information for a FCoE network comprising the FCM, the first FDF, and the second FDF, creating a first base forwarding table for the first FDF, and creating a second base forwarding table for the second FDF, wherein the second base forwarding table is different than the first base forwarding table. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275340 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR MANAGING SECURITY RECONFIGURATION IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods are discussed of managing security reconfiguration and cell update procedures in a user equipment and in a node in a cellular communication system and a user equipment and a node in the cellular communication system. Methods in the user equipment may include detecting a cell update trigger event, and aborting any ongoing security reconfiguration procedure in the user equipment in response to the detected cell update trigger event. Subsequently, a security status indication in response to the aborted security reconfiguration may be provided, and a cell update message and the provided security status indication may be jointly transmitted to a node. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275341 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING A MULTISTAGE NETWORK USING A TWO-DIMENSIONAL ARRAY OF TILES - A network, including: a first tile having a processor, a first top brick connected to the processor, a first bottom brick, and a first intermediate brick; a second tile having a second intermediate brick and a second bottom brick; multiple connections connecting the first top brick with the second intermediate brick and the first intermediate brick with the second bottom brick using a passthrough on an intermediate tile between the first and second tiles, where the first, the intermediate, and the second tiles are positioned in a row; and a third tile having a plurality of caches connected to a third bottom brick, where the second and third tiles are positioned in a column, and the first bottom brick, the second bottom brick, and the third bottom brick belong to a bottom layer of the network, and where the first and second intermediate bricks belong to an intermediate layer of the network. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120281591 | BROADBAND NETWORK SYSTEM AND IMPLEMENTATION METHOD THEREOF - This disclosure discloses a broadband network system and an implementation method thereof. The method comprises the steps that: a terminal transmits an IP address request message to the network side (S | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120281592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING TRAFFIC-ENGINEERING LABEL SWITCHED PATH - A method and apparatus for acquiring a Traffic-Engineering Label Switched Path (TE LSP) provided by the present invention relate to communication field. The method includes: performing path tracing from a source node to a target node, and obtaining a passing node passed by the path tracing; acquiring a Path Compute Element (PCE) in a region in which the passing node is located; acquiring traffic-engineering database of a region in which the PCE is located from the PCE; and according to the traffic-engineering database, obtaining the TE LSP between the source node and the target node. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120287817 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR REPLICATING SETTINGS INFORMATION - The apparatus, method and computer program product provide obtain settings information on a network connection set in a first network device; a settings information storage unit that stores the obtained settings information; a configuration information acquirer that obtains configuration information including information about the second network device; and a generator that selects at least part of settings information corresponding to the obtained configuration information among the settings information stored in the settings information storage unit, and utilizes the at least part of the settings information to generate replicate information used to replicate the settings information to the second network device so as to provide a network connection for the second network device. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120287818 | MULTIPOINT-TO-MULTIPOINT SERVICE FOR A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A multipoint-to-multipoint service is provided between a set of edge nodes of a communications network. The network comprises at least two sub-networks and an intermediate node at a boundary between sub-networks. For each pair of edge nodes comprising an edge node in a first of the sub-networks and an edge node in a second of the sub-networks, a multi-segment pseudowire connection is configured between the pair of edge nodes. The pseudowire connection passing via at least one intermediate node. At the intermediate node forwarding data is configured which specifies a forwarding relationship between pseudowire segments corresponding to the multi-segment pseudowire connections. A topology of Label Switched Paths carry the multi-segment pseudowires. Edge nodes within a sub-network can be connected with a mesh topology or a hub-and-spoke topology. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120287819 | MOBILE CLOUD ARCHITECTURE BASED ON OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) PLATFORM - A simplified future mobile terminal system converging multiple wireless transmission technologies by utilizing a cost-effective and spectrum-efficient mobile cloud solution based on the innovative virtual mobile server system of the open wireless architecture (OWA) platform. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120294187 | ASSIGNING GATEWAYS FOR HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS MOBILE NETWORKS - Systems and methods are provided for assigning gateways for heterogeneous wireless mobile networks. A method includes exchanging routing and connectivity information between a plurality of nodes. Each node is respectively included in a corresponding one of a plurality of mobile ad hoc networks. The information excludes global positioning satellite information. The method further includes determining, for a given node, whether a particular set of gateway functionalities of the given node are redundant with respect to one or more other nodes, based on topology information derived from the information. The method also includes dynamically assigning the given node as a gateway or a non-gateway by respectively turning on or turning off the particular set of gateway functionalities of the given node when the particular set of gateway functionalities of the given node are respectively determined to be non-redundant or redundant with respect to the one or more other nodes. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294188 | Wireless Data Card, Method and System for Communicating between Wireless Data Card and Computer Side - The present invention discloses a wireless data card, and a method and system for communicating between the wireless data card and computer side, and relates to communication field. The method of the present invention includes: the wireless data card installing a wireless data card driver with connection management function into a computer when the wireless data card is connected with the computer; and the computer interacting with the wireless data card through the installed wireless data card driver with the connection management function. The technical scheme of the present invention completes the interaction with the wireless data card board side controlling program in the wireless data card driver, thus avoiding the disadvantage that the wireless data cards of the different manufacturers cannot be universal due to the different connection managers. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294189 | System, Apparatus, and Method for Distributed Home Agents in a Mobile IP Environment - Included is an apparatus comprising a first network node in a first network configured to act as a home agent (HA) for a mobile node (MN), wherein the first network is one of a plurality of networks that connect to the MN, and wherein a second network that connects to the MN comprises a second network node configured to act as a second HA for the MN. Also included is a method comprising receiving, by a first network node, a binding update message, wherein the first network node is in a first network, and wherein the first network node is configured to act as a HA for a MN; and sending, by the first network node, a binding acknowledgement, wherein the binding update message comprises a multicast state of the MN. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294190 | DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ADDRESS SETTING METHOD FOR SETTING AN IP ADDRESS - To set an IP address to an apparatus existing beyond a router, a first apparatus requests a second apparatus via the router to set an IP address to a third apparatus. Upon reception of the request, the second apparatus sets to the third apparatus the IP address instructed by the first apparatus. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294191 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING WITH DATA THROUGH COMPONENT CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TO WHICH CARRIER AGGREGATION METHOD IS APPLIED AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for enabling a terminal to communicate with data by modifying a connective relationship among component carriers in a mobile communication system to which a carrier aggregation method is applied and a terminal apparatus therefor. The method for enabling the terminal to communicate with the data by modifying the connective relationship among the component carriers in the mobile communication system to which the carrier aggregation method is applied, in connection with one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving a message including identifier information for modifying a connective relationship among at least one downlink component carrier and at least one uplink component carrier from a base station; receiving predetermined data through at least one downlink component carrier from the base station; and transmitting feedback data to the base station for data received through the uplink component carrier modified according to the identifier information. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120300668 | GENERATING A LOOP-FREE ROUTING TOPOLOGY USING ROUTING ARCS - In one embodiment, a method comprises creating, in a computing network, a loop-free routing topology comprising a plurality of routing arcs for reaching a destination device, each routing arc comprising a first network device as a first end of the routing arc, a second network device as a second end of the routing arc, and at least a third network device configured for routing any network traffic along the routing arc toward the destination device via any one of the first or second ends of the routing arc; and causing the network traffic to be forwarded along at least one of the routing arcs to the destination device. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300669 | TOPOLOGY-BASED CONSOLIDATION OF LINK STATE INFORMATION - A method in a network element that forwards packets to destination nodes includes identifying groups of the destination nodes. Respective performance metrics of multiple different candidate network paths, over which the destination nodes in a given group are reachable from the network element, are estimated jointly for all the destination nodes in the given group. A network path is selected from among the candidate network paths based on the estimated performance metrics. The packets addressed to the destination nodes in the given group are forwarded over the selected network path. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300670 | Pre-Coding Method and Apparatus Based on Mixed Multiplexing Demodulation Reference Signals - Disclosed in the present invention is a pre-coding method for hybrid multiplexing demodulation reference symbol (DMRS). The method includes: determining a multiplexing relationship between DMRS ports; making layers of data transport correspond to DMRS ports with the multiplexing relationship determined; and pre-coding pilot sequences corresponding to various DMRS ports according to the relationship between the layers of data transport and the DMRS ports. Also disclosed in the present invention is a method for mapping from a layer to a multiplexing demodulation reference symbol (DMRS) and an apparatus for achieving pre-coding based on a hybrid multiplexing demodulation reference symbol (DMRS). By way of the technical solution of the present invention, interference between the layers corresponding to different codeword streams can be avoided, and the accuracy of channel estimation can be improved. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300671 | NETWORK CLUSTERING - A network clustering facility is described. The network clustering facility receives a message having a location identification that identifies a destination for the message and comprises at least two components, selects a network node identified by the components of the location identification, determines whether a link exists to the selected network node, and identifies a best link to the selected network node. The network clustering facility comprises a clustering subsystem, an advertising subsystem, and a routing layer. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300672 | Method for Provisioning Circuits on Multiple Parallel Links With a Single Setup Message - A method and system for provisioning circuits on multiple parallel links with a single setup message is disclosed. A setup message specifying links in a circuit path is transmitted to switches along the circuit path. If a switch determines that a link specified in the setup message has insufficient bandwidth for the circuit, the switch substitutes a parallel link having sufficient bandwidth for the specified link in the circuit path. The setup message can indicate whether substitution for a link is permitted. This can be used to prevent substitution for links when provisioning service routes for new circuits in order to maintain diversity requirements, while allowing substitution for links when provisioning restoration routes for failed circuits in order to reduce restoration time. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300673 | DECENTRALISED COORDINATION ALGORITHM FOR MINIMISING CONFLICT AND MAXIMISING COVERAGE IN SENSOR NETWORKS - A method of creating a sensor network from a plurality of sensing devices that includes identifying a plurality of subsets of the sensing devices, each of the subsets providing a preferred (e.g., desired or specified) sensing quality coverage. Communication signal strengths of the sensing devices in the subsets are adjusted to seek to enable direct or indirect communication between active sensing devices in all of the plurality of subsets, thereby creating a sensor network. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120307679 | Method and Apparatus for Full Duplex Serial Shifting Mode and Switch Mode Data Transmission - An industrial network with bidirectional communication for real time control includes nodes selectively operable in either a switch mode or a serial shifting mode. Nodes operating in the switch mode are capable of initiating data frames for transmission on the network and receiving data frames from the network. Nodes operating in either the switch mode or the serial shifting mode are capable of extracting and/or inserting data into a data frame as it is transmitted through that node. An initialization procedure determines end nodes and intermediate nodes within the network. The end nodes are configured to initially operate in the switch mode and the intermediate nodes are configured to initially operate in the serial shifting mode. The intermediate nodes are additionally operable to selectively toggle between operation in switch mode and serial shift mode and may operate in both modes during a single I/O scan cycle. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307680 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION PATH BETWEEN SERVER AND MOBILE TERMINAL IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A data transmission/reception path between a server and a mobile terminal in a heterogeneous network environment is controlled by mapping at least one actual Internet protocol (IP) address available to the mobile terminal in the heterogeneous network environment to at least one virtual IP to generate a path mapping table, and determining a data transmission/reception path between the server and the mobile terminal with reference to the generated path mapping table. This virtualization of terminal actual addresses with respect to a server improves service continuity in an efficient, low cost manner, independent of the need to modify the OS kernel in various devices. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307681 | NODE APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CHANNEL SELECTION METHOD - A node apparatus for forming a wireless ad-hoc network, including: a recognition possibility determination unit that determines whether or not a gateway apparatus connecting the wireless ad-hoc network to other network can be recognized; an adjoining node detection unit that detects other node apparatus which is the source of a received packet as an adjoining node; a channel switching unit that switches, when the recognition possibility determination unit determines that the gateway apparatus cannot be recognized, the channel used for reception of packets transmitted in the wireless ad-hoc network successively to each of a plurality of channels; and a channel selection unit that selects a channel to be used for communication in the wireless ad-hoc network based on the number of adjoining nodes detected by the adjoining node detection unit in each of the plurality of channels. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307682 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SUB-SUBNET IN AN INFINIBAND (IB) NETWORK - A system and method can support multiple domains in an InfiniBand (IB) fabric. The IB fabric can include one or more subnets, wherein each said subnet contains one or more switch nodes. Additionally, at least one said subnet can be divided into one or more sub-subnets, wherein each said sub-subnet is managed by a separate sub-subnet manager that is associated with a unique management key, and wherein said one or more sub-subnets are connected by one or more sub-subnet gateway switch nodes, wherein each sub-subnet gateway switch node belongs to one sub-subnet. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307683 | LAYER-2 TO MPLS SERVICE MEDIATION ARCHITECTURE - An architecture for providing service mediation in a network having a Layer-2 domain and an MPLS domain includes at least one Layer-2 provider edge device in communication with a first customer site; at least one Layer-2 edge device in communication with the Layer-2 provider edge device; at least one MPLS mediation edge device in communication with the Layer-2 edge device; and at least one MPLS provider edge device in communication with both the MPLS mediation edge device and a second customer site. An end-to-end connection is established using native Layer-2 signaling, if any, in the Layer-2 domain and PWE3 signaling protocols in the MPLS domain. The MPLS mediation edge device resolves associations between Layer-2 edge devices and MPLS provider edge devices. The service is “mediated” in the sense that native Layer-2 signaling is terminated at the MME, and a new domain, i.e., pseudowire, is established across the MPLS domain. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307684 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING LOCATION INDEPENDENT DYNAMIC PORT MIRRORING ON DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL SWITCHES - A method for providing location independent dynamic port mirroring on distributed virtual switches is disclosed. A controller is provided to configure one or more virtual switches within a group of physical machines to appear as a set of distributed virtual switches. In response to the receipt of a data packet at a port of a physical machine, a determination is made whether or not the port has a monitor port located on the physical machine. If the port has a monitor port located on the same physical machine, a copy of the data packet is sent to the monitor port of the physical machine. If the port has a monitor port located on a different physical machine, a copy of the data packet along with an identification (ID) of the port and an ID of the monitor port are encapsulated, and the encapsulated information are sent to a controller. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120314617 | TECHNIQUES FOR PREFIX SUBNETTING - A delegated internet protocol version six prefix, which is assigned to a gateway device which is interposed between an internet and a premises, is divided into a lower-numbered portion and a higher-numbered portion. One of the portions is allocated to a plurality of networks associated with the premises. The other is broken into a plurality of blocks for use in prefix delegation for allocation to routers associated with the premises requesting the prefix delegation. The gateway device is operated in accordance with the dividing, allocating, and breaking steps. Optionally, at least some of the plurality of networks associated with the premises are pre-categorized into at least first and second trust zones, and the operating step further includes operating the gateway device in accordance with the pre-categorizing step. Apparatuses, devices, computer program products, and internet protocol version four embodiments are also provided. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120314618 | Management of Private Virtual Networks - A transmission system including a plurality of edge routers. The system manages a plurality of virtual networks, each network linking a plurality of remote networks therebetween. An edge router manages a topology table that indicates one or more adjacent edge routers for a given virtual network and at least one remote network identifier for an adjacent edge router. A route change made in relation to a remote network of a given virtual network is detected on the edge router. On the basis of the topology table, one or more adjacent edge routers and the corresponding remote network identifiers are determined for the virtual network. The route change is transmitted to said adjacent edge routers by indicating the corresponding remote network identifiers. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120314619 | Methods and Arrangements for Contention-Based Uplink Transmission in a Wireless Communications System - The present invention relates to a user equipment and a radio base station, and to related methods of enabling contention-based uplink transmission. The method comprises the steps of determining ( | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120314620 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF SURVEY SENSORS AND CONTROLLERS - A method and system for configuring wireless communication of survey sensors and controllers is recited. In one embodiment, a survey device controller is configured to receive a first wireless communication comprising a sequence indicating that a survey device is configured to participate in an automatic configuration process with the survey device controller. The system further comprises the survey device which is configured to generate a second wireless communication indicating the reception of a selection event to communicatively couple the survey device with the survey device controller. The survey device controller is further configured to automatically initiate a wireless communication connection comprising the survey device controller and the survey device in response to receiving the second wireless signal contemporaneous with receiving a signal which is generated by the survey device controller to communicatively couple the survey device controller with the survey device. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120314621 | BRIDGING WIRELESS AND WIRED MEDIA IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a wireless access point receives a wireless advertisement frame having a source address field that indicates a reachable node being advertised, a destination address field that indicates a destination to which the reachable node is to be advertised, a transmitter address field that indicates a transmitting node from which the wireless advertisement frame is received, and a receiver address field that indicates the access point. The wireless access point then transmits a reflected wireless advertisement frame having a source address io field that indicates the reachable node, a destination address field that indicates the destination, a transmitter address field that indicates the wireless access point, and a receiver address field that indicates both a plurality of receivers the reflected wireless advertisement frame is to be accepted by, and a node that is to be excluded from accepting the reflected wireless advertisement frame. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120314622 | FORMATION AND REARRANGEMENT OF LENDER DEVICES THAT PERFORM MULTIPLEXING FUNCTIONS - A method includes establishing an ad-hoc network between a borrower and at least two lenders of bandwidth and establishing one lender of the at least two lenders as a multiplexer to manage data flow over the ad-hoc network between the borrower and lenders of the at least two lenders of bandwidth. The method may include providing a computer infrastructure to perform the steps of the invention. A system is also provided which includes a server having a database containing data associated with one or more lenders and a borrower in an ad-hoc network and at least one hardware and/or software component. The system may further include computer usable medium having readable program code embodied in the medium to perform processes of the invention. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120320789 | Methods, Systems, and Products for Network Topology - Methods, systems, and products simulate a topology of a residential home network. The residential home network has a residential gateway and one or more devices communicating with the residential gateway. Each device is queried by the residential gateway for configuration and performance data. A simulated view of a topology of the residential home network is then generated. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320790 | SYSTEMATIC NEIGHBOR DETECTION IN SHARED MEDIA COMPUTER NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a particular node in a shared media computer network may determine a set of network parameters for the network, and a timing of super-frames in the network, each super-frame having one or more frames, each frame divided into a plurality of timeslots. In addition, the particular node computes a discovery scheduling function using its own identification to determine in which particular timeslot of the frames to transmit a network discovery packet. Accordingly, the particular node may transmit the network discovery packet in the particular timeslot of the frames. In an additional or alternative embodiment, the particular node may receive a network discovery request from a requesting node. In response, the particular node determines whether it is free to reply to the network discovery request based on parameters in the network discovery request, and if free to reply, may transmit a network discovery packet to the requesting node. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320791 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE ASSISTANCE INFORMATION FOR RECONFIGURATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to provide assistance information for reconfiguration in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the method comprises providing, from a UE (user equipment), information to an eNB (evolved Node B) to indicate whether there is buffered data or no buffered data for a radio bearer, a logical channel, or a service. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320792 | Method For Activating A Network Component Of A Vehicle Network System - A method and system for activating at least one temporarily inactive network component of a network system for a vehicle, in particular a motor vehicle. A central network device of the network system is connected via signals to the network components by a path inside the network system, the path extending at least partially across a network segment of the network system. The network segment connects via signals the network component and a first activation device associated therewith to a switch device arranged in the path and to a second activation device associated therewith in an unbranched manner. The central network device responds to the first activation device by the switch device by sending a network function control signal. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320793 | Method For Activating A Network Component Of A Motor Vehicle Network System - A method and system for activating at least one temporarily inactive network component of a network system for a vehicle central network device of the network system is connected via signals to the network component by a path inside the network system extending at least partially across a network segment of the network system. The network segment connecting, via signals, the network component and a first activation device associated therewith to a switch device arranged in the path and to a second activation device associated therewith in an unbranched manner. The central network device responds to the first activation device by of the switch device by sending a network function control signal. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320794 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PACKET BASED TIMING OFFSET DETERMINATION USING TIMING ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION - Systems and methods for performing timing offset and or fractional frequency offset for the purpose of time and/or frequency synchronization are provided. Timing packets are exchanged between a master device and a slave device. In addition, timing adjustment information is received by the slave device. The slave device uses the timing adjustment information in conjunction with the transmit and receive times for the timing packets to estimate at timing offset and/or fractional frequency offset. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320795 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A NETWORK TOPOLOGY DURING NETWORK PROVISIONING - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a provisioning instruction including a device identifier from an external management entity, receiving the device identifier from a network device, associating the provisioning instruction the network device, and sending a portion of the provisioning instruction to the network device. The device identifier being associated with a virtual resource. The associating is based on the device identifier of the virtual resource and a device identifier of a network device. The portion of the provisioning instruction is sent to the network device based on the associating. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320796 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADVERTISING BORDER CONNECTION INFORMATION OF AUTONOMOUS SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system are disclosed. Moreover, the method includes: establishing and maintaining, by a border node of the autonomous system, the border connection information of the autonomous system; flooding the border connection information within the autonomous system; and receiving, by nodes of the autonomous system, the border connection information. The method and the apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system of embodiments of the present invention may adapt to dynamic change of network topology, and dynamically advertise the border connection information of the autonomous system within the system in time, so as to optimize networks and improve quality of service of the networks. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320797 | Method and Apparatus for Data Communication Between a Base Station and a Transponder - In certain embodiments, a transponder comprises a transceiver configured to receive a forward link having a forward-link header comprising at least one symbol for configuring a setting of the transponder. The transponder may be configured to transmit a return link having a return-link header comprising information based on one or more characteristics of the transponder, and to receive a modified subsequent symbol of the forward-link header. The modified subsequent symbol of the forward link header generated by analyzing the return-link header to determine adjusted information for configuring the setting of the transponder and modifying the subsequent symbol of the forward-link header in accordance with the adjusted information for configuring the setting of the transponder. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320798 | NODE AND RING INFORMATION TRANSMITTING METHOD - At a node, a first receiver receives ring information from a first adjacent node. A second receiver receives ring information from a second adjacent node. A first transmitter transmits ring information obtained by adding first local ring information attached between the node and the second adjacent node to the ring information received by the first receiver, to the second adjacent node. A second transmitter transmits ring information obtained by adding second local ring information attached between the node and the first adjacent node to the ring information received by the second receiver, to the first adjacent node. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320799 | NODE DEVICE COOPERATING WITH SWITCH WHICH IMPLEMENTS ZONES IN A FIBRE CHANNEL SYSTEM - In a system comprising a first fabric and a plurality of devices coupled to the fabric by Fibre Channel connections, the devices are logically grouped to form configurations and zones. A configuration includes at least one zone, and each zone includes at least one device as a member of the zone. Communications between the devices is restricted according to the configuration currently in effect. For example, one device may be permitted to communicate with another device only if they are members of a common zone. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120327810 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING INTER-FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATIONS DOWNWARDS - A method for sending inter-frequency measurement configurations is disclosed, including: an eNB performing a swap action on a measurement configuration copy formed according to a measurement configuration to obtain a first measurement configuration; the eNB generating a second measurement configuration according to its own configuration and UE capability, and comparing the second measurement configuration with the first one; if the first and second measurement configuration are the same, the measurement configurations being not filled in the controlling message; if the first measurement configuration is a part of the second measurement configuration, in the controlling message, the extra measurement configuration being put in an adding list at the destination side; if they are different, in the controlling message, the first measurement configuration being put in a deleting list, the second one being put in the adding list; and the eNB sending a RRC connection reconfiguring message to the UE. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20130003600 | Configuration of Interfaces Communicatively Coupled to Link-Local Zones in a Network - Some example embodiments include a method for configuring of a node on a network. The method includes configuring an interface of the node on the network. The configuring includes performing duplicate address detection for an address to be assigned to the interface as part of the configuring. The duplicate address detection comprises transmitting, out from the interface onto the network, an address detection message having a destination address that is the same as the address to be assigned to the interface. The configuring also includes responsive to receiving the address detection message on a different interface of the node, determining that the interface and the different interface are on a same link of the network and assigning the interface to be in a same link-local zone as the different interface. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130003601 | EXTERNAL LOOP DETECTION FOR AN ETHERNET FABRIC SWITCH - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a local identifier associated with the switch, a receiving interface, a loop detection mechanism, and an interface control mechanism. The receiving interface identifies a loop-detection frame which includes an identifier associated with originating switch of the frame. The loop detection mechanism detects a loop based on a match of the identifier associated with the originating switch and the local identifier. The interface control mechanism is coupled to the loop detection mechanism and precludes, in response to detecting a loop, the receiving interface from forwarding frames corresponding to the loop. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130003602 | Method and system for implementing self-discovery of network element - A method and a system for implementing self-discovery of network element. The method includes that: layout data (containing identifier information and basic information) of a newly-established network element is imported into a network manager of the newly-established network element; after being powered on, the newly-established network element sends its identifier information to one or more adjacent network elements to request to find its own basic information; and the adjacent network element requests the network manager of the newly-established network element to find the basic information according to the identifier information, and returns the basic information found by the network manager of the newly-established network element and the identifier information of the newly-established network element to the newly-established network element. The disclosure avoids problems of complicated manual configuration and vulnerable, highly risky, and elaborated way of configuration with DHCP in implementation of self-discovery of network element in the related art. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130010636 | THREE DIMENSIONAL FAT TREE NETWORKS - In a first embodiment of the present invention, a non-blocking switch fabric is provided comprising: a first set of intra-domain switches; a second set of intra-domain switches; a set of inter-domain switches located centrally between the first set of intra-domain switches and the second set of intra-domain switches, wherein each of the ports of each of the inter-domain switches is connected to an intra-domain switch from the first or second set of intra-domain switches. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010637 | Network Modeling, Service Provisioning, and Service Management - Methods and devices for network modeling, service provisioning, and service management are disclosed. A network modeling method includes accessing information describing a set of nodes of a communications network, physical links physically connecting the nodes, and logical links logically connecting the nodes using the physical links. The method further includes, based on the information, creating a different connection group object for each of the physical links and for each of the logical links. Each connection group object includes a connection representing the link, a first endpoint representing a first node of the set connected to the link; and a second endpoint representing a second node of the set connected to the link. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010638 | Merging a Stand-Alone Switch to a Fibre Channel Network - A Fibre Channel (FC) switch and related methods are provided for merging the FC switch with an existing FC network. During a merge process of a stand-alone switch with an FC network, a first Exchange Fabric Parameters (EFP) frame is sent from the stand-alone switch to an FC switch in the existing FC network. The first EFP frame has an empty domain identifier (ID) list. The stand-alone switch receives a second EFP frame from the FC switch. The second EFP frame contains a domain ID list of domain IDs already in use in the FC network. The stand-alone switch compares the domain ID list in the second EFP frame with a stored list of one or more domain IDs associated with the stand-alone switch to determine if there is a domain ID overlap or conflict. If no conflict is detected, the stand-alone switch merges with the existing network without initiating a Build Fabric phase or a Principal Switch Selection phase that could cause disruption of traffic in the network. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010639 | SWITCH FABRIC MANAGEMENT - Techniques are disclosed for managing a switch fabric. In one embodiment, a server system is provided that includes a midplane, one or more server cards, switch modules and a management controller. The midplane may include a fabric interconnect for a switch fabric. The one or more server cards and the switch modules may be operatively connected to the midplane. The switch modules may be configured to switch network traffic for the one or more server cards. The management controller may be configured to manage the switch modules via the fabric interconnect. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010640 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT COMPUTER - Provided is a network management system for managing a plurality of packet relay devices, the network management system comprising: the plurality of packet relay devices constituting networks; and a display device for displaying configurations of the networks, in a case where it is determined that a virtual packet relay device identifier of the virtual packet relay device that is assigned a second-network identifier associated with the extracted second-network identifier is registered in a first-network configuration table, a first-work identifying module is configured to associate a first-network identifier that is associated with the virtual packet relay device identifier with the obtained configuration information, and register the association between the first-network identifier and the obtained configuration information in the first-network configuration table. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010641 | Carrier Activation Employing RRC messages - A base station transmits an RRC reconfiguration message to an RRC-connected wireless device to configure secondary carrier(s). The RRC reconfiguration message is configured to cause the RRC-connected wireless device to control the activation of at least one secondary carrier. The base station transmits data packets to the RRC-connected wireless device on a data channel on at least one of the secondary carriers. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010642 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATED DISCOVERY OF CUSTOMER-EDGE DEVICES AND INTERFACE CONNECTIONS IN A VIRTUAL-PRIVATE-NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - One embodiment of the present invention is directed to a customer-edge-discovery subsystem, within a VPN-provider system interconnected with a public communications network, that automatically generates a data representation of a VPN-provider view of the network by: initializing the data representation; accessing tools and protocols available within the VPN-provider system to discover elements, connections, interfaces, VPNs, and other components and characteristics of the public communications network and include representations of the discovered elements, connections, interfaces, VPNs, and other components and characteristics of the public communications network in the data representation; and finding customer-edge devices for each provider-edge device to include in the data representation using broadcast domains or address-resolution-protocol caches. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130016625 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND METHOD FOR REMOTE SEISMIC RECORDING - A method of collecting data from wireless sensor units arranged in a mesh network is disclosed, each wireless sensor unit having one or more sensors arranged on or below the ground surface for remote seismic recording, the method comprising: clustering the wireless sensor units into two or more sub mesh clusters, each sub mesh cluster having an aggregator assigned to the sub mesh cluster; acquiring data with the wireless sensor units by sensing one or more physical parameters; within each sub mesh cluster, each of the wireless sensor units transmitting the acquired data directly or indirectly to the respective aggregator; each aggregator aggregating at least a portion of the acquired data received from the wireless sensor units within the respective sub mesh cluster into aggregated data; and each aggregator transmitting the aggregated data to a base node. A wireless mesh network for remote seismic recording is also disclosed, | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130016626 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GROWING NEXT GENERATION NETWORK USING MODULAR DESIGN - A method and system for growing a next generation network (NGN) using a modular design are disclosed. For example, the method defines a growth core module to support a specific number of subscribers, wherein the growth core module is assigned a module identifier (ID). The method upgrades existing network entities that will be impacted by an installation of the growth core module in the existing IMS network, and installs the growth core module in the IMS network. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130016627 | NETWORK RELAY NODE DEVICE, NETWORK RELAY METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A network relay node device for relaying communication between a first network and a second network having a protocol different from a protocol of the first network through a switch, the network relay node device includes an identical segment information generation control unit that generates identical segment information for identification of another relay node device belonging to a same segment as a local device in the second network and a loop suppression control unit that suppresses a loop of a communication including the switch by broadcasting a received broadcast frame only to a connection port of the first network if the identical segment information is detected in identification source node information acquired from a header of the broadcast frame when the broadcast frame is received from a connection port of the first network. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130021942 | Granular Control of Multicast Delivery Services for Layer-2 Interconnect Solutions - In order to achieve optimized delivery of multicast traffic between L2 OTV sites across an L3 multicast service provider core infrastructure, embodiments of the present disclosure describe building different provider multicast data trees rooted at a source site for individual per-vlan (*,G)/(S,G) streams. Building such provider trees may require individual sites to discover multicast sources local to their network and subsequently announce to all receiver sites the multicast data trees (DS, DG) to be used to deliver such multicast traffic. The present disclosure describes the coordination between OTV edge devices for the (S,G) to (DS, DG) mapping originated by the source OTV edge device where the multicast traffic is originated. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130021943 | METHODS AND NETWORK ELEMENTS OPERABLE TO SPECIFY AND DETERMINE COMPLETE SETS OF LINK STATE MESSAGES FOR LINK STATE ROUTING PROTOCOLS - A method, performed by a transmitter network element utilizing a link state routing protocol which has a maximum link state message size. The method is for providing information to avoid a disruption in data forwarding that would result from a receiver network element performing preferred route computations based on an incomplete set of link state messages. The method includes generating a complete set of link state messages having information indicating that the link state messages are the complete set of the link state messages. The complete set of the link state messages are collectively coherent with a link state of the transmitter network element. The method also includes transmitting the complete set of the link state messages, and the information indicating that the link state messages are the complete set of the link state messages, to a network. Also disclosed are transmitter network elements, receiver network elements, and methods thereof. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130021944 | Method to Pass Virtual Local Area Network Information in Virtual Station Interface Discovery and Configuration Protocol - An apparatus comprising an edge virtual bridging (EVB) bridge, and an EVB station coupled to the EVB bridge, wherein the EVB station is configured to send to the EVB bridge a virtual station interface (VSI) discovery and configuration protocol (VDP) request comprising a filter information (info) field without specifying a virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier (ID), and wherein the EVB bridge is configured to send a VLAN ID (VID) to the EVB station in a second filter info field in a VDP response to the VDP request. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130021945 | NODE APPARATUS AND ALTERNATIVE PATH SEARCH METHOD - Anode apparatus includes: a receiver configured to receive data from a first node apparatus adjacent to the node apparatus, a transmission source of the data being a second node apparatus; a data generator configured to generate transmission data in which the second node apparatus is specified as a final destination; a transmitter configured to transmit the transmission data to an adjacent node apparatus of the node apparatus other than the first node apparatus; and a decision unit configured to decide that an alternative path for transmitting data via an adjacent node apparatus of the node apparatus other than the first node apparatus does not exist between the node apparatus and the second node apparatus, when the node apparatus receives the transmission data transmitted by the transmitter to all adjacent node apparatuses of the node apparatus other than the first node apparatus. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130021946 | METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT DEVICE, AND NETWORK SYSTEM FOR ASSOCIATING A TERMINAL DEVICE WITH A NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, network element device, and network system for associating a terminal device with a network. The method for associating a terminal device with a network includes: receiving an Association Request message sent by a terminal device, where the Association Request message includes information of a request for associating the terminal device with a sensor network and an IP identifier; processing, according to the Association Request message, the request for associating the terminal device with a sensor network; when it is determined, according to the IP identifier, that the terminal device requests association with an IP network, sending an IP network Association Request message to an Edge Router; receiving a result of processing, by the Edge Router, the request for associating the terminal device with the IP network; sending an Association Respond message to the terminal device. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130021947 | Specifying Priority on a Virtual Station Interface Discovery and Configuration Protocol Response - An apparatus comprising an Edge Virtual Bridging (EVB) bridge coupled with an EVB station wherein the EVB bridge is configured to communicate to the EVB station a Filter Information (Info) field of a virtual station interface (VSI) discovery and configuration protocol (VDP) Associate Response message, and wherein the Filter Info field specifies a default Priority Code Point (PCP) value associated with at least one or all of a plurality of VID values carried by that VDP TLV Response. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130021948 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A MOBILE NETWORK DURING A TRANSITIONAL CONFIGURATION MODE - The present invention relates to a method for communicating between a primary station and at least one secondary station, comprising (a) the secondary station being configured to search a first configuration of search spaces, said search spaces comprising a number of resource sets, where at least one resource set might be used to transmit a message to the secondary station, (b) configuring the secondary station by means of a configuration message to search a second configuration of search spaces, (c) the secondary station in response of the reception of the configuration message entering into a transitional configuration mode, wherein the secondary station searches partly the first configuration of search spaces and the second configuration of search spaces. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130028132 | METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - An electronic device and method, including: a communication module, a display, and a controller configured to: obtain information about data communication carried out in a network through the communication module from the network providing multimedia services; and display a plurality of multimedia devices connected to the network and connectivity relationship among the multimedia devices according to the data communication through the display, the connectivity relationship being related to at least one of the multimedia devices communicating multimedia data with at least one other multimedia device. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028133 | Managing Multiple Virtual Network Memberships - To facilitate management and configuration of VLAN memberships associated with applications or network protocols, a network device receives a packet from a wireless station which is a member of a virtual local area network (VLAN). The network device determines whether the packet is associated with a predefined application or network protocol. If so, the network device delivers the received packet to a dedicated VLAN which is accessible only to network devices associated with the predefined application or network protocol, regardless of destination address specified within the packet. If not, the network device delivers the received packet to an address or a group of addresses specified in a header of the received packet. In some embodiments, the VLAN is divided from a VLAN pool, and the dedicated VLAN corresponds to an address space that is outside the address space of the VLAN pool. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028134 | System and Method for Signaling Configuration of Sounding Reference Signals - The present invention discloses a method for a signaling configuration of a sounding reference signal. The method includes: a base station notifying a user equipment to aperiodically send the sounding reference signal, and sending configuration information of aperiodically sending the sounding reference signal (SRS) down to the user equipment. The present invention also discloses a base station for a signaling configuration of a sounding reference signal and a user equipment for a signaling configuration of a sounding reference signal. The present invention can realize that the user equipment aperiodically sends the SRS, which improves the utilization ratio of SRS resources and increases the flexibility of resource scheduling. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028135 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE CONTROL OF INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES - Systems, apparatus and methods are provided for interconnection of one or more Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) devices. The system preferably comprises a virtualized or virtual server which in turn comprises a virtual machine having an FCoE device interconnection apparatus controller, a virtual switch, the virtual switch being coupled to the FCoE device interconnection apparatus controller, and a network interface. The network interface is coupled to the virtual switch, which in turn couples to an Ethernet fabric. A first Ethernet link couples the network interface to the Ethernet fabric. One or more Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) devices are coupled to the Ethernet fabric via Ethernet links. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028136 | NETWORK EDGE SWITCH CONFIGURATION BASED ON CONNECTION PROFILE - Connection profiles are created and stored. The connection profiles are for connections for sources to connect to a network. The connection profiles identify network attributes for the connections and each connection profile includes a status of available or subscribed. A connection profile is assigned to a requested connection for a source. The network attributes for the assigned connection are sent to an edge switch for the source to configure the edge switch to accept traffic for the source. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028137 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATION BASED CONFIGURATION OF A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WAP) AND AN ACCESS DEVICE IN A HYBRID WIRED/WIRELESS NETWORK - Aspects of the invention provide a method and system for location based configuration of a wireless access point and an access device in a hybrid wired/wireless network. A method for providing location based configuration in a hybrid wired/wireless network may include identifying a location of a network device within the hybrid wired/wireless network. Configuration information corresponding to the determined location of the network device may be determined. The determined configuration information may be communicated to the networking device in order to facilitate location based configuration of the network device. The network device may include, but is not limited to, an access device, an access point and a switching device. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028138 | CONFIGURATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION-ADVANCED SYSTEM - A configuration method for a sounding reference signal in a Long Term Evolution Advanced (LTE-A) system is disclosed in the present invention. The method includes: an eNB triggering one or multiple User Equipment (UE) to transmit an aperiodic Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) on one or multiple uplink subframes through a downlink control signaling. An eNB in an LTE-A system is also disclosed in the present invention. The eNB includes: a transmission module, configured to: trigger one or multiple UE to transmit an aperiodic SRS on one or multiple uplink subframes through a downlink control signaling, so as to make the UE use non-periodic SRS resources to transmit the non-periodic SRS on the uplink subframes according to the triggering of the eNB after receiving the downlink control signaling sent by the eNB. User equipment in an LTE-A system is also disclosed. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028139 | ESTABLISHING CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN A RELAY NODE AND A CONFIGURATION ENTITY - A method of establishing connectivity between a relay node and an OAM entity in a communications network, the method comprising the steps of: establishing a connection between the relay node and a user plane of the communications network; addressing communications to the OAM entity defined as residing in an OAM subnet via a gateway in the user plane; and routing the communications from the user plane to the OAM subnet. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130034015 | AUTOMATED NETWORK CONFIGURATION IN A DYNAMIC VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT - In a computer-implemented method, a port profile is associated with a virtual machine that requires a VLAN connection to an external network through an edge port. The port profile includes a VLAN identification associated with the VLAN connection and an edge port identification associated with the edge port. The method further comprises migrating the virtual machine from a first physical server to a second physical server, wherein both the first and second physical servers are in communication with a network switch comprising the edge port. After migrating the virtual machine to the second physical server, the virtual machine is automatically provided with a VLAN connection to the external network in accordance with the port profile associated with the virtual machine. Similarly, a port profile may be associated with a virtual machine as it is created and deployed to a server, wherein the VLAN connection is configured according to the associated port profile. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130034016 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION IN VEHICULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system may receive, at an intermediate vehicle, a route request packet from a source vehicle. The system and method may enter a routing entry comprising a path from intermediate vehicle to the source vehicle and a quality metric value in a routing table. The method and system may receive, at a destination vehicle, the route request packet broadcast from one or more intermediate vehicles. The method and system may transmit, along a path from the destination vehicle to source vehicle, a route reply message. The method and system may transfer data from the source vehicle to the destination vehicle along the path. The method and system may monitor one or more quality metric values associated with the data transferred to the destination vehicle along the path. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130034017 | TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING CHANNEL ESTIMATION AND TRACKING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique for performing channel tracking and/or channel estimation in a wireless communication device includes receiving a reference signal and one or more non-error propagation physical channel signals. In general, the one or more non-error propagation physical channel signals must be correctly decoded before a data channel can be decoded. Channel tracking and/or channel estimation are/is then performed based on the reference signal and at least one of the one or more non-error propagation physical channel signals. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130034018 | METHOD, BASE STATION, TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR UPDATING COMPONENT CARRIER - A method, base station, terminal and communication system for updating component carriers are provided. Wherein, status information of the terminal, base station and/or component carrier is acquired; whether the status information accords with the predetermined condition is determined; an old component carrier is replaced by a new component carrier, or a new component carrier is added in the even that the predetermined condition is met. With the embodiments of the present invention, the component carrier which the terminal would use is updated more effectively. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130034019 | UPDATING OF NETWORK SELECTION INFORMATION - A mechanism for updating network selection information (such as ANDSF information) as stored at a user device is described. An ANDSF server requests network selection policy signatures from a user device and compares those signatures with signatures calculated at the server. The ANDSF server instructs the user device to delete any policy whose signature is not found at the ANDSF server and instructs the user device to add any policy whose signature is found at the ANDSF server, but is not stored at the user device. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130039213 | SIMULTANEOUS SETUP OF A WIRELESS NETWORK ADAPTER AND A NETWORK HOST DEVICE - A system and method for causing concurrent setup of a wireless network adapter and a network host device. The method involves receiving a request to install either a wireless network adapter or a network host device. If the request is to install the wireless network adapter, then the method further involves detecting that the network host device is not yet installed, and prompting a user to connect to the network host device. Alternatively, if the request is to install the network host device, then the method further involves detecting that the wireless network adapter is not yet installed, and prompting the user to connect to the wireless network adapter. The method also involves causing a connection to be established between the wireless network adapter and the network host device. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130039214 | Implementing OSPF in Split-Architecture Networks - A method is implemented in a network element that functions as one of a plurality of controllers for one of a plurality of areas of a split architecture network. The controller provides a control plane for the area of the split architecture network where the controller is remote from a plurality of switches providing a data plane for the area of split architecture network. The controller facilitates optimized routing across the plurality of areas of the split architecture network by providing limited intra-area link cost data to other controllers of other areas of the split architecture network and to traditional routers of a network including the split architecture network. The limited intra-area link cost data provides costs of each possible shortest path traversal of the area of the controller without providing all internal link cost data. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130039215 | System and Method for Direct Multi-User Transmission - A method for transmitting to a plurality of responder stations includes configuring a first responder station for direct link communications, the first responder station being configured with a first group identifier and a first position. The method also includes configuring a second responder station for direct link communications, the second responder station being configured with a second group identifier and a second position. The method further includes transmitting to both the first responder station and the second responder station in a first single transmission, the first single transmission including first information for the first responder station and second information for the second responder station, where the first information is labeled with the first group identifier and located in the first position, and the second information is labeled with the second group identifier and located in the second position. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130039216 | SCALABLE WLAN GATEWAY - A technique for combining transmission bandwidths of several mobile stations (MS | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130039217 | DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION TECHNIQUES - Embodiments provide techniques for the transmission of broadcasts. For instance, an apparatus may include a sequence selection module, and multiple radiating elements. The sequence selection module selects sequences of directional transmission patterns, where each selected sequence corresponds to a time period. The multiple radiating elements wirelessly transmit a broadcast at the time periods in accordance with the selected sequences. The broadcast may include, for example, beacons, and/or a data broadcast, and/or a control broadcast and/or a management broadcast. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130044629 | VIRTUAL NETWORK OVERLAYS AND METHODS OF FORMING THEREOF - Systems are provided for overlaying a virtual network on a physical network in a data center environment. An overlay system is arranged in an overlay virtual network to include an overlay agent and an overlay helper. The overlay agent is implemented in an access switch. The overlay helper is implemented in an end station that is in communication with the access switch. Overlay parameters in compliance with an in-band protocol are transmitted between the overlay agent and the overlay helper. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044630 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK IDENTIFICATION CODE ASSIGNMENT - A method and apparatus for registering a remote network device with a network control device. In one embodiment, the method comprises determining a network identification code stored within the remote network device and determining if the network identification code comprises a default network identification code. If the network identification code comprises a default network identification code, transmitting a message indicative of a request to join an existing network and determining whether a first response to the transmitted message was received. If a first response to the transmitted message was received, determining a second network identification code from the first response, and assigning the second network identification code to the remote network device. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044631 | METHODS OF FORMING VIRTUAL NETWORK OVERLAYS - Methods are provided for overlaying a virtual network on a physical network in a data center environment. An overlay system is arranged in an overlay virtual network to include an overlay agent and an overlay helper. The overlay agent is implemented in an access switch. The overlay helper is implemented in an end station that is in communication with the access switch. Overlay parameters in compliance with an in-band protocol are transmitted between the overlay agent and the overlay helper. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044632 | PLC NETWORK EXTENSION SYSTEM - Provided is a PLC network extension system, the system including a basic base generating a control data for controlling a plurality of extension bases, generating a network frame using the control data, and transmitting the network frame to one extension base in the plurality of extension bases via a network cable, and the plurality of extension bases extracting a control data from the received network frame to control a pre-installed module based on the control data. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044633 | SECURE PROCEDURE FOR ACCESSING A NETWORK AND NETWORK THUS PROTECTED - The description is of a procedure that allows temporary secure access to a communication network. The network has a number of network connection ports. Certain of these ports are termed confidential, that is, their access is controlled by the network operator, in contrast to the other connection ports access to which is free. The access procedure claims is based on the provision of two distinct services accessible via tunnels that are, advantageously, digital. The first service is accessible only from the confidential connection ports and only allows a connection credit to be obtained The second service is accessible from all connection ports, only by means of the connection credit issued by the first service. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044634 | DYNAMICALLY RECONFIGURABLE HYBRID CIRCUIT-SWITCHED AND PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A dynamically reconfigurable network architecture includes a plurality of switching modules arranged in an ordered, multi-level, switched-tree configuration. A network is formed by selecting one switching module as the root and assigning it and all directly or indirectly subsidiary modules to the network. The operating mode of each switching module can be dynamically selected as either circuit-switched or packet-switched. The modules can be grouped into a single network or into a plurality of separate networks operating in parallel, including both circuit-switched and packet-switched networks. When a network is no longer needed, its operation can be halted and its resources released for reassignment to other networks. In embodiments, a selector controlled by allocation registers selects either a circuit-switching sequencer or a packet connection arbitration circuit to control the switching circuits. Switching modules can include crossbar switches. Circuit-switched connections can use TDM to share allocated physical resources. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044635 | Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device receives a first-type packet. If the first-type packet does not include first predetermined information, the device may store first specific information. In some examples, if the first-type packet includes the first predetermined information, the device does not store the first specific information. The device receives a second-type packet after receiving the first-type packet. If the first specific information is stored and the second-type packet is received, the device may send a third-type packet when the target-device identifying information is the same as the first-external-device identifying information. The third-type packet might not be sent where the target-device identifying information is different from the first-external-device identifying information. If the first specific information is not stored and the second-type packet is received, the device may send the third-type packet. When sending the third-type packet, the device may also send a wireless profile. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044636 | DISTRIBUTED LOGICAL L3 ROUTING - A novel method for configuring first and second managed forwarding elements to perform logical L2 switching and L3 routing is described. The method generates a first set of flow entries for configuring the first managed forwarding element to perform logical L2 ingress processing and L3 routing processing. The method generates a second set of flow entries for configuring the second managed forwarding element to performing logical L2 egress processing. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044637 | UPDATING NODE PRESENCE BASED ON COMMUNICATION PATHWAY - A data communications network, for which presence information is maintained for wireless data communication devices forming nodes of the network, includes: a presence server; and a plurality of nodes formed by the wireless data communication devices, each of the devices configured to send periodic check-in messages to the presence server. The presence server is configured to send an acknowledgment in response to a check-in message. Each of the wireless data communication devices is configured to reset a timer associated with the sending of the check-in messages by it upon (i) communicating, as an intermediate node, a check-in message originating at another node, and (ii) communicating, as an intermediate node, a corresponding acknowledgment originating at the presence server. The presence server is configured to update presence information of wireless data communication device from which a check-in message originates and each intermediate node. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044638 | MOBILE TERMINAL, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REALIZING ACCESS POINT NAME SETTING - A system for implementing an access point name setting is disclosed, including: a mobile terminal and an access point name server, wherein, the mobile terminal is configured to: when access point name information is required to be set, send an access point name inquiry request to the access point name server; the access point name server is configured to: after receiving the access point name inquiry request of the mobile terminal, carry the access point name information corresponding to the mobile terminal in an access point name inquiry response to return to the mobile terminal. A mobile terminal and method for implementing the access point name setting are also disclosed. The mobile terminal is enabled to perform automatic setting for an APN conveniently, bringing great convenience to a mobile terminal user. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044639 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP COMMUNICATION RELATIONSHIP - An apparatus and a method for setting up a communication relationship in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes determining, by a relay node, whether a new neighboring cell is found, obtaining information of the new neighboring cell, and reporting the same to a Donor evolved Node B (DeNB) that it belongs to, finding, by the DeNB, a network node that the new neighboring cell belongs to, determining whether an X2 interface is set up between the DeNB and the network node that the new neighboring cell belongs to, and if it is determined that the X2 interface is not set up with the network node, setting up the X2 interface with the network node that the new neighboring cell belongs to. It is realized that the relay node can communicate with the network node that the new neighboring node belongs to through the DeNB. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130051277 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DISCOVERY - A method and apparatus for providing allocating efficient resource allocation for device-to-device (D2D) communications. Various bandwidth allocations are provided which provide for D2D discovery information to be included on a time slot, such as an uplink pilot time slot (UpPTS). By accommodating D2D discovery information on un-used available bandwidth, the base station may efficiently configure and assign radio resources for D2D and cluster communication purposes in its coverage area. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130051278 | CONFIGURING A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - Systems and methods for developing a configuration plan for communication transport links of a distributed antenna system are provided. The distributed antenna system includes a unit communicating with remote antenna units over the communication transport links. The unit receives signals from base stations. Characteristics of each of the signals are determined. The characteristics include, for each signal, a frequency occupancy, a digital bandwidth, and a coverage zone to which to provide the signal. The frequency occupancy includes the minimum frequency component and the maximum frequency component of the signal. The digital bandwidth is a bandwidth for communicating the signal via the communication transport links. A hardware capability of the distributed antenna system, such as a respective available bandwidth for each communication transport link, is also determined. The configuration plan for transporting the digital representations of the signals is determined based on the hardware capability and the characteristics of the signals. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130051279 | MANAGEMENT DEVICE FOR SERVING NETWORK OR DEVICE AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a method of managing resources to allow networks or devices coexist. To this end, a neighbor discovering method of an apparatus including a coexistence manager (CM) includes: receiving, by the CM, a request from a television band device (TVBD) network or device served by the CM; obtaining, by the CM, neighbor information of the TVBD network or device in response to the request; and transmitting, by the CM, the obtained neighbor information to the TVBD network or device, wherein the neighbor information includes an identifier of a neighbor TVBD network or device interfering the TVBD network or device. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130058250 | HIERARCHICAL MANAGED SWITCH ARCHITECTURE - Some embodiments provide a method for managing several managed switching elements in a network. The method determines configurations for the several managed switching elements to implement a first logical data path set. Based on the determined configurations, the method configures a first set of the several managed switching elements to implement the first logical data path set. The method configures a second set of the several managed switching elements to implement a second logical data path set. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058251 | MANAGING A NETWORK BY CONTROLLING EDGE SWITCHING ELEMENTS; USING STANDARD INTERIOR SWITCHES - Some embodiments provide a network system that includes several non-edge switching elements that are each for forwarding network data to other non-edge switching elements. The network system includes several edge switching elements that are each for (1) coupling to a set of network hosts and (2) forwarding network data to the non-edge switching elements and to the set of network hosts. Each of the non-edge switching elements of the several non-edge switching elements is further for forwarding network data to the several edge switching elements. The network system includes a set of network controllers for (1) receiving a definition of a logical switching element that couples to the sets of network hosts and (2) managing the several edge switching elements by configuring the several edge switching elements to forward network data between the sets of network hosts based on the definition of the logical switching element. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058252 | MESH ARCHITECTURES FOR MANAGED SWITCHING ELEMENTS - Some embodiments provide a network architecture that includes several lower level managed switching elements for forwarding network data to several of network hosts. The network architecture includes a set of higher level managed switching elements. The several lower level managed switching elements and the set of higher level managed switching elements implement several logical datapath sets. Communication channels are established among the several lower level managed switching elements and the set of higher level managed switching elements based on a mesh topology. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058253 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND INTERNETWORKING UNIT - A network management system which can easily rebuild the system even when a switch in the configuration of cars occurs. A monitor apparatus including monitor cameras ( | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058254 | System and Method to Enable Large MTUs in Data Center Ethernet Networks - A method of configuring a port on a network device includes receiving a frame of information, determining that the frame includes maximum transmission unit (MTU) information, and configuring a prioritized receive queue on the port with an MTU size based on the MTU information. The MTU size is different than another MTU size of another prioritized receive queue on the port. A network interface includes a port, a de-multiplexer coupled to an output or the port, and prioritized receive queues that each have an MTTU size. A first prioritized receive queue has an MTU size different than a second prioritized receive queue. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130064132 | IDENTIFYING A WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE ACROSS FACTORY RESETS - Techniques are presented for discovering a previously configured network device. In one embodiment, a basic service set identification (BSSID) that uniquely identifies a network device (i.e., a router) is saved when the network device or a client device is configured. The stored BSSID indicates that the network device has previously been configured. After the network device is reset—i.e., one or more user-configurable settings return to their default settings—a client device may execute a setup application to reconfigure the network device. The setup application may compare the BSSID being broadcasted by the network device with the BSSID stored in the memory. If the BSSIDs match, the setup application may automatically select the network device without user input. Because the network device was previously configured, the setup application assumes that the user is attempting to reconfigure the network device after it has been reset. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064133 | Unified Policy Management for Extensible Virtual Switches - Systems, methods, and computer storage media are described herein that configure a switch extension associated with a virtual switch with one or more settings. In response to the configuring, the systems, methods, and computer storage media persist the one or more settings and apply the persisted one or more settings to a target switch extension of a target virtual switch. The systems, methods, and computer storage media receive the settings through a management interface. Also, the systems, methods, and computer storage media receive requests for information associated with the switch extension and provide the switch extension information in response. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064134 | Rapid deployment devices in wireless self-organizing networks and methods for same - The present invention provides rapid deployment devices in wireless self-organizing networks. The device in accordance with the present invention may include a control unit having a rapid deployment information segment module and a wireless communication unit electrically coupled to the control unit. The control unit of the present invention may broadcast a neighbor beacon to at least one neighbor. In accordance with the present invention, the rapid deployment information segment module may expand the neighbor beacon to include a rapid deployment information segment so as to transmit rapid deployment information. In accordance with the present invention, the rapid deployment information may include a cost sequence to a reference node. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064135 | DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, DISTRIBUTION METHOD, AND MEMORY MEDIUM THEREOF - The control node, on the basis of the connection information between the distribution nodes and the load information of the distribution nodes, determines a distribution node of the distribution destination to which one of a plurality of distribution nodes subsequently distributes the data, and the data type which is distributed to the distribution node of the distribution destination. The control node distributes node information which specifies the distribution node of the determined distribution destination and type information which specifies the determined data type. The distribution node receives the node information and the type information distributed from the control node. The distribution node, when it receives the data distributed from the other distribution nodes, selects the data of the type specified by the type information from the received data. The distribution node transmits the data of the selected type to the distribution node specified by the node information. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064136 | SYSTEM, DEVICE AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING A PHOTOVOLTAIC-BASED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - An apparatus, system and method are provided to deliver enhanced wireless mesh networking. According to some embodiments the system is designed to enable photovoltaic-based meshed networking, which may include a networking gateway connected to a photovoltaic receptor, where the networking gateway has one or more wireless communication chips; a network device setup to be in wireless communication with multiple networking gateways, to enable a local communications network, where the network device has a Wi-Fi communication link to enable wireless communications between multiple network devices; and a communications link for connecting the network device to a non-local communications network. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064137 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A PASS THRU MODE IN A VIRTUAL CHASSIS SYSTEM - A virtual chassis system includes a plurality of network nodes connected by virtual fabric link (VFLs) that provide a connection for exchange of packets between the network nodes. A network node in the virtual chassis system is operable in a pass thru mode. In pass thru mode, the network node receives packets over a VFL and transparently forwards the packet over another VFL to another network node in the virtual chassis system. However, the network node | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130070636 | TRACKING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A collaborative method for a node includes forming a local network with at least one other node using a lower power subsystem; selecting a master node from among the local network based on a first set of criteria; and communicating with a back end server over a wireless wide area network (WWAN) using a higher power subsystem. An apparatus may include a first subsystem for communicating with a local network; and a second subsystem having an active mode and an inactive mode, the second subsystem for communicating with a wireless wide area network (WWAN) when in the active mode, the apparatus selecting the active mode or inactive mode based on a set of criteria. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070637 | OSPF NON-STOP ROUTING WITH RELIABLE FLOODING - A network element is configured for open shortest path first (OSPF) non-stop routing (NSR) with reliable flooding. An active OSPF instance determines to flood a link-state advertisement (LSA). The LSA is synchronized with a backup OSPF instance including storing the LSA with a status that indicates that flooding is pending. The active OSPF instance attempts to reliably flood the LSA to a set of adjacent network elements of the flooding scope of the LSA. If flooding of the LSA completes, the active OSPF instance causes the backup OSPF instance to alter the status of the LSA to indicate that flooding is complete. If the backup OSPF instance becomes the currently active OSPF instance prior to the flooding of the LSA completing, then the new active OSPF instance attempts to reliably flood the LSA. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070638 | Summarisation in a Multi-Domain Network - A multi-domain network comprises domains of different network technology types. A network domain comprises a plurality of network nodes connected by links and comprising border nodes which connect with other network domains. In a first domain (AS A) of a first technology type, a method comprises determining an intra-domain topology of the nodes and links of the domain by collecting values of at least one network topology parameter of the first technology type. The method determines a summarised intra-domain topology of paths between border nodes of the domain which is described using values of at least one summarised network topology parameter. Values of the summarised network topology parameter are derived from the values of the network topology parameter of the intra-domain topology of the first technology type. The summarised network topology parameter is part of a common set of network topology parameters for advertising between domains comprising apparatus of different technology types. A domain can comprise multiple layers of different technology type. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070639 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - There is provided a node detection apparatus including: a first acquisition section that acquires identification information peculiar to a communication device in accordance with a first communication protocol; a second acquisition section that acquires the identification information peculiar to the communication device in accordance with a second communication protocol; and an identification section that identifies the communication device that complies with both of the first communication protocol and the second communication protocol based on the identification information acquired by the first acquisition section and the identification information acquired by the second acquisition section. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070640 | Downstream Device Architecture and Control - Techniques are provided for controlling downstream Converged Cable Access Platform (CCAP) access points. At the CCAP access point having a network interface and a coaxial interface, control plane information is received from a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) via the network interface, where the control plane information is designed to configure the CCAP access point to enable communication over the network interface and the coaxial interface. At the CCAP access point, data plane and control plane information is received from the CMTS, and the data plane information transmitted via the coaxial interface to one or more customer termination devices. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070641 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTEGRATED WIFI/WIMAX NEIGHBOR AP DISCOVERY AND AP ADVERTISEMENT - A system and method wherein mobile nodes scan both 802.16 and 802.11 radio channels for neighbor access points. A mobile node reports both WiMax and WiFi neighbor access points to its parent access point. A parent access point advertises both WiMax and WiFi neighbor access points to child mobile nodes to facilitate faster roaming and load balancing. A parent WiMax AP can direct a mobile node to roam to a neighbor WiFi access point that has a lighter load or offers enhanced services. As an option, a location tracking protocol is used to determine the location of a mobile node and the mobile node's parent AP advertises neighbor APs that offer services in the mobile node's location. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070642 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method in which a station transmits data in a wireless LAN system, comprising the following steps: receiving, from an access point, control information containing station group configuration information, which indicates the configurations of station groups and uplink resource allocation information on the resource allocated to each station group; determining, on the basis of the control information, the station group to which the station belongs; and transmitting uplink data to the access point by contending with other stations in the determined station group. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070643 | NETWORK SELECTION SUPPORTING METHOD AND NETWORK SELECTION SUPPORTING APPARATUS - To support selection of a communication system of a network applied to an FA system of a user, a network selection supporting method according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a condition displaying step of displaying, on a condition input screen, one or a plurality of selection conditions set in advance related to the communication system of the network applied to the FA system, a condition receiving step of receiving an input of a selection condition desired by the user among the selection conditions displayed on the condition input screen, a communication system searching step of searching through a communication system database and finding a communication system matching the input selection condition, and a communication system list displaying step of displaying a search result of the communication system on the communication system list display screen as a list. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130077525 | Method And Apparatus For Neighbor Discovery - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved neighbor detection. In a first method, a node (e.g., a mobile node or a network transceiver node) transmits ( | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130077526 | Network Node for Detecting a Communication Device - There is provided a network node for detecting a communication device (stealth device) in a local network and identifying a type of the detected communication device. According to the embodiments of the present invention, the network node | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130077527 | Method and System for Dynamically Setting Up and Tearing Down Connections in Mesh Networks - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices may form and/or tear down intra-mesh connection with other WMC devices in the same mesh network. WMC devices may utilize information related to other WMC devices in the mesh network in determining formation and tearing down of intra-mesh connections. This information may comprise relative speeds, locations, and directions of movement of the WMC devices forming/tearing intra-mesh connections. Other information including data bandwidth and/or power consumption may be utilized in such determination. This information may also comprise available services advertised by WMC devices in the mesh network. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130083688 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A system for communication in a wireless backhaul environment having a wireless mesh network connected in part to the Internet, comprising a communication topology having WiMAX gateway/base stations with multi-hop capability located at each corner, and communication cells each having a relay station and mobile nodes communicating to each other using WiMAX wireless technology, wherein the communication cells are arranged to be connected to each other in a grid fabric. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083689 | OWNERSHIP REQUESTS FOR ACCESS POINTS - Techniques for ownership of an access point are described. An ownership request may be received by a master controller. Ownership of the access point may be determined by the master controller. An ownership response may indicate if a controller shall take ownership of the access point. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083690 | Network Adapter Hardware State Migration Discovery in a Stateful Environment - An approach is provided in which a discovery system receives a migration request to move a virtual machine that executes on a first system. The discovery system identifies a first network adapter corresponding to the first system, and identifies hardware state data used by the first network adapter to process data packets generated by the virtual machine. In turn, the discovery system identifies a second network adapter that is compatible with a native format of the hardware state data, and migrates the virtual machine to a second system corresponding to the identified second network adapter. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083691 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR A SELF-ORGANIZED LAYER-2 ENTERPRISE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a network node operatively coupled within a network. The network node is configured to send a first authentication message upon boot up, and receive, in response to the first authentication message, a second authentication message configured to be used to authenticate the network node. The network node is configured to send a first discovery message, and receive, based on the first discovery message, a second discovery message configured to be used by the network node to identify an address of the network node and an address of a core network node within the network. The network node is configured to set up a control-plane tunnel to the core network node based on the address of the network node and the address for the core network node and receive configuration information from the core network node through the control-plane tunnel. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083692 | OSPF NONSTOP ROUTING SYNCHRONIZATION NACK - A network element is configured for synchronizing dynamic OSPF data between an active OSPF instance and a backup OSPF instance. Upon an OSPF data synchronization event, the active OSPF instance synchronizes dynamic OSPF data with the backup OSPF instance. Upon receiving the dynamic OSPF data, the backup OSPF instance determines whether the requisite data structures exist. If the data structures do not exist, the backup OSPF instance returns a NACK to the active OSPF instance and clears its dynamic OSPF data. Responsive to receiving the NACK, the active OSPF instance resynchronizes its dynamic OSPF data with the backup OSPF instance. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083693 | CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD OF LOGICAL TOPOLOGY IN VIRTUAL NETWORK AND MANAGEMENT SERVER - (1) A configuration management in a management server is carried out such that setting patterns regarding creation of plural types of virtual resources and setting patterns regarding connection between the plural types of virtual resources are extracted from setting information of network devices configuring a virtual network by using plural types of virtualization technologies, (2) an ID required for creating a virtual resource and a connection relation between virtual resources are extracted from the extracted setting pattern, (3) an element corresponding to a virtual resource or a connection between a pair of virtual resources is created by using information including the extracted ID, and (4) the elements created from setting information of individual devices are aggregated to thereby create logical topology information representing a topology of the virtual network. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083694 | SETTING METHOD OF FIELD DEVICE AND SETTING SYSTEM OF FIELD DEVICE - A setting system of field devices may include a first communication path, a terminal device, a relay device, and a second communication path. The terminal device may include a receiving unit that receives an input operation of information, a first setting unit that performs the first setting for each of the field devices by transmitting information necessary for the first setting from the terminal device to each of the field devices through the second communication path in response to the input operation received by the receiving unit, and a second setting unit that performs a second setting for the terminal device, the second setting being necessary with the first setting for each of the field devices in response to the input operation received by the receiving unit. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083695 | METHOD FOR CONTENTION BASED RANDOM ACCESS ON A SECONDARY CARRIER - A mobile station performs random access method. The method includes receiving, from a first cell, a message identifying a random access preamble to transmit to a second cell, wherein the first and second cell operate on different frequencies. The method also includes determining whether the random access preamble is from a set of contention based random access preambles. In addition, the method includes receiving a random access response message, wherein the random access response message is addressed to a unique identifier of the mobile station; and transmitting, if the identified random access preamble is from the set of contention based preambles, a timing verification message. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083696 | SERIAL NETWORKING FIBER OPTIC INFLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Serial networking dedicated fiber optic inflight entertainment (IFE) systems, methods therefor and components thereof, that exhibit improved configuration and failover attributes through implementation of novel network configuration protocols. In some aspects of the invention, such an IFE system comprises a plurality of head end line replaceable units (HE-LRUs) and a plurality of serial networking line replaceable units (SN-LRUs), wherein each of the SN-LRUs individually detects that a closed system network has been formed between the plurality of HE-LRUs and the plurality of SN-LRUs based on a plurality of packets sourced by at least one of the HE-LRUs and received on a plurality of ports of each of the SN-LRUs, and wherein in response to detecting that the closed system network has been formed one of the SN-LRUs blocks one of its ports based on further detecting that the SN-LRU is a middle SN-LRU. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083697 | MANAGING AND PROVISIONING VIRTUAL ROUTERS - Methods and systems are provided for provisioning and managing network-based virtual private networks (VPNs). According to one embodiment, routing information, including virtual private network (VPN) addresses reachable, for customer sites connected via service processing switches is learned or discovered. The routing information is disseminated among routers associated with multiple network-based customer VPNs for multiple customers. A routing configuration is generated for a network-based customer VPN based on the routing information and a global customer routing profile. Virtual routers (VRs) of the service processing switches are provisioned to support the customer VPN based on the routing configuration. A custom routing profile for the customer VPN is received that identifies one or more routing protocols to be used for one or more segments of the customer VPN. The customer VPN is automatically reconfigured by programmatically generating appropriate routing configurations for the VRs based on the routing information and the custom routing profile. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083698 | NATIVE WI-FI ARCHITECTURE FOR 802.11 NETWORKS - A software based wireless infrastructure system is provided. The system has a driver that communicates with the network stack and a network interface card (NIC), a station server in communication with the station driver and an 802.1X supplicant or an 802.1X authenticator. Each NIC provides station and/or access point functionality support. The driver drops packets that have been received if the packet has not been authenticated and associated. Packets that have been fragmented or encrypted are unfragmented and decrypted. An association manager is used in conjunction with a configuration table manager to associate stations and access points via management packets. A manager receives 802.1X data packets from the packet processor and sends them up to a station server that communicates with user mode applications and an 802.1X supplicant or an 802.1X authenticator that are used to authenticate and deauthenticate stations and access points. APIs are provided to enable communication between the components. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130088999 | ROUTE PREFIX AGGREGATION USING REACHABLE AND NON-REACHABLE ADDRESSES IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a network device determines a set of routes to one or more reachable addresses and also a set of no-routes to one or more non-reachable addresses in a computer network. The routes and no-routes may then be aggregated into one or more reachable route prefixes with one or more corresponding non-reachable no-route prefix exceptions. As such, the aggregated combination of route prefixes and no-route prefix exceptions may be utilized by the network device. | 04-11-2013 |
| 20130089000 | Beamforming training within a wireless communication system utilizing a directional antenna - A technique to identify that a station is capable of transmitting a PHY-BRP packet for use in training a directional antenna. The PHY-BRP packet is transmitted, when requested to do so, by appending the PHY-BRP packet to a BRP-Response in order to associate source and destination information to the PHY-BRP packet. | 04-11-2013 |
| 20130094395 | FULLY QUALIFIED DOMAIN NAME (FQDN) RECORD OPTIMIZATION FOR NETWORK NODE SELECTION - A device provides, to a domain name system (DNS), a request for candidate network nodes to which to connect, and receives, from the DNS and based on the request, a list of fully qualified domain names (FQDNs) for the candidate network nodes. The device truncates the FQDNs in the list of FQDNs to create a list of truncated FQDNs corresponding to the candidate network nodes, and stores the list of truncated FQDNs in a buffer associated with the device. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094396 | TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT AND REMOTE CONFIGURATION IN A GATEWAY-BASED NETWORK - Disclosed are apparatus and methodology for remotely configuring gateway devices in a gateway-based Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) network. Remotely configurable gateway devices are provided for Internet Protocol (IP) communications between consumption measuring devices and a utility central facility. Communications between the gateway device and central facility may be by way of wired or wireless communications and may include configuration information multicast from the central facility to selected gateway devices. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094397 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCALIZED AND SCALABLE PACKET FORWARDING - A packet forwarding determination capability is disclosed herein. The packet forwarding determination capability enables determination of handling of a packet at a current node of a network. A set of candidate neighbor nodes is determined for the current node from a representation of respective locations of the neighbor nodes. The set of candidate neighbor nodes includes each of the neighbor nodes located at least within a circle defined within the representation and having a diameter defined by a line between the current node and a destination node of the packet. The routing of the packet at the current node is determined using the set of candidate neighbor nodes. The routing of the packet may include forwarding the packet toward a next-hop node or identifying the current node as being the intended destination of the packet. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094398 | METHODS SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES FOR ROBUSTNESS IMPROVEMENT IN A MOBILE AD HOC NETWORK USING REPUTATION-BASED ROUTING - Aspect of the present disclosure include A Mobile Ad Hoc Network (MANET) in which an intermediate relay node may engage in discreet packet-dropping practices for selfish (e.g., to conserve power) or other reasons. Each node in such a MANET has a dynamic reputation level known to all other nodes. Embodiments include improving the overall performance or robustness of such a MANET by adopting a routing strategy (e.g. routing protocol) which considers the reputation levels of intermediate relaying nodes in determining the best route from a source to a destination. Embodiments of the present disclosure also include a system for discovering a route between two nodes in a communication network. One or more nodes: (i) determine a reputation level of each neighboring node; (ii) sending a route discovery message that is addressed to the destination node to one neighboring node having a highest reputation level. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094399 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COLLECTING DATA ON A WIRELESS DEVICE - Methods, systems, and tangible computer readable storage media for collecting data on a wireless device are disclosed. An example method includes generating a first hierarchical tree structure for a first wireless device metering event associated with a plurality of data attributes describing an occurrence of the first wireless device metering event associated with an application. The example method includes generating a second hierarchical tree structure for a second wireless device metering event associated with a plurality of data attributes describing an occurrence of the second wireless device metering event associated with the application. The example method includes linking a first lower level node of the first hierarchical tree structure to a second lower level node of the second hierarchical tree structure when a first data attribute associated with the first lower level node and a second data attribute associated with the second lower level node share a feature. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094400 | MOBILE NETWORK SERVICES IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services based on the broken out data. A second service mechanism in the core network performs one or more mobile network services based on the network traffic remaining after the first service mechanism performs its breakout. An optional third service mechanism coupled to the core network provides one or more mobile network services in the mobile data network. An overlay network allows the first, second and third service mechanisms to communicate with each other. The overlay network is preferably a private virtual network. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094401 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING INFORMATION AMONG PERSONALIZED AND SHARED RESOURCES WITH A PERSONALIZED PORTABLE DEVICE - A user's request via a portable or handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) to process data may result in discovery of one or more networked resources capable of handling the processing. One or more communication routes may be established between one or more discovered network resources and one or more of the HWCD and a networked terminating device. The portable HWCD may be configured as a gateway. The user's identity may be determined and the user's personal networking preferences may be acquired. Based user's preferences, a route may be established between discovered networked resources and one or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device. The user's identity may be authenticated. Data may undergo rate and/or format conversion. The data may be protected by secure operations. One or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device may consume or render the requested data. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130100850 | TIME OF ARRIVAL BASED POSITIONING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A TOA positioning system can be implemented to improve location estimation of a wireless network device. A first subset of a plurality of reference wireless network devices for determining potential locations of the wireless network device and a second subset of the plurality of reference wireless network devices for determining an estimated location of the wireless network device can be selected. The first and the second subsets can be selected based on a plurality of distance measurements and an average distance and associated with each of the plurality of reference wireless network devices. The potential locations of the wireless network device can be determined based on the first subset of the plurality of reference wireless network devices. The estimated location of the wireless network device can be determined from the potential locations of the wireless network device based on the second subset of the plurality of reference wireless network devices. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100851 | Multicast Source Move Detection for Layer-2 Interconnect Solutions - Methods and systems may be provided for detecting the moves of a multicast source. Sites that were previously designated as an active source may be immediately expired instead of waiting for route expiry. All multicast receiver sites may deterministically learn the new multicast source without additional LSP churn in ISIS for resolving the multicast source move conflict between the old and new source sites. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100852 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-HOP QoS ROUTING - A device within an extended beacon group: generates a neighbor list representing information of each neighbor device corresponding to an 1-hop distance of the device; determines whether a function of the device is as a relaying device using the neighbor list of the device and a neighbor list of the each neighbor device; and selects, when a function of all devices within the extended beacon group is determined, a relaying device to transfer data to the destination device using a metric value representing quality of service (QoS). | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100853 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECOGNIZING TARGET MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for a mobile communication terminal to recognize a target mobile communication terminal using a location recognition system. The method includes acquiring own location information of the mobile communication terminal; creating identification verification information using the location information, the identification verification information containing an identification formula for identifying the target mobile communication terminal as a target of communication; transmitting the created identification verification information to at least one other mobile communication terminal within a communication coverage area; receiving an identification response packet from the at least one other mobile communication terminal which has received the identification verification information, the identification response packet indicating whether the other mobile communication terminal is a target mobile communication terminal; and determining the target mobile communication terminal based on the received identification response packet. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100854 | VPLS OVER MULTI-CHASSIS TRUNK - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a link aggregation database, an arbitration module, a packet processor, and a logical connection management module. The link aggregation database stores information regarding a plurality of switches participating in a multi-chassis trunk. The plurality of switches includes the switch as well. The arbitration module selects a switch of the plurality of switches as an active switch based on the information in the link aggregation database. The packet processor constructs a packet for a remote switch forwardable via a logical connection. The logical connection management module operates in conjunction with the packet processor and constructs a message containing instructions for creating a second logical connection to a second switch of the plurality of switches. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100855 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WI-FI CONNECTION USING WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for Wi-Fi connection based on Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes entering a group owner mode of Wi-Fi Direct when enabling of WPS is requested, after entering the group owner mode, entering a WPS session mode where the portable terminal is operable in a WPS registrar mode, determining whether an Access Point (AP) whose WPS session of the WPS registrar mode is enabled or a device whose group owner mode is enabled, exists nearby, and when an AP whose WPS registrar mode is enabled is discovered, disabling the WPS registrar mode and the group owner mode, enabling a WPS session where the portable terminal is to operate in a WPS enrollee mode, and accessing the discovered AP. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100856 | Multi-Network Type Coordinator For A Single Physical Layer - A coordinator for coordinating the use of a physical layer between a first network operating using a first network protocol and a second network operating using a second network protocol different from the first network protocol, the network protocols being non-interoperable and supporting centralized management of nodes by a master device in each network respectively, including a receiver, a transmitter, a coordinator first network type device (CNTD | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100857 | Secure Hotspot Roaming - Secure hotspot roaming in wireless networks. An enterprise works with one or more hotspot providers to provide secure access to its clients through hotspot locations. The enterprise provides the (hotspot) service provider (SP), with the addresses of enterprise controllers used for client authentication. The SP maintains a database which maps the enterprise realm to the address of the enterprise controller. When a client connects to a hotspot access point (AP), the hotspot AP sends client information such as MAC address to a SP controller. The SP controller determines if the client is new or already known. If the client is known and the realm associated with the client has an entry in the realm to enterprise database, the hotspot AP is instructed to begin client authentication with the specified enterprise controller. If the client is unknown, authentication begins with the SP controller, and the client is queried for realm information. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130107752 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY ASSIGNING A SERVER | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130107753 | System and Method to Provision an MPLS/VPN Network | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130114462 | Sub-Topology Discovery for Operating Hybrid Solutions - Network topology information may be determined for a plurality of network devices on a network. System identifier information may then be determined for each of the plurality of network devices on the network. The system identifier information may be a list of network solutions that each network device actually or potentially belongs to. The system may then flag the system identifier information to indicate whether each solution is an actual or a potential solution. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114463 | System and Method for Domain Name Resolution for Fast Link Setup - Performing wireless local area network (W-LAN) access point name (W-APN) resolution concurrently with wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) link setup reduces latencies involved with accessing a third generation partnership (3GGP) evolved packet core (EPC) network via a Wi-Fi access network. To achieve this, a Wi-Fi access point (AP) sends a W-APN to a domain name system (DNS) server during Wi-Fi link setup, thereby allowing 3GGP gateway assignment to be performed concurrently with Wi-Fi link setup. The W-APN may be a priori information to the mobile station or Wi-Fi AP. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114464 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PARTITIONING WIRELESS NETWORK CELLS INTO TIME-BASED CLUSTERS - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a cluster partitioning module and an optimization module. The cluster partitioning module receives a first performance indicator set for a first instance of a time period set. The cluster partitioning module defines a recurring schedule set, where each time period from the recurring schedule set is associated with a performance indicator from the first performance indicator set and within a predefined range of a performance indicator associated with the remaining time periods from the recurring schedule set. The optimization module receives a second performance indicator set for a second instance of the time period set. The optimization module defines a metric value based on the second performance indicator set, and causes a change in a network implementation based on the metric value at each time period from a third instance of the time period set and from the recurring schedule set. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114465 | LAYER 2 ON RAMP SUPPORTING SCALABILITY OF VIRTUAL DATA CENTER RESOURCES - In an embodiment, a method for operating a virtual data center includes interconnecting a hierarchy of networking devices comprising physical networking devices and virtual networking devices. Customer- facing access to resources in the virtual data center is provided via an overlay network using a suitable protocol that supports compatible addressing between service provider physical locations. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130121205 | Method for Selecting an Optimum Access Point in a Wireless Network on a Common Channel - The performance and ease of management of wireless communications environments is improved by a mechanism that enables access points (APs) to perform automatic channel selection. A wireless network can therefore include multiple APs, each of which will automatically choose a channel such that channel usage is optimized. Furthermore, APs can perform automatic power adjustment so that multiple APs can operate on the same channel while minimizing interference with each other. Wireless stations are load balanced across APs so that user bandwidth is optimized. A movement detection scheme provides seamless roaming of stations between APs. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121206 | Telecommunications Method, Protocol and Apparatus for Improved Quality of Service Handling - A telecommunications network adapted to process data packets according to the client mobile internet protocol domain is extended to provide bearer capability, such that subsessions can be used to distinguish one portion of traffic from another. A different Quality of Service (QoS) can be assigned to each bearer. The bearers can be setup by a mobile node or a home agent in the telecommunications network. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121207 | PROVIDING OVERLAY NETWORKS VIA ELASTIC CLOUD NETWORKING - A device receives network infrastructure requirements from a user, and selects, based on the network infrastructure requirements, at least one of a virtual core network, a virtual network resource, and a virtual system from resources provided in a cloud computing environment. The device also enables use of the selected at least one of the virtual core network, the virtual network resource, and the virtual system by the user. The device receives, from the user, traffic destined for the selected at least one of the virtual core network, the virtual network resource, and the virtual system, and provides the traffic to the selected at least one of the virtual core network, the virtual network resource, and the virtual system. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121208 | ROUTE DETERMINATION DEVICE, NODE DEVICE, AND ROUTE DETERMINATION METHOD - A route determination device includes a memory to store a piece of route information of the route which is already calculated; and a processor to execute a process including: receiving a calculation request which requests route calculation; determining the route which conforms to the calculation request by performing the route calculation when the route information stored in the memory does not include the route which conforms to the calculation request; obtaining the route which conforms to the calculation request from the route information when the route information stored in the memory includes the route which conforms to the calculation request; storing the route information of the route determined by route determining processing in the memory; and sharing, with another route determination device which determines the route going through another node device among the plurality of node devices, the route information of the route determined by the route determining processing. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130128768 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING CONTROL CHANNEL TRANSMISSION - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include enhancing decoding of multicast broadcast control communications, which can be of a relatively large size. A configuration message related to a broadcast channel structure can be received in multiple instances and/or segmented data units. A receiver can combine multiple instances and/or accumulate segmented data units to obtain and/or decode a control channel over which the configuration message is communicated. Communicating segmented data units of the configuration message can allow a broadcast station to utilize a lower data rate, more reliable modulation and coding scheme to encode the configuration message. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128769 | METHOD OF GENERATING PARTITIONS OF A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, A NETWORK PARTITION GENERATOR AND A NETWORK - Method of generating partitions of a communications network A population of partitions S | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128770 | HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION UTILIZING A HIGH FREQUENCY PHYSICAL LAYER FOR A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - Wireless devices may utilize a communication stack to setup a data transmission session with other devices. The data transmission session may include a physical layer that permits wireless devices to perform operations such as discovery, pairing, and security setup. When a radio interface of a wireless device is insufficient to enable performing a data communication, a data transmission session may be established with at least one of a plurality of other physical layers to accommodate the data communication. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128771 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY - A method and an apparatus for topology discovery are disclosed. Link state information of each port of each device on a ring network is confirmed through neighbor negotiation between a first device and a neighbor device, and by broadcasting a link state information base of each device to other devices on the ring network, each device on the ring network can obtain the newest and synchronous link state information of each port on the ring network, so that each network device on the ring network implements topology discovery of the ring network where the network device is located. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128772 | INFRASTRUCTURE FOR LOCATION DISCOVERY - Techniques are generally described for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network. In some examples, methods for creating a location discovery infrastructure (LDI) for estimating locations of one or more of a plurality of communication nodes may comprise one or more of determining a plurality of locations in the terrain to place a corresponding plurality of beacon nodes, determining a plurality of beacon node groups for the placed beacon nodes, and determining a schedule for the placed beacon nodes to be active. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128773 | ALTERNATE DOWN PATHS FOR DIRECTED ACYCLIC GRAPH (DAG) ROUTING - In one embodiment, a node N, within a computer network that utilizes a directed acyclic graph (DAG) to route packets, may select a parent node P that is a parent to the node N in the DAG. The node N may determine a grandparent node GP within the computer network that is a parent of the parent node P in the DAG. The node N may select an alternate parent node P′ within the computer network that has connectivity to the grandparent node GP and the node N. A sibling connection may be established within the computer network between the parent node P and the alternate parent node P′. The sibling connection may provide a path for reaching prefixes reachable via the node N. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130136031 | FIELD AWARE VIRTUAL CONNECTION DISCOVERY - A method for field aware virtual connection discovery is described. In an embodiment, a set of virtual connection domains and a set of virtual connection connectors are determined from a network. Each of the virtual connection connectors defines a connection between two or more of the virtual connection domains. An initial virtual connection connector is selected and added to a virtual connection map. A packet is generated which represents the selected virtual connection connector. The packet is flooded through the virtual connection domains and virtual connection connectors. Each virtual connection domain or virtual connection connector which the packet passes through is added to the virtual connection map. After the flooding is complete, the virtual connection map is displayed. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130136032 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS OF A PHYSICAL NETWORK ENTITY - The invention relates to a method for managing communications of a physical network entity in an arrangement of physical network entities. The method comprises managing ( | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130142075 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK FAILURE INDEPENDENT LINKS IN A MULTILAYER NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing network failure independent links in a multilayer network comprising a client layer and a server layer, wherein each link of said client layer is served by a connection provisioned in said server layer, wherein mutually disjoint paths for said connections which serve links in said client layer that belong to the same predetermined mutually disjoint link group are calculated. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130142076 | NETWORK NODE, USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a network node ( | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130142077 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING NETWORK THEREBY - When a connection is made to a wireless network constructed by a base station, a request to construct a wireless network in which a wireless communication apparatus operates as a base station is sensed and a determination is made as to whether communication is in progress with a communication apparatus of a network different from the wireless network constructed by the base station. If the request to construct the wireless network is sensed and it is determined that communication is in progress with a communication apparatus of a network different from the wireless network in which the base station is the intermediary, then an attempt is made to construct a wireless network in which the wireless communication apparatus operates as a base station. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130148539 | CONFIGURING A NETWORK GATEWAY SERVICE - Method and system of configuring a network gateway service connecting a telephone line on a public circuit-switched telephone network, PSTN, with a data network enabling telecommunications traffic to be routed from the PSTN over the data network to a mobile unit, the method comprising: providing an application on the mobile unit with an identifier of a network gateway connected to the telephone line on the PSTN. Obtaining a PSTN number of the telephone line on the PSTN calling the PSTN number. Calling the PSTN number. Receiving at the application the call. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148540 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALL SET-UP BASED ON NETWORK AVAILABLE TO RECEIVER - A method for call set-up between a receiver and a transmitter via an Internet Protocol (IP) network, the method including setting a communication environment based on a network available to the receiver; and setting up a call based on the set communication environment. The communication environment is set by displaying available communication methods based on the network available to the receiver, and determining a communication method to be used from among the available display communication methods based on a user input. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148541 | DISTRIBUTED LOGICAL L3 ROUTING - A non-transitory machine readable medium storing a program that configures first and second managed forwarding elements to perform logical L2 switching and L3 routing is described. The program generates a first set of flow entries for configuring the first managed forwarding element to perform (1) a first logical L2 processing for a first logical L2 domain, (2) a logical L3 processing, and (3) a second logical L2 processing for a second logical L2 domain. The program generates a second set of flow entries for configuring the second managed forwarding element to determine whether the first managed forwarding element has performed the first logical L2 processing, the logical L3 processing, and the second logical L2 processing. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148542 | HANDLING NAT IN LOGICAL L3 ROUTING - A non-transitory machine readable medium storing a program that configures first and second managed forwarding elements to perform logical L2 switching and L3 routing is described. The program generates a first set of flow entries for configuring the first managed forwarding element to perform (1) a first logical L2 processing for a first logical L2 domain, (2) a logical L3 processing, (3) a network address translation (NAT) processing on packets to be sent to the second managed forwarding element, and (4) a logical ingress L2 processing for a second logical L2 domain on the packets. The program generates a second set of flow entries for configuring the second managed forwarding element to perform a logical egress L2 processing for the second logical L2 domain on the packets. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148543 | HANDLING REVERSE NAT IN LOGICAL L3 ROUTING - A non-transitory machine readable medium storing a program that configures first and second managed forwarding elements to perform logical L2 switching and L3 routing is described. The program generates a first set of flow entries for configuring the first managed forwarding element to (1) perform a network address translation (NAT) processing on a first packet and (2) send, to a second managed switching element. The first packet and information indicate that the NAT processing has been performed on the first packet. The program generates a second set of flow entries for configuring the second managed forwarding element to (1) skip performing a logical L3 processing on a second packet to be sent to the first managed forwarding element in response to receiving the first packet and (2) send the second packet to the first managed switching element. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148544 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING NETWORK AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS FOR UTILITY SERVICES - A method and system of operating a utility node to communicate in a wireless utility network are provided. A utility node in the wireless utility network discovers at least two access points each respectively constituting an interface between a wide area network and the wireless utility network. The node discovers at least two access points constituting an interface between the two networks, registers with the discovered access points, and obtains at least two unique network addresses each respectively associated with a corresponding one of the access points with which the node has registered. The node provides the at least two addresses to a back office server which is communication with the wide area network to provide the back office server with at least two routes to reach the node. The at least two routes are respectively associated with a corresponding one of the access points with which the node registered. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130155898 | DEVICES FOR REPORTING UPLINK INFORMATION - A user equipment (UE) for reporting information is described. The UE includes a processor and instructions stored in memory that is in electronic communication with the processor. The UE selects a reference cell having a reference uplink-downlink (UL-DL) configuration. The UE also selects a first uplink subframe from the reference cell. The UE further selects a first subframe set from a first cell having a first UL-DL configuration. The first UL-DL configuration is different than the reference UL-DL configuration. The UE additionally determines a first set of associations between the first subframe set and the first uplink subframe. The UE further aggregates information corresponding to the reference cell and information corresponding to the first cell based on the first set of associations to produce aggregated information. The UE also reports the aggregated information on an uplink reporting cell. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130155899 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Conditional Access Based on Channel Characteristics - A first network device may discover one or more values of one or more parameters corresponding to a plurality of links and/or devices of the network. The first network device may compare the discovered one or more values of the one or more parameters to an expected one or more values of the one or more parameters. The first network device may determine whether to transmit data onto a network path between the first device and one of the plurality of devices based on a result of the comparison, wherein at least one of the plurality of links and/or devices are not part of the network path. The first network device may be operable to utilize the discovered parameter values to generate a security key which may be utilized to encrypt and/or scramble content prior to transmitting the content onto the network. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130155900 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DISCOVERY AND PAGING MESSAGES - Methods, devices, and computer program products for transmitting and receiving discovery and paging messages are described herein. In one aspect, an apparatus operable in a wireless communication system includes a transmitter and receiver. The transmitter transmits a discovery packet during a first discovery interval of a plurality of discovery intervals. The discovery packet advertises a service provided in a wireless communications network, and the plurality of discovery intervals include recurring time intervals when a plurality of devices are configured to transmit and receive discovery packets. The receiver receives a paging packet from a first device during a first paging interval of a plurality of paging intervals. The paging packet indicates interest in the service, and the plurality of paging intervals include recurring time intervals when the plurality of devices are configured to transmit and receive paging packets. The plurality of paging intervals do not overlap the plurality of discovery intervals. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130155901 | METHOD FOR ALLOWING A UICC TO MANAGE THE PDP CONTEXT PARAMETERS - A method for allowing a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) to set up data bearer parameters for wireless communication between a User Equipment (UE) and a remote server in a telecommunication network, the UE including the UICC and a mobile equipment, the method including the UICC sending to the mobile equipment Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context parameters within a specific command defined for activating a PDP context, on reception of the specific command, the mobile equipment transmitting a PDP context activation request, including an access point name and the parameters received in the specific command, to the telecommunication network, on reception of the PDP context activation request, the telecommunication network transmitting to the mobile equipment a confirmation for a PDP context activation, and the mobile equipment, on receipt of the confirmation, sending a response message to the UICC for confirming a successful command performance. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130163465 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FINDING DIVERSE PHYSICAL LAYER PATHS IN NETWORKS - An approach for finding cost effective network connections while maintaining physical layer diversity is described. A logical segment within a path between a start node and an end node of a network is determined. A plurality of physical connections of the logical segment is then determined, wherein each of the physical connections is associated with a cost value, selecting one of the physical connections of the logical segment based on the cost values. A determination is made of another logical segment between the start node and the end node to include another physical connection, wherein the another logical segment is diverse physically with respect to the logical segment. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163466 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTE LEARNING AND AUTO-CONFIGURATION - In an embodiment of a wireless network, when a node joins the network and receives a routing advertisement, such a node transmits the routing advertisement to all its neighbors. The node then receives transmission from the neighboring nodes indicating interest in joining the advertised network. If more than a threshold number of neighboring nodes are interested in the advertised route, the newly joining node inserts the route advertisement in a beacon transmission. If there is not a threshold level of interest, the node unicasts only to the neighbors who indicated interest in the advertised network. In an embodiment, the node repeats the above steps on a predetermined time basis (e.g., one per day) in order to determine interest in the advertised route that may have newly arisen. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163467 | SHORTEST PATH DETERMINATION FOR LARGE GRAPHS - A computer-implemented method and system are provided for determining the shortest path between two nodes in a network comprising a plurality of nodes. A non-transitory computer-readable medium is also provided that includes a plurality of instructions that, when executed by at least one electronic device, at least cause the at least one electronic device to determine the shortest path between two nodes in a network comprising a plurality of nodes. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163468 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVICE - Provided is a wireless device and method for searching for a neighboring device in which the wireless device may spread a probe request message for searching for neighboring wireless devices using a predetermined spreading code, and broadcast the spread probe request message, and may receive and thereby de-spread a wireless signal and verify whether a neighboring wireless device is present using a probe response message when the probe response message is included in the de-spread wireless signal. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163469 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK-CAPABLE APPLIANCES - A controlling device is used to configure a target device for wireless network communications through use of a setup wizard. The setup wizard is used to obtain information required to perform communications on a wireless network via a wireless network router and a digital representation of the information obtained through use of the setup wizard is provided to the target device via use of the controlling device. The target device will use the digital representation of the information to configure itself for wireless network communications. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130170392 | System and Method for Enabling Wireless Connectivity of a Device - A system and method for enabling communication between a first communication apparatus and a second communication apparatus are disclosed, wherein the method may include reading identification information from a data medium associated with the first communication apparatus with a data medium reader incorporated within a personal communication device; uploading the first-communication-apparatus identification information from the portable communication device to a computer system over the internet; storing the first-communication-apparatus identification information in a database accessible by the computer system; and configuring authentication data for the second communication apparatus to recognize the first communication apparatus, using the first-communication-apparatus identification information. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170393 | Wireless Social Networking - A first device may communicate by joining a wireless mesh network that includes at least one wireless device configured to operate a wireless routing protocol, discovering a group of other wireless devices configured to participate in the wireless mesh network, and accessing an interest metric for a second wireless device in the group of other wireless devices. The interest metric is based in part on a network topology from the wireless mesh network. The interest metric is related to an interest threshold and it is determined whether relating the interest metric to the interest threshold supports enabling messaging communications. If so, messaging communications may be enabled. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170394 | Wireless Social Networking - A first device may communicate by joining a wireless mesh network that includes at least one wireless device configured to operate a wireless routing protocol, discovering a group of other wireless devices configured to participate in the wireless mesh network, and accessing an interest metric for a second wireless device in the group of other wireless devices. The interest metric is based in part on a network topology from the wireless mesh network. The interest metric is related to an interest threshold and it is determined whether relating the interest metric to the interest threshold supports enabling messaging communications. If so, messaging communications may be enabled. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170395 | METHOD FOR LINKING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION FOR DIGITAL PROTECTIVE RELAY AND THE DIGITAL PROTECTIVE RELAY PERFORMING THE SAME - A method for establishing an Ethernet communication link of a digital protective relay having at least two communication ports, includes: configuring physical layers of a first communication port and a second communication port; determining whether or not auto-negotiation with respect to the first communication port or the second communication port is successful; and replacing configuration information regarding one of physical layers of the first communication port and the second communication port with configuration information regarding the other of the physical layers of the first communication port and the second communication port according to whether or not the auto-negotiation with respect to the first communication port and the second communication port has been successful. Although Ethernet ports of the digital protective relay are connected without priority, the digital protective relay may perform the same operation. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170396 | Almost Blank Subframe Indication in Wireless Networks - A base station transmits a first unicast control message configuring transmission parameters of a first carrier for a wireless device. The base station transmits at least one second unicast message configuring measurement parameters of a second carrier. The measurement configuration comprises a first and a second measurement subframe allocation bitmap for the second carrier. The base station receives first and second channel state information from the wireless device. The base station transmits data packets to the wireless device. The data packets are encoded and modulated based on the first and second channel state information. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170397 | MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND MANAGEMENT METHOD - A management device includes a memory and a processor coupled to the memory. The processor executes a process including, searching a network for a node that belongs to a management area to which the management device belongs, and creating management information in which the node searched for at the searching is used as a node that is targeted for management. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130176892 | FRAGMENTATION OF LINK LAYER DISCOVERY PROTOCOL PACKETS - Systems for communicating network device information between network devices. A communication is established between a first network device and a second network device according to a link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). An LLDP advertisement message is output in the communication from the second network device to the first network device. The first network device determines whether the second network device processes fragmented packets by searching the LLDP advertisement message for a fragmentation time length value (TLV) field. The second network device outputs to the first network device a plurality of packet fragments in response to a determination that the LLDP advertisement message includes the fragmentation TLV field. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176893 | Loop Containment Enhancement - Systems, methods, and apparatus for providing a communication network free of bridge loops by providing a first message from one of two bridges and a second message in response to the first message from the other of the two bridges and establishing a communicative path if both the first and second messages were received. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176894 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A modem comprising: a wireless transceiver for connecting to a wireless cellular network; second interface apparatus for connecting to a terminal; and processing apparatus which performs operations of a wireless cellular modem to enable the terminal to access a further, packet-based network via access points of the wireless cellular network. The processing apparatus receives a modem command from the terminal, the modem command comprising a field for specifying the name of one of the access points in the form of a text string. The field comprises the names a plurality of the access points and one or more separator characters between them. The processing apparatus is configured to extract each of the names from the field based on the one or more separator characters, and to establish a different respective channel with each of the plurality of access points based on the extracted names. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176895 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CREATING AND MANAGING AD-HOC GROUPS LINKED TO AN EVENT AND SPANNING MULTIPLE MODES OF COMMUNICATION - A method for creating and managing ad-hoc groups linked to an event and spanning multiple modes of communication includes creating an ad-hoc group associated with an event. Available modes of communication are determined for each participant in the group. For each mode of communication, first information for contacting each participant is determined. Second information that serves as an alias for each participant is determined. A consolidated view of the available modes of communication with each of the participants in the group is provided using the aliases. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176896 | FRAGMENTATION OF LINK LAYER DISCOVERY PROTOCOL PACKETS - Described are methods of communicating network device information between network devices. A communication is established between a first network device and a second network device according to a link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). The method further comprises an LLDP advertisement message is output in the communication from the second network device to the first network device. The first network device determines whether the second network device processes fragmented packets by searching the LLDP advertisement message for a fragmentation time length value (TLV) field. The second network device outputs to the first network device a plurality of packet fragments in response to a determination that the LLDP advertisement message includes the fragmentation TLV field. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176897 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCELERATED LINK SETUP - A methods and apparatus may be used for accelerated link setup. A method may include a station (STA) acquiring information about an access point of an Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 network in advance through a previously connected IEEE 802.11 interface and/or an interface other than the IEEE 802.11 network. The STA may use the acquired information during a link setup procedure between the STA and the access point. The information may include a suggestion for a specific procedure to complete the link setup procedure between the STA and the access point. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176898 | ETHERNET LOCAL MANAGEMENT INTERFACE (E-LMI) - An Ethernet local management interface (E-LMI) protocol for use at a user-to-network interface (UNI) of a Metro Ethernet Network (MEN) is disclosed. The E-LMI protocol allows configuration and status information for the services at the UNI to be transferred from the MEN to a customer edge device coupled to the MEN at the UNI. Various embodiments involve sending or receiving a message via a User-to-Network Interface (UNI) of a Metro Ethernet Network (MEN). A customer edge device extracts configuration and status information for the services at the UNI from a received message. The configuration and status information can correspond to a multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC). | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176899 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING STATION INFORMATION - A method for acquiring station information is disclosed. The method is for use in a system comprising an access controller (AC), a Fit Access Point (Fit AP), a station and a network management device. The method comprises: the network management device reading the station information under the AC when it is initialized, the network management device determining a new online duration of the station according to the recorded online duration of the station and the time interval since the last time the online duration was updated, and the network management device displaying and/or recording the new online duration of the station. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130182604 | Connecting Layer-2 Domains Over Layer-3 Networks - In one embodiment, a method includes building an address resolution cache for a layer-3 router in a first layer-2 datacenter, where the address resolution cache includes a plurality of entries, each of the entries containing a host network address, a host hardware address, and a switch identifier for a switch serving a host, intercepting an address resolution flood within the first layer-2 datacenter that seeks address resolution for a host in a second layer-2 datacenter, and generating a response to the address resolution flood that indicates a source in the second layer-2 datacenter, where data indicating the source in the second layer-2 datacenter is accessed from the address resolution cache. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182605 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING A MOBILE VIRTUAL ROUTER - An approach is provided for creating mobile virtual routers (MVRs). A mobile virtual router is dynamically configured based on an application, wherein the mobile virtual router includes a control plane instance, a forwarding plane instance, and a management plane instance. Data associated with the application is forwarded over the network using the mobile virtual router. The control plane instance, the forwarding plane instance, and the management plane instance are moveable among the plurality of physical routers. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182606 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF FORMING A MOBILE VIRTUAL NETWORK - An approach is provided for creating a mobile virtual network. A virtual network is created to include a plurality of mobile virtual routers. A determination is made whether the virtual network has sufficient resources to satisfy a dynamic virtual network requirement. The size of the virtual network is adjusted based on the determination. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182607 | CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE BASED ON MULTIPLE PRIORITIES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system is disclosed. More particularly, a control method and device based on multiple priorities in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of establishing a packet data network (PDN) connection in a terminal configured with multiple priorities includes establishing a first PDN connection set to a first priority level, determining whether the first PDN connection set to the first priority level is present and a second PDN connection set to a second priority level is requested to be established, and transmitting a PDN connection request message for the second PDN connection set to the second priority level if the first PDN set to the first priority level is present and the second PDN connection set to the second priority level is requested to be established. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182608 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT UTILIZING TOPOLOGY ADVERTISEMENTS - A network management node of a connection-oriented network listens to topology advertisements in a control plane of the network and stores information carried in the topology advertisements. The node selectively sends Link Management Protocol (LMP) requests based on the information carried in the topology advertisements. The LMP requests can be performed for at least one of the following events: adjacency addition; addition of a link between nodes; deletion of a link between nodes; modification to the bandwidth of a link between nodes. The information collected in the topology advertisements is translated into a format compatible with an Operations Support System (OSS) model. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130188512 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MULTI-TENANT DATACENTER WITH LAYER 2 CLOUD INTERCONNECTION - Provided is a system and method for a multi-tenant datacenter with layer | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188513 | FAST-TRACKING APPROACH FOR BUILDING ROUTING TOPOLOGIES IN FAST-MOVING NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a local node in a communication network determines a set of its neighbor nodes, and determines a respective occurrence frequency at which each particular neighbor node is to be probed based on a rate of change in distance between the local node and the particular neighbor node. The local node may then probe each particular neighbor node according to the respective occurrence frequency to determine the rate of change in distance between the local node and each particular neighbor node, and one or more routing metrics for reaching each particular neighbor node. As such, the local node may select, based on the probing, a suitable preferred next-hop node of the set of neighbor nodes for a corresponding routing topology. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188514 | MANAGING A CLUSTER OF SWITCHES USING MULTIPLE CONTROLLERS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a computing system. The computing system includes a discovery module, a high-availability management module, and a controlling module. The discovery module determines local switch-specific information associated with a switch based on a discovery response packet. The high-availability management module determines remote switch-specific information about the same switch with respect to a remote computing system. The controlling module determines whether the computing system is to manage the switch based on a metric derived from the local and remote switch-specific information. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188515 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - Method and apparatus for supporting machine-to-machine (M2M) communications in a hierarchical network architecture including an M2M gateway are disclosed. An M2M entity, (such as M2M device, M2M gateway, or M2M network entity), may perform a service capability discovery procedure to discover an M2M service capability entity that may provide an M2M service capability, and register with the discovered M2M service capability entity. The address or identity of the service capability entity may be pre-configured or obtained from the dispatcher server. |
